Casio Fx Cg10 20 Soft E CG10_CG20_Software_Eng

2014-07-05

: Casio Fx-Cg10-20-Soft-E fx-cg10-20-soft-e casio pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 601 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

CASIO Worldwide Education Website
http://edu.casio.com
CASIO EDUCATIONAL FORUM
http://edu.casio.com/forum/
fx-CG10
fx-CG20
Software
User’s Guide
E
i
• The contents of this user’s guide are subject to change without notice.
• No part of this user’s guide may be reproduced in any form without the express written
consent of the manufacturer.
• Be sure to keep all user documentation handy for future reference.
ii
Contents
Getting Acquainted — Read This First!
Chapter 1 Basic Operation
1. Keys .............................................................................................................................. 1-1
2. Display .......................................................................................................................... 1-3
3. Inputting and Editing Calculations ................................................................................. 1-7
4. Using the Math Input/Output Mode ............................................................................. 1-13
5. Option (OPTN) Menu .................................................................................................. 1-27
6. Variable Data (VARS) Menu ....................................................................................... 1-28
7. Program (PRGM) Menu ............................................................................................. 1-31
8. Using the Setup Screen .............................................................................................. 1-32
9. Using Screen Capture ................................................................................................. 1-36
10. When you keep having problems… ........................................................................... 1-37
Chapter 2 Manual Calculations
1. Basic Calculations ......................................................................................................... 2-1
2. Special Functions .......................................................................................................... 2-7
3. Specifying the Angle Unit and Display Format ............................................................ 2-12
4. Function Calculations .................................................................................................. 2-14
5. Numerical Calculations ............................................................................................... 2-24
6. Complex Number Calculations .................................................................................... 2-34
7. Binary, Octal, Decimal, and Hexadecimal Calculations with Integers ......................... 2-38
8. Matrix Calculations ...................................................................................................... 2-41
9. Metric Conversion Calculations ................................................................................... 2-58
Chapter 3 List Function
1. Inputting and Editing a List ............................................................................................ 3-1
2. Manipulating List Data ................................................................................................... 3-7
3. Arithmetic Calculations Using Lists ............................................................................. 3-13
4. Switching between List Files ....................................................................................... 3-17
5. Using CSV Files .......................................................................................................... 3-18
Chapter 4 Equation Calculations
1. Simultaneous Linear Equations .................................................................................... 4-1
2. High-order Equations from 2nd to 6th Degree .............................................................. 4-3
3. Solve Calculations ......................................................................................................... 4-4
Chapter 5 Graphing
1. Sample Graphs ............................................................................................................. 5-1
2. Controlling What Appears on a Graph Screen .............................................................. 5-4
3. Drawing a Graph ......................................................................................................... 5-13
4. Saving and Recalling Graph Screen Contents ............................................................ 5-20
5. Drawing Two Graphs on the Same Screen ................................................................. 5-23
6. Manual Graphing ......................................................................................................... 5-25
7. Using Tables ............................................................................................................... 5-30
8. Modifying a Graph ....................................................................................................... 5-36
9. Dynamic Graphing ...................................................................................................... 5-40
10. Graphing a Recursion Formula ................................................................................... 5-43
11. Graphing a Conic Section ........................................................................................... 5-48
12. Drawing Dots, Lines, and Text on the Graph Screen (Sketch) ................................... 5-50
13. Function Analysis ........................................................................................................ 5-52
iii
Chapter 6 Statistical Graphs and Calculations
1. Before Performing Statistical Calculations .................................................................... 6-1
2. Calculating and Graphing Single-Variable Statistical Data ........................................... 6-8
3. Calculating and Graphing Paired-Variable Statistical Data (Curve Fitting) ................. 6-14
4. Performing Statistical Calculations .............................................................................. 6-22
5. Tests ........................................................................................................................... 6-32
6. Confidence Interval ..................................................................................................... 6-46
7. Distribution .................................................................................................................. 6-49
8. Input and Output Terms of Tests, Confidence Interval, and Distribution .................... 6-65
9. Statistic Formula ......................................................................................................... 6-68
Chapter 7 Financial Calculation
1. Before Performing Financial Calculations ..................................................................... 7-1
2. Simple Interest .............................................................................................................. 7-3
3. Compound Interest ........................................................................................................ 7-4
4. Cash Flow (Investment Appraisal) ................................................................................ 7-7
5. Amortization .................................................................................................................. 7-9
6. Interest Rate Conversion ............................................................................................ 7-12
7. Cost, Selling Price, Margin .......................................................................................... 7-13
8. Day/Date Calculations ................................................................................................. 7-14
9. Depreciation ................................................................................................................ 7-15
10. Bond Calculations ....................................................................................................... 7-17
11. Financial Calculations Using Functions ...................................................................... 7-20
Chapter 8 Programming
1. Basic Programming Steps ............................................................................................. 8-1
2. Program Mode Function Keys ...................................................................................... 8-2
3. Editing Program Contents ............................................................................................. 8-4
4. File Management .......................................................................................................... 8-6
5. Command Reference .................................................................................................. 8-11
6. Using Calculator Functions in Programs ..................................................................... 8-28
7. Program Mode Command List ................................................................................... 8-51
8. CASIO Scientific Function Calculator
Special Commands
⇔ Text Conversion Table .......................................................... 8-59
9. Program Library .......................................................................................................... 8-66
Chapter 9 Spreadsheet
1. Spreadsheet Basics and the Function Menu ................................................................ 9-1
2. Basic Spreadsheet Operations ..................................................................................... 9-3
3. Using Special Spreadsheet Mode Commands .......................................................... 9-19
4. Conditional Formatting ................................................................................................ 9-21
5. Drawing Statistical Graphs, and Performing Statistical and Regression
Calculations ................................................................................................................. 9-27
6. Spreadsheet Mode Memory ....................................................................................... 9-34
Chapter 10 eActivity
1. eActivity Overview ....................................................................................................... 10-1
2. eActivity Function Menus ............................................................................................ 10-2
3. eActivity File Operations ............................................................................................. 10-4
4. Inputting and Editing Data ........................................................................................... 10-6
Chapter 11 Memory Manager
1. Using the Memory Manager ........................................................................................ 11-1
iv
Chapter 12 System Manager
1. Using the System Manager .........................................................................................12-1
2. System Settings .......................................................................................................... 12-1
Chapter 13 Data Communication
1. Performing Data Communication between
the Calculator and a Personal Computer .................................................................... 13-3
2. Performing Data Communication between Two Calculators ..................................... 13-10
3. Connecting the Calculator to a Projector .................................................................. 13-16
Chapter 14 Geometry
1. Geometry Mode Overview .........................................................................................14-1
2. Drawing and Editing Objects .....................................................................................14-11
3. Controlling the Appearance of the Geometry Window .............................................. 14-33
4. Using Text and Labels in a Screen Image ................................................................ 14-37
5. Using the Measurement Box .....................................................................................14-41
6. Working with Animations ...........................................................................................14-56
Chapter 15 Picture Plot
1. Picture Plot Function Menus ....................................................................................... 15-3
2. Managing Picture Plot Files ........................................................................................ 15-5
3. Using the Plot Function ............................................................................................... 15-7
4. Using the Plot List ..................................................................................................... 15-13
5. Common Functions with the Graph Mode ................................................................ 15-18
Appendix
1. Error Message Table ....................................................................................................α-1
2. Input Ranges ..............................................................................................................α-14
E-Con2 Application
1. E-Con2 Overview .......................................................................................................... ε-1
2. Using the Setup Wizard ................................................................................................ ε-2
3. Using Advanced Setup .................................................................................................. ε-8
4. Using a Custom Probe ................................................................................................ ε-19
5. Using the MULTIMETER Mode ................................................................................... ε-23
6. Using Setup Memory ................................................................................................... ε-24
7. Using Program Converter ........................................................................................... ε-27
8. Starting a Sampling Operation .................................................................................... ε-30
9. Using Sample Data Memory ....................................................................................... ε-33
10. Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data .......................................................... ε-35
11. Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations .......................................................... ε-39
12. Calling E-Con2 Functions from an eActivity ................................................................ ε-50
v
Getting Acquainted — Read This First!
k About this User’s Guide
u Math natural input and display
Under its initial default settings, the calculator is set up to use the “Math input/output mode”,
which enables natural input and display of math expressions. This means you can input
fractions, square roots, derivatives, and other expressions just as they are written. In the
“Math input/output mode”, most calculation results also are displayed using natural display.
You also can select a “Linear input/output mode” if you like, for input and display of
calculation expressions in a single line.
The examples shown in this User’s Guide are mainly presented using the Math input/output
mode. “<Linear input/output mode>” will be indicated for examples that use the Linear input/
output mode.
• For information about switching between the Math input/output mode and Linear input/
output mode, see the explanation of the “Input/Output” mode setting under “Using the Setup
Screen” (page 1-32).
• For information about input and display using the Math input/output mode, see “Using the
Math Input/Output Mode” (page 1-13).
u !x( ')
The above indicates you should press ! and then x, which will input a ' symbol. All
multiple-key input operations are indicated like this. Key cap markings are shown, followed by
the input character or command in parentheses.
u m Equation
This indicates you should first press m, use the cursor keys ( f, c, d, e) to select
the Equation mode, and then press w. Operations you need to perform to enter a mode
from the Main Menu are indicated like this.
u Function Keys and Menus
• Many of the operations performed by this calculator can be executed by pressing function
keys 1 through 6. The operation assigned to each function key changes according to
the mode the calculator is in, and current operation assignments are indicated by function
menus that appear at the bottom of the display.
• This User’s Guide shows the current operation assigned to a function key in parentheses
following the key cap for that key. 1(Comp), for example, indicates that pressing 1
selects {Comp}, which is also indicated in the function menu.
• When ( g) is indicated in the function menu for key 6, it means that pressing 6 displays
the next page or previous page of menu options.
0
vi
u Menu Titles
• Menu titles in this User’s Guide include the key operation required to display the menu
being explained. The key operation for a menu that is displayed by pressing K and then
{LIST} would be shown as: [OPTN] - [LIST] .
• 6( g) key operations to change to another menu page are not shown in menu title key
operations.
u Command List
The Program Mode Command List (page 8-51) provides a graphic flowchart of the various
function key menus and shows how to maneuver to the menu of commands you need.
Example: The following operation displays Xfct: [VARS] - [FACTOR] - [Xfct]
k Display Brightness Adjustment
Adjust the brightness whenever objects on the display appear dim or difficult to see.
1. Use the cursor keys ( f, c, d, e) to select the System icon and press w, then
press 1(DISPLAY) to display the brightness adjustment screen.
2. Adjust the brightness.
• The e cursor key makes display brightness lighter.
• The d cursor key makes display brightness darker.
• 1(INITIAL) returns display brightness to its initial default.
3. To exit display brightness adjustment, press m.
1-1
Chapter 1 Basic Operation
1. Keys
k Key Table
Page Page Page Page Page Page
Page Page Page Page Page
2-1
1-31 1-32
1-2
2-16
2-16
2-1
2-1,
2-22 2-1 2-7
2-35
2-16
2-9
5-52 5-4 5-50 5-54 5-2,
5-33
5-8
1-27
2-16
2-17
2-17
1-22,
2-22
2-222-22
1-19
1-8
2-1
2-1
2-11
2-1
1-7,1-17
2-1
1-12
2-16
2-9
1-11
5-4,
5-15
2-48
1-36
1-12
3-3
2-35
10-21 10-19
2-16
1-2 2-16
1-16
1-28 1-3
Page Page Page Page Page Page
Page Page Page Page Page
2-1
1-31 1-32
1-2
2-16
2-16
2-1
2-1,
2-22 2-1 2-7
2-35
2-16
2-9
5-52 5-4 5-50 5-54 5-2,
5-33
5-8
1-27
2-16
2-17
2-17
1-22,
2-22
2-222-22
1-19
1-8
2-1
2-1
2-11
2-1
1-7,1-17
2-1
1-12
2-16
2-9
1-11
5-4,
5-15
2-48
1-36
1-12
3-3
2-35
10-21 10-19
2-16
1-2 2-16
1-16
1-28 1-3
1
1-2
k Key Markings
Many of the calculator’s keys are used to perform more than one function. The functions
marked on the keyboard are color coded to help you find the one you need quickly and easily.
Function Key Operation
1 log l
2 10
x !l
3 B al
The following describes the color coding used for key markings.
Color Key Operation
Yellow Press ! and then the key to perform the marked function.
Red Press a and then the key to perform the marked function.
• Alpha Lock
Normally, once you press a and then a key to input an alphabetic character, the keyboard
reverts to its primary functions immediately.
If you press ! and then a, the keyboard locks in alpha input until you press a again.
1-3
2. Display
k Selecting Icons
This section describes how to select an icon in the Main Menu to enter the mode you want.
u To select an icon
1. Press m to display the Main Menu.
2. Use the cursor keys ( d, e, f, c) to move the
highlighting to the icon you want.
3. Press w to display the initial screen of the mode whose icon you selected.
• You can also enter a mode without highlighting an icon in the Main Menu by inputting the
number or letter marked in the upper right corner of the icon.
The following explains the meaning of each icon.
Icon Mode Name Description
Run-Matrix Use this mode for arithmetic calculations and function
calculations, and for calculations involving binary, octal,
decimal, and hexadecimal values and matrices.
Statistics Use this mode to perform single-variable (standard deviation)
and paired-variable (regression) statistical calculations, to
perform tests, to analyze data and to draw statistical graphs.
eActivity eActivity lets you input text, math expressions, and other data
in a notebook-like interface. Use this mode when you want to
store text or formulas, or built-in application data in a file.
Spreadsheet Use this mode to perform spreadsheet calculations. Each file
contains a 26-column × 999-line spreadsheet. In addition to
the calculator’s built-in commands and Spreadsheet mode
commands, you can also perform statistical calculations and
graph statistical data using the same procedures that you use
in the Statistics mode.
Graph Use this mode to store graph functions and to draw graphs
using the functions.
Dyna Graph
(Dynamic Graph)
Use this mode to store graph functions and to draw multiple
versions of a graph by changing the values assigned to the
variables in a function.
Currently selected icon Currently selected icon
1-4
Icon Mode Name Description
Table Use this mode to store functions, to generate a numeric table
of different solutions as the values assigned to variables in a
function change, and to draw graphs.
Recursion Use this mode to store recursion formulas, to generate a
numeric table of different solutions as the values assigned to
variables in a function change, and to draw graphs.
Conic Graphs Use this mode to draw graphs of conic sections.
Equation Use this mode to solve linear equations with two through six
unknowns, and high-order equations from 2nd to 6th degree.
Program Use this mode to store programs in the program area and to
run programs.
Financial Use this mode to perform financial calculations and to draw
cash flow and other types of graphs.
E-Con2 Use this mode to control the optionally available EA-200 Data
Analyzer.
Link Use this mode to transfer memory contents or back-up data to
another unit or PC.
Memory Use this mode to manage data stored in memory.
System Use this mode to initialize memory, adjust display brightness,
and to make other system settings.
Geometry Use this mode to draw and analyze geometric objects.
Picture Plot Use this mode to plot points (that represent coordinates) on the
screen and to perform various types of analysis based on the
plotted data (coordinate values).
1-5
k About the Function Menu
Use the function keys ( 1 to 6) to access the menus and commands in the menu bar
along the bottom of the display screen. You can tell whether a menu bar item is a menu or a
command by its appearance.
k Status Bar
The status bar is an area that displays messages and the current status of the calculator. It is
always displayed at the top of the screen.
• Icons are used to indicate the information described below.
This icon: Indicates this:
The current battery level. The icons indicated (from left to right): Level 3,
Level 2, Level 1, Dead. See “Low Battery Message” (page 1-38) for more
information.
Important!
If the Level 1 icon ( ) appears, immediately replace the batteries. For
details about battery replacement, see the separate “Hardware User’s
Guide”.
Calculation in progress.
! key was pressed and the calculator is standing by for the next key
operation.
a key was pressed and the calculator is standing by for the next key
operation. The icon indicates the lower-case input mode (eActivity
and Program modes only).
Alpha Lock (page 1-2) is in effect.
!i(CLIP) was pressed and the calculator is standing by for range
specification (page 1-11).
Setup “Input/Output” setting.
Setup “Angle” setting.
Setup “Display” setting.
Setup “Frac Result” setting.
Setup “Complex Mode” setting.
• For details about the Setup screen, see “Using the Setup Screen” (page 1-32).
• For information about other icons and messages that are specific to each application, see
the chapters that cover each application.
1-6
k About Display Screens
This calculator uses two types of display screens: a text screen and a graph screen. The
text screen can show 21 columns and 8 lines of characters, with the bottom line used for the
function key menu. The graph screen uses an area that measures 384 (W) × 216 (H) dots.
Text Screen Graph Screen
k Normal Display
The calculator normally displays values up to 10 digits long. Values that exceed this limit are
automatically converted to and displayed in exponential format.
u How to interpret exponential format
1.2
E
+12 indicates that the result is equivalent to 1.2 × 10
12
. This means that you should move
the decimal point in 1.2 twelve places to the right, because the exponent is positive. This
results in the value 1,200,000,000,000.
1.2
E
–03 indicates that the result is equivalent to 1.2 × 10
–3
. This means that you should move
the decimal point in 1.2 three places to the left, because the exponent is negative. This results
in the value 0.0012.
You can specify one of two different ranges for automatic changeover to normal display.
Norm 1 ................... 10
–2
(0.01) > | x |, | x | > 10
10
Norm 2 ................... 10
–9
(0.000000001) > | x |, | x | > 10
10
All of the examples in this manual show calculation results using Norm 1.
See page 2-13 for details on switching between Norm 1 and Norm 2.
1-7
k Special Display Formats
This calculator uses special display formats to indicate fractions, hexadecimal values, and
degrees/minutes/seconds values.
u Fractions
.................... Indicates: 456
12
23
u Hexadecimal Values
.................... Indicates: 0ABCDEF1
(16)
, which equals
180150001
(10)
u Degrees/Minutes/Seconds
.................... Indicates: 12° 34’ 56.78”
• In addition to the above, this calculator also uses other indicators or symbols, which are
described in each applicable section of this manual as they come up.
3. Inputting and Editing Calculations
k Inputting Calculations
When you are ready to input a calculation, first press A to clear the display. Next, input your
calculation formulas exactly as they are written, from left to right, and press w to obtain the
result.
Example 2 + 3 – 4 + 10 =
Ac+d-e+baw
k Editing Calculations
Use the d and e keys to move the cursor to the position you want to change, and then
perform one of the operations described below. After you edit the calculation, you can execute
it by pressing w. Or you can use e to move to the end of the calculation and input more.
• You can select either insert or overwrite for input*
1
. With overwrite, text you input replaces
the text at the current cursor location. You can toggle between insert and overwrite by
performing the operation: !D(INS). The cursor appears as “ ” for insert and as “ ” for
overwrite.
*
1
Insert and overwrite switching is possible only when the Linear input/output mode (page
1-32) is selected.
1-8
u To change a step
Example To change cos60 to sin60
Acga
ddd
D
s
u To delete a step
Example To change 369 × × 2 to 369 × 2
Adgj**c
dD
In the insert mode, the D key operates as a backspace key.
u To insert a step
Example To change 2.36
2
to sin2.36
2
Ac.dgx
ddddddd
s
k Parentheses Colors during Calculation Formula Input
Parentheses are color coded during input and editing of calculation formulas in order to make
it easier to confirm the proper relationship between opening and closing parentheses.
The following rules are applied when assigning parentheses colors.
• When there are nested parentheses, colors are assigned in sequence from the outermost
parentheses inward. Colors are assigned in the following sequence: blue, red, green,
magenta, black. When there are more than five nesting levels, the color sequence is
repeated starting from blue again.
1-9
• Inputting a closing parenthesis assigns it the same color as the corresponding opening
parenthesis.
• The parentheses of parenthetical expressions that are of the same level are the same color.
Executing a calculation causes the color of all parentheses to become black.
k Using Replay Memory
The last calculation performed is always stored into replay memory. You can recall the
contents of the replay memory by pressing d or e.
If you press e, the calculation appears with the cursor at the beginning. Pressing d causes
the calculation to appear with the cursor at the end. You can make changes in the calculation
as you wish and then execute it again.
• Replay memory is enabled in the Linear input/output mode only. In the Math input/output
mode, the history function is used in place of replay memory. For details, see “History
Function” (page 1-21).
Example 1 To perform the following two calculations
4.12 × 6.4 = 26.368
4.12 × 7.1 = 29.252
Ae.bc*g.ew
dddd
!D(INS)
h.b
w
1-10
After you press A, you can press f or c to recall previous calculations, in sequence from
the newest to the oldest (Multi-Replay Function). Once you recall a calculation, you can use
e and d to move the cursor around the calculation and make changes in it to create a new
calculation.
Example 2
Abcd+efgw
cde-fghw
A
f (One calculation back)
f (Two calculations back)
• A calculation remains stored in replay memory until you perform another calculation.
• The contents of replay memory are not cleared when you press the A key, so you can
recall a calculation and execute it even after pressing the A key.
k Making Corrections in the Original Calculation
Example 14 ÷ 0 × 2.3 entered by mistake for 14 ÷ 10 × 2.3
Abe/a*c.d
w
Press J.
Cursor is positioned automatically at the
location of the cause of the error.
Make necessary changes.
db
Execute again.
w
1-11
k Using the Clipboard for Copy and Paste
You can copy (or cut) a function, command, or other input to the clipboard, and then paste the
clipboard contents at another location.
Note
In the Math input/output mode, the copy (or cut) range you can specify is limited by the range
of movement of the cursor. In the case of parentheses, you can select any range within a
parenthetical expression or you can select the entire parenthetical expression.
u To specify the copy range
1. Move the cursor ( ) to the beginning or end of the range of text you want to copy and then
press !i(CLIP).
• This will cause to appear in the status bar.
2. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor and highlight the range of text you want to copy.
3. Press 1(COPY) to copy the highlighted text to the clipboard, and exit the copy range
specification mode.
The selected characters are not
changed when you copy them.
To cancel text highlighting without performing a copy operation, press J.
u To cut the text
1. Move the cursor ( ) to the beginning or end of the range of text you want to cut and then
press !i(CLIP).
• This will cause to appear in the status bar.
2. Use the cursor keys to move the cursor and highlight the range of text you want to cut.
3. Press 2(CUT) to cut the highlighted text to the clipboard.
Cutting causes the original
characters to be deleted.
1-12
u Pasting Text
Move the cursor to the location where you want to paste the text, and then press
!j(PASTE). The contents of the clipboard are pasted at the cursor position.
A
!j(PASTE)
k Catalog Function
The Catalog is an alphabetic list of all the commands available on this calculator. You can
input a command by calling up the Catalog and then selecting the command you want.
u To use the Catalog to input a command
1. Press !e(CATALOG) to display an alphabetic Catalog of commands.
• The screen that appears first is the last one you used for command input.
2. Press 6(CAT) to display the category list.
• You can skip this step and go straight to step 5,
if you want.
3. Use the cursor keys ( f, c) to highlight the command category you want, and then press
1(EXE) or w.
• This displays a list of commands in the category you selected.
4. Input the first letter of the command you want to input. This will display the first command
that starts with that letter.
5. Use the cursor keys ( f, c) to highlight the command you want to input, and then press
1(INPUT) or w.
Example To use the Catalog to input the Cash_IRR( command
A!e(CATALOG) I(C) c~ cw
Pressing J or !J(QUIT) closes the Catalog.
1-13
4. Using the Math Input/Output Mode
Selecting “Math” for the “Input/Output” mode setting on the Setup screen (page 1-32) turns on
the Math input/output mode, which allows natural input and display of certain functions, just as
they appear in your textbook.
• The operations in this section all are performed in the Math input/output mode. The initial
default setting for this calculator is the Math input/output mode. If you have changed to the
Linear input/output mode, switch back to the Math input/output mode before performing the
operations in this section. See “Using the Setup Screen” (page 1-32) for information about
how to switch modes.
• In the Math input/output mode, all input is insert mode (not overwrite mode) input. Note that
the !D(INS) operation (page 1-7) you use in the Linear input/output mode to switch to
insert mode input performs a completely different function in the Math input/output mode. For
more information, see “Using Values and Expressions as Arguments” (page 1-17).
• Unless specifically stated otherwise, all operations in this section are performed in the
Run-Matrix mode.
k Input Operations in the Math Input/Output Mode
u Math Input/Output Mode Functions and Symbols
The functions and symbols listed below can be used for natural input in the Math input/output
mode. The “Bytes” column shows the number of bytes of memory that are used up by input in
the Math input/output mode.
Function/Symbol Key Operation Bytes
Fraction (Improper) v 9
Mixed Fraction*
1 !v( & ) 14
Power M 4
Square x 4
Negative Power (Reciprocal) !)(
x –1
) 5
'!x( ') 6
Cube Root !((
3
') 9
Power Root !M(
x ') 9
e x !I( e x
) 6
10
x !l(10
x
) 6
log(a,b) (Input from MATH menu*
2
) 7
Abs (Absolute Value) (Input from MATH menu*
2
) 6
First Derivative (Input from MATH menu*
2
) 7
Second Derivative (Input from MATH menu*
2
) 7
Integral*
3 (Input from MATH menu*
2
) 8
Σ Calculation*
4 (Input from MATH menu*
2
) 11
Matrix (Input from MATH menu*
2
) 14*
5
1-14
Function/Symbol Key Operation Bytes
Parentheses ( and ) 1
Braces (Used during list input.) !*( { ) and !/( } ) 1
Brackets (Used during matrix input.) !+( [ ) and !-( ] ) 1
*
1
Mixed fraction is supported in the Math input/output mode only.
*
2
For information about function input from the MATH function menu, see “Using the MATH
Menu” described below.
*
3
Tolerance cannot be specified in the Math input/output mode. If you want to specify
tolerance, use the Linear input/output mode.
*
4
For Σ calculation in the Math input/output mode, the pitch is always 1. If you want to specify
a different pitch, use the Linear input/output mode.
*
5
This is the number of bytes for a 2 × 2 matrix.
u Using the MATH Menu
In the Run-Matrix mode, pressing 4(MATH) displays the MATH menu.
You can use this menu for natural input of matrices, derivatives, integrals, etc.
• { MAT } ... {displays the MAT submenu, for natural input of matrices}
• { 2 × 2 } ... {inputs a 2 × 2 matrix}
• { 3 × 3 } ... {inputs a 3 × 3 matrix}
• {
m × n } ... {inputs a matrix with m lines and n columns (up to 6 × 6)}
• { log
a
b } ... {starts natural input of logarithm log
a
b}
• { Abs } ... {starts natural input of absolute value |X|}
• { d / dx } ... {starts natural input of first derivative dx
df(x)x = a}
• { d
2 / dx
2 } ... {starts natural input of second derivative dx2
d2
f(x)x = a}
• { ∫ dx } … {starts natural input of integral f(x)dx
a
b}
• { Σ ( } … {starts natural input of Σ calculation f(x)
x=α
β
α
Σ}
1-15
u Math Input/Output Mode Input Examples
This section provides a number of different examples showing how the MATH function menu
and other keys can be used during Math input/output mode natural input. Be sure to pay
attention to the input cursor position as you input values and data.
Example 1 To input 2
3
+ 1
AcM
d
e
+b
w
Example 2 To input
(
)
1+ 2
5
2
A(b+
v
cc
f
e
)x
w
1-16
Example 3 To input
1+
x
+ 1
dx
0
1
Ab+4(MATH) 6( g) 1(
∫ dx )
v+b
ea
fb
e
w
Example 4 To input
2 ×1
2
21
2
2
Ac*4(MATH) 1(MAT) 1(2×2)
vbcc
ee
!x( ') ce
e!x( ') ceevbcc
w
1-17
u When the calculation does not fit within the display window
Arrows appear at the left, right, top, or bottom edge of the
display to let you know when there is more of the
calculation off the screen in the corresponding direction.
When you see an arrow, you can use the cursor keys to
scroll the screen contents and view the part you want.
u Math Input/Output Mode Input Restrictions
Certain types of expressions can cause the vertical width of a calculation formula to be greater
than one display line. The maximum allowable vertical width of a calculation formula is about
two display screens. You cannot input any expression that exceeds this limitation.
u Using Values and Expressions as Arguments
A value or an expression that you have already input can be used as the argument of a
function. After you have input “(2+3)”, for example, you can make it the argument of ',
resulting in (2+3).
Example
1. Move the cursor so it is located directly to the left of the part of the expression that you want
to become the argument of the function you will insert.
2. Press !D(INS).
• This changes the cursor to an insert cursor ( ).
3. Press !x( ') to insert the ' function.
• This inserts the ' function and makes the parenthetical expression its argument.
As shown above, the value or expression to the right of the cursor after !D(INS) are
pressed becomes the argument of the function that is specified next. The range encompassed
as the argument is everything up to the first open parenthesis to the right, if there is one, or
everything up to the first function to the right (sin(30), log2(4), etc.).
1-18
This capability can be used with the following functions.
Function Key Operation Original
Expression
Expression After
Insertion
Improper Fraction v
Power M
'!x( ')
Cube Root !((
3
')
Power Root !M(
x ')
e x !I( e x
)
10
x !l(10
x
)
log(a,b) 4(MATH) 2(log
a
b)
Absolute Value 4(MATH) 3(Abs)
First Derivative 4(MATH) 4( d / dx )
Second Derivative 4(MATH) 5( d
2 / dx
2 )
Integral 4(MATH) 6( g)
1( ∫ dx )
Σ Calculation 4(MATH) 6( g)
2( Σ ( )
• In the Linear input/output mode, pressing !D(INS) will change to the insert mode. See
page 1-7 for more information.
u Editing Calculations in the Math Input/Output Mode
The procedures for editing calculations in the Math input/output mode are basically the same
as those for the Linear input/output mode. For more information, see “Editing Calculations”
(page 1-7).
Note however, that the following points are different between the Math input/output mode and
the Linear input/output mode.
• Overwrite mode input that is available in the Linear input/output mode is not supported by
the Math input/output mode. In the Math input/output mode, input is always inserted at the
current cursor location.
• In the Math input/output mode, pressing the D key always performs a backspace operation.
1-19
• Note the following cursor operations you can use while inputting a calculation with Math
input/output mode.
To do this: Press this key:
Move the cursor from the end of the calculation to the beginning e
Move the cursor from the beginning of the calculation to the end d
k Using Undoing and Redoing Operations
You can use the following procedures during calculation expression input in the Math input/
output mode (up until you press the w key) to undo the last key operation and to redo the
key operation you have just undone.
- To undo the last key operation, press: aD(UNDO).
- To redo a key operation you have just undone, press: aD(UNDO) again.
• You also can use UNDO to cancel an A key operation. After pressing A to clear an
expression you have input, pressing aD(UNDO) will restore what was on the display
before you pressed A.
• You also can use UNDO to cancel a cursor key operation. If you press e during input and
then press aD(UNDO), the cursor will return to where it was before you pressed e.
• The UNDO operation is disabled while the keyboard is alpha-locked. Pressing
aD(UNDO) while the keyboard is alpha-locked will perform the same delete operation
as the D key alone.
Example
b+vbe
D
aD(UNDO)
c
A
aD(UNDO)
1-20
k Math Input/Output Mode Calculation Result Display
Fractions, matrices, and lists produced by Math input/output mode calculations are displayed
in natural format, just as they appear in your textbook.
Sample Calculation Result Displays
• Fractions are displayed either as improper fractions or mixed fractions, depending on the
“Frac Result” setting on the Setup screen. For details, see “Using the Setup Screen” (page
1-32).
• Matrices are displayed in natural format, up to 6 × 6. A matrix that has more than six rows or
columns will be displayed on a MatAns screen, which is the same screen used in the Linear
input/output mode.
• Lists are displayed in natural format for up to 20 elements. A list that has more than 20
elements will be displayed on a ListAns screen, which is the same screen used in the Linear
input/output mode.
• Arrows appear at the left, right, top, or bottom edge of the display to let you know when there
is more data off the screen in the corresponding direction.
You can use the cursor keys to scroll the screen and view the data you want.
• Pressing 2(DELETE) 1(DEL-LINE) while a calculation result is selected will delete both
the result and the calculation that produced it.
• The multiplication sign cannot be omitted immediately before an improper fraction or mixed
fraction. Be sure to always input a multiplication sign in this case.
Example:
2× 2
5 c*cvf
• A M, x, or !)( x –1
) key operation cannot be followed immediately by another M,
x, or !)( x –1
) key operation. In this case, use parentheses to keep the key operations
separate.
Example: (3
2
)
–1
(dx)!)( x –1
)
1-21
k History Function
The history function maintains a history of calculation expressions and results in the Math
input/output mode. Up to 30 sets of calculation expressions and results are maintained.
b+cw
*cw
You can also edit the calculation expressions that are maintained by the history function and
recalculate. This will recalculate all of the expressions starting from the edited expression.
Example To change “1+2” to “1+3” and recalculate
Perform the following operation following the sample shown above.
ffffdDdw
• You can get a rough idea of how many entries (calculation expressions and results) are
contained in history by checking the length of the scroll bar. A shorter bar indicates a greater
number of entries.
• The value stored in the answer memory is always dependent on the result produced by
the last calculation performed. If history contents include operations that use the answer
memory, editing a calculation may affect the answer memory value used in subsequent
calculations.
- If you have a series of calculations that use the answer memory to include the result of the
previous calculation in the next calculation, editing a calculation will affect the results of all
the other calculations that come after it.
- When the first calculation of the history includes the answer memory contents, the answer
memory value is “0” because there is no calculation before the first one in history.
1-22
k Calculation Operations in the Math Input/Output Mode
This section introduces Math input/output mode calculation examples.
• For details about calculation operations, see “Chapter 2 Manual Calculations”.
u Performing Function Calculations Using Math Input/Output Mode
Example Operation
=
4×5
610
3
( )
=
3
π2
1
cos (Angle: Rad)
log
2
8 = 3
123 = 1.988647795
7
2 + 3 × 3 64 − 4 = 10
A6 v4 *5 w
Ac(!E( π ) v3 e)w
A4(MATH) 2(log
a
b) 2 e8 w
A!M(
x ') 7 e123 w
A2 +3 *!M(
x ') 3 e64 e-4 w
4
3= 0.1249387366log A4(MATH) 3(Abs) l3 v4 w
20
73
5
2+ 3 =
4
1 A2 v5 e+3 !v( () 1 e4 w
10
23
+
2
3
1.5 + 2.3i =
i
A1.5 +2.3 !a( i ) wM
dx
d
( )
x3 + 4x2 + x − 6 x = 3 = 52 A4(MATH) 4 ( d / dx ) vM3 e+4
vx+v-6 e3 w
2x2 + 3x + 4dx =3
404
∫5
1
A4(MATH) 6( g) 1( ∫ dx ) 2 vx+3 v+4 e1
e5 w
(
k2 − 3k + 5
)
= 55
∑
k=2
6A4(MATH) 6( g) 2( Σ ) a,(K) x-3 a,(K)
+5 ea,(K) e2 e6 w
1-23
k Performing Matrix Calculations Using Math Input/Output Mode
u To specify the dimensions (size) of a matrix
1. In the Run-Matrix mode, press !m(SET UP) 1(Math) J.
2. Press 4(MATH) to display the MATH menu.
3. Press 1(MAT) to display the following menu.
• { 2 × 2 } … {inputs a 2 × 2 matrix}
• { 3 × 3 } … {inputs a 3 × 3 matrix}
• {
m × n } … {inputs an m -row × n -column matrix (up to 6 × 6)}
Example To create a 2-row × 3-column matrix
3( m × n )
Specify the number of rows.
cw
Specify the number of columns.
dw
w
1-24
u To input cell values
Example To perform the calculation shown below
The following operation is a continuation of the example calculation on the previous page.
bebvceedde
bdveeefege
*iw
u To assign a matrix created using Math input/output mode to a specified
matrix memory
Example To assign the calculation result to Mat J
!c(Mat) !-(Ans) a
!c(Mat) a)(J) w
• Pressing the D key while the cursor is located at the top (upper left) of the matrix will delete
the entire matrix.
D
⇒
× 8
33
65
1
13
4
1
2× 8
33
65
1
13
4
1
2
1-25
k Using Graph Modes and the Equation Mode in the Math Input/Output
Mode
Using the Math input/output mode with any of the modes below lets you input numeric
expressions just as they are written in your text book and view calculation results in natural
display format.
Modes that support input of expressions as they are written in textbooks:
Run-Matrix, eActivity, Graph, Dyna Graph, Table, Recursion, Equation (SOLVER)
Modes that support natural display format:
Run-Matrix, eActivity, Equation
The following explanations show Math input/output mode operations in the Graph ,
Dyna Graph , Table , Recursion and Equation modes, and natural calculation result display in
the Equation mode.
• See the sections that cover each calculation for details about its operation.
• See “Input Operations in the Math Input/Output Mode” (page 1-13) and “Calculation
Operations in the Math Input/Output Mode” (page 1-22) for details about Math input/output
mode input operations and calculation result displays in the Run-Matrix mode.
• eActivity mode input operations and result displays are the same as those in the
Run-Matrix mode. For information about eActivity mode operations, see “Chapter 10
eActivity”.
u Math Input/Output Mode Input in the Graph Mode
You can use the Math input/output mode for graph expression input in the Graph ,
Dyna Graph , Table , and Recursion modes.
Example 1 In the Graph mode, input the function y=−−1
2
x2
'
2
x
'
and then graph it.
Make sure that initial default settings are configured on the View Window.
mGraph vxv!x( ') c
ee-vv!x( ') cee
-bw
6(DRAW)
1-26
Example 2 In the Graph mode, input the function y=x2−x−1d
x
∫x
4
1
2
1
0
and then
graph it.
Make sure that initial default settings are configured on the View Window.
mGraph K2(CALC) 3( ∫ dx)
bveevx-bvce
v-beaevw
6(DRAW)
• Math Input/Output Mode Input and Result Display in the Equation Mode
You can use the Math input/output mode in the Equation mode for input and display as shown
below.
• In the case of simultaneous equations ( 1(SIMUL)) and high-order equations ( 2(POLY)),
solutions are output in natural display format (fractions, ', π are displayed in natural format)
whenever possible.
• In the case of Solver ( 3(SOLVER)), you can use Math input/output mode natural input.
Example To solve the quadratic equation
x 2
+ 3 x + 5 = 0 in the Equation mode
mEquation !m(SET UP)
cccc(Complex Mode)
2(a+b
i ) J
2(POLY) 1(2) bwdwfww
1-27
5. Option (OPTN) Menu
The option menu gives you access to scientific functions and features that are not marked on
the calculator’s keyboard. The contents of the option menu differ according to the mode you
are in when you press the K key.
• The option menu does not appear if you press K while binary, octal, decimal, or
hexadecimal is set as the default number system.
• For details about the commands included on the option (OPTN) menu, see the “ K key”
item in the “ Program Mode Command List” (page 8-51).
• The meanings of the option menu items are described in the sections that cover each mode.
The following list shows the option menu that is displayed when the Run-Matrix or Program
mode is selected.
• { LIST } ... {list function menu}
• { MAT } ... {matrix operation menu}
• { COMPLEX } ... {complex number calculation menu}
• { CALC } ... {functional analysis menu}
• { STAT } ... {menu for paired-variable statistical estimated value, distribution, standard
deviation, variance, and test functions}
• { CONVERT } ... {metric conversion menu}*
• { HYPERBL } ... {hyperbolic calculation menu}
• { PROB } ... {probability/distribution calculation menu}
• { NUMERIC } ... {numeric calculation menu}
• { ANGLE } ... {menu for angle/coordinate conversion, sexagesimal input/conversion}
• { ENG-SYM } ... {engineering symbol menu}
• { PICTURE } ... {graph save/recall menu}
• { FUNCMEM } ... {function memory menu}
• { LOGIC } ... {logic operator menu}
• { CAPTURE } ... {screen capture menu}
• { FINANCE } ... {financial calculation menu}
• The PICTURE, FUNCMEM and CAPTURE items are not displayed when “Math” is selected
for the “Input/Output” mode setting on the Setup screen.
* Metric conversion commands are supported only when the Metric Conversion add-in
application is installed.
1-28
6. Variable Data (VARS) Menu
To recall variable data, press J to display the variable data menu.
{ V-WIN } / { FACTOR } / { STAT } / { GRAPH } / { DYNA } / { TABLE } / { RECURSION } / { EQUATION } /
{ FINANCE } / { Str }
• Note that the EQUATION and FINANCE items appear for function keys ( 3 and 4) only
when you access the variable data menu from the Run-Matrix or Program mode.
• The variable data menu does not appear if you press J while binary, octal, decimal, or
hexadecimal is set as the default number system.
• For details about the commands included on the variable data (VARS) menu, see the “ J
key” item in the “ Program Mode Command List” (page 8-51).
u V-WIN — Recalling V-Window values
• { X } / { Y } / { T, } ... { x -axis menu}/{ y -axis menu}/{T, menu}
•
{ R-X } / { R-Y } / { R-T, } ... { x -axis menu}/{ y -axis menu}/{T, menu} for right side of Dual
Graph
• { min } / { max } / { scale } / { dot } / { pitch } ... {minimum value}/{maximum value}/{scale}/{dot
value*
1
}/{pitch}
*
1
The dot value indicates the display range (Xmax value – Xmin value) divided by the
screen dot pitch. The dot value is normally calculated automatically from the
minimum and maximum values. Changing the dot value causes the maximum to be
calculated automatically.
u FACTOR — Recalling zoom factors
• { Xfct }/{ Yfct } ... { x -axis factor}/{ y -axis factor}
u STAT — Recalling statistical data
• { X } … {single-variable, paired-variable x -data}
• {
n } / { ¯ x } / { Σ x } / { Σ x 2
} / { x } / { sx } / { minX } / { maxX } ... {number of data}/{mean}/{sum}/{sum
of squares}/{population standard deviation}/{sample standard deviation}/{minimum
value}/{maximum value}
•
{ Y } ... {paired-variable y -data}
• {
} / { Σ y } / { Σ y 2
} / { Σ xy } / { y } / { sy } / { minY } / { maxY } ... {mean}/{sum}/{sum of squares}/{sum
of products of x -data and y -data}/{population standard deviation}/{sample standard
deviation}/{minimum value}/{maximum value}
•
{ GRAPH } ... {graph data menu}
• { a } / { b } / { c } / { d } / { e } ... regression coefficient and polynomial coefficients
• { r } / { r 2
} ... {correlation coefficient}/{coefficient of determination}
• { MSe } ... {mean square error}
• { Q
1
} / { Q
3
} ... {first quartile}/{third quartile}
• { Med } / { Mod } ... {median}/{mode} of input data
• { Start } / { Pitch } ... histogram {start division}/{pitch}
1-29
•
{ PTS } ... {summary point data menu}
• { x 1
} / { y 1
} / { x 2
} / { y 2
} / { x 3
} / { y 3
} ... coordinates of summary points
•
{ INPUT } ... {statistical calculation input values}
• {
n } / { ¯ x } / {s x } / { n 1
} / { n 2
} / { ¯ x 1
} / { ¯ x 2
} / { s x 1
} / { s x 2
} / { s p
} ... {size of sample}/{mean of sample}/
{sample standard deviation}/{size of sample 1}/{size of sample 2}/{mean of sample 1}/
{mean of sample 2}/{standard deviation of sample 1}/{standard deviation of sample 2}/
{standard deviation of sample p }
•
{ RESULT } ... {statistical calculation output values}
• { TEST } ... {test calculation results}
• {
p } / { z } / { t } / { Chi } / { F } / { ˆ p } / { ˆ p 1
} / { ˆ p 2
} / { df } / { s e
} / { r } / { r
2
} / { pa } / { Fa } / { Adf } / { SSa } / { MSa } / { pb } / { Fb } /
{ Bdf } / { SSb } / { MSb } / { pab } / { Fab } / { ABdf } / { SSab } / { MSab } / { Edf } / { SSe } / { MSe }
... {
p -value}/{ z score}/{ t score}/{ χ 2
value}/{ F value}/{estimated sample proportion}/
{estimated proportion of sample 1}/{estimated proportion of sample 2}/{degrees of
freedom}/{standard error}/{correlation coefficient}/{coefficient of determination}/
{factor A p -value}/{factor A F value}/{factor A degrees of freedom}/{factor A sum of
squares}/{factor A mean squares}/{factor B p -value}/{factor B F value}/{factor B
degrees of freedom}/{factor B sum of squares}/{factor B mean squares}/{factor AB
p -value}/{factor AB F value}/{factor AB degrees of freedom}/{factor AB sum of
squares}/{factor AB mean squares}/{error degrees of freedom}/{error sum of
squares}/{error mean squares}
• { INTR } ... {confidence interval calculation results}
• {Lower}/{Upper} / { ˆ p } / { ˆ p 1
} / { ˆ p 2
} / { df } ... {confidence interval lower limit}/{confidence
interval upper limit}/{estimated sample proportion}/{estimated proportion of
sample 1}/{estimated proportion of sample 2}/{degrees of freedom}
• { DIST } ... {distribution calculation results}
• {
p } / { xInv } / { x1Inv } / { x2Inv } / { zLow } / { zUp } / { tLow } / { tUp } ... {probability distribution
or cumulative distribution calculation result ( p -value)}/{inverse Student- t , χ 2
, F ,
binomial, Poisson, geometric or hypergeometric cumulative distribution calculation
result}/{inverse normal cumulative distribution upper limit (right edge) or lower limit
(left edge)}/{inverse normal cumulative distribution upper limit (right edge)}/{normal
cumulative distribution lower limit (left edge)}/{normal cumulative distribution upper
limit (right edge)}/{Student- t cumulative distribution lower limit (left edge)}/{Student- t
cumulative distribution upper limit (right edge)}
u GRAPH — Recalling graph functions
• { Y } / { r } ... {rectangular coordinate function (Y=f(x) type)}/{polar coordinate function}
• { Xt } / { Yt } ... parametric graph function {Xt}/{Yt}
• { X } ... {rectangular coordinate function (X=f(y) type)}
• Press these keys before inputting a value to specify a memory area.
u DYNA — Recalling dynamic graph setup data
• { Start } / { End } / { Pitch } ... {coefficient range start value}/{coefficient range end value}/
{coefficient value increment}
1-30
u TABLE — Recalling table setup and content data
• { Start } / { End } / { Pitch } ... {table range start value}/{table range end value}/{table value
increment}
• { Result *
1
} ... {matrix of table contents}
*
1
The Result item appears only when the TABLE menu is displayed in the Run-Matrix and
Program modes.
u RECURSION — Recalling recursion formula*
1
, table range, and table content
data
• { FORMULA } ... {recursion formula data menu}
• { a n
} / { a n +1
} / { a n +2
} / { b n
} / { b n +1
} / { b n +2
} / { C n
} / { C n +1
} / { C n +2
} ... { a n
}/{ a n +1
}/{ a n +2
}/{ b n
}/{ b n +1
}/{ b n +2
}/{ c n
}/
{ c n +1
}/{ c n +2
} expressions
• { RANGE } ... {table range data menu}
• { Start } / { End } ... table range {start value}/{end value}
• {
a 0
} / { a 1
} / { a 2
} / { b 0
} / { b 1
} / { b 2
} / { C 0
} / { C 1
} / { C 2
} ... { a 0
}/{ a 1
}/{ a 2
}/{ b 0
}/{ b 1
}/{ b 2
}/{ c 0
}/{ c 1
}/{ c 2
} value
• {
a n Start } / { b n Start } / { C n Start } ... origin of { a n
}/{ b n
}/{ c n
} recursion formula convergence/
divergence graph (WEB graph)
• { Result *
2
} ... {matrix of table contents*
3
}
*
1
An error occurs when there is no function or recursion formula numeric table in memory.
*
2
“Result” is available only in the Run-Matrix and Program modes.
*
3
Table contents are stored automatically in Matrix Answer Memory (MatAns).
u EQUATION — Recalling equation coefficients and solutions*
1
*
2
• { SimRes } / { SimCoef } ... matrix of {solutions}/{coefficients} for linear equations with two
through six unknowns*
3
• { PlyRes } / { PlyCoef } ... matrix of {solution}/{coefficients} for high-order equations from 2nd
to 6th degree
*
1
Coefficients and solutions are stored automatically in Matrix Answer Memory (MatAns).
*
2
The following conditions cause an error.
- When there are no coefficients input for the equation
- When there are no solutions obtained for the equation
*
3
Coefficient and solution memory data for a linear equation cannot be recalled at the same
time.
u FINANCE — Recalling financial calculation data
• { n } / { I %} / { PV } / { PMT } / { FV } ... {payment periods (installments)}/{annual interest rate}/
{present value}/{payment}/{future value}
• {
P/Y } / { C/Y } ... {installment periods per year}/{compounding periods per year}
u Str — Str command
• { Str } ... {string memory}
1-31
7. Program (PRGM) Menu
To display the program (PRGM) menu, first enter the Run-Matrix or Program mode from the
Main Menu and then press !J(PRGM). The following are the selections available in the
program (PRGM) menu.
• The program (PRGM) menu items are not displayed when “Math” is selected for the “Input/
Output” mode setting on the Setup screen.
• { COMMAND } .....{program command menu}
• { CONTROL } ......{program control command menu}
• { JUMP } ...............{jump command menu}
• { ? } ......................{input command}
• { ^} ....................{output command}
• { CLEAR } ............{clear command menu}
• { DISPLAY } ........{display command menu}
• { RELATNL } .......{conditional jump relational operator menu}
• { I/O } ...................{I/O control/transfer command menu}
• { : } .......................{multi-statement command}
• { STR } .................{string command}
The following function key menu appears if you press !J(PRGM) in the Run-Matrix
mode or the Program mode while binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal is set as the default
number system.
• { Prog } ................. {program recall}
• { JUMP } / { ? } / { ^} / { RELATNL } / {:}
The functions assigned to the function keys are the same as those in the Comp mode.
For details on the commands that are available in the various menus you can access from the
program menu, see “Chapter 8 Programming”.
1-32
8. Using the Setup Screen
The mode’s Setup screen shows the current status of mode settings and lets you make any
changes you want. The following procedure shows how to change a setup.
u To change a mode setup
1. Select the icon you want and press w to enter a mode and display its initial screen. Here
we will enter the Run-Matrix mode.
2. Press !m(SET UP) to display the mode’s Setup
screen.
• This Setup screen is just one possible example. Actual
Setup screen contents will differ according to the mode
you are in and that mode’s current settings.
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the item whose setting you
want to change.
4. Press the function key ( 1 to 6) that is marked with the setting you want to make.
5. After you are finished making any changes you want, press J to exit the Setup screen.
k Setup Screen Function Key Menus
This section details the settings you can make using the function keys in the Setup screen.
indicates default setting.
• The setting of each item with a frame around it is indicated by an icon in the status bar.
u Input/Output (input/output mode)
• { Math } / { Line } ... {Math}/{Linear} input/output mode
u Mode (calculation/binary, octal, decimal, hexadecimal mode)
• { Comp } ... {arithmetic calculation mode}
• { Dec } / { Hex } / { Bin } / { Oct } ... {decimal}/{hexadecimal}/{binary}/{octal}
u Frac Result (fraction result display format)
• { d/c } / { ab/c } ... {improper}/{mixed} fraction
1-33
u Func Type (graph function type)
Pressing one of the following function keys also switches the function of the v key.
• { Y= } / { r= } / { Parm } / { X= } ... {rectangular coordinate (Y=
f ( x ) type)}/{polar coordinate}/
{parametric}/{rectangular coordinate (X=
f ( y ) type)} graph
• { Y> } / { Y< } / { Y t} / { Y s} ... {
y > f ( x )}/{ y < f ( x )}/{ y ≥ f ( x )}/{ y ≤ f ( x )} inequality graph
• { X> } / { X< } / { X t} / { X s} ... {
x > f ( y )}/{ x < f ( y )}/{ x ≥ f ( y )}/{ x ≤ f ( y )} inequality graph
u Draw Type (graph drawing method)
• { Connect } / { Plot } ... {connected points}/{unconnected points}
u Derivative (derivative value display)
• { On } / { Off } ... {display on}/{display off} while Graph-to-Table, Table & Graph, and Trace are
being used
u Angle (default angle unit)
• { Deg } / { Rad } / { Gra } ... {degrees}/{radians}/{grads}
u Complex Mode
• { Real } ... {calculation in real number range only}
• {
a + bi } / { r ∠ } ... {rectangular format}/{polar format} display of a complex calculation
u Coord (graph pointer coordinate display)
• { On } / { Off } ... {display on}/{display off}
u Grid (graph gridline display)
• { On } / { Off }/{Line} ... {show grid as dots}/{hide grid}/{show grid as lines}
u Axes (graph axis display)
• { On } / { Off }/{Scale} ... {show axis}/{hide axis}/{show axis and scale}
u Label (graph axis label display)
• { On } / { Off } ... {display on}/{display off}
u Display (display format)
• { Fix } / { Sci } / { Norm } / { Eng } ... {fixed number of decimal places specification}/{number of
significant digits specification}/{normal display setting}/{engineering mode}
• When the Engineering mode is on, “/E” is appended after the status bar icon, such as
.
u Stat Wind (statistical graph V-Window setting method)
• { Auto } / { Manual } ... {automatic}/{manual}
u Resid List (residual calculation)
• { None } / { LIST } ... {no calculation}/{list specification for the calculated residual data}
1-34
u List File (list file display settings)
• { FILE } ... {settings of list file on the display}
u Sub Name (list naming)
• { On } / { Off } ... {display on}/{display off}
u Graph Func (function display during graph drawing and trace)
• { On } / { Off } ... {display on}/{display off}
u Dual Screen (dual screen mode status)
• { G+G } / { GtoT } / { Off } ... {graphing on both sides of dual screen}/{graph on one side and
numeric table on the other side of dual screen}/{dual screen off}
u Simul Graph (simultaneous graphing mode)
• { On } / { Off } ... {simultaneous graphing on (all graphs drawn simultaneously)}/{simultaneous
graphing off (graphs drawn in area numeric sequence)}
u Background (background image display)
• {None}/{PICT n}/{OPEN}... {no background}/{specify picture memory image as the
background}/{specify an image as the background}
u Plot/LineCol (plot and line color)
• {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellow}... Specifies a color for plots and
graph lines.
u Sketch Line (overlaid line type)
• { } / { } / { } / { }/{ } ... {normal}/{thick}/{broken}/{dotted}/{thin}
u Dynamic Type (dynamic graph type)
• { Cont } / { Stop } ... {non-stop (continuous)}/{automatic stop after 10 draws}
u Locus (dynamic graph locus mode)
• { On } / { Off } ... {locus drawn}/{locus not drawn}
u Y=Draw Speed (dynamic graph draw speed)
• { Norm } / { High } ... {normal}/{high-speed}
u Variable (table generation and graph draw settings)
• { RANG } / { LIST } ... {use table range}/{use list data}
u Σ Display ( Σ value display in recursion table)
• { On } / { Off } ... {display on}/{display off}
1-35
u Slope (display of derivative at current pointer location in conic section
graph)
• { On } / { Off } ... {display on}/{display off}
u Payment (payment period setting)
• { BEGIN } / { END } ... {beginning}/{end} setting of payment period
u Date Mode (number of days per year setting)
• { 365 } / { 360 } ... interest calculations using {365}/{360} days per year
u Periods/YR. (payment interval specification)
• { Annual } / { Semi } ... {annual}/{semiannual}
u Graph Color
• {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellow} ... Specifies a single line color
for graphing in the Financial mode.
u Ineq Type (inequality fill specification)
• { Intsect } / { Union } ... When graphing multiple inequalities, {fill areas where all inequality
conditions are satisfied}/{fill areas where each inequality condition is satisfied}
u Simplify (calculation result auto/manual reduction specification)
• { Auto } / { Manual } ... {auto reduce and display}/{display without reduction}
u Q1Q3 Type (Q
1
/Q
3
calculation formulas)
• { Std } / { OnData } ... {divide total population on its center point between upper and lower
groups, with the median of the lower group Q1 and the median of the upper group Q3}/
{make the value of element whose cumulative frequency ratio is greater than 1/4 and
nearest to 1/4 Q1 and the value of element whose cumulative frequency ratio is greater
than 3/4 and nearest to 3/4 Q3}
u Auto Calc (spreadsheet auto calc)
• { On } / { Off } ... {execute}/{not execute} the formulas automatically
u Show Cell (spreadsheet cell display mode)
• { Form } / { Val } ... {formula}*
1
/{value}
u Move (spreadsheet cell cursor direction) *
2
• { Low } / { Right } ... {move down}/{move right}
*
1
Selecting “Form” (formula) causes a formula in the cell to be displayed as a formula. The
“Form” does not affect any non-formula data in the cell.
*
2
Specifies the direction the cell cursor moves when you press the w key to register cell
input, when the Sequence command generates a number table, and when you recall data
from List memory.
1-36
9. Using Screen Capture
Any time while operating the calculator, you can capture an image of the current screen and
save it in capture memory.
u To capture a screen image
1. Operate the calculator and display the screen you want to capture.
2. Press !h(CAPTURE).
• This displays a memory area selection dialog box.
3. Input a value from 1 to 20 and then press w.
• This will capture the screen image and save it in capture memory area named “Capt
n ”
( n = the value you input).
• You cannot capture the screen image of a message indicating that an operation or data
communication is in progress.
• A Memory ERROR will occur if there is not enough room in main memory to store the screen
capture.
u To recall a screen image from capture memory
This operation is possible only while the Linear input/output mode is selected.
1. In the Run-Matrix mode, press K6( g)
6( g) 5(CAPTURE) 1(Recall).
2. Enter a capture memory number in the range of 1 to 20, and then press w.
• This displays the image stored in the capture memory you specified.
3. To exit the image display and return to the screen you started from in step 1, press J.
• You can also use the RclCapt command in a program to recall a screen image from capture
memory.
1-37
10. When you keep having problems…
If you keep having problems when you are trying to perform operations, try the following
before assuming that there is something wrong with the calculator.
k Getting the Calculator Back to its Original Mode Settings
1. From the Main Menu, enter the System mode.
2. Press 5(RESET).
3. Press 1(SETUP), and then press 1(Yes).
4. Press Jm to return to the Main Menu.
Now enter the correct mode and perform your calculation again, monitoring the results on the
display.
k Restart and Reset
u Restart
Should the calculator start to act abnormally, you can restart it by pressing the RESTART
button. Note, however, that you should only use the RESTART button only as a last resort.
Normally, pressing the RESTART button reboots the calculator’s operating system, so
programs, graph functions and other data in calculator memory is retained.
RESTART
buttun
Important!
The calculator backs up user data (main memory) when you turn power off and loads the
backed up data when you turn power back on.
When you press the RESTART button, the calculator restarts and loads backed up data.
This means that if you press the RESTART button after you edit a program, graph function, or
other data, any data that has not been backed up will be lost.
Note
Pressing the RESTART button to restart the calculator will cause the Battery Settings screen
to appear on the display. For details about the settings on this screen, see “Battery Settings”
(page 12-6).
1-38
u Reset
Use reset when you want to delete all data currently in calculator memory and return all mode
settings to their initial defaults.
Before performing the reset operation, first make a written copy of all important data.
For details, see “Reset” (page 12-4).
k Low Battery Message
If the following message appears on the display, immediately turn off the calculator and
replace batteries as instructed.
If you continue using the calculator without replacing batteries, power will automatically turn
off to protect memory contents. Once this happens, you will not be able to turn power back on,
and there is the danger that memory contents will be corrupted or lost entirely.
• You will not be able to perform data communication operations after the low battery message
appears.
k Image File Compatibility
An image file (g3p/g3b) saved (or updated) on the fx-CG20 will not be compatible with the
fx-CG10.
• “To capture a screen image” (page 1-36)
• “To update the background image V-Window settings with current V-Window settings” (page
5-11)
• “Adjusting the Lightness (Fade I/O) of the Background Image” (page 5-12)
• “Saving Graph Screen Contents as an Image (g3p File)” (page 5-21)
• “Saving Current Screen Contents as an Image (g3p File) in the Geometry Mode” (page
14-9)
• “Saving a File” (page 15-5)
• “K1(PICTURE)” under “Graph Screen Key Operations” (page ε-39)
• Other image files saved from the graph screen of any mode (Statistics, Spreadsheet,
Financial, etc.)
1-39
Note
• The fx-CG10 will not be able to import image files saved using the above procedures on the
fx-CG20.
• The fx-CG20 will be able to read image files saved using the above procedures on the fx-
CG10.
• eActivity files that contain inserted images that were stored (or updated) on the fx-CG20
cannot be opened with the fx-CG10.
• If the message “Provided by CASIO” appears at the bottom of the detail screen of an
image file or eActivity file that was displayed using the operation under “Viewing Detailed
Information about a File in Storage Memory” (page 11-6), that file can be opened on both the
fx-CG10 and the fx-CG20.
2-1
Chapter 2 Manual Calculations
1. Basic Calculations
k Arithmetic Calculations
• Enter arithmetic calculations as they are written, from left to right.
• Use the - key to input the minus sign before a negative value.
• Calculations are performed internally with a 15-digit mantissa. The result is rounded to a 10-
digit mantissa before it is displayed.
• For mixed arithmetic calculations, multiplication and division are given priority over addition
and subtraction.
Example Operation
56 × (–12) ÷ (–2.5) = 268.8 56 *-12 /-2.5 w
(2 + 3) × 10
2
= 500 (2 +3 )*1 E2 w
2 + 3 × (4 + 5) = 29 2 +3 *(4 +5 w*
1
4
×
5
6 = 10
3 (0.3) $6c4*5w
<Linear input/output mode>
6 /(4 *5 )w
*
1
Final closed parentheses (immediately before operation of the w key) may be omitted, no
matter how many are required.
k Number of Decimal Places, Number of Significant Digits, Normal
Display Range
[SET UP]
-
[Display]
-
[Fix]
/
[Sci]
/
[Norm]
• Even after you specify the number of decimal places or the number of significant digits,
internal calculations are still performed using a 15-digit mantissa, and displayed values are
stored with a 10-digit mantissa. Use Rnd of the Numeric Calculation Menu (NUMERIC) (page
2-14) to round the displayed value off to the number of decimal place and significant digit
settings.
• Number of decimal place (Fix) and significant digit (Sci) settings normally remain in effect
until you change them or until you change the normal display range (Norm) setting.
2
2-2
Example 1 100 ÷ 6 = 16.66666666...
Condition Operation Display
100 /6 w 16.66666667
4 decimal places !m(SET UP) ff
1(Fix) ewJw
16.6667
5 significant digits !m(SET UP) ff
2(Sci) fwJw
1.6667
E
+01
Cancels specification !m(SET UP) ff
3(Norm) Jw
16.66666667
*
1
Displayed values are rounded off to the place you specify.
Example 2 200 ÷ 7 × 14 = 400
Condition Operation Display
200 /7 *14 w 400
3 decimal places !m(SET UP) ff
1(Fix) dwJw
400.000
Calculation continues using
display capacity of 10 digits
200 /7 w
*
14 w
28.571
Ans ×
I
400.000
• If the same calculation is performed using the specified number of digits:
200 /7 w 28.571
The value stored internally is
rounded off to the number of
decimal places specified on
the Setup screen.
K6( g) 4(NUMERIC) 4(Rnd) w
*
14 w
28.571
Ans ×
I
399.994
200 /7 w 28.571
You can also specify the
number of decimal places for
rounding of internal values
for a specific calculation.
(Example: To specify
rounding to two decimal
places)
6( g) 1(RndFix) !-(Ans) ,2 )
w
*
14 w
RndFix(Ans,2)
28.570
Ans ×
I
399.980
• You cannot use a first derivative, second derivative, integration, Σ , maximum/minimum value,
Solve, RndFix or log
a
b calculation expression inside of a RndFix calculation term.
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
2-3
k Calculation Priority Sequence
This calculator employs true algebraic logic to calculate the parts of a formula in the following
order:
1 Type A functions
• Coordinate transformation Pol (
x , y ), Rec ( r ,
θ
)
• Functions that include parentheses (such as derivatives, integrations, Σ , etc.)
d / dx , d
2 / dx
2
, ∫ dx , Σ , Solve, FMin, FMax, List → Mat, Fill, Seq, SortA, SortD, Min, Max,
Median, Mean, Augment, Mat → List, P(, Q(, R(, t(, RndFix, log
a
b
• Composite functions*
1
, List, Mat, fn, Y n, r n, X tn, Y tn, X n
2 Type B functions
With these functions, the value is entered and then the function key is pressed.
x 2
, x –1
, x ! , ° ’ ”, ENG symbols, angle unit °,
r
,
g
3 Power/root ^( x y
),
x '
4 Fractions
a
b
/
c
5 Implied multiplication format in front of π , memory name, or variable name.
2 π , 5A, Xmin, F Start, etc.
6 Type C functions
With these functions, the function key is pressed and then the value is entered.
' ,
3
' , log, In, e x
, 10
x
, sin, cos, tan, sin
–1
, cos
–1
, tan
–1
, sinh, cosh, tanh, sinh
–1
, cosh
–1
,
tanh
–1
, (–), d, h, b, o, Neg, Not, Det, Trn, Dim, Identity, Ref, Rref, Sum, Prod, Cuml,
Percent, ΔList, Abs, Int, Frac, Intg, Arg, Conjg, ReP, ImP
7 Implied multiplication format in front of Type A functions, Type C functions, and parenthesis.
2 '3 , A log2, etc.
8 Permutation, combination, complex number operator in polar form
n P r , n C r , ∠
9 Metric conversion commands*
2
0 × , ÷, Int÷, Rmdr
! +, –
@ Relational operators =, ≠ , >, <, ≥ , ≤
# And (logical operator), and (bitwise operator)
$ Or, Xor (logical operator), or, xor, xnor (bitwise operator)
*
1
You can combine the contents of multiple function memory (fn) locations or graph memory
( Y n, r n, X tn, Y tn, X n) locations into composite functions. Specifying fn1(fn2), for example,
results in the composite function fn1
°
fn2 (see page 5-14). A composite function can consist
of up to five functions.
*2 Metric conversion commands are supported only when the Metric Conversion add-in application
is installed.
2-4
Example 2 + 3 × (log sin2 π 2
+ 6.8) = 22.07101691 (angle unit = Rad)
• When functions with the same priority are used in series, execution is performed from right to
left.
e x
In 120 → e x
{In( 120 )}
Otherwise, execution is from left to right.
• Compound functions are executed from right to left.
• Anything contained within parentheses receives highest priority.
k Calculation Result Irrational Number Display
You can configure the calculator to display calculation results in irrational number format
(including ' or π ) by selecting “Math” for the “Input/Output” mode setting on the Setup screen.
Example '2 + '8 = 3 '2 (Input/Output: Math)
!x( ') ce+!x( ') iw
u Calculation Result Display Range with
'
Display of a calculation result in ' format is supported for result with ' in up to two terms.
Calculation results in ' format take one of the following forms.
± a 'b , ± d ± a 'b , ± a'
b
c ± d'
e
f
• The following are the ranges for each of the coefficients ( a , b , c , d , e , f ) can be displayed in
the ' calculation result format.
1 <
a < 100, 1 < b < 1000, 1 < c < 100
0 <
d < 100, 0 < e < 1000, 1 < f < 100
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
2-5
• In the cases shown below, a calculation result may be able to be displayed in ' format even
if their coefficients (
a , c , d ) are outside the above ranges.
A ' format calculation result uses a common denominator.
a'
b
c + d'
e
f → a´'
b + d´'
e
c´ * c ´ is the least common multiple of c and f .
Since the calculation result uses a common denominator, calculation result still may be
displayed using the ' format even when coefficients ( a ´, c ´, d ´) are outside the corresponding
range of coefficients ( a , c , d ).
Example: '
3
11 + '
2
10 = 10'
3 + 11'
2
110
Calculation Examples
This calculation: Produces this type of display:
2 × (3 – 2 '5) = 6 – 4 '5 ' format
35 '2 × 3 = 148.492424 (= 105 '2)*
1 Decimal format
150'
2
25 = 8.485281374*
1
23 × (5 – 2 '3) = 35.32566285 (= 115 – 46 '3)*
1 Decimal format
'2 + '3 + '8 = '3 + 3 '2 ' format
'
2 + '
3 + '
6 = 5.595754113*
2 Decimal format
*
1
Decimal format because values are outside of range.
*
2
Decimal format because calculation result has three terms.
• The calculation result is displayed using decimal format even if an intermediate result goes
greater than two terms.
Example: (1 + '2 + '3) (1 – '2 – '3) (= – 4 – 2 '6)
= –8.898979486
• If the calculation formula has a ' term and a term that cannot be displayed as a fraction,
the calculation result will be displayed in decimal format.
Example: log3 + '2 = 1.891334817
2-6
u Calculation Result Display Range with
π
A calculation results is displayed using π format in the following cases.
• When the calculation result can be displayed in the form
n π
n is an integer up to |10
6
|.
• When the calculation result can be displayed in the form ab
c π or b
c π
However, {number of
a digits + number of b digits + number of c digits} must be 8 or less
when the above
ab
c or b
c is reduced.*
1
*
2
Also, the maximum number of allowable c digits is
three.*
2
*
1
When c < b , the number of a , b , and c digits are counted when the fraction is converted
from an improper fraction ( b
c ) to a mixed fraction (
ab
c ).
*
2
When “Manual” is specified for the Setup screen “Simplify” setting, the calculation result
may be displayed in decimal format, even if these conditions are met.
Calculation Examples
This calculation: Produces this type of display:
78 π × 2 = 156 π π format
123456 π × 9 = 3490636.164 (= 11111104 π )*
3 Decimal format
105 568
824 π = 105 71
103 π π format
2 258
3238 π = 6.533503684 129
1619 π2 *
4 Decimal format
*
3
Decimal format because calculation result integer part is |10
6
| or greater.
*
4
Decimal format because number of denominator digits is four or greater for the ab
c π form.
k Multiplication Operations without a Multiplication Sign
You can omit the multiplication sign ( × ) in any of the following operations.
• Before Type A functions ( 1 on page 2-3) and Type C functions ( 6 on page 2-3), except for
negative signs
Example 1 2sin30, 10log1.2, 2'
3, 2Pol(5, 12), etc.
• Before constants, variable names, memory names
Example 2 2 π , 2AB, 3Ans, 3Y
1 , etc.
• Before an open parenthesis
Example 3 3(5 + 6), (A + 1)(B – 1), etc.
2-7
k Overflow and Errors
Exceeding a specified input or calculation range, or attempting an illegal input causes an error
message to appear on the display. Further operation of the calculator is impossible while an
error message is displayed. For details, see the “Error Message Table” on page α -1.
• Most of the calculator’s keys are inoperative while an error message is displayed. Press J
to clear the error and return to normal operation.
k Memory Capacity
Each time you press a key, either one byte or two bytes is used. Some of the functions that
require one byte are: b, c, d, sin, cos, tan, log, In, ' , and π .
Some of the functions that take up two bytes are d / dx (, Mat, Xmin, If, For, Return, DrawGraph,
SortA(, PxIOn, Sum, and a n +1
.
• The required number of bytes to input functions and commands is different in the Linear
input/output mode and the Math input/output mode. For details about the number of bytes
required for each function in the Math input/output mode, see page 1-13.
2. Special Functions
k Calculations Using Variables
Example Operation Display
193.2 aav(A) w 193.2
193.2 ÷ 23 = 8.4 av(A) /23 w 8.4
193.2 ÷ 28 = 6.9 av(A) /28 w 6.9
k Memory
u Variables (Alpha Memory)
This calculator comes with 28 variables as standard. You can use variables to store values you
want to use inside of calculations. Variables are identified by single-letter names, which are
made up of the 26 letters of the alphabet, plus r and
θ
. The maximum size of values that you
can assign to variables is 15 digits for the mantissa and 2 digits for the exponent.
• Variable contents are retained even when you turn power off.
2-8
u To assign a value to a variable
[value] a [variable name] w
Example 1 To assign 123 to variable A
Abcdaav(A) w
Example 2 To add 456 to variable A and store the result in variable B
Aav(A) +efga
al(B) w
• You can input an X variable by pressing a+(X) or v. Pressing a+(X) will input X,
while pressing v will input x. Values assigned to X and x are stored in the same memory
area.
Example 3 Assign 10 to x and then assign 5 to X. Next, check what is assigned to
x.
Abaavw
faa+(X)w
vw
u To assign the same value to more than one variable
[value] a [first variable name] a3(~) [last variable name] w
• You cannot use “
r ” or “
θ
” as a variable name.
Example To assign a value of 10 to variables A through F
Abaaav(A)
!e(CATALOG).
ccc ... c(22 times)
1(INPUT) at(F) w
u String Memory
You can store up to 20 strings (named Str 1 to Str 20) in string memory. Stored strings can be
output to the display or used inside functions and commands that support the use of strings as
arguments.
For details about string operations, see “Strings” (page 8-25).
2-9
Example To assign string “ABC” to Str 1 and then output Str 1 to the display
!m(SET UP)2(Line)J
A!a(A-LOCK) E(”) v(A)
l(B) I(C) E(”) a(Releases Alpha Lock.)
aJ6( g) 5(Str) bw
5(Str) bw
String is displayed justified left.
• Perform the above operation in the Linear input/output mode. It cannot be performed in the
Math input/output mode.
u Function Memory [OPTN] - [FUNCMEM]
Function memory is convenient for temporary storage of often-used expressions. For longer
term storage, we recommend that you use the Graph mode for expressions and the Program
mode for programs.
• { STORE } / { RECALL } / { fn } / { SEE } ... {function store}/{function recall}/{function area
specification as a variable name inside an expression}/{function list}
u To store a function
Example To store the function (A+B) (A–B) as function memory number 1
!m(SET UP)2(Line)J
A (av(A) +al(B) )
(av(A) -al(B) )
K6( g) 6( g) 3(FUNCMEM)
1(STORE) bw
JJJ
• If the function memory number to which you store a function already contains a function, the
previous function is replaced with the new one.
• You can also use a to store a function in function
memory in a program. In this case, you must enclose the
function inside of double quotation marks.
2-10
u To recall a function
Example To recall the contents of function memory number 1
AK6( g) 6( g) 3(FUNCMEM)
2(RECALL) bw
• The recalled function appears at the current location of the cursor on the display.
u To recall a function as a variable
Adaav(A) w
baal(B) w
K6( g) 6( g) 3(FUNCMEM) 3(fn)
b+cw
u To display a list of available functions
K6( g) 6( g) 3(FUNCMEM)
4(SEE)
u To delete a function
Example To delete the contents of function memory number 1
A
K6( g) 6( g) 3(FUNCMEM)
1(STORE) bw
• Executing the store operation while the display is blank deletes the function in the function
memory you specify.
2-11
k Answer Function
The Answer Function automatically stores the last result you calculated by pressing w
(unless the w key operation results in an error). The result is stored in the answer memory.
• The largest value that the answer memory can hold is 15 digits for the mantissa and 2 digits
for the exponent.
• Answer memory contents are not cleared when you press the A key or when you switch
power off.
u To use the contents of the answer memory in a calculation
Example 123 + 456 = 579
789 – 579 = 210
Abcd+efgw
hij-!-(Ans) w
• Performing an operation that assigns a value to an Alpha memory (such as
faal(B) w), answer memory contents are updated in the Math input/output mode
but not in the Linear input/output mode.
k Performing Continuous Calculations
Answer memory also lets you use the result of one calculation as one of the arguments in the
next calculation.
Example 1 ÷ 3 =
1 ÷ 3 × 3 =
Ab/dw
(Continuing) *dw
Continuous calculations can also be used with Type B functions (
x 2
, x –1
, x! , on page 2-3), +, –,
^(
x y
),
x
', ° ’ ”, etc.
2-12
3. Specifying the Angle Unit and Display Format
Before performing a calculation, you should use the Setup screen to specify the angle unit and
display format.
k Setting the Angle Unit [SET UP] - [Angle]
1. On the Setup screen, highlight “Angle”.
2. Press the function key for the angle unit you want to specify, then press J.
• { Deg } / { Rad } / { Gra } ... {degrees}/{radians}/{grads}
• The relationship between degrees, grads, and radians is shown below.
360° = 2 π radians = 400 grads
90° = π /2 radians = 100 grads
k Setting the Display Format [SET UP] - [Display]
1. On the Setup screen, highlight “Display”.
2. Press the function key for the item you want to set, then press J.
• { Fix } / { Sci } / { Norm } / { Eng } ... {fixed number of decimal places specification}/
{number of significant digits specification}/{normal display}/{Engineering mode}
u To specify the number of decimal places ( Fix)
Example To specify two decimal places
1(Fix) cw
Press the number key that corresponds to the number of decimal places you want to specify
(
n = 0 to 9).
• Displayed values are rounded off to the number of decimal places you specify.
2-13
u To specify the number of significant digits ( Sci)
Example To specify three significant digits
2(Sci) dw
Press the number key that corresponds to the number of significant digits you want to specify
(
n = 0 to 9). Specifying 0 makes the number of significant digits 10.
• Displayed values are rounded off to the number of significant digits you specify.
u To specify the normal display ( Norm 1/Norm 2)
Press 3(Norm) to switch between Norm 1 and Norm 2.
Norm 1: 10
–2
(0.01) > | x |, | x | >10
10
Norm 2: 10
–9
(0.000000001) > | x |, | x | >10
10
u To specify the engineering notation display ( Eng mode)
Press 4(Eng) to switch between engineering notation and standard notation. The indicator
“/E” is on the display while engineering notation is in effect.
You can use the following symbols to convert values to engineering notation, such as 2,000
(= 2 × 10
3
) → 2k.
E (Exa) × 10
18 m (milli) × 10
–3
P (Peta) × 10
15 μ (micro) × 10
–6
T (Tera) × 10
12 n (nano) × 10
–9
G (Giga) × 10
9 p (pico) × 10
–12
M (Mega) × 10
6 f (femto) × 10
–15
k (kilo) × 10
3
• The engineering symbol that makes the mantissa a value from 1 to 1000 is automatically
selected by the calculator when engineering notation is in effect.
2-14
4. Function Calculations
k Function Menus
This calculator includes five function menus that give you access to scientific functions not
printed on the key panel.
• The contents of the function menu differ according to the mode you entered from the Main
Menu before you pressed the K key. The following examples show function menus that
appear in the Run-Matrix or Program mode.
u Hyperbolic Calculations (HYPERBL) [OPTN] - [HYPERBL]
• { sinh } / { cosh } / { tanh } ... hyperbolic {sine}/{cosine}/{tangent}
• { sinh
–1
} / { cosh
–1
} / { tanh
–1
} ... inverse hyperbolic {sine}/{cosine}/{tangent}
u Probability/Distribution Calculations (PROB) [OPTN] - [PROB]
• {
x! } ... {press after inputting a value to obtain the factorial of the value}
• {
n P r } / { n C r } ... {permutation}/{combination}
• { RAND } ... {random number generation}
• { Ran# } / { Int } / { Norm } / { Bin } / { List } ... {random number generation (0 to 1)}/{random integer
generation}/{random number generation in accordance with normal distribution based
on mean
and standard deviation }/{random number generation in accordance with
binomial distribution based on number of trials n and probability p }/{random number
generation (0 to 1) and storage of result in ListAns}
• { P (} / { Q (} / { R (} ... normal probability {P(
t )}/{Q( t )}/{R( t )}
• {
t (} ... {value of normalized variate t ( x )}
u Numeric Calculations (NUMERIC) [OPTN] - [NUMERIC]
• { Abs } ... {select this item and input a value to obtain the absolute value of the value}
• { Int } / { Frac } ... select the item and input a value to extract the {integer}/{fraction} part.
• { Rnd } ... {rounds off the value used for internal calculations to 10 significant digits (to match
the value in the answer memory), or to the number of decimal places (Fix) and number
of significant digits (Sci) specified by you}
• { Intg } ... {select this item and input a value to obtain the largest integer that is not greater
than the value}
• { RndFix } ... {rounds off the value used for internal calculations to specified digits (0 to 9) (see
page 2-2)}
• { GCD } ... {greatest common divisor for two values}
• { LCM } ... {least common multiple for two values}
• { MOD } ... {remainder of division (remainder output when
n is divided by m )}
• { MOD_ Exp } ... {remainder when division is performed on a power value (remainder output
when
n is raised to p power and then divided by m )}
2-15
u Angle Units, Coordinate Conversion, Sexagesimal Operations (ANGLE)
[OPTN] - [ANGLE]
• { ° } / { r } / { g } ... {degrees}/{radians}/{grads} for a specific input value
• { ° ’ ” } ... {specifies degrees (hours), minutes, seconds when inputting a degrees/minutes/
seconds value}
• {
° ’ ”
} ... {converts decimal value to degrees/minutes/seconds value}
• The {
° ’ ”
} menu operation is available only when there is a calculation result on the display.
• { Pol( } / { Rec( } ... {rectangular-to-polar}/{polar-to-rectangular} coordinate conversion
• { 'DMS } ... {converts decimal value to sexagesimal value}
u Engineering Symbol (ENG-SYM) [OPTN] - [ENG-SYM]
• { m } / {
} / { n } / { p } / { f } ... {milli (10
–3
)}/{micro (10
–6
)}/{nano (10
–9
)}/{pico (10
–12
)}/{femto (10
–15
)}
• { k } / { M } / { G } / { T } / { P } / { E } ... {kilo (10
3
)}/{mega (10
6
)}/{giga (10
9
)}/{tera (10
12
)}/{peta (10
15
)}/
{exa (10
18
)}
• { ENG } / { ENG } ... shifts the decimal place of the displayed value three digits to the {left}/{right}
and {decreases}/{increases} the exponent by three.
When you are using engineering notation, the engineering symbol is also changed
accordingly.
• The {ENG} and {ENG} menu operations are available only when there is a calculation result
on the display.
k Angle Units
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example Operation
To convert 4.25 rad to degrees:
243.5070629
!m(SET UP) cccccc 1(Deg) J
4.25 K6( g) 5(ANGLE) 2(r) w
47.3° + 82.5rad = 4774.20181° 47.3 +82.5 K6( g) 5(ANGLE) 2(r) w
2°20´30˝ + 39´30˝ = 3°00´00˝ 2 K6( g) 5(ANGLE) 4(° ’ ”) 20 4(° ’ ”) 30
4(° ’ ”) +0 4(° ’ ”) 39 4(° ’ ”) 30 4(° ’ ”) w
5(
° ’ ”
)
2.255° = 2°15´18˝ 2.255 K6( g) 5(ANGLE) 6( g) 3( 'DMS) w
2-16
k Trigonometric and Inverse Trigonometric Functions
• Be sure to set the angle unit before performing trigonometric function and inverse
trigonometric function calculations.
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example Operation
cos (
π
3
rad) = 2
1 (0.5) !m(SET UP) cccccc 2(Rad) J
c$!E(π)c3w
<Linear input/output mode>
c(!E( π ) /3 )w
2
•
sin 45° × cos 65° = 0.5976724775 !m(SET UP) cccccc 1(Deg) J
2 *s45 *c65 w*
1
sin
–1
0.5 = 30°
( x when sin x = 0.5)
!s(sin
–1
) 0.5 *
2
w
*
1
* can be omitted.
*
2
Input of leading zero is not necessary.
k Logarithmic and Exponential Functions
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example Operation
log 1.23 (log
10
1.23) = 0.08990511144 l1.23 w
log
2
8 = 3 4(MATH)2(logab) 2e8w
<Linear input/output mode>
K4(CALC) 6( g) 4(log
a
b) 2 ,8 )w
(–3)
4
= (–3) × (–3) × (–3) × (–3) = 81 (-3 )M4 w
7
123 (= 123
1
7
) = 1.988647795 !M(x') 7e123w
<Linear input/output mode>
7 !M(
x ') 123 w
• The Linear input/output mode and Math input/output mode produce different results when
two or more powers are input in series, like: 2 M 3 M 2.
Linear input/output mode: 2^3^2 = 64 Math input/output mode: 232 = 512
This is because the Math input/output mode internally treats the above input as: 2^(3^(2)).
(90° = radians = 100 grads)
π
2
(90° = radians = 100 grads)
π
2
2-17
k Hyperbolic and Inverse Hyperbolic Functions
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example Operation
sinh 3.6 = 18.28545536 K6( g) 2(HYPERBL) 1(sinh) 3.6 w
cosh
–1
20
15 = 0.7953654612 K6(g)2(HYPERBL)5(cosh–1)$20c15w
<Linear input/output mode>
K6( g) 2(HYPERBL) 5(cosh
–1
) (20
/15 )w
k Other Functions
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example Operation
'2 + '5 = 3.65028154 !x(') 2e+!x(') 5wM
<Linear input/output mode>
!x( ') 2 +!x( ') 5 w
(–3)
2
= (–3) × (–3) = 9 (-3 )xw
8! (= 1 × 2 × 3 × .... × 8) = 40320 8 K6( g) 3(PROB)
1( x !) w
What is the integer part of – 3.5?
– 3
K6( g) 4(NUMERIC)
2(Int) -3.5 w
k Random Number Generation (RAND)
u Random Number Generation (0 to 1) (Ran#, RanList#)
Ran# and RanList# generate 10 digit random numbers randomly or sequentially from 0 to 1.
Ran# returns a single random number, while RanList# returns multiple random numbers in list
form. The following shows the syntaxes of Ran# and RanList#.
Ran# [a] 1 < a < 9
RanList# (n [,a]) 1 < n < 999
•
n is the number of trials. RanList# generates the number of random numbers that
corresponds to
n and displays them on the ListAns screen. A value must be input for n .
• “
a ” is the randomization sequence. Random numbers are returned if nothing is input for “ a ”.
Entering an integer of 1 through 9 for a will return the corresponding sequential random
number.
• Executing the function Ran# 0 initializes the sequences of both Ran# and RanList#. The
sequence also is initialized when a sequential random number is generated with a different
sequence of the previous execution using Ran# or RanList#, or when generating a random
number.
2-18
Ran# Examples
Example Operation
Ran#
(Generates a random number.)
K6( g) 3(PROB) 4(RAND)
1(Ran#) w
(Each press of w generates a new random
number.)
w
w
Ran# 1
(Generates the first random number in
sequence 1.)
(Generates the second random number in
sequence 1.)
K6( g) 3(PROB) 4(RAND)
1(Ran#) 1 w
w
Ran# 0
(Initializes the sequence.)
Ran# 1
(Generates the first random number in
sequence 1.)
1(Ran#) 0 w
1(Ran#) 1 w
RanList# Examples
Example Operation
RanList# (4)
(Generates four random numbers and
displays the result on the ListAns screen.)
K6( g) 3(PROB) 4(RAND) 5(List)
4 )w
RanList# (3, 1)
(Generates from the first to the third random
numbers of sequence 1 and displays the
result on the ListAns screen.)
K6( g) 3(PROB) 4(RAND)5(List)
3 ,1 )w
(Next, generates from the fourth to the sixth
random number of sequence 1 and displays
the result on the ListAns screen.)
w
Ran# 0
(Initializes the sequence.)
1(Ran#) 0 w
RanList# (3, 1)
(Re-generates from the first to the third
random numbers of sequence 1 and displays
the result on the ListAns screen.)
5(List) 3 ,1 )w
2-19
u Random Integer Generation (RanInt#)
RanInt# generates random integers that fall between two specified integers.
RanInt# (A, B [,n]) A < B |A|,|B| < 1 E 10 B – A < 1 E 10 1 < n < 999
• A is the start value and B is the end value. Omitting a value for
n returns a generated random
number as-is. Specifying a value for n returns the specified number of random values in list
form.
Example Operation
RanInt# (1, 5)
(Generates one random integer from 1 and
5.)
K6( g) 3(PROB) 4(RAND) 2(Int)
1 ,5 )w
RanInt# (1, 10, 5)
(Generates five random integers from 1 to
10 and displays the result on the ListAns
screen.)
K6( g) 3(PROB) 4(RAND) 2(Int)
1 ,10 ,5 )w
u Random Number Generation in Accordance with Normal Distribution
(RanNorm#)
This function generates a 10-digit random number in accordance with normal distribution
based on a specified mean and standard deviation values.
RanNorm# (
, [,n]) > 0 1 < n < 999
• Omitting a value for
n returns a generated random number as-is. Specifying a value for n
returns the specified number of random values in list form.
Example Operation
RanNorm# (8, 68)
(Randomly produces a body length value
obtained in accordance with the normal
distribution of a group of infants less than
one year old with a mean body length of
68cm and standard deviation of 8.)
K6( g) 3(PROB) 4(RAND) 3(Norm)
8 ,68 )w
RanNorm# (8, 68, 5)
(Randomly produces the body lengths of five
infants in the above example, and displays
them in a list.)
K6( g) 3(PROB) 4(RAND) 3(Norm)
8 ,68 ,5 )w
2-20
u Random Number Generation in Accordance with Binomial Distribution
(RanBin#)
This function generates random integers in accordance with binomial distribution based on
values specified for the number of trials
n and probability p .
RanBin# (n, p [,m]) 1 < n < 100000 1 < m < 999 0 < p < 1
• Omitting a value for
m returns a generated random number as-is. Specifying a value for m
returns the specified number of random values in list form.
Example Operation
RanBin# (5, 0.5)
(Randomly produces the number of heads
that can be expected in accordance with
binomial distribution for five coin tosses
where the probability of heads is 0.5.)
K6( g) 3(PROB) 4(RAND) 4(Bin)
5 ,0.5 )w
RanBin# (5, 0.5, 3)
(Performs the same coin toss sequence
described above three times and displays
the results in a list.)
K6( g) 3(PROB) 4(RAND) 4(Bin)
5 ,0.5 ,3 )w
k Coordinate Conversion
u Rectangular Coordinates u Polar Coordinates
• With polar coordinates, can be calculated and displayed within a range of
–180°< < 180° (radians and grads have same range).
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example Operation
Calculate
r and ° when x = 14 and y = 20.7
!m(SET UP) cccccc
1(Deg) J
K6( g) 5(ANGLE) 6( g) 1(Pol()
14 ,20.7 )w
Calculate
x and y when r = 25 and = 56°
2(Rec() 25 ,56 )w
1 24.989 → 24.98979792 (r)
2 55.928 → 55.92839019 ( )
θ
1 24.989 → 24.98979792 (r)
2 55.928 → 55.92839019 ( )
θ
1 13.979 → 13.97982259 (x)
2 20.725 → 20.72593931 (y)
1 13.979 → 13.97982259 (x)
2 20.725 → 20.72593931 (y)
2-21
k Permutation and Combination
u Permutation u Combination
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example 1 To calculate the possible number of different arrangements using 4
items selected from among 10 items
Formula Operation
10 P 4 = 5040 10 K6( g) 3(PROB) 2(
n P r ) 4 w
Example 2 To calculate the possible number of different combinations of 4 items
that can be selected from among 10 items
Formula Operation
10 C 4 = 210 10 K6( g) 3(PROB) 3(
n C r ) 4 w
k Greatest Common Divisor (GCD), Least Common Multiple (LCM)
Example Operation
To determine the greatest common
divisor of 28 and 35
(GCD (28, 35) = 7)
K6( g) 4(NUMERIC) 6( g) 2(GCD) 28
, 35 )w
To determine the least common multiple
of 9 and 15
(LCM (9, 15) = 45)
K6( g) 4(NUMERIC) 6( g) 3(LCM) 9
,15 )w
k Division Remainder (MOD), Remainder of Exponential Division
(MOD_Exp)
Example Operation
To determine the remainder when 137 is
divided by 7
(MOD (137, 7) = 4)
K6( g) 4(NUMERIC) 6( g) 4(MOD) 137
,7 )w
To determine the remainder when 5
3
is
divided by 3
(MOD_Exp (5, 3, 3) = 2)
K6( g) 4(NUMERIC) 6( g)
5(MOD_Exp) 5 ,3 ,3 )w
n!n!
nPr=nCr=
(
n–r)! r!(
n–r
)!
n!n!
nPr=nCr=
(
n–r)! r!(
n–r
)!
2-22
k Fractions
• In the Math input/output mode, the fraction input method is different from that described
below. For fraction input operations in the Math input/output mode, see page 1-13.
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example Operation
2 1 73
–– + 3 –– = ––
–
5 4 20
= 3.65 (Conversion to decimal)*
1
$2c5e+!$(&) 3e1c4w
<Linear input/output mode>
2 $5 +3 $1 $4 w
M
1 1
––––– + –––––
2578 4572 = 6.066202547 × 10
–4
*
2 $1c2578e+$1c4572w
<Linear input/output mode>
1 $2578 +1 $4572 w
1
––
2
× 0.5 = 0.25*
3 $1c2e*.5w
<Linear input/output mode>
1 $2 *.5 w
*
1
Fractions can be converted to decimal values and vice versa.
*
2
When the total number of characters, including integer, numerator, denominator and delimiter
marks exceeds 10, the fraction is automatically displayed in decimal format.
*
3
Calculations containing both fractions and decimals are calculated in decimal format.
• Pressing the !M(
<
) key toggles the display fraction between mixed fraction and
improper fraction format.
k Engineering Notation Calculations
Input engineering symbols using the engineering notation menu.
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example Operation
999k (kilo) + 25k (kilo)
= 1.024M (mega)
!m(SET UP) ff4(Eng) J999 K6( g) 6( g)
1(ENG-SYM) 6( g) 1(k) +25 1(k) w
9 ÷ 10 = 0.9 = 900m (milli)
= 0.9
9 /10 w
K6( g) 6( g) 1(ENG-SYM) 6( g) 6( g) 3(ENG)*1
= 0.0009k (kilo)
= 0.9
= 900m
3(ENG)*
1
2(ENG)*
2
2(ENG)*
2
*
1
Converts the displayed value to the next higher engineering unit, by shifting the decimal
point three places to the right.
*
2
Converts the displayed value to the next lower engineering unit, by shifting the decimal point
three places to the left.
2-23
k Logical Operators (AND, OR, NOT, XOR) [OPTN] - [LOGIC]
The logical operator menu provides a selection of logical operators.
• { And } / { Or } / { Not } / { Xor } ... {logical AND}/{logical OR}/{logical NOT}/{logical XOR}
• Be sure to specify Comp for Mode in the Setup screen.
Example What is the logical AND of A and B when A = 3 and B = 2?
A AND B = 1
Operation Display
3 aav(A) w
2 aal(B) w
av(A) K6( g) 6( g)
4(LOGIC) 1(And) al(B) w
1
u About Logical Operations
• A logical operation always produces either 0 or 1 as its result.
• The following table shows all of possible results that can be produced by AND, OR and XOR
operations.
Value or Expression A Value or Expression B A AND B A OR B A XOR B
A ≠ 0 B ≠ 0 1 1 0
A ≠ 0 B = 0 0 1 1
A = 0 B ≠ 0 0 1 1
A = 0 B = 0 0 0 0
• The following table shows the results produced by the NOT operation.
Value or Expression A NOT A
A ≠ 0 0
A = 0 1
2-24
5. Numerical Calculations
The following explains the numerical calculation operations included in the function menu
displayed when K4(CALC) is pressed. The following calculations can be performed.
• { Int÷ } / { Rmdr } / { Simp } ... {quotient}/{remainder}/{simplification}
• { Solve } / { d / dx } / { d 2
/ dx 2
} / { ∫ dx } / { SolveN } ... {equality solution}/{first derivative}/{second
derivative}/{integration}/{ f ( x ) function solution}
• { FMin } / { FMax } / { Σ ( } / { log
a
b } ... {minimum value}/{maximum value}/{summation}/{logarithm
log
a
b}
k Quotient of Integer ÷ Integer [OPTN] - [CALC] - [Int÷]
The “Int÷” function can be used to determine the quotient when one integer is divided by
another integer.
Example To calculate the quotient of 107 ÷ 7
AbahK4(CALC) 6( g)
6( g) 1(Int÷) h
w
k Remainder of Integer ÷ Integer [OPTN] - [CALC] - [Rmdr]
The “Rmdr” function can be used to determine the remainder when one integer is divided by
another integer.
Example To calculate the remainder of 107 ÷ 7
AbahK4(CALC) 6( g)
6( g) 2(Rmdr) h
w
2-25
k Simplification [OPTN] - [CALC] - [Simp]
The “ 'Simp” function can be used to simplify fractions manually. The following operations can
be used to perform simplification when an unsimplified calculation result is on the display.
• { Simp } w ... This function automatically simplifies the displayed calculation result using the
smallest prime number available. The prime number used and the simplified result are
shown on the display.
• { Simp }
n w ... This function performs simplification according to the specified divisor n .
Under initial default settings, this calculator automatically simplifies fraction calculation results
before displaying them. Before performing the following examples, use the Setup screen to
change the “Simplify” setting from “Auto” to “Manual” (page 1-35).
• When “a+b
i ” or “ r ∠
θ
” is specified for the Setup screen “Complex Mode” setting, fraction
calculation results always are simplified before being displayed, even if the “Simplify” setting
is “Manual”.
• If you want to simplify fractions manually (Simplify: Manual), make sure that the “Real” is
selected for the “Complex Mode” setting.
Example 1 To simplify 15
60 ==
15
60
5
20
1
4
A$bfcgaw
K4(CALC) 6( g) 6( g) 3(Simp) w
3(Simp) w
The “F=” value is the divisor.
2-26
Example 2 To simplify 27
63 specifying a divisor of 9 =
27
63
3
7
A$chcgdw
K4(CALC) 6( g) 6( g) 3(Simp) j
w
• An error occurs if simplification cannot be performed using the specified divisor.
• Executing 'Simp while a value that cannot be simplified is displayed will return the original
value, without displaying “F=”.
k Solve Calculations [OPTN] - [CALC] - [Solve]
The following is the syntax for using the Solve function in a program.
Solve( f ( x ), n , a , b ) ( a : lower limit, b : upper limit, n : initial estimated value)
There are two different input methods that can be used for Solve calculations: direct
assignment and variable table input.
With the direct assignment method, you assign values directly to variables. This type of input is
identical to that used with the Solve command used in the Program mode.
Variable table input is used with the Solve function in the Equation mode. This input method is
recommended for most normal Solve function input.
An error (Time Out) occurs when there is no convergence of the solution.
For information about Solve calculations, see page 4-4.
• You cannot use a second derivative, Σ , maximum/minimum value or Solve calculation
expression inside of any of the above functions.
• Pressing A during calculation of Solve (while the cursor is not shown on the display)
interrupts the calculation.
k Solving an f ( x ) Function [OPTN] - [CALC] - [SolveN]
You can use SolveN to solve an
f ( x ) function using numerical analysis. The following is the
input syntax.
SolveN (left side [=right side] [,variable] [, lower limit, upper limit])
• The right side, variable, lower limit and upper limit all can be omitted.
• “left side[=right side]” is the expression to be solved. Supported variables are A through Z,
r ,
and
θ
. When the right side is omitted, solution is perform using right side = 0.
• The variable specifies the variable within the expression to be solved for (A through Z,
r ,
θ
).
Omitting a variable specification cause X to be used as the variable.
2-27
• The lower limit and upper limit specify the range of the solution. You can input a value or an
expression as the range.
• The following functions cannot be used within any of the arguments.
Solve(, d
2 / dx
2 (, FMin(, FMax(, Σ (
Up to 10 calculation results can be displayed simultaneously in ListAns format.
• The message “No Solution” is displayed if no solution exists.
• The message “More solutions may exist.” is displayed when there may be solutions other
than those displayed by SolveN.
Example To solve
x 2
– 5 x – 6 = 0
K4(CALC) 5(SolveN)
vx-fv-g)w
J
k First Derivative Calculations [OPTN] - [CALC] - [ d / dx ]
To perform first derivative calculations, first display the function analysis menu, and then input
the values using the syntax below.
<Math input/output mode>
K4(CALC)2(d/dx) f(x)ea
or
4(MATH)4(d/dx) f(x)ea
<Linear input/output mode>
K4(CALC) 2( d / dx ) f ( x ) ,a )
a is the point for which you want to determine the first derivative.
The derivative is defined as:
d/dx (
f (x), a) ⇒f (a)
dx
d
d/dx (
f (x), a) ⇒f (a)
dx
d
f(a+Ax)–f(a)
f (a) = lim –––––––––––––
Ax
Ax→0
'
f(a+Ax)–f(a)
f (a) = lim –––––––––––––
Ax
Ax→0
'
2-28
In this definition, infinitesimal is replaced by a sufficiently small Ax , with the value in the
neighborhood of f
'
( a ) calculated as:
Example To determine the derivative at x = 3 for the function y = x 3
+ 4 x 2
+ x – 6
Input the function f ( x ).
AK4(CALC) 2( d / dx ) vMde+evx+v-ge
Input point
x = a for which you want to determine the derivative.
dw
Using First Derivative Calculation in a Graph Function
• You can omit input of the value a in the syntax on page 2-27 by using the following format
for the first derivative graph: Y2 = d / dx (Y1). In this case, the value of the X variable is used
instead of the value a.
First Derivative Calculation Precautions
• In the function f ( x ), only X can be used as a variable in expressions. Other variables
(A through Z excluding X,
r , ) are treated as constants, and the value currently assigned to
that variable is applied during the calculation.
• Pressing A during calculation of a first derivative (while the cursor is not shown on the
display) interrupts the calculation.
• Inaccurate results and errors can be caused by the following:
- discontinuous points in
x values
- extreme changes in
x values
- inclusion of the local maximum point and local minimum point in
x values
- inclusion of the inflection point in
x values
- inclusion of undifferentiable points in
x values
- first derivative calculation results approaching zero
• Always use radians (Rad mode) as the angle unit when performing trigonometric first
derivatives.
• You cannot use a first derivative, second derivative, integration, Σ , maximum/minimum value,
Solve or RndFix calculation expression inside a first derivative calculation term.
f(a+Ax)–f(a)
f (a) –––––––––––––
Ax
'
f(a+Ax)–f(a)
f (a) –––––––––––––
Ax
'
2-29
k Second Derivative Calculations [OPTN] - [CALC] - [ d
2 / dx
2 ]
After displaying the function analysis menu, you can input second derivatives using the
following syntax.
<Math input/output mode>
K4(CALC)3(d2/dx2) f(x)ea
or
4(MATH)5(d2/dx2) f(x)ea
<Linear input/output mode>
K4(CALC) 3( d
2 / dx
2 ) f ( x ) ,a )
a is the point for which you want to determine the second derivative.
Second derivative calculations produce an approximate derivative value using the following
second derivative formula, which is based on Newton’s polynomial interpretation.
In this expression, values for “sufficiently small increments of
h ” are used to obtain a value that
approximates f
"
( a ).
Example To determine the second derivative at
x = 3 for the function
y = x 3
+ 4 x 2
+ x – 6
Input the function f ( x ).
AK4(CALC) 3( d
2 / dx
2 ) vMde+evx+v-ge
Input 3 as point a , which is the derivative point.
dw
Using Second Derivative Calculation in a Graph Function
You can omit input of the value a in the syntax above by using the following format for the
second derivative graph: Y2 = d2/dx2 (Y1). In this case, the value of the X variable is used
instead of the value a.
Second Derivative Calculation Precautions
The precautions that apply for first derivative also apply when using a second derivative
calculation (see page 2-28).
d2d2
––– ( f(x), a)⇒––– f(a)
dx2dx2
d2d2
––– ( f(x), a)⇒––– f(a)
dx2dx2
f
''(a) =
180h2
2 f(a + 3h) – 27 f(a + 2h) + 270 f(a + h) – 490 f(a) + 270 f(a – h) – 27 f(a –2h) + 2 f(a – 3h)
f
''(a) =
180h2
2 f(a + 3h) – 27 f(a + 2h) + 270 f(a + h) – 490 f(a) + 270 f(a – h) – 27 f(a –2h) + 2 f(a – 3h)
2-30
k Integration Calculations [OPTN] - [CALC] - [ ∫ dx ]
To perform integration calculations, first display the function analysis menu and then input the
values using the syntax below.
<Math input/output mode>
K4(CALC)4(∫dx) f(x)e a f b
or
4(MATH)6(g)1(∫dx) f(x)e a f b
<Linear input/output mode>
K4(CALC) 4( ∫ dx ) f ( x ) , a , b , tol )
(
a
: lower limit,
b
: upper limit,
tol
: tolerance)
Area of
∫
a
b
f(x)dx
is calculated
As shown in the illustration above, integration calculations are performed by calculating
integral values from
a through b for the function y = f ( x ) where a < x < b , and f ( x ) > 0. This in
effect calculates the surface area of the shaded area in the illustration.
Example To perform the integration calculation for the function shown below,
with a tolerance of “
tol ” = 1 E – 4
• Math input/output mode
K4(CALC)4(∫dx)cvx+
dv+eebffw
• Linear input/output mode
Input the function
f
( x ).
AK4(CALC) 4( ∫ dx ) cvx+dv+e,
Input the start point, end point, and the tolerance value.
b,f,bE-e)w
∫
(f(x), a,b, tol)⇒
∫
a
b f(x)dx
∫
(f(x), a,b, tol)⇒
∫
a
b f(x)dx
∫
1
5
(2x
2
+ 3x + 4) dx
∫
1
5
(2x
2
+ 3x + 4) dx
2-31
Note the following points to ensure correct integration values.
(1) When cyclical functions for integration values become positive or negative for different
divisions, perform the calculation for single cycles, or divide between negative and positive,
and then add the results together.
Positive
part (
S
)
Negative part (
S
)
Positive part ( S ) Negative part ( S )
(2) When minute fluctuations in integration divisions produce large fluctuations in integration
values, calculate the integration divisions separately (divide the large fluctuation areas into
smaller divisions), and then add the results together.
• Pressing A during calculation of an integral (while the cursor is not shown on the display)
interrupts the calculation.
• Always use radians (Rad mode) as the angle unit when performing trigonometric
integrations.
• An error (Time Out) occurs whenever no solution that satisfies the tolerance value can be
obtained.
∫
a
b f(x)dx =
∫
a
c f(x)dx + (–
∫
c
b f(x)dx)
∫
a
b f(x)dx =
∫
a
c f(x)dx + (–
∫
c
b f(x)dx)
∫
a
b f(x)dx =
∫
a
x
1
f(x)dx +
∫
x
1
x
2
f(x)dx +.....+
∫
x
4
b f(x)dx
∫
a
b f(x)dx =
∫
a
x
1
f(x)dx +
∫
x
1
x
2
f(x)dx +.....+
∫
x
4
b f(x)dx
2-32
Integration Calculation Precautions
• In the function f ( x ), only X can be used as a variable in expressions. Other variables (A
through Z excluding X,
r , ) are treated as constants, and the value currently assigned to
that variable is applied during the calculation.
• Input of “
tol ” and closing parenthesis can be omitted. If you omit “ tol ,” the calculator
automatically uses a default value of 1 E –5.
• Integration calculations can take a long time to complete.
• You cannot use a first derivative, second derivative, integration, Σ , maximum/minimum value,
Solve or RndFix calculation expression inside of an integration calculation term.
• In the Math input/output mode, the tolerance value is fixed at 1
E –5 and cannot be changed.
k Σ Calculations [OPTN] - [CALC] - [ Σ (]
To perform Σ calculations, first display the function analysis menu, and then input the values
using the syntax below.
<Math input/output mode>
K4(CALC)6(g)3(Σ( ) ak e k e
α
e
β
or
4(MATH)6(g)2(Σ( ) ak e k e
α
e
β
<Linear input/output mode>
K4(CALC) 6( g) 3( Σ ( )
a k , k ,
α
,
β
, n )
( n : distance between partitions)
Example To calculate the following:
Use n = 1 as the distance between partitions.
AK4(CALC) 6( g) 3( Σ ( ) a,(K)
x-da,(K) +fe
a,(K) ecegw
Σ
Calculation Precautions
• The value of the specified variable changes during a Σ calculation. Be sure to keep separate
written records of the specified variable values you might need later before you perform the
calculation.
• You can use only one variable in the function for input sequence
a k .
β
Σ(a
k
,k,
α
,
β
,n)=Σa
k
=a
α
+a
α
+1
+........+ a
β
k =
α
β
Σ(a
k
,k,
α
,
β
,n)=Σa
k
=a
α
+a
α
+1
+........+ a
β
k =
α
6
Σ(k
2
–3
k+5)
k = 2
6
Σ(k
2
–3
k+5)
k = 2
2-33
• Input integers only for the initial term (
α
) of sequence a k and last term (
β
) of sequence a k .
• Input of
n and the closing parentheses can be omitted. If you omit n , the calculator
automatically uses n = 1.
• Make sure that the value used as the final term
β
is greater than the value used as the initial
term
α
. Otherwise, an error will occur.
• To interrupt an ongoing Σ calculation (indicated when the cursor is not on the display), press
the A key.
• You cannot use a first derivative, second derivative, integration, Σ , maximum/minimum value,
Solve or RndFix calculation expression inside of a Σ calculation term.
• In the Math input/output mode, the distance between partitions (
n ) is fixed at 1 and cannot be
changed.
k Maximum/Minimum Value Calculations [OPTN] - [CALC] - [FMin]/[FMax]
After displaying the function analysis menu, you can input maximum/minimum calculations
using the formats below, and solve for the maximum and minimum of a function within interval
a < x < b .
u Minimum Value
K4(CALC) 6( g) 1(FMin) f
( x ) , a , b , n )
(
a : start point of interval, b : end point of interval, n : precision ( n = 1 to 9))
u Maximum Value
K4(CALC) 6( g) 2(FMax) f
( x ) , a , b , n )
(
a : start point of interval, b : end point of interval, n : precision ( n = 1 to 9))
Example To determine the minimum value for the interval defined by start
point a = 0 and end point b = 3, with a precision of n = 6 for the function
y = x 2
– 4 x + 9
Input
f
( x ).
AK4(CALC) 6( g) 1(FMin) vx-ev+j,
Input the interval a = 0, b = 3.
a,d,
Input the precision n = 6.
g)w
• In the function f
( x ), only X can be used as a variable in expressions. Other variables (A
through Z excluding X, r , ) are treated as constants, and the value currently assigned to
that variable is applied during the calculation.
2-34
• Input of
n and the closing parenthesis can be omitted.
• Discontinuous points or sections with drastic fluctuation can adversely affect precision or
even cause an error.
• Inputting a larger value for
n increases the precision of the calculation, but it also increases
the amount of time required to perform the calculation.
• The value you input for the end point of the interval (
b ) must be greater than the value you
input for the start point (
a ). Otherwise an error occurs.
• You can interrupt an ongoing maximum/minimum calculation by pressing the A key.
• You can input an integer in the range of 1 to 9 for the value of
n . Using any value outside this
range causes an error.
• You cannot use a first derivative, second derivative, integration, Σ , maximum/minimum value,
Solve or RndFix calculation expression inside of a maximum/minimum calculation term.
6. Complex Number Calculations
You can perform addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, parentheses calculations,
function calculations, and memory calculations with complex numbers just as you do with the
manual calculations described on pages 2-1 to 2-17.
• The input/output range of complex numbers is normally 10 digits for the mantissa and two
digits for the exponent.
• The following functions can be used with complex numbers.
',
x 2
, x –1
, ^( x y
),
3
',
x ', In, log, log
a
b, 10
x
, e x
, Int, Frac, Rnd, Intg, RndFix(, Fix, Sci, ENG,
ENG, ° ’ ”,
° ’ ”
,
a b
/ c , d / c
You can select the complex number calculation mode by changing the Complex Mode item on
the Setup screen to one of the following settings.
• { Real } ... Calculation in the real number range only*
1
• { a + bi } ... Performs complex number calculation and displays results in rectangular form
• {
r ∠ } ... Performs complex number calculation and displays results in polar form*
2
*
1
When there is an imaginary number in the argument, however, complex number calculation
is performed and the result is displayed using rectangular form.
Examples:
ln 2
i = 0.6931471806 + 1.570796327 i
ln 2 i + ln (– 2) = (Non-Real ERROR)
*
2
The display range of depends on the angle unit set for the Angle item on the Setup
screen.
• Deg ... –180 <
< 180
• Rad ... – π <
< π
• Gra ... –200 <
< 200
2-35
Press K3(COMPLEX) to display the complex calculation number menu, which contains
the following items.
• { i } ... {imaginary unit i input}
• { Abs } / { Arg } ... obtains {absolute value}/{argument}
• { Conjg } ... {obtains conjugate}
• { ReP } / { ImP } ... {real}/{imaginary} part extraction
• { 'r ∠ } / { 'a + bi } ... converts the result to {polar}/{rectangular} form
• You can also use !a( i ) in place of K3(COMPLEX) 1( i ).
• Solutions obtained by the Real,
a + b i and r ∠ modes are different for power root (
x
'
)
calculations when x < 0 and y = m / n when n is an odd number.
Example: 3
x ' (– 8) = – 2 (Real)
= 1 + 1.732050808 i ( a + b i )
= 2 ∠ 60 ( r ∠ , Deg mode)
• To input the “ ∠ ” operator into the polar coordinate expression (
r ∠ ), press !v( ∠ ).
k Arithmetic Operations [OPTN] - [COMPLEX] - [ i ]
Arithmetic operations are the same as those you use for manual calculations. You can even
use parentheses and memory.
Example (1 + 2
i ) + (2 + 3 i )
AK3(COMPLEX)
(b+c1(
i ) )
+(c+d1(
i ) )w
k Reciprocals, Square Roots, and Squares
Example (3 + i )
AK3(COMPLEX)
!x( ') (d+1(
i ) )w
2-36
k Complex Number Format Using Polar Form
Example 2 ∠ 30 × 3 ∠ 45 = 6 ∠ 75
!m(SET UP) cccccc
1(Deg) c3(
r ∠ ) J
Ac!v( ∠ ) da*d
!v( ∠ ) efw
k Absolute Value and Argument [OPTN] - [COMPLEX] - [Abs]/[Arg]
The unit regards a complex number in the form
a + b i as a coordinate on a Gaussian plane,
and calculates absolute value ⎮ Z ⎮ and argument (arg).
Example To calculate absolute value (
r ) and argument ( ) for the complex
number 3 + 4 i , with the angle unit set for degrees
Imaginary axis
Real axis
AK3(COMPLEX) 2(Abs)
d+e1(
i ) w
(Calculation of absolute value)
AK3(COMPLEX) 3(Arg)
(d+e1(
i ) )w
(Calculation of argument)
• The result of the argument calculation differs in accordance with the current angle unit
setting (degrees, radians, grads).
2-37
k Conjugate Complex Numbers [OPTN] - [COMPLEX] - [Conjg]
A complex number of the form
a + b i becomes a conjugate complex number of the form
a – b i .
Example To calculate the conjugate complex number for the complex number
2 + 4
i
AK3(COMPLEX) 4(Conjg)
(c+e1(
i ) )w
k Extraction of Real and Imaginary Parts [OPTN] - [COMPLEX] - [ReP]/[lmP]
Use the following procedure to extract the real part
a and the imaginary part b from a complex
number of the form
a + b i .
Example To extract the real and imaginary parts of the complex number 2 + 5
i
AK3(COMPLEX) 6( g) 1(ReP)
(c+f6( g) 1(
i ) )w
(Real part extraction)
AK3(COMPLEX) 6( g) 2(ImP)
(c+f6( g) 1(
i ) )w
(Imaginary part extraction)
k Polar and Rectangular Form Transformation
[OPTN] - [COMPLEX] - [ 'r ∠ ]/[ 'a + bi ]
Use the following procedure to transform a complex number displayed in rectangular form to
polar form, and vice versa.
Example To transform the rectangular form of complex number 1 + ' 3
i to its
polar form
!m(SET UP) cccccc
1(Deg) c2(
a + b i ) J
Ab+(!x( ') de)
K3(COMPLEX) 1(
i ) 6( g)
3(
'r ∠
θ
) w
Ac!v( ∠ ) ga
K3(COMPLEX) 6( g) 4(
'a + b i ) w
2-38
7. Binary, Octal, Decimal, and Hexadecimal
Calculations with Integers
You can use the Run-Matrix mode and binary, octal, decimal, and hexadecimal settings to
perform calculations that involve binary, octal, decimal and hexadecimal values. You can also
convert between number systems and perform bitwise operations.
• You cannot use scientific functions in binary, octal, decimal, and hexadecimal calculations.
• You can use only integers in binary, octal, decimal, and hexadecimal calculations, which
means that fractional values are not allowed. If you input a value that includes a decimal part,
the calculator automatically cuts off the decimal part.
• If you attempt to enter a value that is invalid for the number system (binary, octal, decimal,
hexadecimal) you are using, the calculator displays an error message. The following shows
the numerals that can be used in each number system.
Binary: 0, 1
Octal: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Decimal: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Hexadecimal: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, F
• Negative binary, octal, and hexadecimal values are produced using the two’s complement of
the original value.
• The following are the display capacities for each of the number systems.
Number System Binary Octal Decimal Hexadecimal
Display Capacity 16 digits 11 digits 10 digits 8 digits
• The alphabetic characters used in the hexadecimal number appear differently on the display
to distinguish them from text characters.
Normal Text A B C D E F
Hexadecimal Values
Keys vlIsct
• The following are the calculation ranges for each of the number systems.
Binary Values
Positive: 0 <
x < 111111111111111
Negative: 1000000000000000 <
x < 1111111111111111
Octal Values
Positive: 0 <
x < 17777777777
Negative: 20000000000 <
x < 37777777777
Decimal Values
Positive: 0 <
x < 2147483647
Negative: –2147483648 <
x < –1
Hexadecimal Values
Positive: 0 <
x < 7FFFFFFF
Negative: 80000000 <
x < FFFFFFFF
2-39
k Selecting a Number System
You can specify decimal, hexadecimal, binary, or octal as the default number system using the
Setup screen.
u To perform a binary, octal, decimal, or hexadecimal calculation
[SET UP] - [Mode] - [Dec]/[Hex]/[Bin]/[Oct]
1. In the Main Menu, select Run-Matrix .
2. Press !m(SET UP). Move the highlighting to “Mode”, and then specify the default
number system by pressing 2(Dec), 3(Hex), 4(Bin), or 5(Oct) for the Mode setting.
3. Press J to change to the screen for calculation input. This causes a function menu with
the following items to appear.
• { d~o } / { LOGIC } / { DISPLAY } ... {number system specification}/{bitwise operation}/
{decimal/hexadecimal/binary/octal conversion} menu
u To specify a number system for an input value
You can specify a number system for each individual value you input. Press 1(d~o) to display
a menu of number system symbols. Press the function key that corresponds to the symbol you
want to select and then input the value.
• { d } / { h } / { b } / { o } ... {decimal}/{hexadecimal}/{binary}/{octal}
u To input values of mixed number systems
Example To input 123 10 , when the default number system is hexadecimal
!m(SET UP)
Move the highlighting to “Mode”, and then
press 3(Hex) J.
A1(d~o) 1(d) bcdw
k Negative Values and Bitwise Operations
Press 2(LOGIC) to display a menu of negation and bitwise operators.
• { Neg } ... {negation}*
1
• { Not } / { and } / { or } / { xor } / { xnor } ... {NOT}*
2
/{AND}/{OR}/{XOR}/{XNOR}*
3
*
1
two’s complement
*
2
one’s complement (bitwise complement)
*
3
bitwise AND, bitwise OR, bitwise XOR, bitwise XNOR
2-40
u Negative Values
Example To determine the negative of 110010 2
!m(SET UP)
Move the highlighting to “Mode”, and then
press 4(Bin) J.
A2(LOGIC) 1(Neg)
bbaabaw
• Negative binary, octal, and hexadecimal values are produced by taking the binary two’s
complement and then returning the result to the original number base. With the decimal
number base, negative values are displayed with a minus sign.
u Bitwise Operations
Example To input and execute “120 16 and AD 16 ”
!m(SET UP)
Move the highlighting to “Mode”, and then
press 3(Hex) J.
Abca2(LOGIC)
3(and) ADw
k Number System Transformation
Press 3(DISPLAY) to display a menu of number system transformation functions.
• {
'Dec } / { 'Hex } / { 'Bin } / { 'Oct } ... transformation of displayed value to its {decimal}/
{hexadecimal}/{binary}/{octal} equivalent
u To convert a displayed value from one number system to another
Example To convert 22 10 (default number system) to its binary or octal value
A!m(SET UP)
Move the highlighting to “Mode”, and then
press 2(Dec) J.
1(d~o) 1(d) ccw
J3(DISPLAY) 3( 'Bin) w
4( 'Oct) w
2-41
8. Matrix Calculations
From the Main Menu, enter the Run-Matrix
mode, and press 3( 'MAT) to perform Matrix
calculations.
26 matrix memories (Mat A through Mat Z) plus a Matrix Answer Memory (MatAns), make it
possible to perform the following matrix operations.
• Addition, subtraction, multiplication, division
• Scalar multiplication calculations
• Determinant calculations
• Matrix transposition
• Matrix inversion
• Matrix squaring
• Raising a matrix to a specific power
• Absolute value, integer part extraction, fractional part extraction, maximum integer
calculations
• Inputting complex numbers in matrix elements and using complex number related functions
• Matrix modification using matrix commands
The maximum number of rows that can be specified for a matrix is 999, and the maximum
number of columns is 999.
Important!
• You can input either an upper-case X (a+(X)) or lower-case x (v) for matrix memory
“Mat X”. Both “Mat X” and “Mat x” refer to the same memory area.
About Matrix Answer Memory (MatAns)
The calculator automatically stores matrix calculation results in Matrix Answer Memory. Note
the following points about Matrix Answer Memory.
• Whenever you perform a matrix calculation, the current Matrix Answer Memory contents are
replaced by the new result. The previous contents are deleted and cannot be recovered.
• Inputting values into a matrix does not affect Matrix Answer Memory contents.
k Inputting and Editing Matrices
Pressing 3( 'MAT) displays the Matrix Editor screen. Use the Matrix Editor to input and edit
matrices.
m × n … m (row) × n (column) matrix
None… no matrix preset
• { DELETE } / { DEL-ALL } ... deletes {a specific matrix}/{all matrices}
• { DIM } ... {specifies the matrix dimensions (number of cells)}
• {CSV} ... {stores a matrix as a CSV file and imports the contents of CSV file into one of the
matrix memories (Mat A through Mat Z, and MatAns) (page 2-47)}
2-42
u Creating a Matrix
To create a matrix, you must first define its dimensions (size) in the Matrix Editor. Then you can
input values into the matrix.
u To specify the dimensions (size) of a matrix
Example To create a 2-row × 3-column matrix in the area named Mat B
Highlight Mat B.
c
3(DIM) (This step can be omitted.)
Specify the number of rows.
cw
Specify the number of columns.
dw
w
• All of the cells of a new matrix contain the value 0.
• Changing the dimensions of a matrix deletes its current contents.
• If “Memory ERROR” remains next to the matrix area name after you input the dimensions, it
means there is not enough free memory to create the matrix you want.
u To input cell values
Example To input the following data into Matrix B:
The following operation is a continuation of the example calculation on the previous page.
bwcwdw
ewfwgw
(Data is input into the highlighted cell. Each
time you press w, the highlighting moves
to the next cell to the right.)
• Displayed cell values show positive integers up to six digits, and negative integers up to five
digits (one digit used for the negative sign). Exponential values are shown with up to two
digits for the exponent. Fractional values are not displayed.
1 2 3
4 5 6
1 2 3
4 5 6
2-43
u Deleting Matrices
You can delete either a specific matrix or all matrices in memory.
u To delete a specific matrix
1. While the Matrix Editor is on the display, use f and c to highlight the matrix you want to
delete.
2. Press 1(DELETE).
3. Press 1(Yes) to delete the matrix or 6(No) to abort the operation without deleting
anything.
u To delete all matrices
1. While the Matrix Editor is on the display, press 2(DEL-ALL).
2. Press 1(Yes) to delete all matrices in memory or 6(No) to abort the operation without
deleting anything.
k Matrix Cell Operations
Use the following procedure to prepare a matrix for cell operations.
1. While the Matrix Editor is on the display, use f and c to highlight the name of the matrix
you want to use.
You can jump to a specific matrix by inputting the letter that corresponds to the matrix name.
Inputting ai(N), for example, jumps to Mat N.
Pressing !-(Ans) jumps to the matrix current memory.
2. Press w and the function menu with the following items appears.
• { ROW-OP } ... {row operation menu}
• { ROW }
• { DELETE } / { INSERT } / { ADD } ... row {delete}/{insert}/{add}
• { COLUMN }
• { DELETE } / { INSERT } / { ADD } ... column {delete}/{insert}/{add}
• { EDIT } ... {cell editing screen}
All of the following examples use Matrix A.
2-44
u Row Calculations
The following menu appears whenever you press 1(ROW-OP) while a recalled matrix is on
the display.
• { SWAP } ... {row swap}
• { Row } ... {product of specified row and scalar}
• { Row + } ... {addition of one row and the product of a specified row with a scalar}
• { Row+ } ... {addition of specified row to another row}
u To swap two rows
Example To swap rows two and three of the following matrix:
All of the operation examples are performed using the following matrix.
Matrix A =
1 2
3 4
5 6
1(ROW-OP) 1(SWAP)
Input the number of the rows you want to swap.
cwdww
u To calculate the scalar multiplication of a row
Example To calculate the product of row 2 and the scalar 4
1(ROW-OP) 2( Row)
Input multiplier value.*
ew
Specify row number.
cww
* A complex number also can be input as multiplier value (k).
2-45
u To calculate the scalar multiplication of a row and add the result to another
row
Example To calculate the product of row 2 and the scalar 4, then add the result to
row 3
1(ROW-OP) 3( Row+)
Input multiplier value.*
ew
Specify number of row whose product should be calculated.
cw
Specify number of row where result should be added.
dww
* A complex number also can be input as multiplier value (k).
u To add two rows together
Example To add row 2 to row 3
1(ROW-OP) 4(Row+)
Specify number of row to be added.
cw
Specify number of row to be added to.
dww
u Row Operations
• { DELETE } ... {delete row}
• { INSERT } ... {insert row}
• { ADD } ... {add row}
u To delete a row
Example To delete row 2
2(ROW) c
1(DELETE)
2-46
u To insert a row
Example To insert a new row between rows one and two
2(ROW) c
2(INSERT)
u To add a row
Example To add a new row below row 3
2(ROW) cc
3(ADD)
u Column Operations
• { DELETE } ... {delete column}
• { INSERT } ... {insert column}
• { ADD } ... {add column}
u To delete a column
Example To delete column 2
3(COLUMN) e
1(DELETE)
2-47
k Transferring Data between Matrices and CSV Files
You can import the contents of a CSV file stored with this calculator or transferred from a
computer into one of the matrix memories (Mat A through Mat Z, and MatAns). You also can
save the contents of one of the matrix memories (Mat A through Mat Z, and MatAns) as a CSV
file.
u To import the contents of a CSV file to a matrix memory
1. Prepare the CSV file you want to import.
• See “Import CSV File Requirements” (page 3-18).
2. While the Matrix Editor is on the display, use f and c to highlight the name of the matrix
to which you want to import the CSV file contents.
• If the matrix you select already contains data, performing the following steps will overwrite
its current contents with the newly imported CSV file data.
3. Press 4(CSV)1(LOAD).
4. On the select file dialog box that appears, use f and c to move the highlighting to the
file you want to import and then press w.
• This imports the contents of the CSV file you specified to the matrix memory.
Important!
Attempting to import the following types of CSV files will result in an error.
• A CSV file that includes data that cannot be converted. In this case, an error message will
appear showing the location in the CSV file (Example: row 2, column 3) where the data that
cannot be converted is located.
• A CSV file with more than 999 columns or 999 rows. In this case, an “Invalid Data Size” error
will occur.
u To save matrix contents as a CSV file
1. While the Matrix Editor is on the display, use f and c to highlight the name of the matrix
whose contents you want to save as a CSV file.
2. Press 4(CSV)2(SAVE • AS).
• This displays a folder selection screen.
3. Select the folder where you want to save the CSV file.
• To store the CSV file in the root directory, highlight “Root”.
• To store the CSV file in a folder, use f and c to move the highlighting to the desired
folder and then press 1(OPEN).
4. Press 1(SAVE • AS).
5. Input up to eight characters for the file name and then press w.
2-48
Important!
• When saving matrix data to a CSV file, some data is converted as described below.
- Complex number data: Only the real number part is extracted.
- Fraction data: Converted to calculation line format (Example: 2{3{4 → =2+3/4)
- ' and π data: Converted to a decimal value (Example: '3 → 1.732050808)
u To specify the CSV file delimiter symbol and decimal point
While the Matrix Editor is on the display, press 4(CSV)3(SET) to display the CSV format
setting screen. Next, perform the procedure from step 3 under “Specifying the CSV File
Delimiter Symbol and Decimal Point” (page 3-20).
k Modifying Matrices Using Matrix Commands [OPTN] - [MAT]
u To display the matrix commands
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Run-Matrix mode.
2. Press K to display the option menu.
3. Press 2(MAT) to display the matrix command menu.
The following describes only the matrix command menu items that are used for creating
matrices and inputting matrix data.
• { Mat } ... {Mat command (matrix specification)}
• { Mat → Lst } ... {Mat → List command (assign contents of selected column to a list)}
• { Augment } ... {Augment command (link two matrices)}
• { Identity } ... {Identity command (identity matrix input)}
• { Dim } ... {Dim command (dimension check)}
• { Fill( } ... {Fill command (identical cell values)}
• You can also use !c(Mat) in place of K2(MAT) 1(Mat).
2-49
u Matrix Data Input Format [OPTN] - [MAT] - [Mat]
The following shows the format you should use when inputting data to create a matrix using
the Mat command.
= [ [a
11
, a
12
, ..., a
1
n
] [a
21
, a
22
, ..., a
2
n
] .... [a
m 1
, a
m 2
, ..., a
mn
] ]
→ Mat [letter A through Z]
Example To input the following data as Matrix A:
!+( [ ) !+( [ ) b,d,f
!-( ] ) !+( [ ) c,e,g
!-( ] ) !-( ] ) aK2(MAT)
1(Mat) av(A)
w
• The maximum value of both m and n is 999.
• An error occurs if memory becomes full as you are inputting data.
• You can also use the above format inside a program that inputs matrix data.
u To input an identity matrix [OPTN] - [MAT] - [Identity]
Use the Identity command to create an identity matrix.
Example To create a 3 × 3 identity matrix as Matrix A
K2(MAT) 6( g) 1(Identity)
da6( g) 1(Mat) av(A) w
Number of rows/columns
a
11
a
12
...
a
1n
a
21
a
22
...
a
2n
a
m1
a
m2
...
a
mn
...
...
...
a
11
a
12
...
a
1n
a
21
a
22
...
a
2n
a
m1
a
m2
...
a
mn
...
...
...
1 3 5
2 4 6
1 3 5
2 4 6
2-50
u To check the dimensions of a matrix [OPTN] - [MAT] - [Dim]
Use the Dim command to check the dimensions of an existing matrix.
Example 1 To check the dimensions of Matrix A
K2(MAT) 6( g) 2(Dim)
6( g) 1(Mat) av(A) w
The display shows that Matrix A consists of two rows and three columns.
Since the result of the Dim command is list type data, it is stored in ListAns Memory.
You can also use {Dim} to specify the dimensions of the matrix.
Example 2 To specify dimensions of 2 rows and 3 columns for Matrix B
!*( ) c,d!/( ) a
K2(MAT) 6( g) 2(Dim)
6( g) 1(Mat) al(B) w
u Modifying Matrices Using Matrix Commands
You can also use matrix commands to assign values to and recall values from an existing
matrix, to fill in all cells of an existing matrix with the same value, to combine two matrices into
a single matrix, and to assign the contents of a matrix column to a list.
u To assign values to and recall values from an existing matrix
[OPTN] - [MAT] - [Mat]
Use the following format with the Mat command to specify a cell for value assignment and
recall.
Mat X [
m , n ]
X = matrix name (A through Z, or Ans)
m = row number
n = column number
2-51
Example 1 To assign 10 to the cell at row 1, column 2 of the following matrix:
Matrix A =
1 2
3 4
5 6
baaK2(MAT) 1(Mat)
av(A) !+( ) b,c
!-( ) w
Example 2 Multiply the value in the cell at row 2, column 2 of the above matrix by 5
K2(MAT) 1(Mat)
av(A) !+( ) c,c
!-( ) *fw
u To fill a matrix with identical values and to combine two matrices into a
single matrix
[OPTN] - [MAT] - [Fill(]/[Augment]
Use the Fill( command to fill all the cells of an existing matrix with an identical value and the
Augment command to combine two existing matrices into a single matrix.
Example 1 To fill all of the cells of Matrix A with the value 3
K2(MAT) 6( g) 3(Fill( )
d,6( g) 1(Mat) av(A)) w
Example 2 To combine the following two matrices:
K2(MAT) 5(Augment)
1(Mat) av(A) ,
1(Mat) al(B)) w
• The two matrices you combine must have the same number of rows. An error occurs if you
try to combine two matrices that have different number of rows.
• You can use Matrix Answer Memory to assign the results of the above matrix input and edit
operations to a matrix variable. To do so, use the following syntax.
Augment (Mat
α
, Mat
β
) → Mat
γ
In the above,
α
,
β
, and
γ
are any variable names A through Z.
The above does not affect the contents of Matrix Answer Memory.
A = 1
2
B = 3
4
A = 1
2
B = 3
4
2-52
u To assign the contents of a matrix column to a list [OPTN] - [MAT] - [Mat → Lst]
Use the following format with the Mat → List command to specify a column and a list.
Mat → List (Mat X,
m ) → List n
X = matrix name (A through Z)
m = column number
n = list number
Example To assign the contents of column 2 of the following matrix to list 1:
Matrix A =
1 2
3 4
5 6
K2(MAT) 2(Mat → Lst)
1(Mat) av(A) ,c)
aK1(LIST) 1(List) bw
1(List) bw
k Matrix Calculations [OPTN] - [MAT]
Use the matrix command menu to perform matrix calculation operations.
u To display the matrix commands
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Run-Matrix mode.
2. Press K to display the option menu.
3. Press 2(MAT) to display the matrix command menu.
The following describes only the matrix commands that are used for matrix arithmetic
operations.
• { Mat } ... {Mat command (matrix specification)}
• { Det } ... {Det command (determinant command)}
• { Trn } ... {Trn command (transpose matrix command)}
• { Identity } ... {Identity command (identity matrix input)}
• { Ref } ... {Ref command (row echelon form command)}
• { Rref } ... {Rref command (reduced row echelon form command)}
All of the following examples assume that matrix data is already stored in memory.
2-53
u Matrix Arithmetic Operations [OPTN] - [MAT] - [Mat]/[Identity]
Example 1 To add the following two matrices (Matrix A + Matrix B):
K2(MAT) 1(Mat) av(A) +
1(Mat) al(B) w
Example 2 To multiply the two matrices in Example 1 (Matrix A × Matrix B)
K2(MAT) 1(Mat) av(A) *
1(Mat) al(B) w
• The two matrices must have the same dimensions in order to be added or subtracted. An
error occurs if you try to add or subtract matrices of different dimensions.
• For multiplication (Matrix 1 × Matrix 2), the number of columns in Matrix 1 must match the
number of rows in Matrix 2. Otherwise, an error occurs.
u Determinant [OPTN] - [MAT] - [Det]
Example Obtain the determinant for the following matrix:
Matrix A =
1 2 3
4 5 6
−1 −2 0
K2(MAT) 3(Det) 1(Mat)
av(A) w
• Determinants can be obtained only for square matrices (same number of rows and columns).
Trying to obtain a determinant for a matrix that is not square produces an error.
• The determinant of a 2 × 2 matrix is calculated as shown below.
| A | = a11 a12 =a
11a22 –a
12a21
a21 a22
• The determinant of a 3 × 3 matrix is calculated as shown below.
= a11a22a33 + a12a23a31 + a13a21a32 – a11a23a32 – a12a21a33 – a13a22a31
a11 a12 a13
a21 a22 a23
a31 a32 a33
|A| =
A = 1 1
2 1
2 3
2 1
B =
A = 1 1
2 1
2 3
2 1
B =
2-54
u Matrix Transposition [OPTN] - [MAT] - [Trn]
A matrix is transposed when its rows become columns and its columns become rows.
Example To transpose the following matrix:
Matrix A =
1 2
3 4
5 6
K2(MAT) 4(Trn) 1(Mat)
av(A) w
u Row Echelon Form [OPTN] - [MAT] - [Ref]
This command uses the Gaussian elimination algorithm to find the row echelon form of a
matrix.
Example To find the row echelon form of the following matrix:
Matrix A =
K2(MAT) 6( g) 4(Ref)
6( g) 1(Mat) av (A) w
1 2 3
4 5 6
1 2 3
4 5 6
2-55
u Reduced Row Echelon Form [OPTN] - [MAT] - [Rref]
This command finds the reduced row echelon form of a matrix.
Example To find the reduced row echelon form of the following matrix:
Matrix A =
K2(MAT) 6( g) 5(Rref)
6( g) 1(Mat) av (A) w
• The row echelon form and reduced row echelon form operation may not produce accurate
results due to dropped digits.
u Matrix Inversion [ x –1
]
Example To invert the following matrix:
Matrix A =
K2(MAT) 1(Mat)
av(A) !)(
x –1
) w
• Only square matrices (same number of rows and columns) can be inverted. Trying to invert a
matrix that is not square produces an error.
• A matrix with a determinant of zero cannot be inverted. Trying to invert a matrix with
determinant of zero produces an error.
• Calculation precision is affected for matrices whose determinant is near zero.
• A matrix being inverted must satisfy the conditions shown below.
A A–1 = A–1 A = E = 1 0
0 1
The following shows the formula used to invert Matrix A into inverse matrix A
–1
.
A = a b
c d
A–1= 1
ad – bc
d–b
–c a
Note that ad – bc ≠ 0.
2 −1 3 19
1 1 −5 −21
0 4 3 0
2 −1 3 19
1 1 −5 −21
0 4 3 0
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
2-56
u Squaring a Matrix [ x 2
]
Example To square the following matrix:
Matrix A =
K2(MAT) 1(Mat) av(A) xw
u Raising a Matrix to a Power [^]
Example To raise the following matrix to the third power:
Matrix A =
K2(MAT) 1(Mat) av(A)
Mdw
• For matrix power calculations, calculation is possible up to a power of 32766.
u Determining the Absolute Value, Integer Part, Fraction Part, and Maximum
Integer of a Matrix
[OPTN] - [NUMERIC] - [Abs]/[Frac]/[Int]/[Intg]
Example To determine the absolute value of the following matrix:
Matrix A =
K6( g) 4(NUMERIC) 1(Abs)
K2(MAT) 1(Mat) av(A) w
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2
3 4
1 –2
–3 4
1 –2
–3 4
2-57
u Complex Number Calculations with a Matrix
Example To determine the absolute value of a matrix with the following complex
number elements:
Matrix D =
K6( g) 4(NUMERIC) 1(Abs)
K2(MAT) 1(Mat) as (D) w
• The following complex number functions are supported in matrices.
i , Abs, Arg, Conjg, ReP, ImP, 'a+b i , 'r ∠
θ
Note, however, that “ 'a+b i ” and “ 'r ∠
θ
” cannot be used in the Linear input/output mode.
Matrix Calculation Precautions
• Determinants and inverse matrices are subject to error due to dropped digits.
• Matrix operations are performed individually on each cell, so calculations may require
considerable time to complete.
• The calculation precision of displayed results for matrix calculations is ± 1 at the least
significant digit.
• If a matrix calculation result is too large to fit into Matrix Answer Memory, an error occurs.
• You can use the following operation to transfer Matrix Answer Memory contents to another
matrix.
MatAns → Mat
α
In the above,
α
is any variable name A through Z. The above does not affect the contents of
Matrix Answer Memory.
–1 + i 1 + i
1 + i –2 + 2i
–1 + i 1 + i
1 + i –2 + 2i
2-58
9. Metric Conversion Calculations
You can convert values from one unit of measurement to another. Measurement units are
classified according to the following 11 categories. The indicators in the “Display Name”
column show the text that appears in the calculator’s function menu.
Important!
Metric conversion commands are supported only when the Metric Conversion add-in
application is installed.
Display Name Category Display Name Category Display Name Category
LENGTH Length TMPR Temperature PRESSURE Pressure
AREA Area VELOCITY Velocity ENERGY Energy/Work
VOLUME Volume MASS Mass POWER Power
TIME Time FORCE Force/Weight
You can convert from any unit in a category to any other unit in the same category.
• Attempting to convert from a unit in one category (such as “AREA”) to a unit in another
category (such as “TIME”) results in a Conversion ERROR.
• See the “Unit Conversion Command List” (page 2-60) for information about the units included
in each category.
2-59
k Performing a Unit Conversion Calculation [OPTN] - [CONVERT]
Input the value you are converting from and the conversion commands using the syntax shown
below to perform a unit conversion calculation.
{value converting from}{conversion command 1} ' {conversion command 2}
• Use {conversion command 1} to specify the unit being converted from and {conversion
command 2} to specify the unit being converted to.
• ' is a command that links the two conversion commands. This command is always available
at 1( ') of the Conversion menu.
• Real numbers or a list that contains real number elements only can be used as the value
being converted from. When values being converted from are input into a list (or when list
memory is specified), conversion calculation is performed for each element in the list and
calculation results are returned in list format (ListAns screen).
• A complex number cannot be used as a value to be converted from. An error occurs if even
a single element of a list being used as the value being converted from contains a complex
number.
Example 1 To convert 50cm to inches
AfaK6( g) 1(CONVERT)
2(LENGTH) f(cm) 1( ')
2(LENGTH) ec(in) w
Example 2 To convert {175, 162} square meters to hectares
A!*({) bhf,bgc
!/(})
K6( g) 1(CONVERT) 3(AREA)
c(m
2
) 1( ') 3(AREA) d(ha) w
2-60
k Unit Conversion Command List
Cat. Display Name Unit Cat. Display Name Unit
Length
fm fermi
Volume
cm
3 cubic centimeter
Å angstrom mL milliliter
μ
m micrometer L liter
mm millimeter m
3 cubic meter
cm centimeter in
3 cubic inch
m meter ft
3 cubic foot
km kilometer fl_oz(UK) ounce
AU astronomical unit fl_oz(US) fluid ounce (U.S.)
l.y. light year gal(US) gallon
pc parsec gal(UK) UK gallon
Mil 1/1000 inch pt pint
in inch qt quart
ft foot tsp teaspoon
yd yard tbsp tablespoon
fath fathom cup cup
rd rod
Time
ns nanosecond
mile mile
μ
s microsecond
n mile nautical mile ms millisecond
Area
cm
2 square centimeter s second
m
2 square meter min minute
ha hectare h hour
km
2 square kilometer day day
in
2 square inch week week
ft
2 square foot yr year
yd
2 square yard s-yr sidereal year
acre acre t-yr tropical year
mile
2 square mile
2-61
Cat. Display Name Unit Cat. Display Name Unit
Temperature
°C degrees Celsius
Pressure
Pa Pascal
K Kelvin kPa Kilo Pascal
°F degrees Fahrenheit mmH
2
O millimeter of water
°R degrees Rankine mmHg millimeter of Mercury
Velocity
m/s meter per second atm atmosphere
km/h kilometer per hour inH
2
O inch of water
knot knot inHg inch of Mercury
ft/s foot per second lbf/in
2 pound per square
inch
mile/h mile per hour bar bar
Mass
u atomic mass unit kgf/cm
2 kilogram force per
square centimeter
mg milligram
Energy/Work
eV electron Volt
g gram J Joule
kg kilogram cal
th calorie
th
mton metric ton cal
15 calorie (15°C)
oz avoirdupois ounce cal
IT calorie
IT
lb pound mass kcal
th kilocalorie
th
slug slug kcal
15 kilocalorie (15°C)
ton(short) ton, short (2000lbm) kcal
IT kilocalorie
IT
ton(long) ton, long (2240lbm) l-atm liter atmosphere
Force/Weight
N newton kW
•
h kilowatt hour
lbf pound of force ft
•
lbf foot-pound
tonf ton of force Btu British thermal unit
dyne dyne erg erg
kgf kilogram of force kgf
•
m kilogram force meter
Power
W watt
cal
th
/s calorie per second
hp horsepower
ft
•
lbf/s foot-pound per
second
Btu/min British thermal unit
per minute
Source: NIST Special Publication 811 (1995)
3-1
Chapter 3 List Function
A list is a storage place for multiple data items.
This calculator lets you store up to 26 lists in a single file, and you can store up to six files in
memory. Stored lists can be used in arithmetic and statistical calculations, and for graphing.
Element number Display range Cell Column
List name
Sub name
Row
1. Inputting and Editing a List
When you enter the Statistics mode, the “List Editor” will appear first. You can use the List
Editor to input data into a list and to perform a variety of other list data operations.
u To input values one-by-one
Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the list
name, sub name or cell you want to select. Note that c
does not move the highlighting to a cell that does not
contain a value.
The screen automatically scrolls when the highlighting is located at either edge of the screen.
The following example is performed starting with the highlighting located at Cell 1 of List 1.
1. Input a value and press w to store it in the list.
dw
• The highlighting automatically moves down to the next
cell for input.
List 1 List 2 List 3 List 4 List 5 List 26
1
SUB
56 1 107 3.5 4 0
2 37 2 75 6 0 0
3 21 4 122 2.1 0 0
4 69 8 87 4.4 2 0
5 40 16 298 3 0 0
64832486.8 3 0
7 93 64 338 2 9 0
8 30 128 49 8.7 0 0
••••••
••••••
••••••
•
•
•
•
• •••••
List 1 List 2 List 3 List 4 List 5 List 26
1
SUB
56 1 107 3.5 4 0
2 37 2 75 6 0 0
3 21 4 122 2.1 0 0
4 69 8 87 4.4 2 0
5 40 16 298 3 0 0
64832486.8 3 0
7 93 64 338 2 9 0
8 30 128 49 8.7 0 0
••••••
••••••
••••••
•
•
•
•
• •••••
3
3-2
2. Input the value 4 in the second cell, and then input the
result of 2 + 3 in the next cell.
ewc+dw
• You can also input the result of an expression or a complex number into a cell.
• You can input values up to 999 cells in a single list.
u To batch input a series of values
1. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to another
list.
2. Press !*( { ), and then input the values you want,
pressing , between each one. Press !/( } ) after
inputting the final value.
!*( { ) g,h,i!/( } )
3. Press w to store all of the values in your list.
w
• Remember that a comma separates values, so you should not input a comma after the final
value of the set you are inputting.
Right: {34, 53, 78}
Wrong: {34, 53, 78,}
You can also use list names inside of a mathematical expression to input values into another
cell. The following example shows how to add the values in each row in List 1 and List 2, and
input the result into List 3.
1. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the name
of the list where you want the calculation results to be
input.
3-3
2. Press K and input the expression.
K1(LIST) 1(List) b+
K1(LIST) 1(List) cw
• You can also use !b(List) in place of K1(LIST) 1(List).
k Editing List Values
u To change a cell value
Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the cell whose value you want to change. Input
the new value and press w to replace the old data with the new one.
u To edit the contents of a cell
1. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the cell whose contents you want to edit.
2. Press 6( g) 2(EDIT).
3. Make any changes in the data you want.
u To delete a cell
1. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the cell you want to delete.
2. Press 6( g) 3(DELETE) to delete the selected cell and cause everything below it to be
shifted up.
• The cell delete operation does not affect cells in other lists. If the data in the list whose cell
you delete is somehow related to the data in neighboring lists, deleting a cell can cause
related values to become misaligned.
u To delete all cells in a list
Use the following procedure to delete all the data in a list.
1. Use the cursor key to move the highlighting to any cell of the list whose data you want to
delete.
2. Pressing 6( g) 4(DEL-ALL) causes a confirmation message to appear.
3. Press 1(Yes) to delete all the cells in the selected list or 6(No) to abort the delete
operation without deleting anything.
3-4
u To insert a new cell
1. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the location where you want to insert the
new cell.
2. Press 6( g) 5(INSERT) to insert a new cell, which contains a value of 0, causing
everything below it to be shifted down.
• The cell insert operation does not affect cells in other lists. If the data in the list where you
insert a cell is somehow related to the data in neighboring lists, inserting a cell can cause
related values to become misaligned.
k Naming a List
You can assign List 1 through List 26 “sub names” of up to eight bytes each.
u To name a list
1. On the Setup screen, highlight “Sub Name” and then press 1(On) J.
2. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the SUB cell of the list you want to name.
3. Type in the name and then press w.
• To type in a name using alpha characters, press !a to enter the ALPHA-LOCK
mode.
Example: YEAR
-(Y) c(E) v(A) g(R) w
3-5
• The following operation displays a sub name in the Run-Matrix mode.
!m(SET UP)2(Line)J
!b(List)
n !+( [ ) a!-( ] ) w
(
n = list number from 1 to 26)
• Though you can input up to 8 bytes for the sub name, only the characters that can fit within
the List Editor cell will be displayed.
• The List Editor SUB cell is not displayed when “Off” is selected for “Sub Name” on the Setup
screen.
k Changing the Data Color
You can change the color of data input into an individual cell or for all of the data input in a
particular list.
u To change the data color in a specific cell
1. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the cell
whose character color you want to change.
• Be sure to select a cell that already contains input
data. You will not be able to perform the next step if you
select a cell that does not contain any input data.
2. Press !f(FORMAT) to display the color selection
dialog box.
3. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the
desired color and then press w.
• You also can select an option by pressing the number
key that corresponds to the number to the left of the
desired option.
3-6
u To change the color of all the data in a particular list
1. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the
list name of the list whose character color you want to
change.
• Be sure to select a list that already contains input data.
You will not be able to perform the next step if you
select a list that does not contain any input data.
2. Press !f(FORMAT) to display the color selection dialog box.
3. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the
desired color and then press w.
• Changing the character color affects only cells that
already contain input data. After performing this
operation, any data input into any cell that did not
previously contain data will be the default color (black).
Note that this operation does not change the color of
the sub name.
k Sorting List Values
You can sort lists into either ascending or descending order. The highlighting can be located in
any cell of the list.
u To sort a single list
Ascending order
1. While the lists are on the screen, press 6( g) 1(TOOL) 1(SORTASC).
2. The prompt “How Many Lists?:” appears to ask how many lists you want to sort. Here we will
input 1 to indicate we want to sort only one list.
bw
3. In response to the “Select List List No:” prompt, input the number of the list you want to sort.
bw
Descending order
Use the same procedure as that for the ascending order sort. The only difference is that you
should press 2(SORTDES) in place of 1(SORTASC).
3-7
u To sort multiple lists
You can link multiple lists together for a sort so that all of their cells are rearranged in
accordance with the sorting of a base list. The base list is sorted into either ascending
order or descending order, while the cells of the linked lists are arranged so that the relative
relationship of all the rows is maintained.
Ascending order
1. While the lists are on the screen, press 6( g) 1(TOOL) 1(SORTASC).
2. The prompt “How Many Lists?:” appears to ask how many lists you want to sort. Here we will
sort one base list linked to one other list, so we should input 2.
cw
3. In response to the “Select Base List List No:” prompt, input the number of the list you want
to sort into ascending order. Here we will specify List 1.
bw
4. In response to the “Select Second List List No:” prompt, input the number of the list you
want to link to the base list. Here we will specify List 2.
cw
Descending order
Use the same procedure as that for the ascending order sort. The only difference is that you
should press 2(SORTDES) in place of 1(SORTASC).
• You can specify a value from 1 to 6 as the number of lists for sorting.
• If you specify a list more than once for a single sort operation, an error occurs.
An error also occurs if lists specified for sorting do not have the same number of values
(rows).
2. Manipulating List Data
List data can be used in arithmetic and function calculations. In addition, various list data
manipulation functions make manipulation of list data quick and easy.
You can use list data manipulation functions in the Run-Matrix , Statistics , Table , Equation
and Program modes.
3-8
k Accessing the List Data Manipulation Function Menu
All of the following examples are performed after entering the Run-Matrix mode.
Press K and then 1(LIST) to display the list data manipulation menu, which contains the
following items.
• { List } / { Lst → Mat } / { Dim } / { Fill( } / { Seq } / { Min } / { Max } / { Mean } / { Med } / { Augment } / { Sum } / { Prod } /
{ Cuml } / { % } / { ΔList}
Note that all closing parentheses at the end of the following operations can be omitted.
u To transfer list contents to Matrix Answer Memory [OPTN] - [LIST] - [Lst → Mat]
K1(LIST) 2(Lst → Mat) 1(List) <list number 1 - 26> ,1(List) <list number 1 - 26> ...
,1(List) <list number 1 - 26> )w
• You can skip input 1(List) in the part of the above operation.
• All the lists must contain the same number of data items. If they don’t, an error occurs.
Example: List → Mat (1, 2) w
Example To transfer the contents of List 1 (2, 3, 6, 5, 4) to column 1, and the
contents of List 2 (11, 12, 13, 14, 15) to column 2 of Matrix Answer
Memory
AK1(LIST) 2(Lst → Mat)
1(List) b,1(List) c)w
u To count the number of data items in a list [OPTN] - [LIST] - [Dim]
K1(LIST) 3(Dim) 1(List) <list number 1 - 26> w
• The number of cells a list contains is its “dimension.”
Example To count the number of values in List 1 (36, 16, 58, 46, 56)
AK1(LIST) 3(Dim)
1(List) bw
3-9
u To create a list by specifying the number of data items [OPTN] - [LIST] - [Dim]
Use the following procedure to specify the number of data in the assignment statement and
create a list.
<number of data
n > aK1(LIST) 3(Dim) 1(List) <list number 1 - 26> w ( n = 1 - 999)
Example To create five data items (each of which contains 0) in List 1
AfaK1(LIST) 3(Dim)
1(List) bw
You can view the newly created list by entering the
Statistics mode.
u To replace all data items with the same value [OPTN] - [LIST] - [Fill(]
K1(LIST) 4(Fill( ) <value> ,1(List) <list number 1 - 26> )w
Example To replace all data items in List 1 with the number 3
AK1(LIST) 4(Fill( )
d,1(List) b)w
The following shows the new contents of List 1.
u To generate a sequence of numbers [OPTN] - [LIST] - [Seq]
K1(LIST) 5(Seq) <expression> , <variable name> , <start value> , <end value>
, <increment> )w
• The result of this operation is stored in ListAns Memory.
Example To input the number sequence 1
2
, 6
2
, 11
2
, into a list, using the function
f ( x ) = X
2
. Use a starting value of 1, an ending value of 11, and an
increment of 5.
AK1(LIST) 5(Seq) vx,
v,b,bb,f)w
Specifying an ending value of 12, 13, 14, or 15 produces the same result as shown above
since they are less than the value produced by the next increment (16).
3-10
u To find the minimum value in a list [OPTN] - [LIST] - [Min]
K1(LIST) 6( g) 1(Min) 6( g) 6( g) 1(List) <list number 1 - 26> )w
Example To find the minimum value in List 1 (36, 16, 58, 46, 56)
AK1(LIST) 6( g) 1(Min)
6( g) 6( g) 1(List) b)w
u To find which of two lists contains the greatest value [OPTN] - [LIST] - [Max]
K1(LIST) 6( g) 2(Max) 6( g) 6( g) 1(List) <list number 1 - 26> ,1(List)
<list number 1 - 26> )w
• The two lists must contain the same number of data items. If they don’t, an error occurs.
• The result of this operation is stored in ListAns Memory.
Example To find whether List 1 (75, 16, 98, 46, 56) or List 2 (35, 59, 58, 72, 67)
contains the greatest value
K1(LIST) 6( g) 2(Max)
6( g) 6( g) 1(List) b,
1(List) c)w
u To calculate the mean of data items [OPTN] - [LIST] - [Mean]
K1(LIST) 6( g) 3(Mean) 6( g) 6( g) 1(List) <list number 1 - 26> )w
Example To calculate the mean of data items in List 1 (36, 16, 58, 46, 56)
AK1(LIST) 6( g) 3(Mean)
6( g) 6( g) 1(List) b)w
u To calculate the median of data items of specified frequency
[OPTN] - [LIST] - [Med]
This procedure uses two lists: one that contains values and one that indicates the frequency
(number of occurrences) of each value. The frequency of the data in Cell 1 of the first list is
indicated by the value in Cell 1 of the second list, etc.
• The two lists must contain the same number of data items. If they don’t, an error occurs.
K1(LIST) 6( g) 4(Med) 6( g) 6( g) 1(List) <list number 1 - 26 (data)> ,1(List)
<list number 1 - 26 (frequency)> )w
3-11
Example To calculate the median of values in List 1 (36, 16, 58, 46, 56), whose
frequency is indicated by List 2 (75, 89, 98, 72, 67)
AK1(LIST) 6( g) 4(Med)
6( g) 6( g) 1(List) b,
1(List) c)w
u To combine lists [OPTN] - [LIST] - [Augment]
• You can combine two different lists into a single list. The result of a list combination operation
is stored in ListAns memory.
K1(LIST) 6( g) 5(Augment) 6( g) 6( g) 1(List) <list number 1 - 26> ,1(List)
<list number 1 - 26> )w
Example To combine the List 1 (–3, –2) and List 2 (1, 9, 10)
AK1(LIST) 6( g) 5(Augment)
6( g) 6( g) 1(List) b,
1(List) c)w
u To calculate the sum of data items in a list [OPTN] - [LIST] - [Sum]
K1(LIST) 6( g) 6( g) 1(Sum) 6( g) 1(List) <list number 1 - 26> w
Example To calculate the sum of data items in List 1 (36, 16, 58, 46, 56)
AK1(LIST) 6( g) 6( g) 1(Sum)
6( g) 1(List) bw
u To calculate the product of values in a list [OPTN] - [LIST] - [Prod]
K1(LIST) 6( g) 6( g) 2(Prod) 6( g) 1(List) <list number 1 - 26> w
Example To calculate the product of values in List 1 (2, 3, 6, 5, 4)
AK1(LIST) 6( g) 6( g) 2(Prod)
6( g) 1(List) bw
3-12
u To calculate the cumulative frequency of each data item [OPTN] - [LIST] - [Cuml]
K1(LIST) 6( g) 6( g) 3(Cuml) 6( g) 1(List) <list number 1 - 26> w
• The result of this operation is stored in ListAns Memory.
Example To calculate the cumulative frequency of each data item in List 1
(2, 3, 6, 5, 4)
AK1(LIST) 6( g) 6( g) 3(Cuml)
6( g) 1(List) bw
u To calculate the percentage represented by each data item [OPTN] - [LIST] - [%]
K1(LIST) 6( g) 6( g) 4(%) 6( g) 1(List) <list number 1 - 26> w
• The above operation calculates what percentage of the list total is represented by each data
item.
• The result of this operation is stored in ListAns Memory.
Example To calculate the percentage represented by each data item in List 1
(2, 3, 6, 5, 4)
AK1(LIST) 6( g) 6( g) 4(%)
6( g) 1(List) bw
1 2+3=
2 2+3+6=
3 2+3+6+5=
4 2+3+6+5+4=
1 2 3 4
1 2+3=
2 2+3+6=
3 2+3+6+5=
4 2+3+6+5+4=
1 2 3 4
1 2/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 =
2 3/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 =
3 6/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 =
4 5/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 =
5 4/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 = 12345
1 2/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 =
2 3/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 =
3 6/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 =
4 5/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 =
5 4/(2+3+6+5+4) × 100 = 12345
3-13
u To calculate the differences between neighboring data inside a list
[OPTN] - [LIST] - [ ΔList]
K1(LIST) 6( g) 6( g) 5( ΔList) <list number 1 - 26> w
• The result of this operation is stored in ListAns Memory.
Example To calculate the difference between the data items in List 1 (1, 3, 8, 5, 4)
AK1(LIST) 6( g) 6( g) 5( ΔList)
bw
• You can specify the storage location in list memory for a calculation result produced by a list
calculation whose result is stored in ListAns memory. For example, specifying “ ΔList 1 → List
2” will store the result of ΔList 1 in List 2.
• The number of cells in the new ΔList is one less than the number of cells in the original list.
• An error occurs if you execute ΔList for a list that has no data or only one data item.
3. Arithmetic Calculations Using Lists
You can perform arithmetic calculations using two lists or one list and a numeric value.
Calculation results are stored in
ListAns Memory.
k Error Messages
• A calculation involving two lists performs the operation between corresponding cells.
Because of this, an error occurs if the two lists do not have the same number of values
(which means they have different “dimensions”).
• An error occurs whenever an operation involving any two cells generates a mathematical
error.
1 3 – 1 =
2 8 – 3 =
3 5 – 8 =
4 4 – 5 =
1 2 3 4
1 3 – 1 =
2 8 – 3 =
3 5 – 8 =
4 4 – 5 =
1 2 3 4
List
Numeric Value
List
Numeric Value
+
−
×
÷
=List
ListAns Memory
List
Numeric Value
List
Numeric Value
+
−
×
÷
=List
ListAns Memory
3-14
k Inputting a List into a Calculation
There are three methods you can use to input a list into a calculation.
• Specification of the list number of a list created with List Editor.
• Specification of the sub name of a list created with List Editor.
• Direct input of a list of values.
u To specify the list number of a list created with List Editor
1. In the Run-Matrix mode, perform the following key operation.
AK1(LIST) 1(List)
• Enter the “List” command.
2. Enter the list number (integer from 1 to 26) you want to specify.
u To specify the sub name of a list created with List Editor
1. In the Run-Matrix mode, perform the following key operation.
AK1(LIST) 1(List)
• Enter the “List” command.
2. Enter the sub name of the list you want to specify, enclosed in double quotes (” ”).
Example: ”QTY”
u To directly input a list of values
You can also directly input a list of values using {, }, and ,.
Example To input the list: 56, 82, 64
!*( { ) fg,ic,
ge!/( } )
3-15
u To assign the contents of one list to another list
Use a to assign the contents of one list to another list.
Example To assign the contents of List 3 (41, 65, 22) to List 1
K1(LIST) 1(List) da1(List) bw
In place of 1(LIST) 1(List) d operation in the above procedure, you could input
!*( { ) eb,gf,cc!/( } ).
u To recall the value in a specific list cell
You can recall the value in a specific list cell and use it in a calculation. Specify the cell number
by enclosing it inside square brackets.
Example To calculate the sine of the value stored in Cell 3 of List 2
sK1(LIST) 1(List) c!+( [ ) d!-( ] ) w
u To input a value into a specific list cell
You can input a value into a specific list cell inside a list. When you do, the value that was
previously stored in the cell is replaced with the new value you input.
Example To input the value 25 into Cell 2 of List 3
cfaK1(LIST) 1(List) d!+( [ ) c!-( ] ) w
k Recalling List Contents
Example To recall the contents of List 1
K1(LIST) 1(List) bw
• The above operation displays the contents of the list you specify and also stores them in
ListAns Memory. You can then use the ListAns Memory contents in a calculation.
u To use list contents in ListAns Memory in a calculation
Example To multiply the list contents in ListAns Memory by 36
K1(LIST) 1(List) !-(Ans) *dgw
• The operation K1(LIST) 1(List) !-(Ans) recalls ListAns Memory contents.
• This operation replaces current ListAns Memory contents with the result of the above
calculation.
3-16
k Graphing a Function Using a List
When using the graphing functions of this calculator, you can input a function such as Y1 =
List 1X. If List 1 contains the values 1, 2, 3, this function will produces three graphs: Y = X,
Y = 2X, Y = 3X.
There are certain limitations on using lists with graphing functions.
k Inputting Scientific Calculations into a List
You can use the numeric table generation functions in the Table mode to input values that
result from certain scientific function calculations into a list. To do this, first generate a table
and then use the list copy function to copy the values from the table to the list.
Example To use the Table mode to create a number table for the formula (Y1 =
x 2
–1), and then copy the table to List 1 in the Statistics mode
1. In the Table mode, input the formula Y1 =
x 2
–1.
2. Create the number table.
3. Use e to move the highlighting to the Y1 column.
4. Press K1(LISTMEM).
5. Press bw.
6. Enter the Statistics mode to confirm that Table mode column Y1 has been copied to List 1.
3-17
k Performing Scientific Function Calculations Using a List
Lists can be used just as numeric values are in scientific function calculations. When the
calculation produces a list as a result, the list is stored in ListAns Memory.
Example To use List 3
41
65
22
to perform sin (List 3)
Use radians as the angle unit.
sK1(LIST) 1(List) dw
4. Switching between List Files
You can store up to 26 lists (List 1 to List 26) in each file (File 1 to File 6). A simple operation
lets you switch between list files.
u To switch between list files
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Statistics mode.
Press !m(SET UP) to display the Statistics mode Setup screen.
2. Use c to highlight “List File”.
3. Press 1(FILE) and then input the number of the list file you want to use.
Example To select File 3
1(FILE) d
w
All subsequent list operations are applied to the lists contained in the file you select (List File 3
in the above example).
3-18
5. Using CSV Files
You can import the contents of a CSV file stored with this calculator or transferred from a
computer into the List Editor. You also can save the contents of all the list data in the List Editor
as a CSV file. These operations are performed using the CSV function menu, which appears
when you press 6(g)6(g)1(CSV) while the List Editor is on the display.
k Import CSV File Requirements
A CSV file that has been output from the List Editor, Matrix Editor (page 2-41), or Spreadsheet
(page 9-4), or a CSV file transferred from a computer to storage memory can be used for
import. The following types of CSV files are supported for import.
• A CSV file that uses the comma ( , ) or semi-colon ( ; ) as its delimiter, and the period ( . ) or
comma ( , ) as its decimal point. A CSV file that uses the tab as its delimiter is not supported.
• CR, LF and CRLF are supported for the line break code.
• When importing a CSV file to the calculator, if the data in Line 1 of each column of the file
(or Line 1 of Column 1 of the file) contains double quotation marks ( " ) or a single quotation
mark ( ' ), Line 1 of all of the columns of the CSV file will be ignored, and data will be input
starting from Line 2.
For information about transferring files from a computer to the calculator, see “Chapter 13 Data
Communication”.
k Transferring Data between Lists and CSV Files
u To import the contents of a CSV file to the List Editor
1. Prepare the CSV file you want to import.
• See “Import CSV File Requirements” described above.
2. While the List Editor is on the display, press 6(g)6(g)1(CSV) to display the CSV
function menu.
3. What you should do next depends on the type of CSV file import operation you want to
perform.
To start import from a specific row: To overwrite the entire contents
of the List Editor:
Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the
row from which you want to start importing data and
then press 1(LOAD)1(LIST).
Press 1(LOAD)2(FILE).
3-19
4. On the select file dialog box that appears, use f and c to move the highlighting to the
file you want to import and then press w.
• This imports the contents of the CSV file you specified to the List Editor.
• If you pressed 1(LOAD)1(LIST) in step 3, import starts from the row where the
highlighted cell is located, overwriting List Editor rows only with the same number of rows
contained in the CSV file.
Examples
List Editor Original Content
List 1 List 2 List 3 List 4 List 5 Highlighting
11111
22222
33333
44444
Import CSV File Data
20 20 20
30 30 30
40 40 40
List Editor Content following Import
List 1 List 2 List 3 List 4 List 5
120 20 20 1
2303030 2
3404040 3
44
Important!
Attempting to import the following types of CSV files will result in an error.
• A CSV file that includes data that cannot be converted. In this case, an error message will
appear showing the location in the CSV file (Example: row 2, column 3) where the data that
cannot be converted is located.
• A CSV file with more than 26 columns or 999 rows. In this case, an “Invalid Data Size” error
will occur.
3-20
u To save the contents of all the list data in the List Editor as a single CSV file
1. While the List Editor is on the display, press 6(g)6(g)1(CSV) to display the CSV
function menu.
2. Press 2(SAVE
•
AS).
• This displays a folder selection screen.
3. Select the folder where you want to save the CSV file.
• To store the CSV file in the root directory, highlight “Root”.
• To store the CSV file in a folder, use f and c to move the highlighting to the desired
folder and then press 1(OPEN).
4. Press 1(SAVE • AS).
5. Input up to eight characters for the file name and then press w.
Important!
• The sub name line of the List Editor is not saved in the CSV file.
• When saving list data to a CSV file, some data is converted as described below.
- Complex number data: Only the real number part is extracted.
- Fraction data: Converted to calculation line format (Example: 2{3{4 → =2+3/4)
- ' and π data: Converted to a decimal value (Example: '3 → 1.732050808)
k Specifying the CSV File Delimiter Symbol and Decimal Point
When importing a CSV file that has been transferred from a computer to the calculator, specify
the delimiter symbol and decimal point in accordance with the settings you specified on the
application when outputting the CSV file. The comma ( , ) or semi-colon ( ; ) can be specified
for the delimiter, while the period ( . ) or comma ( , ) can be specified as the decimal point.
u To specify the CSV file delimiter symbol and decimal point
1. While the List Editor is on the display, press 6(g)6(g)1(CSV) to display the CSV
function menu.
2. Press 3(SET).
• This displays the CSV format setting screen.
3. Use the f and c keys to move the highlighting to “CSV Separator” and then press
1( , ) or 2( ; ).
4. Use the f and c keys to move the highlighting to “CSV Decimal Symbol” and then press
1( . ) or 2( , ).
• If you specified 1( , ) in step 3, you will not be able to specify 2( , ) here.
5. After the setting is the way you want, press J.
4-1
Chapter 4 Equation Calculations
From the Main Menu, enter the Equation mode.
• { SIMUL } ... {linear equation with 2 to 6 unknowns}
• { POLY } ... {degree 2 to 6 equation}
• { SOLVER } ... {Solve calculation}
1. Simultaneous Linear Equations
You can solve simultaneous linear equations with two to six unknowns.
• Simultaneous Linear Equation with Two Unknowns:
a 1
x
+ b 1
y
= c 1
a 2
x
+ b 2
y
= c 2
• Simultaneous Linear Equation with Three Unknowns:
a 1
x
+ b 1
y
+ c 1
z
= d 1
a 2
x
+ b 2
y
+ c 2
z
= d 2
a 3
x
+ b 3
y
+ c 3
z
= d 3
…
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Equation mode.
2. Select the SIMUL (Simultaneous) mode, and specify the number of unknowns (variables).
You can specify from 2 to 6 unknowns.
3. Sequentially input the coefficients.
• The cell that is currently selected for input is highlighted. Each time you input a coefficient,
the highlighting shifts in the sequence:
a 1
→ b 1
→ c 1
→ … a n → b n → c n ( n = 2 to 6)
• You can also input fractions and values assigned to variables as coefficients.
• You can cancel the value you are inputting for the current coefficient by pressing J at
any time before you press w to store the coefficient value. This returns to the coefficient
to what it was before you input anything. You can then input another value if you want.
• To change the value of a coefficient that you already stored by pressing w, move the
cursor to the coefficient you want to edit. Next, input the value you want to change to.
• Pressing 3(CLEAR) clears all coefficients to zero.
4. Solve the equations.
4
4-2
Example To solve the following simultaneous linear equations for
x , y , and z
4 x + y – 2 z = – 1
x + 6 y + 3 z = 1
– 5
x + 4 y + z = – 7
1 m Equation
2 1(SIMUL)
2(3)
3 ewbw-cw-bw
bwgwdwbw
-fwewbw-hw
4 1(SOLVE)
• Internal calculations are performed using a 15-digit mantissa, but results are displayed using
a 10-digit mantissa and a 2-digit exponent.
• Simultaneous linear equations are solved by inverting the matrix containing the coefficients
of the equations. For example, the following shows the solution ( x
, y
, z
) of a simultaneous
linear equation with three unknowns.
Because of this, precision is reduced as the value of the determinant approaches zero. Also,
simultaneous equations with three or more unknowns may take a very long time to solve.
• The message “No Solution” appears if there is no solution. The message “Infinitely Many
Solutions” appears if there are an infinite number of solutions. The message “Ma ERROR”
appears if a solution could not be found.
• After calculation is complete, you can press 1(REPEAT), change coefficient values, and
then re-calculate.
–1
=
x
y
z
a1b1c1
a2b2c2
a3b3c3
d1
d2
d3
–1
=
x
y
z
a1b1c1
a2b2c2
a3b3c3
d1
d2
d3
4-3
2. High-order Equations from 2nd to 6th Degree
Your calculator can be used to solve high-order equations from 2nd to 6th degree.
• Quadratic Equation:
ax 2
+ bx + c = 0 ( a 0)
• Cubic Equation:
ax 3
+ bx 2
+ cx + d = 0 ( a 0)
• Quartic Equation:
ax 4
+ bx 3
+ cx 2
+ dx + e = 0 ( a 0)
…
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Equation mode.
2. Select the POLY (Polynomial) mode, and specify the degree of the equation.
You can specify a degree 2 to 6.
3. Sequentially input the coefficients.
• The cell that is currently selected for input is highlighted. Each time you input a coefficient,
the highlighting shifts in the sequence:
a → b → c → …
• You can also input fractions and values assigned to variables as coefficients.
• You can cancel the value you are inputting for the current coefficient by pressing J at
any time before you press w to store the coefficient value. This returns to the coefficient
to what it was before you input anything. You can then input another value if you want.
• To change the value of a coefficient that you already stored by pressing w, move the
cursor to the coefficient you want to edit. Next, input the value you want to change to.
• Pressing 3(CLEAR) clears all coefficients to zero.
4. Solve the equations.
Example To solve the cubic equation (Angle unit = Rad)
x 3
– 2 x 2
– x + 2 = 0
1 m Equation
2 2(POLY)
2(3)
3 bw-cw-bwcw
4 1(SOLVE)
Multiple Solutions (Example: x 3
+ 3 x 2
+ 3 x + 1 = 0)
4-4
Complex Number Solution (Example:
x 3
+ 2 x 2
+ 3 x + 2 = 0)
Complex Mode: Real (page 1-33)
Complex Mode: a + b i
Complex Mode: r ∠
θ
• Internal calculations are performed using a 15-digit mantissa, but results are displayed
using a 10-digit mantissa and a 2-digit exponent.
• It may take considerable time for the calculation result of a high-order equation of 3rd degree
or higher to appear on the display.
• An error occurs if the calculator is unable to find a solution.
• High-order equation calculations may not produce accurate results when the equation has
multiple solutions.
• After calculation is complete, you can press 1(REPEAT), change coefficient values, and
then re-calculate.
3. Solve Calculations
The Solve calculation mode lets you determine the value of any variable in a formula without
having to solve the equation.
Important!
• You can input either an upper-case X (a+(X)) or lower-case x (v) for variable X.
Both “X” and “x” refer to the same variable.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Equation mode.
2. Select the SOLVER mode, and input the equation as it is written.
• If you do not input an equals sign, the calculator assumes that the expression is to the left
of the equals sign, and there is a zero to the right.
• An error occurs if you input more than one equals sign.
4-5
3. In the table of variables that appears on the display, input values for each variable.
• You can also specify values for Upper and Lower to define the upper and lower limits of
the range of solutions.
• An error occurs if the solution falls outside the range you specify.
4. Select the variable for which you want to solve to obtain the solution.
“Lft” and “Rgt” indicate the left and right sides that are calculated using the solution.*
1
*
1
Solutions are approximated using Newton’s method. Lft and Rgt values are displayed for
confirmation, because Newton’s method may produce results that are the real solution.
The closer the difference between the Lft and Rgt values is to zero, the lower degree of
error in the result.
Example An object thrown into the air at initial velocity V takes time T to reach
height H. Use the following formula to solve for initial velocity V when
H = 14 (meters), T = 2 (seconds) and gravitational acceleration is G =
9.8 (m/s
2
).
H = VT – 1/2 GT
2
1 m Equation
2 3(SOLVER)
aM(H) !.(=) ac(V) a/(T) -
(b/c)a$(G) a/(T) xw
3 bew(H = 14)
aw(V = 0)
cw(T = 2)
j.iw(G = 9.8)
4 Press fff to highlight V = 0, and then press
6(SOLVE).
• The message “Retry” appears on the display when the calculator judges that convergence is
not sufficient for the displayed results.
• A Solve operation will produce a single solution. Use POLY when you want to obtain multiple
solutions for a high-order equation (such as ax 2
+ bx + c = 0).
5-1
Chapter 5 Graphing
Select the icon in the Main Menu that suits the type of graph you want to draw or the type of table
you want to generate.
• Graph … General function graphing
• Run-Matrix … Manual graphing (pages 5-25 to 5-29)
• Table … Number table generation (pages 5-30 to 5-35)
• Dyna Graph … Dynamic graphing (pages 5-40 to 5-43)
• Recursion … Recursion graphing or number table generation (pages 5-43 to 5-48)
• Conic Graphs … Conic section graphing (pages 5-48 and 5-49)
1. Sample Graphs
k Graph Relation List Screen and Graph Color
A graph relation list screen (table relation list screen) like the one shown below appears first
whenever you enter the Graph, Dyna Graph, or Table mode. You can use this screen to
register functions to be used for drawing graphs and creating number tables.
(Example: Graph mode)
Each line of the graph relation list screen is preset with a color, which represents the line color
used when each function is graphed. When you draw a graph, it is drawn using the same color
as the line where its function is registered.
Graph relation list screen
→
Graph screen
5
5-2
In the case of the Table mode, a number table is created in the same color as the line where
its function is registered.
Table relation list screen
→
Table screen
• You can change the color used to draw the graph and the number table character color. For
details, see “Changing Graph Properties” (page 5-15).
k How to draw a simple graph (1)
To draw a graph, simply input the applicable function.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Graph mode.
2. Input the function you want to graph.
Here you would use the V-Window to specify the range and other parameters of the graph.
See page 5-4.
3. Draw the graph.
Example To graph
y = 3 x 2
1 m Graph
2 dvxw
3 6(DRAW) (or w)
• Press A to return to the screen in step 2 (graph relation list). After drawing a graph, you
can toggle between the graph relation list and graph screen by pressing !6(G⇔T).
5-3
k How to draw a simple graph (2)
You can store up to 20 functions in memory and then select the one you want for graphing.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Graph mode.
2. Specify the function type and input the function whose graph you want to draw.
You can use the Graph mode to draw a graph for the following types of expressions:
rectangular coordinate expression (Y=
f ( x )), polar coordinate expression, parametric
function, rectangular coordinate expression (X= f ( y )), inequality.
3(TYPE) 1(Y=) ... rectangular coordinates (Y=f(x) type)
2(r=) ... polar coordinates
3(Param) ... parametric function
4(X=) ... rectangular coordinates (X=f(y) type)
5(CONVERT)1('Y=) to 5('Y≤)
6(g)1('X=) to 5('X≤) ... changes the function type
6(g)1(Y>) to 4(Y≤) .... Y inequality on left side
6(g)6(g)1(X>) to 4(X≤) .... X inequality on left side
Repeat this step as many times as required to input all of the functions you want.
Next you should specify which of the functions among those that are stored in memory you
want to graph (see page 5-13).
3. Draw the graph.
• You can use the function menu that appears when you press 4(TOOL)1(STYLE) in
step 2 of the above procedure to select one of the following line styles for each graph.
1() ... Normal (initial default)
2() … Thick (twice the thickness of Normal)
3() … Broken (thick broken)
4() … Dot (dotted)
5() … Thin (one third the thickness of Normal)
• When simultaneously graphing multiple inequalities, you can use the “Ineq Type” setting
on the Setup screen (!m(SET UP)) to specify either of two fill ranges.
1(Intsect) ... Fills areas only where the conditions of
all of the graphed inequalities are satisfied.
5-4
2(Union) .... Fills all areas where the conditions of the
graphed inequalities are satisfied.
This is the initial default.
• Pressing !f(FORMAT) while the graph relation list screen or graph screen displays
a dialog box that you can use to change the graph line style and graph line color. For
details, see “Changing Graph Properties” (page 5-15).
Example Input the functions shown below and draw their graphs.
Y1 = 2x2 – 3, r2 = 3sin2
θ
1 m Graph
2 3(TYPE) 1(Y=) cvx-dw
3(TYPE) 2(
r =) dscvw
3 6(DRAW)
2. Controlling What Appears on a Graph Screen
k V-Window (View Window) Settings
Use the View Window to specify the range of the x - and y -axes, and to set the spacing
between the increments on each axis. You should always set the V-Window parameters you
want to use before graphing.
u To configure V-Window settings
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Graph mode.
2. Press !3(V-WIN) to display the V-Window setting screen.
Rectangular coordinate parameter
Xmin/Xmax … Minimum/maximum x-axis value
Xscale … Spacing of x-axis increments
Xdot … Value that corresponds to one x-axis dot
Ymin/Ymax … Minimum/maximum y-axis value
Yscale … Spacing of y-axis increments
5-5
Polar coordinate parameter
T
θ
min/T
θ
max ... Minimum/maximum T,
θ
values
T
θ
ptch ... T,
θ
pitch
3. Press c to move the highlighting and input an appropriate value for each parameter,
pressing w after each.
• {INITIAL}/{TRIG}/{STANDRD} … V-Window {initial settings}/{initial settings using specified
angle unit}/{standard settings}
• {V-MEM}
• {STORE}/{RECALL} … V-Window setting {store}/{recall}
• {SQUARE}
• {Y-BASE}/{X-BASE} … {fix y-axis setting and change x-axis setting}/{fix x-axis setting
and change y-axis setting} so y-axis and x-axis scales are displayed as a 1-to-1
relationship
• {BGV-WIN} … Overwrites current V-Window settings with the V-Window settings saved
in the background image file. This menu item appears only while a graph background
image is open.
After settings are the way you want them, press J or !J(QUIT) to exit the V-Window
setting screen.
• Pressing w without inputting anything while is on the display exits the V-Window setting
screen.
5-6
u V-Window Setting Precautions
• Inputting zero for T
θ
ptch causes an error.
• Any illegal input (out of range value, negative sign without a value, etc.) causes an error.
• When T
θ
max is less than T
θ
min, T
θ
ptch becomes negative.
• You can input expressions (such as 2 π ) as V-Window parameters.
• When the V-Window setting produces an axis that does not fit on the display, the scale of
the axis is indicated on the edge of the display closest to the origin.
• Changing the V-Window settings clears the graph currently on the display and replaces it
with the new axes only.
• Changing the Xmin or Xmax value causes the Xdot value to be adjusted automatically.
Changing the Xdot value causes the Xmax value to be adjusted automatically.
• A polar coordinate (
r =) or parametric graph will appear coarse if the settings you make in
the V-Window cause the T
θ
ptch value to be too large, relative to the differential between
the T
θ
min and T
θ
max settings. If the settings you make cause the T
θ
ptch value to be
too small relative to the differential between the T
θ
min and T
θ
max settings, on the other
hand, the graph will take a very long time to draw.
• The following is the input range for V-Window parameters.
–9.999999999
E
97 to 9.999999999
E
97
k V-Window Memory
You can store up to six sets of V-Window settings in V-Window memory for recall when you
need them.
u To store V-Window settings
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Graph mode.
2. Press !3(V-WIN) to display the V-Window setting screen, and input the values you
want.
3. Press 4(V-MEM)1(STORE) to display the pop-up window.
4. Press a number key to specify the V-Window memory where you want to save the settings,
and then press w. Pressing bw stores the settings in V-Window Memory 1 (V-Win1).
5-7
u To recall V-Window memory settings
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Graph mode.
2. Press !3(V-WIN) to display the V-Window setting screen.
3. Press 4(V-MEM)2(RECALL) to display the pop-up window.
4. Press a number key to specify the V-Window memory number for the settings you want to
recall, and then press w. Pressing bw recalls the settings in V-Window Memory 1
(V-Win1).
k Specifying the Graph Range
You can define a range (start point, end point) for a function before graphing it.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Graph mode.
2. Configure V-Window settings.
3. Specify the function type and input the function. The following is the syntax for function
input.
Function ,!+( [ ) Start Point , End Point !-( ] )
4. Draw the graph.
Example Graph
y = x 2
+ 3 x – 2 within the range – 2 < x < 4.
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = –3, Xmax = 5, Xscale = 1
Ymin = –10, Ymax = 30, Yscale = 5
1 m Graph
2 !3(V-WIN) -dwfwbwc
-bawdawfwJ
3 3(TYPE) 1(Y=) vx+dv-c,
!+( [ ) -c,e!-( ] ) w
4 6(DRAW)
• You can specify a range when graphing rectangular expressions, polar expressions,
parametric functions, and inequalities.
5-8
k Zoom
This function lets you enlarge and reduce the graph on the screen.
1. Draw the graph.
2. Specify the zoom type.
!2(ZOOM) 1(BOX) ... Box zoom
Draw a box around a display area, and that area is enlarged to
fill the entire screen.
2(FACTOR) ... Factor zoom
Specifies the
x -axis and y -axis zoom factors for factor zoom.
3(IN)/ 4(OUT) ... Factor zoom
The graph is enlarged or reduced in accordance with the factor
you specify, centered on the current pointer location.
5(AUTO) ... Auto zoom
V-Window
y -axis settings are automatically adjusted so the
graph fills the screen along the y -axis.
6( g) 1(ORIGINAL) ... Original size
Returns the graph to its original size following a zoom operation.
6( g) 2(SQUARE) ... Graph correction
V-Window
x -axis values are corrected so they are identical to
the
y -axis values.
6( g) 3(ROUND) ... Coordinate rounding
Rounds the coordinate values at the current pointer location.
6( g) 4(INTEGER) ... Integer
Each dot is given a width of 1, which makes coordinate values
integers.
6( g) 5(PREVIOUS) ... Previous
V-Window parameters are returned to what they were prior to
the last zoom operation.
Box zoom range specification
3. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer ( ) in the center of the screen to the location
where you want one corner of the box to be, and then press w.
4. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer. This causes a box to appear on the screen. Move
the cursor until the area you want to enlarge is enclosed in the box, and then press w to
enlarge it.
5-9
Example Graph y = ( x + 5)( x + 4)( x + 3), and then perform a box zoom.
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = –8, Xmax = 8, Xscale = 2
Ymin = –4, Ymax = 2, Yscale = 1
1 m Graph
!3(V-WIN) -iwiwcwc
-ewcwbwJ
3(TYPE) 1(Y=) (v+f)(v+e)
(v+d)w
6(DRAW)
2 !2(ZOOM) 1(BOX)
3 d~ dw
4 d~ d, f~ fw
• You must specify two different points for box zoom, and the two points cannot be on a
straight line vertically or horizontally from each other.
k Zoom In/Zoom Out Using Key Operations
You can use the + and - keys while the graph screen is on the display to zoom in and out
on the center of the graph screen. The zoom operations are performed in accordance with the
factor value specified with!2(ZOOM)2(FACTOR).
k Using Pan to Shift the Graph Screen
You can use pan to grab a location on the graph screen and drag the screen image up, down,
left, and right. The pan operation can be used in the Graph, Conic Graphs, Table, and
Recursion modes. Note, however, that it cannot be used while the “Dual Screen” setting on
the Setup screen is “G+G” or “GtoT”.
5-10
u To pan the screen
1. While the graph screen is on the display, press K2(PAN).
• This enters the Pan mode and displays a pointer ( ) in the center of the screen.
2. Move the pointer to the location on the screen you want to grab and then press w.
• This causes the pointer to change from to .
3. Use the cursor keys to shift the screen in the direction you want.
• In the Pan mode, each press of w toggles the shape of the pointer between and .
While the pointer is on the display, you can use the cursor keys to move it to another
location on the screen. Pressing the cursor keys while the pointer is on the display will
shift (pan) the screen contents.
4. To exit the Pan mode, press J.
k Displaying a Graph Background Image
You can configure the calculator so a particular image is always displayed as the graph
background image. Use the “Background” setting on the Setup screen to specify the
background image. The following describes the types of files that can be used as the
background image.
• A file saved using the procedure under “Saving Graph Screen Contents as an Image (g3p
File)” (page 5-21)
• A file described under “Managing Picture Plot Files” (page 15-5)
u To select the graph background image
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Graph mode.
2. Press !m(SET UP) to display the Setup screen.
3. Use f and c to move the highlighting to “Background” and then press 2(PICT n),
3(OPEN), or 1(None).
• If you do not want to display a background image on the graph screen, press 1(None)
and then advance to step 6.
• To display a list of g3p files stored in the PICT folder in storage memory, press
2(PICT n).
• To display a list of g3p files stored in the PICT folder in the storage memory root directory,
press 3(OPEN). In this case, use f and c if required to move the highlighting to the
folder that contains the image you want to use and then press 1(OPEN).
4. Use f and c to move the highlighting to the file you want to use and then press
1(OPEN).
5-11
5. When the “V-Window values for specified background will be loaded. OK?” confirmation
dialog box appears, press 1(YES) to apply the V-Window settings saved with the g3p file
or 6(NO) to retain the current V-Window settings.
• Pressing 1(YES) overwrites all V-Window setting values except Tmin, Tmax, and
Tptch with the values stored with the g3p file.
6. To exit the Setup screen, press J.
u To overwrite current V-Window settings with the settings saved with the
background image
1. In the Graph mode, press !3(V-WIN) to display the V-Window screen.
2. Press 6(BGV-WIN).
• This will overwrite all V-Window setting values except Tmin, Tmax, and Tptch with the
values stored with the background file.
3. To exit the V-Window screen, press J.
u To update the background image V-Window settings with current V-Window
settings
1. While the graph screen is on the display, press K4(BGV-WIN).
2. Press 1(SAVE).
• This will cause the “OK to refresh background V-Window?” confirmation message to
appear.
3. Press 1(YES) to update the V-Window settings of the background file, or 6(NO) to
cancel updating.
u To save the background image to a file with current V-Window settings
1. While the graph screen is on the display, press K4(BGV-WIN).
2. Press2(SAVE • AS).
• This will cause the message “OK to refresh background V-Window?” to appear. To clear
this message and cancel this operation, press 6(NO).
3. Press 1(YES).
4. Specify the folder you want.
• Highlight ROOT to save the file to the root directory.
• To save the file in a specific folder, use f and c to move the highlighting to the desired
folder and then press 1(OPEN).
5. Press 1(SAVE • AS).
5-12
6. On the File Name dialog box that appears, enter a name up to eight characters long and
then press w.
• This saves the background image under the name you specify. It also changes the image
specified for the “Background” item on the Setup screen to the newly saved background
image.
k Adjusting the Lightness (Fade I/O) of the Background Image
You can adjust the lightness of the graph screen background image specified by the
“Background” setting on the Setup screen within a range of 0% (as-is) to 100% (all white).
A higher setting value makes the image lighter, and a setting of 100% displays an all white
background.
→
You can use this setting to adjust the background image to a level that makes the graph easier
to see.
• Note that the lightness setting can be adjusted only when the background image is a 16-bit
image data.
• After you adjust the lightness level, the setting is stored with the background image.
u To adjust the lightness (Fade I/O) of the background image
1. While the graph screen is on the display, press K3(FadeI/O). If you are in the Dyna
Graph mode, press K1(FadeI/O).
• This causes a slider for adjusting image lightness to appear on the display.
2. Use d and e to adjust the lightness value.
• Each press of d or e changes the setting value in steps of 5%.
• You can also input values directly, if you want. To specify a lightness value of 20%, for
example, press caw.
3. After the setting is the way you want, press J.
5-13
3. Drawing a Graph
You can store up to 20 functions in memory. Functions in memory can be edited, recalled, and
graphed.
k Specifying the Graph Type
Before you can store a graph function in memory, you must first specify its graph type.
1. While the graph relation list is on the display, press 3(TYPE) to display the graph type
menu, which contains the following items.
• { Y= } / { r= } / { Param } / { X= } ... {rectangular coordinate (Y=
f ( x ) type)}/{polar coordinate}/
{parametric}/{rectangular coordinate (X=
f ( y ) type)} graph
• {Y>}/{Y<}/{Y≥}/{Y≤} ... {Y>f (x)}/{Y<f (x)}/{Y≥f (x)}/{Y≤f (x)} inequality graph
• {X>}/{X<}/{X≥}/{X≤} ... {X>f(y)}/{X<f(y)}/{X≥f(y)}/{X≤f(y)} inequality graph
• {CONVERT}
• {'Y=}/{'Y>}/{'Y<}/{'Y
≥
}/{'Y
≤
}/{'X=}/{'X>}/{'X<}/{'X
≥
}/{'X
≤
}
... {changes the function type of the selected expression}
2. Press the function key that corresponds to the graph type you want to specify.
k Storing Graph Functions
u To store a rectangular coordinate function (Y=)
Example To store the following expression in memory area Y1: y = 2 x 2
– 5
3(TYPE) 1(Y=) (Specifies rectangular coordinate expression.)
cvx-f(Inputs expression.)
w (Stores expression.)
• A function cannot be stored into a memory area that already contains a function of a different
type from the one you are trying to store. Select a memory area that contains a function that
is the same type as the one you are storing, or delete the function in the memory area to
which you are trying to store.
5-14
u To store a parametric function
Example To store the following expressions in memory areas Xt3 and Yt3:
x = 3 sinT
y = 3 cosT
3(TYPE)3(Param) (Specifies parametric expression.)
dsvw(Inputs and stores x expression.)
dcvw(Inputs and stores y expression.)
u To create a composite function
Example To use relations in Y1 and Y2 to create composite functions for Y3
and Y4
Y1 = (X + 1), Y2 = X2 + 3
Assign Y1°Y2 to Y3, and Y2°Y1 to Y4.
(Y1°Y2 = ((x2 + 3) +1) = (x2 + 4) Y2°Y1 = ( (X + 1))2 + 3 = X + 4 (X > −1))
Input relations into Y3 and Y4.
3(TYPE)1(Y=)J4(GRAPH)
1(Y)b(1(Y)c)w
J4(GRAPH)1(Y)c
(1(Y)b)w
• A composite function can consist of up to five functions.
5-15
u To assign values to the coefficients and variables of a graph function
Example To assign the values −1, 0, and 1 to variable A in Y = AX2−1, and draw a
graph for each value
3(TYPE)1(Y=)
av(A)vx-bw
J4(GRAPH)1(Y)b(av(A)
!.(=)-b)w
J4(GRAPH)1(Y)b(av(A)
!.(=)a)w
J4(GRAPH)1(Y)b(av(A)
!.(=)b)w
ffff1(SELECT)
6(DRAW)
The above screens are produced using the Trace function.
See “Function Analysis” (page 5-52) for more information.
k Changing Graph Properties
u To change graph properties from the graph relation list screen
1. On the graph relation list screen, use f and c to highlight the relation whose graph
properties you want to change.
2. Press !f(FORMAT) to display the format dialog box.
5-16
3. Use f and c to move the highlighting to “Line Style”
and then press w.
4. On the list of line styles that appears, use f and c to move the highlighting to the
desired style and then press w.
• You also can select an option by pressing the number key that corresponds to the number
to the left of the desired option.
5. Use f and c to move the highlighting to “Line Color”
and then press w.
6. On the list of colors that appears, use f and c to move the highlighting to the desired
color and then press w.
• You also can select an option by pressing the number key that corresponds to the number
to the left of the desired option.
7. After the setting is the way you want, press J.
u To change graph properties from the graph screen
1. While the graph screen is on the display, press !f(FORMAT).
• If there are multiple graphs on the graph screen, one of them will start flashing. The
flashing graph is the one that is currently selected.
• If there are multiple graphs on the graph screen, perform step 2, below. If there is only one
graph on the screen, skip step 2 and go directly to step 3.
2. Use f and c to move the flashing to the graph whose properties you want to change
and then press w.
3. Use the format dialog box that appears to configure the Line Style and Line Color as you like.
• For the remainder of this procedure, perform the steps from step 3 under “To change
graph properties from the graph relation list screen”.
• Pressing J will redraw a graph in accordance with your changes.
5-17
u To change the line style of a graph function
1. On the graph relation list screen, use f and c to highlight the relation whose line style
you want to change.
2. Press 4(TOOL)1(STYLE).
3. Select the line style.
Example To change the line style of y = 2x2 – 3, which is stored in area Y1, to
“Broken”
4(TOOL)1(STYLE)3() (Selects “Broken”.)
k Editing and Deleting Functions
u To edit a function in memory
Example To change the expression in memory area Y1 from y = 2x2 – 5 to
y = 2x2 – 3
e (Displays cursor.)
eeeeeDd(Changes contents.)
w(Stores new graph function.)
u To change the type of a function *1
1. While the graph relation list is on the display, press f or c to move the highlighting to
the area that contains the function whose type you want to change.
2. Press 3(TYPE) 5(CONVERT).
3. Select the function type you want to change to.
Example To change the function in memory area Y1 from
y = 2 x 2
– 3 to
y < 2 x 2
– 3
3(T YPE) 5(CONVERT) 3(
'Y<) (Changes the function type to “Y<”.)
*
1
The function type can be changed for rectangular coordinate functions and inequalities only.
5-18
u To delete a function
1. While the graph relation list is on the display, press f or c to move the highlighting to
the area that contains the function you want to delete.
2. Press 2(DELETE) or D.
3. Press 1(Yes) to delete the function or 6(No) to abort the procedure without deleting
anything.
• Using the above procedure to delete one line of a parametric function (such as Xt2) also
will delete the applicable paired line (Yt2, in the case of Xt2).
k Selecting Functions for Graphing
u To specify the draw/non-draw status of a graph
1. On the graph relation list, use f and c to highlight the relation you do not want to graph.
2. Press 1(SELECT).
• Each press of 1(SELECT) toggles graphing on and off.
3. Press 6(DRAW).
Example To select the following functions for drawing:
Y1 = 2
x 2
– 5, r 2 = 5 sin3
θ
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = –5, Xmax = 5, Xscale = 1
Ymin = –5, Ymax = 5, Yscale = 1
T
θ
min = 0, T
θ
max =
π
, T
θ
ptch = 2
π
/ 60
cf (Select a memory area that contains a
function for which you want to specify non-draw.)
1(SELECT) (Specifies n on-draw.)
6(DRAW) or w (Draws the graphs.)
• You can use the Setup screen settings to alter the appearance of the graph screen as shown
below.
• Grid: On (Axes: On, Label: Off)
This setting causes dots to appear at the grid intersects on
the display.
Changing the V-Window Xscale or Yscale settings to 0
while “On” is specified for the Grid setting will cause the
dots to disappear from the display.
5-19
• Grid: Line (Axes: On, Label: Off)
This setting causes scale lines to be displayed for the x-
axis and y-axis.
Changing the V-Window Xscale setting to 0 while “Line”
is specified for the Grid setting will cause the horizontal
lines to disappear from the display. Changing the V-
Window Yscale setting to 0 will cause the vertical lines to
disappear.
• Axes: Off (Label: Off, Grid: Off)
This setting clears the axis lines from the display.
• Axes: Scale (Label: Off, Grid: Off)
This setting causes scale lines to be displayed for the x-
axis and y-axis.
• Label: On (Axes: On, Grid: Off)
This setting display x-axis, y-axis, and origin (O) labels.
• Even if the Grid setting is “On” or “Line”, grid lines will not be displayed if the V-Window
settings are configured in a way that the grids are too close to each other.
k Graph Memory
Graph memory lets you store up to 20 sets of graph function data and recall it later when you
need it.
A single save operation saves the following data in graph memory.
• All graph functions in the currently displayed graph relation list (up to 20)
• Graph types
• Function graph line style and color information
• Draw/non-draw status
• V-Window settings (1 set)
5-20
u To store graph functions in graph memory
1. Press 4(TOOL)2(GPH-MEM)1(STORE) to display the pop-up window.
2. Press a number key to specify the graph memory where you want to save the graph
function, and then press w. Pressing bw stores the graph function to Graph Memory 1
(G-Mem1).
• There are 20 graph memories numbered G-Mem1 to G-Mem20.
• Storing a function in a memory area that already contains a function replaces the existing
function with the new one.
• If the data exceeds the calculator’s remaining memory capacity, an error occurs.
u To recall a graph function
1. Press 4(TOOL)2(GPH-MEM)2(RECALL) to display the pop-up window.
2. Press a number key to specify the graph memory for the function you want to recall, and
then press w. Pressing bw recalls the graph function in Graph Memory 1 (G-Mem1).
• Recalling data from graph memory causes any data currently on the graph relation list to
be deleted.
4. Saving and Recalling Graph Screen Contents
You can save the contents of the graph screen to a file. The format of the file is g3p, which
is a proprietary format unique to this calculator. Performing the save operation in this section
saves the following information.
• A bitmap image of the graph
• A bitmap image of the graph background (including axes, grid, axes labels, background
image)
- The background image includes the lightness setting, so it is saved as it appears on the
graph screen.
- The function menu and status are not included in the background image.
• V-Window settings (excluding Tmin, Tmax, Tptch values)
Saved images can be recalled to a graph screen and overlaid onto another graph, or recalled
from and used in another application.
5-21
k Saving Graph Screen Contents as an Image (g3p File)
There are two methods that can be used to save a g3p file.
• Saving to Picture Memory
This method lets you assign a number from 1 to 20 to an image when you save it. It stores
the image in the storage memory’s PICT folder as a file with a name from Pict01.g3p through
Pict20.g3p.
• Saving under an Assigned Name
This method saves the image in the folder you want in storage memory. You can assign a
file name up to eight characters long.
Important!
• A dual graph screen or any other type of graph that uses a split screen cannot be saved in
picture memory.
u To save a graph screen image to Picture Memory
1. While the graph screen is on the display, press K1(PICTURE)1(STORE)1(1-20).
2. On the Store In Picture Memory screen that appears, enter a value from 1 to 20 and then
press w.
• There are 20 picture memories numbered Pict 1 to Pict 20.
• Storing an image in a memory area that already contains an image replaces the existing
image with the new one.
u To store a graph screen image under a file name
1. While the graph screen is on the display, press K1(PICTURE)1(STORE)
2(SAVE • AS).
• This displays a folder selection screen.
2. Select the folder where you want to save the image.
• To store the image in the root directory, highlight
“ROOT”.
5-22
• To store the image in a folder, use f and c to move the highlighting to the desired
folder and then press 1(OPEN).
→
3. Press 1(SAVE • AS).
4. On the File Name dialog box that appears, enter a name up to eight characters long and
then press w.
k Recalling an Image (g3p File) to a Graph Screen
There are two methods that can be used to recall an image (g3p file) to a graph screen.
• Recalling an image from picture memory (Pict01.g3p to Pict20.g3p)
• Recalling an image from a folder in storage memory
Note
• Recalling an image causes it to be placed immediately behind the graph (above the current
background image) on the graph screen.
• To clear a recalled image, display the graph screen and then press !4(SKETCH)
1(Cls).
u To recall an image stored in Picture Memory
1. While the graph screen is on the display, press K1(PICTURE)2(RECALL)1(1-20).
2. On the Recall From Picture Memory screen that appears, enter a value from 1 to 20 and
then press w.
u To recall a g3p file stored in Storage Memory
1. While the graph screen is on the display, press K1(PICTURE)2(RECALL)
2(OPEN).
• Use f and c if required to move the highlighting to the folder that contains the image
file you want to recall and then press 1(OPEN).
2. Use f and c to move the highlighting to the file you want to recall and then press
1(OPEN).
5-23
5. Drawing Two Graphs on the Same Screen
k Copying the Graph to the Sub-screen
Dual Graph lets you split the screen into two parts. Then you can graph two different functions
in each for comparison, or draw a normal size graph on one side and its enlarged version on
the other side. This makes Dual Graph a powerful graph analysis tool.
With Dual Graph, the left side of the screen is called the “main screen”, while the right side is
called the “sub-screen”.
u Main Screen
The graph in the main screen is actually drawn from a function.
u Sub-screen
The graph on the sub-screen is produced by copying or zooming the main screen graph.
You can even make different V-Window settings for the sub-screen and main screen.
u To copy the graph to the sub-screen
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Graph mode.
2. On the Setup screen, select “G + G” for “Dual Screen”.
3. Configure V-Window settings for the main screen.
Press 6(RIGHT) to display the sub-graph settings screen. Pressing 6(LEFT) returns to
the main screen setting screen.
4. Store the function, and draw the graph in the main screen.
5. Perform the Dual Graph operation you want.
K1(COPY) ... Duplicates the main screen graph in the sub-screen
K2(SWAP) ... Swaps the main screen contents and sub-screen contents
• Indicators appear to the right of the formulas in the graph relation list to tell where graphs are
drawn with Dual Graph.
Indicates sub-screen graph (on right side of display)
Indicates graph drawn on both sides of display
Performing a draw operation with the function marked “ R ” in the above example screen
causes the graph to be drawn on the right side on the display. The function marked “ B ” is
drawn on both sides of the graph.
5-24
Pressing 1(SELECT) while one of the functions marked “ R ” or “ B ” is highlighted would
causes its “ R ” or “ B ” indicator to be cleared. A function without an indicator is drawn as
the main screen graph (on the left side of the display).
• The graph properties operation can be performed only for the graph that is on the left side
of the Dual Graph graph screen.
• If you change the graph properties of an expression marked with “ B ” on the graph
relation list screen and then draw the graph, the changes will be applied to both graphs.
• You cannot change the graph properties of an expression marked with “ R ” on the graph
relation list screen.
• For details about how to change graph properties, see “Changing Graph Properties” (page
5-15).
Example Graph
y = x(x + 1)(x – 1) in the main screen and sub-screen.
Use the following V-Window settings.
(Main Screen) Xmin = –2, Xmax = 2, Xscale = 0.5
Ymin = –2, Ymax = 2, Yscale = 1
(Sub-screen) Xmin = –4, Xmax = 4, Xscale = 1
Ymin = –3, Ymax = 3, Yscale = 1
1 m Graph
2 !m(SET UP)cccc1(G + G)J
3 !3(V-WIN) -cwcwa.fwc
-cwcwbw
6(RIGHT) -ewewbwc
-dwdwbwJ
4 3(TYPE) 1(Y=) v(v+b)(
v-b)w
6(DRAW)
5 K1(COPY)
• Pressing A while a graph is on the display will return to the screen in step 4.
5-25
6. Manual Graphing
k Rectangular Coordinate Graph
Inputting the Graph command in the Run-Matrix mode enables drawing of rectangular
coordinate graphs.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Run-Matrix mode.
2. On the Setup screen, change “Input/Output” setting to “Linear”.
3. Configure V-Window settings.
4. Input the commands for drawing the rectangular coordinate graph.
5. Input the function.
Example Graph y = 2x2 + 3x – 4.
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = –5, Xmax = 5, Xscale = 2
Ymin = –10, Ymax = 10, Yscale = 5
1 m Run-Matrix
2 !m(SET UP)2(Line)J
3 !3(V-WIN) -fwfwcwc
-bawbawfwJ
4 !4(SKETCH)1(Cls)w
5(GRAPH)1(Y=)
5 cvx+dv-ew
• Certain functions can be graphed easily using built-in function graphs.
• You can draw graphs of the following built-in scientific functions.
Rectangular Coordinate Graph Polar Coordinate Graph
• sin x • cos x • tan x • sin–1 x
• cos–1 x • tan–1 x • sinh x • cosh x
• tanh x • sinh–1 x • cosh–1 x • tanh–1 x
• 'x • x2 • log x • lnx
• 10x • ex • x–1 •
3'x
• • •
• sin
θ
• cos
θ
• tan
θ
• sin–1
θ
• cos–1
θ
• tan–1
θ
• sinh
θ
• cosh
θ
• tanh
θ
• sinh–1
θ
• cosh–1
θ
• tanh–1
θ
• '
θ
•
θ
2 • log
θ
• ln
θ
• 10
θ
• e
θ
•
θ
–1 •
3'
θ
- Input for x and
θ
variables is not required for a built-in function.
- When inputting a built-in function, other operators or values cannot be input.
dx (x)
d
dx (x)
d
dx2(x)
d2
dx2(x)
d2∫(x)dx
∫(x)dx
5-26
k Drawing Multiple Graphs on the Same Screen (Overwrite Graph)
Use the following procedure to assign various values to a variable contained in an expression
and overwrite the resulting graphs on the screen.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Graph mode.
2. On the Setup screen, change the “Dual Screen” setting to “Off”.
3. Configure V-Window settings.
4. Specify the function type and input the function. The following is the syntax for function
input.
Expression containing one variable ,!+( [ ) variable !.(=) value , value ,
... , value !-( ] )
5. Draw the graph.
Example To graph y = A
x 2
– 3 as the value of A changes in the sequence 3, 1, –1
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = –5, Xmax = 5, Xscale = 1
Ymin = –10, Ymax = 10, Yscale = 2
1 m Graph
2 !m(SET UP)cccc3(Off)J
3 !3(V-WIN) -fwfwbwc
-bawbawcwJ
4 3(TYPE) 1(Y=) av(A) vx-d,
!+( [ ) av(A) !.(=) d,b,-b
!-( ] )w
5 6(DRAW)
• When multiple graphs are drawn simultaneously with the above operation, they are drawn
using five different colors in the following sequence: blue, red, green, magenta, black. The
first graph is drawn using the color specified for an expression that is registered on the graph
relation list screen, followed by the next color in the above sequence.
Due to display readability considerations, if cyan or yellow is specified for the expression, the
default color for the graph relation list screen line where the expression is registered will be
used instead.
5-27
• You cannot change the line color or line style for graphs drawn using the above operation.
• The value of only one of the variables in the expression can change.
• Any of the following cannot be used for the variable name: X, Y, r ,
θ
, T.
• You cannot assign a variable to the variable inside the function.
• When Simul Graph is turned on, all of the graphs for the specified variable values are drawn
simultaneously.
• Overwrite can be used when graphing rectangular expressions, polar expressions,
parametric functions, and inequalities.
k Using a List to Simultaneously Draw Multiple Graphs (List Graph)
You can use a list to simultaneously draw multiple graphs by substituting list data for a
coefficient within an expression registered on the graph relation list screen.
Example: List 1 = {1,2,3}, List 2 = {4,5,6}
• Registering and graphing the expression Y1 = (List 1)X2 will simultaneously draw graphs for
the following three expressions:
Y = X2, Y = 2X2, Y = 3X2
• Registering and graphing the expression Y1 = (List 1)X2 − (List 2) will simultaneously draw
graphs for the following three expressions:
Y = X2 − 4, Y = 2X2 − 5, Y = 3X2 − 6
Important!
If you want to use multiple lists within a registered expression, all of the lists must have the
same number of elements. A Dimension ERROR will occur if a list that does not have the
same number of elements as the other lists is included.
u To use a list to simultaneously draw multiple graphs
1. Use the List Editor (Chapter 3) to register the list(s) you want to use.
2. From the Main Menu, enter the Graph mode.
3. On the Setup screen, change the “Dual Screen” setting to “Off”.
4. Configure V-Window settings.
5. Register an expression with a coefficient that uses the list(s) data.
6. Draw the graph.
5-28
Example Register {3, 1, −1} in List 1, and then graph y = (List 1)x2 − 3.
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = –5, Xmax = 5, Xscale = 1
Ymin = –10, Ymax = 10, Yscale = 2
1 m Statistics
dwbw-bw
2 m Graph
3 !m(SET UP)cccc3(Off)J
4 !3(V-WIN)-fwfwbwc-ba
wbawcwJ
5 3(TYPE)1(Y=)!b(List)bvx-dw
6 6(DRAW)
• When multiple graphs are drawn simultaneously with the above operation, they are drawn
using five different colors in the following sequence: blue, red, green, magenta, black. The
first graph is drawn using the color specified for an expression that is registered on the
graph relation list screen, followed by the next color in the above sequence.
Due to display readability considerations, if cyan or yellow is specified for the expression,
the default color for the graph relation list screen line where the expression is registered
will be used instead.
• You cannot change the line color or line style for graphs drawn using the above operation.
• When Simul Graph is turned on, all of the graphs are drawn simultaneously.
k Using Copy and Paste to Graph a Function
You can graph a function by copying it to the clipboard, and then pasting it into the graph
screen.
There are two types of functions you can paste into the graph screen.
Type 1 (Y= expression)
A function with the Y variable to the left of the equal sign is graphed as Y=
expression.
Example: To paste Y=X and graph it
• Any spaces to the left of Y are ignored.
Type 2 (expression)
Pasting this type of expression graphs Y= expression.
Example: To paste X and graph Y=X
• Any spaces to the left of the expression are ignored.
5-29
u To graph a function using copy and paste
1. Copy the function you want to graph to the clipboard.
2. From the Main Menu, enter the Graph mode.
3. On the Setup screen, change the “Dual Screen” setting to “Off”.
4. Configure V-Window settings.
5. Draw the graph.
6. Paste the expression.
Example While the graph of
y = 2 x 2
+ 3 x – 4 is currently displayed, to paste the
previously copied function Y=X from the clipboard
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = –5, Xmax = 5, Xscale = 2
Ymin = –10, Ymax = 10, Yscale = 5
1 m Run-Matrix
a-(Y)!.(=)v
!i(CLIP)ddd1(COPY)
2 mGraph
3 !m(SET UP)cccc3(Off)J
4 !3(V-WIN) -fwfwcwc
-bawbawfwJ
5 3(TYPE) 1(Y=) cvx+dv-ew
6(DRAW)
6 !j(PASTE)
• A graph drawn as the result of a paste operation is drawn with blue line color and normal line
style. You can change the line color and line style on the graph screen only. For details, see
“Changing Graph Properties” (page 5-15).
• Paste is supported only when “Off” is selected for the “Dual Screen” setting on the Setup
screen.
• Though there is no limit on the number of graphs you can draw by pasting a function, the
total number of graphs supported by trace and other functions is 30 (number of graphs
drawn using expression number 1 to 20, plus graphs drawn using pasted functions).
• For the graph of a pasted function, the graph expression that appears when using trace or
other functions is displayed in the format: Y= expression.
• Re-executing a draw without clearing graph screen memory will redraw all the graphs,
including those produced by pasting functions.
5-30
7. Using Tables
From the Main Menu, enter the Table mode.
k Storing a Function and Generating a Number Table
u To store a function
Example To store the function y = 3 x 2
– 2 in memory area Y1
Use f and c to move the highlighting in the table relation list to the memory area where
you want to store the function. Next, input the function and press w to store it.
u Variable Specifications
There are two methods you can use to specify value for the variable x when generating a
numeric table.
• Table range method
With this method, you specify the conditions for the change in value of the variable.
• List
With this method, the data in the list you specify is substituted for the
x -variable to
generate a number table.
u To generate a table using a table range
Example To generate a table as the value of variable x changes from –3 to 3, in
increments of 1
m Table
5(SET)
-dwdwbw
The numeric table range defines the conditions under which the value of variable x changes
during function calculation.
Start ............ Variable
x start value
End ............. Variable
x end value
Step ............ Variable
x value change (interval)
After specifying the table range, press J to return to the table relation list.
5-31
u To generate a table using a list
1. While the table relation list is on the screen, display the Setup screen.
2. Highlight “Variable” and then press 2(LIST) to display the pop-up window.
3. Select the list whose values you want to assign for the
x -variable.
• To select List 6, for example, press gw. This causes the setting of the Variable
item of the Setup screen to change to List 6.
4. After specifying the list you want to use, press J to return to the previous screen.
u To change the number table character color from the table relation list
screen
The procedure for changing the number table character color from the table relation list screen
is identical to the procedure for changing the graph line color from the graph relation list
screen.
For details, see “To change graph properties from the graph relation list screen” (page 5-15).
u Generating a Table
Example To generate a table of values for the functions stored in memory areas
Y1 and Y3 of the table relation list
Use f and c to move the highlighting to the
function you want to select for table generation and
press 1(SELECT) to select it.
The “=” sign of selected functions is highlighted on
the screen. To deselect a function, move the cursor
to it and press 1(SELECT) again.
Press 6(TABLE) to generate a number table using
the functions you selected. The value of variable
x
changes according to the range or the contents
of the list you specified.
The example screen shown here shows the results based
on the contents of List 6 (–3, –2, –1, 0, 1, 2, 3).
Each cell can contain up to six digits, including negative sign.
5-32
u To generate a differential number table
Changing the setting of Setup screen’s “Derivative” item to “On” causes a number table that
includes the derivative to be displayed whenever you generate a number table.
Locating the cursor at a differential
coefficient displays “dY/dX” in the top line,
which indicates differential.
• An error occurs if a graph for which a range is specified
or an overwrite graph is included among the graph
expressions.
u Specifying the Function Type
You can specify a function as being one of three types.
• Rectangular coordinate (Y=)
• Polar coordinate (
r =)
• Parametric (Param)
1. Press 3(TYPE) while the relation list is on the screen.
2. Press the number key that corresponds to the function type you want to specify.
• The number table is generated only for the function type specified on the relation list (Table
Func). You cannot generate a number table for a mixture of different function types.
k Editing Tables
You can use the table menu to perform any of the following operations once you generate a
table.
• Change the values of variable
x
• Edit (delete, insert, and append) rows
• Delete a table
• Draw a connect type graph
• Draw a plot type graph
• {FORMULA} ... {return to table relation list}
• {DELETE} ... {delete table}
• {ROW}
• {DELETE}/{INSERT}/{ADD} ... {delete}/{insert}/{add} row
• {EDIT} ... {change the values of variable x}
• {GPH-CON}/{GPH-PLT} ... {connected type}/{draw plot type} graph draw
• If you try to replace a value with an illegal operation (such as division by zero), an error
occurs and the original value remains unchanged.
• You cannot directly change any values in the other (non-
x ) columns of the table.
5-33
k Copying a Table Column to a List
A simple operation lets you copy the contents of a numeric table column into a list.
Use d and e to move the cursor to the column you want to copy. The cursor can be in any
row.
u To copy a table to a list
Example To copy the contents of Column x into List 1
K1(LISTMEM)
Input the number of the list you want to copy and then press w.
bw
• The color of the text in the list where you perform the paste operation will be black.
k Drawing a Graph from a Number Table
Use the following procedure to generate a number table and then draw a graph based on the
values in the table.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Table mode.
2. Configure V-Window settings.
3. Store the functions.
4. Specify the table range.
5. Generate the table.
6. Select the graph type and draw it.
5(GPH-CON) ... line graph
6(GPH-PLT) ... plot type graph
• After drawing the graph, pressing !6(G⇔T) or A returns to the number table screen.
5-34
Example Store the two functions below, generate a number table, and then draw
a line graph. Specify a range of –3 to 3, and an increment of 1.
Y1 = 3
x 2
– 2, Y2 = x 2
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = 0, Xmax = 6, Xscale = 1
Ymin = –2, Ymax = 10, Yscale = 2
1 m Table
2 !3(V-WIN) awgwbwc
-cwbawcwJ
3 3(TYPE) 1(Y=) dvx-cw
vxw
4 5(SET) -dwdwbwJ
5 6(TABLE)
6 5(GPH-CON)
• You can use Trace, Zoom, or Sketch after drawing a graph.
• You can use the graph screen to change the properties of a graph after you draw using a
number table. For details, see “To change graph properties from the graph screen” (page
5-16).
k Simultaneously Displaying a Number Table and Graph
Specifying “T+G” for “Dual Screen” on the Setup screen makes it possible to display a number
table and graph at the same time.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Table mode.
2. Configure V-Window settings.
3. On the Setup screen, select “T+G” for “Dual Screen”.
4. Input the function.
5. Specify the table range.
6. The number table is displayed in the sub-screen on the right.
7. Specify the graph type and draw the graph.
5(GPH-CON) ... line graph
6(GPH-PLT) ... plot type graph
5-35
Example Store the function Y1 = 3
x 2
– 2 and simultaneously display its number
table and line graph. Use a table range of –3 to 3 with an increment of 1.
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = 0, Xmax = 6, Xscale = 1
Ymin = –2, Ymax = 10, Yscale = 2
1 m Table
2 !3(V-WIN) awgwbwc
-cwbawcwJ
3 !m(SET UP)ccc1(T+G)J
4 3(TYPE)1(Y=)dvx-cw
5 5(SET)
-dwdwbwJ
6 6(TABLE)
7 5(GPH-CON)
• The Setup screen’s “Dual Screen” setting is applied in the Table mode and the Recursion
mode.
• You can make the number table active by pressing K1(CHANGE) or A.
5-36
8. Modifying a Graph
A Modify function lets you modify the value of a variable in a graph expression (for example,
the value of A in Y = AX2) from the graph screen and view how the change affects the graph.
k Modify Function Overview
The Modify function can be used in the Graph mode and Conic Graphs mode. To execute
the Modify function in the Graph mode, display the graph relation list screen and press
5(MODIFY). In the Conic Graphs mode, display the coefficients input screen and press
1(MODIFY).
The following shows an example of the graph screen while the Modify function is running.
Graph expression Graph
Graph expression variables and
their current values
Step value
• The graph expression variables and their current values, and a step value are displayed in
the lower left corner of the screen while the Modify function is running. The variable (or step
value) that you can modify is displayed in magenta.
• Use d and e to modify the value of the magenta colored variable. Each press of d or
e changes the magenta value by the amount specified by the step value.
Important!
• You can use the Modify function to modify only one graph expression, and the graph
expression being modified can contain at least one and no more than five variables. If these
conditions are not satisfied, attempting to execute the Modify function will cause an error.
When there are multiple expressions graphed and only one of them includes variables, you
can execute the Modify function to simultaneously graph the expression that contains the
variables and the expressions that do not contain any variables.
• Note that the Modify function cannot be executed in the case when there is more than one
expression containing variables.
5-37
k Modify Function Operations
u To modify a graph in the Graph mode
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Graph mode.
2. On the Setup screen, change the “Dual Screen” setting to “Off”.
3. Configure V-Window settings.
4. Specify the function type and enter a function that contains variables.
• In addition to manual input, you also can input expression containing variables using the
built-in function type list that appears when you press 4(TOOL)3(BUILT-IN). The
content of the built-in function type list is the same as that in the Dyna Graph mode (page
5-40).
5. Press 5(MODIFY) to execute the Modify function.
• This will draw the graph function you entered in step 4.
6. Use f and c to select Step (which will change its color to magenta) and then use the
number keys to enter a step value.
7. Use f and c to select the variable you want to modify.
8. Use d and e to change the selected variable value by the unit specified by the step
setting.
9. You also can enter the variable value directly.
10. To exit the Modify operation, press J.
Example To register the graph expression y = x2 − Ax (A initial value = 0) and
specify a step of 0.5, and then observe changes in the graph as the
value of A changes from 0.5 to 2. Next, enter a value of −2 for the value
of A and observe how the graph changes. Use initialized (INITIAL) V-
Window settings.
1 m Graph
2 !m(SET UP)cccc3(Off)J
3 !3(V-WIN)1(INITIAL)J
4 3(TYPE)1(Y=)vx-av(A)vw
5 5(MODIFY)
6 ca.fw
7 f
8 eeee
5-38
9 -cw
0 J
u To modify a graph in the Conic Graphs mode
Example In the Conic Graphs mode, register the parametric equation X = H + T ;
Y = K + AT2 and the initial values A=2, H=0, K=0. Next, use the Modify
function to change H to −1 and then change K to −1, and observe the
changes in the graph.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Conic Graphs mode.
2. Press 3(PARAM) to display the parametric equation list.
3. Use c to move the highlighting to X = H + T ; Y = K + AT2 and then press w.
• This will display a coefficients input screen.
4. Perform the following key operation to input A=2, H=0, K=0.
cwawaw
5. Press 1(MODIFY) to execute the Modify function.
6. Press c. Check to make sure that the H=0 line is magenta colored and then press d.
5-39
7. Press c. Check to make sure that the K=0 line is magenta colored and then press d.
8. To exit the Modify operation, press J.
k Copying a Graph Expression to the Graph Relation List while the
Modify Function is Running
You can use the following procedure to copy the expression (including its currently assigned
coefficient values) used to draw a graph with the Modify function.
1. While the graph to be copied is displayed and Modify function is running, press
K1(COPY).
• This displays the graph relation list screen.
2. Use f and c to move the highlighting to the area to which you want to copy the graph
expression.
3. Press w.
• This copies the expression and returns to the graph screen.
• You can view the copied expression by pressing J twice and displaying the graph
relation list screen.
Important!
• If you select an area that already contains an expression in step 2 of the above procedure,
pressing w in step 3 will overwrite the existing expression with the new one.
• Selecting the area where an expression that is being used for graphing (one whose “=”
symbol is highlighted) in step 2 of the above procedure and pressing w in step 3 will cause
the message “Expression in use” to appear. No copy operation is performed in this case.
5-40
9. Dynamic Graphing
k Using Dynamic Graph
Dynamic Graph lets you define a range of values for the coefficients in a function, and then
observe how a graph is affected by changes in the value of a coefficient. It helps to see how
the coefficients and terms that make up a function influence the shape and position of a graph.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Dyna Graph mode.
2. Configure V-Window settings.
3. On the Setup screen, specify the Dynamic Type.
1(Cont) ... Continuous
2(Stop) ... Automatic stop after 10 draws
4. Use the cursor keys to select the function type on the built-in function type list.*1
5. If required, press !f(FORMAT) and use the dialog box that appears to specify the
graph color.
6. Input values for coefficients, and specify which coefficient will be the dynamic variable.*2
7. Specify the start value, end value, and increment.
8. Specify the drawing speed.
3(SPEED) 1() .... Pause after each draw (Stop&Go)*3
2( ) ...... Half normal speed (Slow)
3( ) ...... Normal speed (Normal)
4( ) ..... Twice normal speed (Fast)
9. Draw the Dynamic Graph.
*1 The following are the seven built-in function types.
• Y=Ax+B • Y=A(x−B)2+C • Y=Ax2+Bx+C • Y=Ax^3+Bx2+Cx+D
• Y=Asin(Bx+C) • Y=Acos(Bx+C) • Y=Atan(Bx+C)
After you press 3(TYPE) and select the function type you want, you can then input the
actual function.
*2 You could also press w here and display the parameter setting menu.
*3 When “Stop&Go” is selected as the drawing speed, starting a Dynamic Graph draw operation
will cause drawing of the graph with the initial variable values to stop. Each press of w
sequentially displays the graph of the next variable value. Also, you can scroll to the graph of
the next variable value by pressing e (or +) or to the graph of the previous variable value
by pressing d (or -). To exit the Dynamic Graph draw operation, press J.
• The message “Too Many Functions” appears when more than one function is selected for
Dynamic Graphing.
5-41
Example Use Dynamic Graph to graph y = A (x – 1)2 – 1, in which the value of
coefficient A changes from 2 through 5 in increments of 1. The graph is
drawn 10 times.
1 m Dyna Graph
2 !3(V-WIN)1(INITIAL)J
3 !m(SET UP)c2(Stop)J
4 5(BUILT-IN)c1(SELECT)
5 !f(FORMAT)b(Black)
6 4(VAR)cwbw-bw
7 2(SET)cwfwbwJ
8 3(SPEED)3()J
9 6(DYNA)
Repeats from 1 through 4.
k Drawing a Dynamic Graph Locus
Turning on the Dynamic Graph locus setting on the Setup screen lets you overlay a graph
drawn by changing the coefficient values.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Dyna Graph mode.
2. Configure V-Window settings.
3. On the Setup screen, select “On” for “Locus”.
4. Use the cursor keys to select the function type on the built-in function type list.
5. Input values for coefficients, and specify which coefficient will be the dynamic variable.
6. Specify the start value, end value, and increment.
7. Specify “Normal” for the draw speed.
8. Draw the Dynamic Graph.
1
4
2
3
→
←
→
←
↓ ↑
1
4
2
3
→
←
→
←
↓ ↑
5-42
Example Use Dynamic Graph to graph y = A x , in which the value of coefficient
A changes from 1 through 4 in increments of 1. The Graph is drawn 10
times.
1 m Dyna Graph
2 !3(V-WIN) 1(INITIAL) J
3 !m(SET UP)cc1(On)J
4 5(BUILT-IN)1(SELECT)
5 4(VAR)bwaw
6 2(SET)bwewbwJ
7 3(SPEED)3()J
8 6(DYNA)
k Graph Calculation DOT Switching Function
Use this function to specify drawing of all the dots on the Dynamic Graph x-axis, or every other
dot. This setting is value for “Dynamic Func Y=” graphic only.
1. Press !m(SET UP) to display the Setup screen.
2. Press ccc to select “Y=Draw Speed”.
3. Select the graphing method.
1(Norm) … Draws all x-axis dots. (initial default)
2(High) … Draws every other x-axis dot. (faster drawing than Normal)
4. Press J.
k Using Dynamic Graph Memory
You can store Dynamic Graph conditions data in Dynamic Graph memory for later recall when
you need it. This lets you save time, because you can recall the data and immediately begin a
Dynamic Graph draw operation. Note that you can store one set of data in memory at any one
time.
····→
←····
····→
←····
5-43
u To save data in Dynamic Graph memory
1. While a Dynamic Graph draw operation is being performed, press A to change to the
speed adjustment menu.
2. Press 5(STORE). In response to the confirmation dialog that appears, press 1(Yes) to
save the data.
u To recall data from Dynamic Graph memory
1. Display the Dynamic Graph relation list.
2. Pressing 6(RECALL) recalls Dynamic Graph memory contents and draws the graph.
10. Graphing a Recursion Formula
k Generating a Number Table from a Recursion Formula
You can input up to three of the following types of recursion formulas and generate a number
table.
• General term of sequence {
a n
}, composed of a n
, n
• Linear two-term recursion composed of a n +1
, a n
, n
• Linear three-term recursion composed of a n +2
, a n +1
, a n
, n
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Recursion mode.
2. Specify the recursion type.
3(TYPE) 1(
a n
) ... {general term of sequence a n
}
2(an+1) ... {linear two-term recursion}
3(an+2) ... {linear three-term recursion}
3. Input the recursion formula.
4. Specify the table range. Specify a start point and end point for
n . If necessary, specify a
value for the initial term, and a pointer start point value if you plan to graph the formula.
5. Display the recursion formula number table.
5-44
Example Generate a number table from recursion between three terms as
expressed by
a n +2
= a n +1
+ a n
, with initial terms of a 1
= 1, a 2
= 1 (Fibonacci
sequence), as
n changes in value from 1 to 6.
1 m Recursion
2 3(TYPE) 3(
a n +2
)
3 4(
n . a n
··) 3( a n +1
) +2( a n
) w
4 5(SET) 2( a 1
) bwgwbwbwJ
5 6(TABLE)
* The first two values correspond
to
a 1
= 1 and a 2
= 1.
• Pressing 1(FORMULA) will return to the screen for storing recursion formulas.
• Specifying “On” for the “ Σ Display” of the Setup screen causes the sum of each term to be
included in the table.
k Graphing a Recursion Formula
After generating a number table from a recursion formula, you can graph the values on a line
graph or plot type graph.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Recursion mode.
2. Configure V-Window settings.
3. Specify the recursion formula type and input the formula.
4. Specify the table range, and start and ending values for
n . If necessary, specify the initial
term value and pointer start point.
5. Select the line style for the graph.
6. Display the recursion formula number table.
7. Specify the graph type and draw the graph.
5(GPH-CON) ... line graph
6(GPH-PLT) ... plot type graph
Example Generate a number table from recursion between two terms as
expressed by
a n +1
= 2 a n
+
1, with an initial term of a 1
= 1, as n changes in
value from 1 to 6. Use the table values to draw a line graph.
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = 0, Xmax = 6, Xscale = 1
Ymin = –15, Ymax = 65, Yscale = 5
5-45
1 m Recursion
2 !3(V-WIN) awgwbwc
-bfwgfwfwJ
3 3(TYPE) 2( a n +1
) c2( a n
) +bw
4 5(SET) 2(
a 1
) bwgwbwJ
5 1(SEL+S) f2() J
6 6(TABLE)
7 5(GPH-CON)
• You can change the graph line color and line style from the recursion formula screen and
from the graph screen. To change from the recursion formula screen, see “To change graph
properties from the graph relation list screen” (page 5-15). To change from the graph screen,
see “To change graph properties from the graph screen” (page 5-16).
• After drawing a graph, you can use Trace, Zoom, and Sketch.
• Press A to return to the number table screen. After drawing a graph, you can toggle
between the number table screen and graph screen by pressing !6(G⇔T).
k Graphing a Phase Plot from Two Numeric Sequences
You can draw the phase plot for numeric sequences generated by two expressions input in
the Recursion mode with one value on the horizontal axis and the other value on the vertical
axis. For
a n
( a n +1
, a n +2
), b n
( b n +1
, b n +2
), c n
( c n +1
, c n +2
), the numeric sequence of the alphabetically
first expression is on the horizontal axis while the following numeric sequence is on the vertical
axis.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Recursion mode.
2. Configure V-Window settings.
3. Enter two recursion formulas and select both of them for table generation.
4. Configure table generation settings.
Specify the start and end values for variable
n and the initial term for each recursion
formula.
5. Display the recursion formula number table.
6. Draw the phase plot.
Example To input the two sequence formulas for regression between two terms
a n +1
= 0.9 a n
and b n +1
= b n
+ 0.1
n
− 0.2, and specify initial terms a 1
= 1 and
b 1
= 1 for each. Generate a number table as the value of the n variable
goes from 1 to 10 and use it to draw a phase plot.
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = 0, Xmax = 2, Xscale = 1
Ymin = 0, Ymax = 4, Yscale = 1
5-46
1 m Recursion
2 !3(V-WIN) awcwbwc
awewbwJ
3 3(TYPE) 2(
a n +1
) a.j2( a n
) w
4(
n . a n
··) 3( b n
) +a.b1( n ) -a.cw
4 5(SET) 2(
a 1
) bwbawbwbwJ
5 6(TABLE)
6 3(PHASE)
• The color used for phase plotting is the color assigned to the initial expression. When
phase plotting from expression an and expression bn, for example, the color will be that of
expression an.
• If you enter three expressions on the Recursion mode screen and select all of them for table
creation, you will need to specify which two of the three expressions you want to use to draw
the phase plot. To do so, use the function menu that appears when you press 3(PHASE)
on the table screen.
1(a • b) ..........Graph using an (an+1, an+2) and bn (bn+1, bn+2).
2(
b • c ) ..........Graph using b n
( b n +1
, b n +2
) and c n
( c n +1
, c n +2
).
3(
a • c ) ..........Graph using a n
( a n +1
, a n +2
) and c n
( c n +1
, c n +2
).
• Specifying “On” for the “ΣDisplay” of the Setup screen causes the sum of each term to be
included in the table. At this time you can select use of the two numeric sequences as-is to
draw the plot graph, or use of the sums of each of the two numeric sequences. To do so, use
the function menu that appears when you press 3(PHASE) on the table screen.
1(
a n
) ............Use numeric sequence for graphing.
6( Σ a n
) ..........Use numeric sequence sums for graphing.
5-47
• When “On” is selected “ΣDisplay” on the Setup screen and all three of the expressions
you input in the Recursion mode are selected for table creation, use the function menu
that appears when you press 3(PHASE) on the table screen to specify which two of the
expressions you want to use, and to specify whether you want to use numeric sequence
data or numeric sequence sum data.
1(
a • b ) ..........Graph using number sequences a n
(
a n +1
, a n +2
) and b n
( b n +1
, b n +2
)
2(
b • c ) ..........Graph using number sequences b n
( b n +1
, b n +2
) and c n
( c n +1
, c n +2
)
3(
a • c ) ..........Graph using number sequences a n
( a n +1
, a n +2
) and c n
( c n +1
, c n +2
)
4( Σ a • b ) .......Graph using the sums of number
sequences a n
( a n +1
, a n +2
) and b n
( b n +1
, b n +2
)
5( Σ b • c ) .......Graph using the sums of number
sequences b n
( b n +1
, b n +2
) and c n
( c n +1
, c n +2
)
6( Σ a • c ) .......Graph using the sums of number
sequences a n
( a n +1
, a n +2
) and c n
( c n +1
, c n +2
)
k WEB Graph (Convergence, Divergence)
y = f ( x ) is graphed by presuming a n +1
= y , a n
= x for linear two-term recursion a n +1
= f ( a n
)
composed of a n +1
, a n
. Next, it can be determined whether the function is convergent or
divergent.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Recursion mode.
2. Configure V-Window settings.
3. Select 2-term recursion as the recursion formula type, and input the formula.
4. Specify the table range,
n start and end points, initial term value, and pointer start point.
5. Display the recursion formula number table.
6. Draw the graph.
7. Press w, and the pointer appears at the start point you specified.
Press w several times.
If convergence exists, lines that resemble a spider web are drawn on the display. Failure
of the web lines to appear indicates either divergence or that the graph is outside the
boundaries of the display screen. When this happens, change to larger V-Window values
and try again.
You can use fc to select the graph.
5-48
Example To draw the WEB graph for the recursion formula a n +1
= –3( a n
)
2
+ 3 a n
, b n +1
= 3 b n
+ 0.2, and check for divergence or convergence. Use the following
table range: Start = 0, End = 6,
a 0
= 0.01, a n
Str = 0.01, b 0
= 0.11, b n
Str
= 0.11
1 m Recursion
2 !3(V-WIN) awbwbwc
awbwbwJ
3 3(TYPE) 2(
a n +1
) -d2( a n
) x+d2( a n
) w
d3(
b n
) +a.cw
4 5(SET) 1(
a 0
)
awgwa.abwa.bbwc
a.abwa.bbwJ
5 6(TABLE)
6 4(WEB-GPH)
7 w~ w(
a n
is convergence)
cw~w(bn is divergence)
• To change the graph line style, press 1(SEL+S) after step 4.
• With WEB Graph, you can specify the line type for a y = f ( x ) graph. The line type setting is
valid only when “Connect” is selected for “Draw Type” on the Setup screen.
11. Graphing a Conic Section
k Graphing a Conic Section
You can use the Conic Graphs mode to graph parabolas, circles, ellipses, and hyperbolas.
You can input a rectangular coordinate function, polar coordinate function, or parametric
function for graphing.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Conic Graphs mode.
2. Select the function type.
1(RECT).... {rectangular coordinate}
2(POL).... {polar coordinate}
3(PARAM).... {parametric}
5-49
3. Select the pattern of the function in accordance with the type of graph you want to draw.
R
w
4. Enter the coefficients of the function and draw the graph.
Example To input the rectangular coordinate function
x = 2 y 2
+ y − 1 and graph a
parabola open on the right, and then input the polar coordinate function
r = 4cos
θ
and draw a circle graph.
1 m Conic Graphs
2 1(RECT) c(X=AY
2
+BY+C) w
3 cwbw-bw6(DRAW)
4 JJ
5 2(POL) cccc(R=2Acos
θ
) w
6 cw6(DRAW)
• In the Conic Graphs mode, you can press 1(MODIFY) in place of 6(DRAW) while
the coefficients input screen is displayed and modify the value of the coefficients on the
graph screen, and observe changes in the graph due to the modifications. For details, see
“Modifying a Graph” (page 5-36).
• In the Conic Graphs mode, you can press !f(FORMAT) while any screen is displayed
to display a dialog box for changing the graph color.
5-50
12. Drawing Dots, Lines, and Text on the Graph
Screen (Sketch)
The sketch function lets you draw points and lines inside of graphs. You can select one of five
different line styles and seven colors for drawing with the sketch function.
u To draw dots, lines, and text on the graph screen
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Graph mode.
2. Configure V-Window settings.
3. On the Setup screen, configure the following settings as required.
• Sketch Line ... Initial default line style when drawing a line
• Plot/LineCol ... Initial default color when drawing a plot, line, or text
4. Input the function of the graph.
5. Draw the graph.
6. Select the sketch function you want to use.*1
!4(SKETCH) 1(Cls) ... Screen clear
2(Tangent) ... Tangent line
3(Norm) ... Line normal to a curve
4(Inverse) ... Inverse function*
2
6( g) 1(PLOT)
{Plot}/{PlotOn}/{PlotOff}/{PlotChg} ... Point {Plot}/{On}/{Off}/{Change}
6( g) 2(LINE)
{Line}/{F-Line} ... {connects 2 points plotted by 6(g)1(PLOT) with
a line}/{for drawing a line between any 2 points}
6( g) 3(Circle) ... Circle
6( g) 4(Vertical) ... Vertical line
6( g) 5(Horz) ... Horizontal line
6( g) 6( g) 1(PEN) ... Freehand
6(g)6(g)2(Text) ... Text input
7. Press !f(FORMAT) to display the format dialog box, and then configure color and line
style settings.
• You can specify the line color and line style while Tangent, Norm, Line, F-Line, Circle,
Vertical, Horz, or PEN is selected.
• You cannot specify the line color and line style while Plot, PlotOn, PlotChg, or Text is
selected.
• To close the format dialog box, press J.
5-51
8. Use the cursor keys to move the pointer ( ) to the location where you want to draw, and
press w.*3
*
1
The above shows the function menu that appears in the Graph mode. Menu items may
differ somewhat in other modes.
*
2
In the case of an inverse function graph, drawing starts immediately after you select this
option. The line style and color setting selected for the Setup screen “Sketch Line” and
“Plot/LineCol” settings are always applied for an inverse function graph.
*
3
Some sketch functions require specification of two points. After you press w to specify the
first point, use the cursor keys to move the pointer to the location of the second point and
press w.
Example Draw a line that is tangent to point (2, 0) on the graph for
y = x ( x + 2)
( x – 2).
1 m Graph
2 !3(V-WIN) 1(INITIAL) J
3 !m(SET UP)cccccccc1(COLOR)b(Black)
c1()J
4 3(TYPE)1(Y=)v(v+c)(v
-c)w
5 6(DRAW)
6 !4(SKETCH) 2(Tangent)
7 !f(FORMAT)b(Line Style)f(Thin)
c(Line Color)d(Red)J
8 e~ew*1
*1 You can draw a tangent line in succession by moving the pointer and pressing w.
5-52
13. Function Analysis
k Reading Coordinates on a Graph Line
Trace lets you move a pointer along a graph and read out coordinates on the display.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Graph mode.
2. Draw the graph.
3. Press !1(TRACE), and a pointer appears in the center of the graph.*
1
4. Use d and e to move the pointer along the graph to
the point at which you want to display the coordinates.
When there are multiple graphs on the display, press
f and c to move between them along the x-axis of
the current pointer location.
• At this time, pointer coordinate values appear at the bottom of the screen and to the right
(or left) of the pointer. Also, supplementary lines appear from the pointer to the x-axis and
y-axis.
• You can hide the supplementary lines by pressing !c. To redisplay hidden lines,
press !f.
5. You can also move the pointer by pressing v to display the pop-up window, and then
inputting an x value.
The pop-up window appears even when you input an x value directly.
To exit a trace operation, press !1(TRACE).
*
1
The pointer is not visible on the graph when it is located at a point outside the graph display
area or when an error of no value occurs.
• You can turn off display of the coordinates at the pointer location by specifying “Off” for the
“Coord” item on the Setup screen.
• The following shows how coordinates are displayed for each function type.
Polar Coordinate Graph
Parametric Graph
Inequality Graph (Y≥
≥
, Y
≤
, X
≥
, X
≤
)(Y≥
≥
, Y
≤
, X
≥
, X
≤
)
(Y>, Y<, X>, X<)(Y>, Y<, X>, X<)
5-53
• Pressing w while the pointer is on a graph (during
Trace, G-Solve, etc.) will place a dot at the pointer location
along with a label which shows the coordinates at the dot
location. Pressing aD removes the last dot and
coordinate label that was created.
• Dots created with the above operation will appear as for coordinate values that are
included in the graph expression, and for values that are not. For example, a dot at
coordinates (2,1) on the graph Y=2X will be , while a dot at coordinates (2,1) on the graph
Y>2X will be .
k Displaying the Derivative
In addition to using Trace to display coordinates, you can also display the derivative at the
current pointer location.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Graph mode.
2. On the Setup screen, specify “On” for “Derivative”.
3. Draw the graph.
4. Press !1(TRACE), and the pointer appears at the
center of the graph. The current coordinates and the
derivative also appear on the display at this time.
k Graph to Table
You can use trace to read the coordinates of a graph and store them in a number table. You
can also use Dual Graph to simultaneously store the graph and number table, making this an
important graph analysis tool.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Graph mode.
2. On the Setup screen, specify “GtoT” for “Dual Screen”.
3. Configure V-Window settings.
4. Save the function and draw the graph on the
main (left) screen.
5. Activate Trace. When there are multiple graphs on
the display, press f and c to select the graph you
want.
6. Use d and e to move the pointer and press w to store coordinates into the number
table. Repeat this step to store as many values as you want.
• Each press of w places a dot on the graph at the current pointer location.
7. Press K1(CHANGE) to make the number table active.
5-54
k Coordinate Rounding
This function rounds off coordinate values displayed by Trace.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Graph mode.
2. Draw the graph.
3. Press !2(ZOOM) 6( g) 3(ROUND). This causes
the V-Window settings to be changed automatically
in accordance with the Rnd value.
4. Press !1(TRACE), and then use the cursor keys
to move the pointer along the graph. The coordinates
that now appear are rounded.
k Analyzing Graphs (G-SOLVE Menu)
Pressing !5(G-SOLVE) displays a function menu that contains functions you can use to
analyze the currently displayed graph and obtain the following information.
!5(G-SOLVE)1(ROOT) ... Root of the graph
2(MAX) ... Maximum value of the graph
3(MIN) ... Minimum value of the graph
4(Y-ICEPT) ... y-intercept of the graph
5(INTSECT) ... Intersection of two graphs
6(g)1(Y-CAL) ... y-coordinate for a given x-coordinate
6(g)2(X-CAL) ... x-coordinate for a given y-coordinate
6(g)3(∫dx)1(∫dx) ... Integration value for a specified range
6(g)3(∫dx)2(ROOT) ... Integration value between the two or more of
the graph’s roots
6(g)3(∫dx)3(INTSECT) ... Integration value between the two or more
intersections of two graphs
• Either of the following can cause poor accuracy or even make it impossible to obtain
solutions.
- When the graph of the solution obtained is a point of tangency with the x-axis
- When a solution is an inflection point
5-55
u To calculate the root of a graph
1. Draw a graph.
2. Press !5(G-SOLVE)1(ROOT).
3. If there are multiple graphs on the graph screen, one of them will start flashing. Use f and
c to move the flashing to the graph you want to analyze.
4. To select the flashing graph, press w. This displays the value produced by the analysis.
Example Graph the function shown below, and then calculate the roots.
Y1 = x3 − 4x
• When an analysis produces multiple values, press e to calculate the next value. Pressing
d returns to the previous value.
• When “On” is selected for the Derivative setting on the Setup screen, the derivative will
be displayed along with the root when you calculate the root of a graph using the above
procedure.
u To calculate the point of intersection of two graphs
1. Draw the graphs.
2. Press !5(G-SOLVE)5(INTSECT). If there are three or more graphs on the graph
screen, one of them will start flashing.
3. Use f and c to move the flashing to one of the graphs whose point of intersection you
want to determine and then press w.
4. Use f and c to move the flashing to the other graph whose point of intersection you
want to determine and then press w.
5. Press w to determine the point of intersection for the two graphs.
When an analysis produces multiple values, press e to calculate the next value.
Pressing d returns to the previous value.
5-56
Example Graph the two functions shown below, and determine the point of
intersection between Y1 and Y2.
Y1 =
x + 1, Y2 = x 2
• You can calculate the point of intersection for rectangular coordinate graphs (Y=
f ( x ) type)
and inequality graphs (Y > f(x), Y < f(x), Y ≥ f(x) or Y ≤ f(x)) only.
• Either of the following can cause poor accuracy or even make it impossible to obtain
solutions.
- When a solution is a point of tangency between two graphs
- When a solution is an inflection point
u To determine the coordinates for given points
1. Draw the graph.
2. Select the function you want to perform.
!5(G-SOLVE) 6(g)1(Y-CAL) ... y-coordinate for given x
6(g)2(X-CAL) ... x-coordinate for given y
3. If there are multiple graphs on the graph screen, one of them will start flashing. Use f and
c to move the flashing to the graph you want to select and then press w.
4. Input the given x-coordinate value or y-coordinate value.
Press w to calculate the corresponding y-coordinate value or x-coordinate value.
Example Graph the two functions shown below and then determine the
y -
coordinate for x = 0.5 and the x -coordinate for y = 2.2 on graph Y2.
Y1 =
x + 1, Y2 = x ( x + 2)( x – 2)
• When there are multiple results for the above procedure, press e to calculate the next
value. Pressing d returns to the previous value.
• The X-CAL value cannot be obtained for a parametric function graph.
5-57
u To calculate the integral value for a given range
Use the following procedure to obtain integration values for a given range.
1. Draw the graph.
2. Press !5(G-SOLVE)6(g)3(∫dx)1(∫dx). If there are multiple graphs on the graph
screen, one of them will start flashing.
3. Use f and c to move the flashing to the graph you want to select and then press w.
4. Use d and e to move the lower limit pointer to the location you want, and then press
w.
5. Use e to move the upper limit pointer to the location you want.
6. Press w to calculate the integral value.
Example Graph the function shown below, and then determine the integral value
at (–2, 0).
Y1 =
x ( x + 2)( x – 2)
• You can also specify the lower limit and upper limit by inputting them on the 10-key pad.
• When setting the range, make sure that the lower limit is less than the upper limit.
• Integral values can be calculated for rectangular coordinate graphs only.
u To obtain the integration value and area value between two or more roots of
a graph
1. Draw a graph.
2. Press !5(G-SOLVE)6(g)3(∫dx)2(ROOT).
• The pointer will appear at the leftmost root currently on the graph screen.
• If there is no root on the display, the message “Not Found” will appear. In this case, press
J.
3. Use d and e to move the pointer to the root you want to use as the lowermost side of
the integration region, and then press w.
4. Use e to move the pointer to the root you want to use as the uppermost side of the
integration region, and the press w.
• If there is only one root on the display, the message “Not Found” will appear. In this case,
press J.
5. Press w to calculate the integral value and area value.
5-58
Example To graph Y = sin X, and then determine the graph integration value and
area value for the region between the root of the minus value nearest
the origin and the root of the plus value nearest the origin
Integration value
Area value
• If there are 21 or more roots between the two roots you specify, an error will occur.
• Integral values and area values can be calculated for rectangular coordinate graphs only.
u To obtain the integration value and area value between two or more
intersection points of two graphs
1. Draw two graphs.
2. Press !5(G-SOLVE)6(g)3(∫dx)3(INTSECT).
• The pointer will appear at the leftmost intersection currently on the graph screen.
• If there is no intersection point on the display, the message “Not Found” will appear. In this
case, press J.
3. Use d and e to move the pointer to the intersection point you want to use as the
lowermost side of the integration region, and then press w.
4. Use e to move the pointer to the intersection point you want to use as the uppermost side
of the integration region.
• If there is only one intersection point on the display, the message “Not Found” will appear.
In this case, press J.
5. Press w to calculate the integral value and area value.
Example To graph Y = sin X and Y = sin (X − 2
π), and then determine the
integration value and area value between two points of intersection you
specify
Integration value
Area value
• If there are 21 or more intersections between the two points of intersection you specify, an
error will occur.
• Integral values and area values can be calculated for rectangular coordinate graphs only.
5-59
k Conic Section Graph Analysis
You can determine approximations of the following analytical results using conic section
graphs.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Conic Graphs mode.
2. Select the function type.
1(RECT).... {rectangular coordinate}
2(POL).... {polar coordinate}
3(PARAM).... {parametric}
3. Use f and c to select the conic section you want to analyze.
4. Input the conic section constants.
5. Draw the graph.
After graphing a conic section, press !5(G-SOLVE) to display the following graph
analysis menus.
u Parabolic Graph Analysis
• { FOCUS } / { VERTEX } / { LENGTH } / { e } ... {focus}/{vertex}/{length of latus rectum}/{eccentricity}
• { DIRECTX } / { SYMMETRY } ... {directrix}/{axis of symmetry}
• { X-ICEPT } / { Y-ICEPT } ... {
x -intercept}/{ y -intercept}
u Circular Graph Analysis
• { CENTER } / { RADIUS } ... {center}/{radius}
• { X-ICEPT } / { Y-ICEPT } ... {
x -intercept}/{ y -intercept}
u Elliptical Graph Analysis
• { FOCUS } / { VERTEX } / { CENTER } / { e } ... {focus}/{vertex}/{center}/{eccentricity}
• { X-ICEPT } / { Y-ICEPT } ... {
x -intercept}/{ y -intercept}
u Hyperbolic Graph Analysis
• { FOCUS } / { VERTEX } / { CENTER } / { e } ... {focus}/{vertex}/{center}/{eccentricity}
• { ASYMPT } ... {asymptote}
• { X-ICEPT } / { Y-ICEPT } ... {
x -intercept}/{ y -intercept}
5-60
u To calculate the focus and length of latus rectum
Example To determine the focus and length of latus rectum for the parabola X =
(Y – 2)
2
+ 3
Use the following V-Window settings.
Xmin = –1, Xmax = 10, Xscale = 1
Ymin = –5, Ymax = 5, Yscale = 1
m Conic Graphs
w
bwcwdw6(DRAW)
!5(G-SOLVE)
1(FOCUS)
(Calculates the focus.)
!5(G-SOLVE)
5(LENGTH)
(Calculates the length of latus rectum.)
• When calculating two foci for an ellipse or hyperbolic graph, press e to calculate the
second focus. Pressing d returns to the first focus.
• When calculating two vertexes for a hyperbolic graph, press e to calculate the second
vertex. Pressing d returns to the first vertex.
• Pressing e when calculating the vertices of an ellipse will calculate the next value.
Pressing d will scroll back through previous values. An ellipse has four vertices.
5-61
u To calculate the center
Example To determine the center for the circle
(X + 2)
2
+ (Y + 1)
2
= 2
2
m Conic Graphs
ccccw
-cw-bwcw6(DRAW)
!5(G-SOLVE)
1(CENTER)
(Calculates the center.)
6-1
Chapter 6 Statistical Graphs and
Calculations
Important!
This chapter contains a number of graph screen shots. In each case, new data values were input in
order to highlight the particular characteristics of the graph being drawn. Note that when you try to
draw a similar graph, the unit uses data values that you have input using the List function. Because
of this, the graphs that appear on the screen when you perform a graphing operation will probably
differ somewhat from those shown in this manual.
1. Before Performing Statistical Calculations
Entering the Statistics mode from the Main Menu displays the List Editor screen.
You can use the List Editor screen to input statistical data and perform statistical calculations.
Use f, c, d and e to move the
highlighting around the lists.
Once you input data, you can use it to produce a graph and
check for tendencies. You can also use a variety of different
regression calculations to analyze the data.
• For information about using the List Editor, see “Chapter 3
List Function”.
k Statistical Graph Parameters
You can specify the graph draw/non-draw status, the graph type, and other general settings for
each of the graphs in the graph menu (GRAPH1, GRAPH2, GRAPH3).
While the List Editor is on the display, press 1(GRAPH) to display the graph menu, which
contains the following items.
• { GRAPH1 } / { GRAPH2 } / { GRAPH3 } ... graph {1}/{2}/{3} drawing*
1
• { SELECT } ... {simultaneous graph (GRAPH1, GRAPH2, GRAPH3) selection}
You can specify the multiple graphs.
• { SET } ... {graph settings (graph type, list assignments)}
*
1
The initial default graph type setting for all the graphs (Graph 1 through Graph 3) is scatter
diagram, but you can change to one of a number of other graph types.
6
6-2
k General Graph Settings [GRAPH]-[SET]
This section describes how to use the general graph settings screen to make the following
settings for each graph (GRAPH1, GRAPH2, GRAPH3).
• Graph Type
The initial default graph type setting for all the graphs is scatter graph. You can select one of a
variety of other statistical graph types for each graph.
• List
The initial default statistical data is List 1 for single-variable data, and List 1 and List 2 for
paired-variable data. You can specify which statistical data list you want to use for
x -data and
y -data.
• Frequency
This setting specifies a list that contains frequency data.
In statistics, “frequency” means the number of times a data item (or set of data items) occurs.
Frequencies are used in “frequency distribution tables,” which list each unique data item in
one column, with the frequency (number of occurrences) in the column to the right. With this
calculator, the data column and frequency column are separate lists. This setting specifies the
list (List 1, List 2, etc.) to be used for the frequency column when drawing a statistical graph.
The initial default setting for this item is 1, which indicates that the frequency of all data items
is 1 (one occurrence).
• The values contained in a frequency list should be 0 or positive values only. Even a single
negative value will cause an error (Out of Domain).
• Mark Type
This setting lets you specify the shape of the plot points on the graph.
• Color Link
This setting specifies whether the color specified on the List Editor for the statistical data list(s)
to be used for graphing should be applied as the graph color(s). The initial default value is “Off”
(color specified with the List Editor not applied to the graph).
• Graph Color
Specifies the graph color when “Off” is selected for the Color Link setting. Depending on the
graph type, setting items for specifying the color of each part of a graph may appear in place
of this item. In the case of a pie chart, for example, Pie Area and Pie Border color settings will
appear.
6-3
u To display the general graph settings screen
Pressing 1(GRAPH) 6(SET) displays the general graph
settings screen.
• StatGraph (statistical graph specification)
• { GRAPH1 } / { GRAPH2 } / { GRAPH3 } ... graph {1}/{2}/{3}
• Graph Type (graph type specification)
• { Scatter } / {
xy Line} / { NPPlot } / { Pie } ... {scatter diagram}/{ xy line graph}/{normal probability
plot}/{pie chart}
• { Hist } / { MedBox } / { Bar } / { N-Dist } / { Broken } ... {histogram}/{med-box graph}/{bar graph}/
{normal distribution curve}/{broken line graph}
• { X } / { Med } / { X2 } / { X3 } / { X4 } ... {linear regression graph}/{Med-Med graph}/{quadratic regression
graph}/{cubic regression graph}/{quartic regression graph}
• { Log } / { aebx}/{abx } / { Power } / { Sin } / { Logistic } ... {logarithmic regression graph}/{exponential
regression graph (aebx)}/{exponential regression graph (abx)}/{power regression graph}/
{sinusoidal regression graph}/{logistic regression graph}
• XList ( x -axis data list)/YList ( y -axis data list)
• { List } ... {List 1 to 26}
• Frequency (number of times a value occurs)
• { 1 } ... {1-to-1 plot}
• { List } ... {List 1 to 26}
• Mark Type (plot mark type)
• { } / {} / { } ... scatter diagram plot points
• Color Link
The options that appear for this setting depend on the graph type.
For this graph
type:
Selecting
this: Causes this to happen:
Scatter, xyLine X&Y Colors specified for both the XList and YList data are
reflected in the graph.
• When the same lines of the XList and YList are the same
color, plot marks and line will be drawn in the graph using
that color.
• When the same lines of the XList and YList are different
colors, the graph plot marks are shown as ◎ and lines are
drawn in black.
OnlyX The color specified only for the XList data is reflected in the
graph.
OnlyY The color specified only for the YList data is reflected in the
graph.
Off List data color specifications are ignored.
6-4
For this graph
type:
Selecting
this: Causes this to happen:
NPPlot, Pie,
Bar
On The color specified for the list data is reflected in the graph.
Off List data color specifications are ignored.
Hist, Broken X&Freq Colors specified for both the XList and Frequency data list
are reflected in the graph.
• When the same lines of the XList and Frequency data list
are the same color, the graph is drawn using that color.
• When the same lines of the XList and Frequency data
list are the different colors, plot marks and lines are
represented as described below.
Hist: Graph is shaded with the applicable color.
Broken: Graph plot marks are shown as ◎ and lines are
drawn in black.
OnlyX The color specified for only the XList data is reflected in the
graph.
Off List data color specifications are ignored.
Example: Scatter graph when “OnlyX” is selected for the Color Link setting
⇒
List Editor display
(XList:List 1, YList:List 2)
Color Link: OnlyX
(scatter graph)
• Graph Color
• {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellow} ... Specifies a single color as the
graph color
Example: Scatter graph when {Red} is specified for Graph
Color
6-5
• {Auto} ... Cycles the color used for graph drawing in the following sequence for each data
item (or data pair): blue, red, green, magenta, black. Cycle is repeated after all five
colors are used. For some graphs, different parts of the graph (points, lines, etc.) are
automatically drawn using different colors. {Auto} can be selected only when the graph
type is Scatter, xyLine, NPPlot, or Broken.
Example: Scatter graph when {Auto} is specified for Graph
Color
• The Graph Color setting is always “Link” whenever anything other than “Off” is selected for
the Color Link setting.
When “Pie” (pie chart) is selected as the Graph Type:
• Data (Specifies the list to be used as graph data.)
• { LIST } ... {List 1 to List 26}
• Display (pie chart value display setting)
• { % } / { Data } ... For each data element {display as percentage}/{display as value}
• % Sto Mem (Specifies storage of percentage values to a list.)
• { None } / { List } ... For percentage values: {Do not store to list}/{Specify List 1 to 26 and store}
• Pie Area (Specifies the fill color of a pie chart.)
• Area Color
• {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellow} ... Specifies a single fill color
for each data item.
• {Auto} ... Automatically cycles the fill color in the following sequence for each data item:
blue, red, green, magenta, cyan, yellow. Cycle is repeated after all six colors are used.
• Paint Style
• {Normal}/{Lighter} ... {normal fill density}/{lighter fill density}
• The Area Color setting is always “Link” and the Paint Style setting is always “Lighter”
whenever anything other than “Off” is selected for the Color Link setting.
• Pie Border (Specifies the border line color of a pie chart.)
• {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellow} ... Specifies a single color for the
border line.
• {Clear} ... No border line drawn.
6-6
When “Hist” (Histogram) is selected as the Graph Type:
• Hist Area (Specifies the fill color of a histogram.)
Settings are the same as those for Pie Area.
• Hist Border (Specifies the border line color of a histogram.)
Settings are the same as those for Pie Border.
• The Hist Border setting is always “Link” whenever anything other than “Off” is selected for
the Color Link setting.
When “MedBox” (med-box graph) is selected as the Graph Type:
• Outliers (outliers specification)
• { On } / { Off } ... {display}/{do not display} Med-Box outliers
minX Q1 Med Q3 maxX Outlier(s)
• Box (Specifies the border line color of the box enclosed by Q1 through Q3, and the
Med line color.)
• {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellow} ... Specifies a single color for the
border line.
• Whisker (Specifies the whisker color from the box ends to minX and maxX.)
Settings are the same as those for Box.
• Out Color (Specifies the outliers color.)
Settings are the same as those for Box.
• Box Inside (Specifies the fill color of the box enclosed by Q1 through Q3.)
Settings are basically the same as those for Pie Area, except for the following differences.
• When “Auto” is selected for the Area Color setting, blue is the fill color of the box from Q1 to
Med, and yellow is the fill color of the box from Med to Q3.
When “Bar” (bar graph) is selected as the Graph Type:
• Data1 (first stick data list)
• { LIST } ... {List 1 to 26}
• Data2 (second stick data list)/Data3 (third stick data list)
• { None } / { LIST } ... {none}/{List 1 to 26}
• Stick Style (stick style specification)
• { Length } / { Horz } ... {length}/{horizontal}
6-7
• D1 Area, D2 Area, D3 Area (Specifies the fill colors of bar graphs Data 1, Data 2, and
Data 3.)
Settings are the same as those for Hist Area.
• D1 Border, D2 Border, D3 Border (Specifies the border colors of bar graphs Data 1,
Data 2, and Data 3.)
Settings are the same as those for Hist Border.
k Graph Draw/Non-draw Status [GRAPH]-[SELECT]
The following procedure can be used to specify the draw (On)/non-draw (Off) status of each of
the graphs in the graph menu.
u To specify the draw/non-draw status of a graph
1. Pressing 1(GRAPH) 4(SELECT) displays the graph
On/Off screen.
• Note that the StatGraph1 setting is for Graph 1 (GRAPH1 of the graph menu), StatGraph2
is for Graph 2, and StatGraph3 is for Graph 3.
2. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the graph whose status you want to change,
and press the applicable function key to change the status.
• { On } / { Off } ... {On (draw)}/{Off (non-draw)}
• { DRAW } ... {draws all On graphs}
3. To return to the graph menu, press J.
k Statistical Graph V-Window Settings
V-Window parameters are normally set automatically for statistical graphing. If you want to set
V-Window parameters manually, you must change the Stat Wind item to “Manual”.
While the List Editor is on the display, perform the following procedure.
!m(SET UP) 2(Manual)
J(Returns to previous menu.)
Note that V-Window parameters are set automatically for the following types of graphs
regardless of whether or not the Stat Wind item is set to “Manual”.
Pie, 1-Sample
Z Test, 2-Sample Z Test, 1-Prop Z Test, 2-Prop Z Test, 1-Sample t Test, 2-
Sample t Test, χ 2
GOF Test, χ 2
2-way Test, 2-Sample F Test ( x -axis only disregarded).
6-8
2. Calculating and Graphing Single-Variable
Statistical Data
Single-variable data is data with only a single variable. If you are calculating the average height
of the members of a class for example, there is only one variable (height).
Single-variable statistics include distribution and sum. The following types of graphs are
available for single-variable statistics.
You can also use the procedures under “Statistical Graph Parameters” on page 6-1 to make
the settings you want before drawing each graph.
k Normal Probability Plot
This plot compares the data accumulated ratio with a normal distribution accumulated ratio.
XList specifies the list where data is input, and Mark Type is used to select from among the
marks { / / } you want to plot.
Press A, J or !J(QUIT) to return to the List Editor.
k Pie Chart
You can draw a pie chart based on the data in a specific list. The maximum number of graph
data items (list lines) is 20. The graph is labeled A, B, C, and so on, corresponding to lines 1,
2, 3, and so on of the list used for the graph data.
When “%” is selected for the “Display” setting on the general graph settings screen (page 6-3),
a value showing the percentage is displayed for each of the alphabetic label letters.
6-9
k Histogram
XList specifies the list where the data is input, while Freq specifies the list where the data
frequency is input. 1 is specified for Freq when frequency is not specified.
⇒
w(Draw)
The display screen appears as shown above before the graph is drawn. At this point, you can
change the Start and Width values.
k Med-box Graph
This type of graph lets you see how a large number of
data items are grouped within specific ranges. A box
encloses all the data in an area from the first quartile
(Q1) to the third quartile (Q3), with a line drawn at the
median (Med). Lines (called whiskers) extend from
either end of the box up to the minimum (minX) and
maximum (maxX) of the data.
To plot the data that falls outside the box, first specify
“MedBox” as the Graph Type. Then, on the same screen you
use to specify the graph type, turn the Outliers item “On”,
and draw the graph.
• Changing the “Q1Q3 Type” setting on the Setup screen can cause the Q1 and Q3 positions
to change, even when a Med-box graph is drawn based on a single list.
minX
MedQ1 Q3 maxX
minX
MedQ1 Q3 maxX
6-10
k Bar Graph
You can specify up to three lists for drawing a bar graph. The graph is labeled [1], [2], [3], and
so on, corresponding to lines 1, 2, 3, and so on of the list used for the graph data.
• Any of the following causes an error and cancels bar graph drawing.
- A Condition ERROR occurs when drawing of multiple graphs is specified using the graph
On/Off screen (page 6-7), and bar graph is specified for one of the graphs and a different
graph type is specified for another graph.
- A Dimension ERROR occurs when you draw a graph with two or three lists specified and
the specified lists have a different number of list elements.
- A Condition ERROR occurs when lists are assigned for Data1 and Data3, while “None” is
specified for Data2.
k Normal Distribution Curve
The normal distribution curve is graphed using the normal
distribution function.
XList specifies the list where the data is input, while Freq
specifies the list where the data frequency is input. 1 is
specified for Freq when frequency is not specified.
k Broken Line Graph
Lines connect center points of a histogram bar.
XList specifies the list where the data is input, while Freq specifies the list where the data
frequency is input. 1 is specified for Freq when frequency is not specified.
6-11
⇒
w(Draw)
The display screen appears as shown above before the graph is drawn. At this point, you can
change the Start and Width values.
k Displaying the Calculation Results of a Drawn Single-Variable Graph
Single-variable statistics can be expressed as both graphs
and parameter values. When these graphs are displayed,
the single-variable calculation results appear as shown to
the right when you press 1(1-VAR).
• Use c to scroll the list so you can view the items that run off the bottom of the screen.
The following describes the meaning of each of the parameters.
¯ x .................. mean
Σ x ................ sum
Σ x 2
............... sum of squares
σ x
................. population standard
deviation
s
x
................. sample standard
deviation
n ..................number of data items
minX ............. minimum
Q1 ................ first quartile
Med .............. median
Q3 ................ third quartile
maxX ............ maximum
Mod .............. mode
Mod:
n ..........number of data mode items
Mod:F ..........data mode frequency
• Press 6(DRAW) to return to the original single-variable statistical graph.
• When Mod has multiple solutions, they are all displayed.
• You can use the Setup screen’s “Q1Q3 Type” setting to select either “Std” (standard
calculation) or “OnData” (French calculation) for the Q1 and Q3 calculation mode.
For details about calculation methods while “Std” or “OnData” is selected, see “Calculation
Methods for the Std and OnData Settings” below.
6-12
k Calculation Methods for the Std and OnData Settings
Q1 and Q3 can be calculated in accordance with the Setup screen’s “Q1Q3 Type” setting as
described below.
u Std
With this calculation method, processing depends on whether the number of elements n in the
population is an even number or odd number.
When the number of elements
n is an even number:
Using the center point of the total population as the reference, the population elements are
divided into two groups: a lower half group and an upper half group. Q1 and Q3 then become
the values described below.
Q1 = {median of the group of 2
n items from the bottom of the population}
Q3 = {median of the group of 2
n items from the top of the population}
Center Point Center Point Center Point
When the number of elements
n is an odd number:
Using the median of the total population as the reference, the population elements are divided
into two groups: a lower half group (values less than the median) and an upper half group
(values greater than the median). The median value is excluded. Q1 and Q3 then become the
values described below.
Q1 = {median of the group of 2
n – 1 items from the bottom of the population}
Q3 = {median of the group of 2
n – 1 items from the top of the population}
• When n = 1, Q1 = Q3 = population center point.
2
4 + 5= Median
= Q1
2
2 + 3= Q3
2
6 + 7
12345678
2
4 + 5= Median
= Q1
2
2 + 3= Q3
2
6 + 7
12345678
6-13
Center Point Center Point
u OnData
The Q1 and Q3 values for this calculation method are described below.
Q1 = {value of element whose cumulative frequency ratio is greater than 1/4 and nearest to
1/4}
Q3 = {value of element whose cumulative frequency ratio is greater than 3/4 and nearest to
3/4}
The following shows an actual example of the above.
(Number of Elements: 10)
Data Value Frequency Cumulative
Frequency
Cumulative
Frequency Ratio
1 1 1 1/10 = 0.1
2 1 2 2/10 = 0.2
3 2 4 4/10 = 0.4
4 3 7 7/10 = 0.7
5 1 8 8/10 = 0.8
6 1 9 9/10 = 0.9
7 1 10 10/10 = 1.0
• 3 is the value of whose cumulative frequency ratio is greater than 1/4 and nearest to 1/4, so
Q1 = 3.
• 5 is the value of whose cumulative frequency ratio is greater than 3/4 and nearest to 3/4, so
Q3 = 5.
Reference Point (0.25) Reference Point (0.75)
Median
1234567 98
= Q1
2
2 + 3= Q3
2
7 + 8
Median
1234567 98
= Q1
2
2 + 3= Q3
2
7 + 8
Q1
0.1 0.2 0.4 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Q3
12633444 75
Q1
0.1 0.2 0.4 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0
Q3
12633444 75
6-14
3. Calculating and Graphing Paired-Variable
Statistical Data (Curve Fitting)
k Drawing a Scatter Diagram and xy Line Graph
The following procedure plots a scatter diagram and connects the dots to produce an xy line
graph.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Statistics mode.
2. Input the data into a list.
3. Specify Scatter (scatter diagram) or
xy Line ( xy line graph) as the graph type, and then
execute the graph operation.
Press A, J or !J(QUIT) to return to the List Editor.
Example Input the two sets of data shown below. Next, plot the data on a scatter
diagram and connect the dots to produce an
xy line graph.
0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2 ( x List)
–2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4 (
y List)
1 m Statistics
2 a.fwb.cwc.ewewf.cwe
-c.bwa.dwb.fwcwc.ew
3 (Scatter diagram) 1(GRAPH) 6(SET) c1(Scatter) J1(GRAPH1)
3 (
xy line graph) 1(GRAPH) 6(SET) c2( xy Line) J1(GRAPH1)
(Scatter diagram) (
xy line graph)
6-15
k Drawing a Regression Graph
Use the following procedure to input paired-variable statistical data, perform a regression
calculation using the data, and then graph the results.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Statistics mode.
2. Input the data into a list, and plot the scatter diagram.
3. Select the regression type, execute the calculation, and display the regression parameters.
4. Draw the regression graph.
Example Input the two sets of data shown below and plot the data on a scatter
diagram. Next, perform logarithmic regression on the data to display the
regression parameters, and then draw the corresponding regression
graph.
0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2 ( x List)
–2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4 (
y List)
1 m Statistics
2 a.fwb.cwc.ewewf.cwe
-c.bwa.dwb.fwcwc.ew
1(GRAPH) 6(SET) c1(Scatter) J1(GRAPH1)
3 1(CALC) 6( g) 2(Log)
4 6(DRAW)
• You can perform trace on a regression graph. You cannot perform trace scroll.
k Selecting the Regression Type
After you graph paired-variable statistical data, you can use the function menu at the bottom of
the display to select from a variety of different types of regression.
• { ax + b } / { a + bx } / { Med } / { X2 } / { X3 } / { X4 } / { Log } / { aebx } / { abx } / { Power } / { Sin } / { Logistic } ...
{linear regression ( ax + b form)}/{linear regression ( a + bx form)}/{Med-Med}/{quadratic
regression}/{cubic regression}/{quartic regression}/{logarithmic regression}/{exponential
regression ( ae bx
form)}/{exponential regression ( ab x
form)}/{power regression}/
{sinusoidal regression}/{logistic regression} calculation and graphing
• { 2-VAR }... {paired-variable statistical results}
6-16
k Displaying Regression Calculation Results
Whenever you perform a regression calculation, the regression formula parameter (such
as a and b in the linear regression y = ax + b ) calculation results appear on the display. The
regression formula parameter calculation results also appear as soon as you press 1(CALC)
and then a function key to select a regression type, while a graph is on the display.
The following parameters will also appear on the regression calculation result screen.
r ..............correlation coefficient (linear regression, logarithmic regression, exponential
regression, and power regression only)
r 2
.............coefficient of determination (except for Med-Med, sinusoidal regression, and
logistic regression)
MSe .........mean square error (except for Med-Med)
k Graphing Statistical Calculation Results
While the parameter calculation result is on the display, you can graph the displayed
regression formula by pressing 6(DRAW).
k Linear Regression Graph
Linear regression uses the method of least squares to plot a straight line that passes close to
as many data points as possible, and returns values for the slope and y -intercept ( y -coordinate
when x = 0) of the line.
The graphic representation of this relationship is a linear regression graph.
1(CALC) 2(X)
1(
ax + b ) or 2( a + bx )
6(DRAW)
The following is the linear regression model formula.
y = ax + b
a .............regression coefficient (slope)
b .............regression constant term ( y -intercept)
y = a + bx
a .............regression constant term ( y -intercept)
b .............regression coefficient (slope)
6-17
Cubic regression
Model formula .......
y = ax 3
+ bx 2
+ cx + d
a ..........regression third coefficient
b ..........regression second coefficient
c ..........regression first coefficient
d ..........regression constant term
( y -intercept)
Quadratic regression
Model formula .......
y = ax 2
+ bx + c
a ..........regression second coefficient
b ..........regression first coefficient
c ..........regression constant term
( y -intercept)
k Med-Med Graph
When it is suspected that there are a number of extreme values, a Med-Med graph can be
used in place of the least squares method. This is similar to linear regression, but it minimizes
the effects of extreme values.
1(CALC) 3(Med)
6(DRAW)
The following is the Med-Med graph model formula.
y = ax + b
a ..............Med-Med graph slope
b ..............Med-Med graph y -intercept
k Quadratic/Cubic/Quartic Regression Graph
A quadratic/cubic/quartic regression graph represents connection of the data points of a
scatter diagram. It uses the method of least squares to draw a curve that passes close to
as many data points as possible. The formula that represents this is quadratic/cubic/quartic
regression.
Ex. Quadratic regression
1(CALC) 4(X2)
6(DRAW)
Quartic regression
Model formula .......
y = ax 4
+ bx 3
+ cx 2
+ dx + e
a ..........regression fourth coefficient
b ..........regression third coefficient
c ..........regression second coefficient
d ..........regression first coefficient
e ..........regression constant term ( y -intercept)
6-18
k Logarithmic Regression Graph
Logarithmic regression expresses y as a logarithmic function of x . The standard logarithmic
regression formula is y = a + b × In x , so if we say that X = In x , the formula corresponds to
linear regression formula y = a + b X.
1(CALC) 6( g) 2(Log)
6(DRAW)
The following is the logarithmic regression model formula.
y = a + b ·ln x
a ..............regression constant term
b .............. regression coefficient
k Exponential Regression Graph
Exponential regression expresses y as a proportion of the exponential function of x . The
standard exponential regression formula is y = a × e bx
, so if we take the logarithms of both
sides we get In y = In a + bx . Next, if we say Y = In y , and A = In a , the formula corresponds to
linear regression formula Y = A + bx .
1(CALC) 6( g) 3(EXP)
1( aebx ) or 2( abx )
6(DRAW)
The following is the exponential regression model formula.
y = a · e bx
a ..............regression coefficient
b ..............regression constant term
y = a · b x
a ..............regression constant term
b ..............regression coefficient
6-19
k Power Regression Graph
Power regression expresses y as a proportion of the power of x . The standard power
regression formula is y = a × x b
, so if we take the logarithm of both sides we get In
y = In a + b × In x . Next, if we say X = In x , Y = In y , and A = In a , the formula corresponds to
linear regression formula Y = A + b X.
1(CALC) 6( g) 4(Power)
6(DRAW)
The following is the power regression model formula.
y = a · x b
a ..............regression coefficient
b ..............regression power
k Sinusoidal Regression Graph
Sinusoidal regression is best applied for cyclical data.
The following is the sinusoidal regression model formula.
y = a ·sin( bx + c ) + d
1(CALC) 6( g) 5(Sin)
6(DRAW)
Drawing a sine regression graph causes the angle unit setting of the calculator to automatically
change to Rad (radians). The angle unit does not change when you perform a sine regression
calculation without drawing a graph.
• Certain types of data may take a long time to calculate. This does not indicate malfunction.
6-20
k Logistic Regression Graph
Logistic regression is best applied for time-based phenomena in which there is a continual
increase until a saturation point is reached.
The following is the logistic regression model formula.
1(CALC) 6( g) 6( g) 1(Logistic)
6(DRAW)
• Certain types of data may take a long time to calculate. This does not indicate malfunction.
k Residual Calculation
Actual plot points ( y -coordinates) and regression model distance can be calculated during
regression calculations.
While the List Editor is on the display, recall the Setup screen to specify a LIST (“List 1”
through “List 26”) for “Resid List”. Calculated residual data is stored in the specified list.
The vertical distance from the plots to the regression model will be stored in the list.
Plots that are higher than the regression model are positive, while those that are lower are
negative.
Residual calculation can be performed and saved for all regression models.
Any data already existing in the selected list is cleared. The residual of each plot is stored in
the same precedence as the data used as the model.
y = c
1 + ae
–bx
y = c
1 + ae
–bx
6-21
k Displaying the Calculation Results of a Drawn Paired-Variable Graph
Paired-variable statistics can be expressed as both graphs and parameter values. When these
graphs are displayed, the paired-variable calculation results appear as shown below when you
press 1(CALC) 1(2-VAR).
• Use c to scroll the list so you can view the items that run off the bottom of the screen.
o ...........mean of data stored in x List
Σ x .........sum of data stored in x List
Σ x 2
........ sum of squares of data stored in
x List
σ
x
..........population standard deviation of
data stored in x List
s
x
.......... sample standard deviation of
data stored in x List
n ...........number of data
p ............mean of data stored in
y List
Σ y .........sum of data stored in y List
Σ y 2
........ sum of squares of data stored in y List
σ
y
.......... population standard deviation of data
stored in y List
s
y
.......... sample standard deviation of data
stored in y List
Σ xy ........ sum of the product of data stored in
x List and y List
minX ...... minimum of data stored in
x List
maxX ..... maximum of data stored in
x List
minY ...... minimum of data stored in
y List
maxY ..... maximum of data stored in
y List
k Copying a Regression Graph Formula to the Graph Mode
You can copy regression formula calculation results to the Graph mode graph relation list, and
store and compare.
1. While a regression calculation result is on the display (see “Displaying Regression
Calculation Results” on page 6-16), press 5(COPY).
• This will display the Graph mode graph relation list.*
1
2. Use f and c to highlight the area to which you want to copy the regression formula of
the displayed result.
3. Press w to save the copied graph formula and return to the previous regression calculation
result display.
*
1
You cannot edit regression formulas for graph formulas in the Graph mode.
6-22
4. Performing Statistical Calculations
All of the statistical calculations up to this point were performed after displaying a graph. The
following procedures can be used to perform statistical calculations alone.
u To specify statistical calculation data lists
You have to input the statistical data for the calculation you want to perform and specify
where it is located before you start a calculation. Display the statistical data and then press
2(CALC) 6(SET).
The following is the meaning for each item.
1Var XList ....... location of single-variable statistic
x values (XList)
1Var Freq ........ location of single-variable frequency values (Frequency)
2Var XList ....... location of paired-variable statistic
x values (XList)
2Var YList ....... location of paired-variable statistic
y values (YList)
2Var Freq ........ location of paired-variable frequency values (Frequency)
• Calculations in this section are performed based on the above specifications.
k Single-Variable Statistical Calculations
In the previous example under “Displaying the Calculation Results of a Drawn Single-Variable
Graph”, statistical calculation results were displayed after the graph was drawn. These were
numeric expressions of the characteristics of variables used in the graphic display.
These values can also be directly obtained by displaying the
List Editor and pressing 2(CALC) 1(1-VAR).
After this, pressing f or c scrolls the statistical calculation result display so you can view
variable characteristics.
For details on the meanings of these statistical values, see “Displaying the Calculation Results
of a Drawn Single-Variable Graph” (page 6-11).
6-23
k Paired-Variable Statistical Calculations
In the previous example under “Displaying the Calculation Results of a Drawn Paired-Variable
Graph”, statistical calculation results were displayed after the graph was drawn. These were
numeric expressions of the characteristics of variables used in the graphic display.
These values can also be directly obtained by displaying the
List Editor and pressing 2(CALC) 2(2-VAR).
After this, pressing f or c scrolls the statistical calculation result display so you can view
variable characteristics.
For details on the meanings of these statistical values, see “Displaying the Calculation Results
of a Drawn Paired-Variable Graph” (page 6-21).
k Regression Calculation
In the explanations from “Linear Regression Graph” to “Logistic Regression Graph”, regression
calculation results were displayed after the graph was drawn. Here, each coefficient value of
the regression line or regression curve is expressed as a number.
You can directly determine the same expression from the data input screen.
Pressing 2(CALC) 3(REG) displays a function menu, which contains the following items.
• { ax + b } / { a + bx } / { Med } / { X2 } / { X3 } / { X4 } / { Log } / { aebx } / { abx } / { Power } / { Sin } / { Logistic } ...
{linear regression (
ax + b form)}/{linear regression ( a + bx form)}/{Med-Med}/{quadratic
regression}/{cubic regression}/{quartic regression}/{logarithmic regression}/{exponential
regression ( ae bx
form)}/{exponential regression ( ab x
form)}/{power regression}/
{sinusoidal regression}/{logistic regression} parameters
Example To display single-variable regression parameters
2(CALC) 3(REG) 1(X) 1(
ax + b )
The meanings of the parameters that appear on this screen are the same as those for
“Displaying Regression Calculation Results” and “Linear Regression Graph” to “Logistic
Regression Graph”.
6-24
u Calculation of the Correlation Coefficient (r), Coefficient of Determination
(r
2
) and Mean Square Error (MSe)
After the regression formula parameters on the regression calculation result screen, the
following parameters also appear on the display. The parameters that appear depend on the
regression formula.
Correlation coefficient (r)
Displayed following: linear regression, logarithmic regression, exponential regression, or power
regression calculation.
Coefficient of determination (r2)
Displayed following: linear regression, quadratic regression, cubic regression, quartic
regression, logarithmic regression, exponential regression, power regression calculation.
Mean square error (MSe)
Displayed following any regression calculation except Med-Med.
Depending on the regression calculation type, mean square error (MSe) is obtained using the
following formulas.
• Linear Regression (
ax + b ) .............
(
a + bx ) .............
• Quadratic Regression .....................
• Cubic Regression ...........................
• Quartic Regression ........................
• Logarithmic Regression ..................
• Exponential Regression (
a · e bx
) .......
(
a · b x
) ........
M
Se =
Σ
1
n – 2
i=1
n
(y
i
– (ax
i
+ b))
2
M
Se =
Σ
1
n – 2
i=1
n
(y
i
– (ax
i
+ b))
2
M
Se = Σ
1
n – 2 i=1
n(yi – (a + bxi))2
M
Se = Σ
1
n – 2 i=1
n(yi – (a + bxi))2
M
Se = Σ
1
n – 3
i=1
n
(y
i
– (ax
i
+ bx
i
+ c))
2
2
M
Se = Σ
1
n – 3
i=1
n
(y
i
– (ax
i
+ bx
i
+ c))
2
2
M
Se = Σ
1
n – 4
i=1
n
(y
i
– (ax
i3
+ bx
i
+ cx
i
+ d ))
2
2
M
Se = Σ
1
n – 4
i=1
n
(y
i
– (ax
i3
+ bx
i
+ cx
i
+ d ))
2
2
M
Se =
Σ
1
n – 5 i=1
n(yi – (axi4+ bxi3 + cxi + dxi + e))2
2
M
Se =
Σ
1
n – 5 i=1
n(yi – (axi4+ bxi3 + cxi + dxi + e))2
2
M
Se =
Σ
1
n – 2
i=1
n
(y
i
– (a + b ln x
i
))
2
M
Se =
Σ
1
n – 2
i=1
n
(y
i
– (a + b ln x
i
))
2
M
Se = Σ
1
n – 2
i=1
n
(ln y
i
– (ln a + bx
i
))
2
M
Se = Σ
1
n – 2
i=1
n
(ln y
i
– (ln a + bx
i
))
2
M
Se = Σ
1
n – 2 i=1
n(ln yi – (ln a + (ln b) · xi ))2
M
Se = Σ
1
n – 2 i=1
n(ln yi – (ln a + (ln b) · xi ))2
6-25
• Power Regression ..........................
• Sin Regression ...............................
• Logistic Regression ........................
u Estimated Value Calculation for Regression Graphs
The Statistics mode also includes a Y-CAL function that uses regression to calculate the
estimated y -value for a particular x -value after graphing a paired-variable statistical
regression.
The following is the general procedure for using the Y-CAL function.
1. After drawing a regression graph, press !5(G-SOLVE) 1(Y-CAL) to enter the graph
selection mode, and then press w.
If there are multiple graphs on the display, use f and c to select the graph you want,
and then press w.
• This causes an
x -value input dialog box to appear.
2. Input the value you want for x and then press w.
• This causes the coordinates for
x and y to appear at
the bottom of the display, and moves the pointer to the
corresponding point on the graph.
3. Pressing v or a number key at this time causes the
x -value input dialog box to reappear
so you can perform another estimated value calculation if you want.
• The pointer does not appear if the calculated coordinates are not within the display range.
• The coordinates do not appear if “Off” is specified for the “Coord” item of the Setup screen.
M
Se =
Σ
1
n – 2
i=1
n
(ln y
i
– (ln a + b ln x
i
))
2
M
Se =
Σ
1
n – 2
i=1
n
(ln y
i
– (ln a + b ln x
i
))
2
M
Se =
Σ
1
n – 2 i=1
n(yi – (a sin (bxi + c) + d ))2
M
Se =
Σ
1
n – 2 i=1
n(yi – (a sin (bxi + c) + d ))2
M
Se =
Σ
1
n – 2 1 + ae
–bx
i
C
i=1
n
y
i
–
2
M
Se =
Σ
1
n – 2 1 + ae
–bx
i
C
i=1
n
y
i
–
2
6-26
u Regression Formula Copy Function from a Regression Calculation Result
Screen
In addition to the normal regression formula copy function that lets you copy the regression
calculation result screen after drawing a statistical graph (such as Scatter Plot), the Statistics
mode also has a function that lets you copy the regression formula obtained as the result of a
regression calculation. To copy a resulting regression formula, press 6(COPY).
k Estimated Value Calculation ( , )
After drawing a regression graph with the Statistics mode, you can use the Run-Matrix mode
to calculate estimated values for the regression graph’s x and y .
Example To perform a linear regression using the nearby data and estimate the
values of
and x when xi = 20 and yi = 1000
xi 10 15 20 25 30
yi 1003 1005 1010 1011 1014
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Statistics mode.
2. Input data into the list and draw the linear regression graph.
3. From the Main Menu, enter the Run-Matrix mode.
4. Press the keys as follows.
ca(value of xi )
K5(STAT) 2(
) w
The estimated value is displayed for xi = 20.
baaa(value of yi )
1(
ˆ x ) w
The estimated value ˆ x is displayed for yi = 1000.
• You cannot obtain estimated values for a Med-Med, quadratic regression, cubic regression,
quartic regression, sinusoidal regression, or logistic regression graph.
6-27
k Normal Probability Distribution Calculation
You can calculate normal probability distributions for single-variable statistics with the
Run-Matrix mode.
Press K6( g) 3(PROB) 6( g) to display a function menu, which contains the following
items.
• { P( } / { Q( } / { R( } ... obtains normal probability {P(
t )}/{Q( t )}/{R( t )} value
• {
t ( } ... {obtains normalized variate t ( x ) value}
• Normal probability P(
t ), Q( t ), and R( t ), and normalized variate t ( x ) are calculated using the
following formulas.
Standard Normal Distribution
Example The following table shows the results of measurements of the height of
20 college students. Determine what percentage of the students fall in
the range 160.5 cm to 175.5 cm. Also, in what percentile does the 175.5
cm tall student fall?
Class no. Height (cm) Frequency
1 158.5 1
2 160.5 1
3 163.3 2
4 167.5 2
5 170.2 3
P
(
t
)Q
(
t
)R
(
t
)
tt t
00 0
σ
x
P
(
t
)Q
(
t
)R
(
t
)
tt t
00 0
σ
x
Class no. Height (cm) Frequency
6 173.3 4
7 175.5 2
8 178.6 2
9 180.4 2
10 186.7 1
6-28
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Statistics mode.
2. Input the height data into List 1 and the frequency data into List 2.
3. Perform the single-variable statistical calculations.
You can obtain the normalized variate immediately after
performing single-variable statistical calculations only.
2(CALC) 6(SET)
1(LIST) bw
c2(LIST) cw!J(QUIT)
2(CALC) 1(1-VAR)
4. Press m, select the Run-Matrix mode, press K6( g) 3(PROB) to recall the
probability calculation (PROB) menu.
3(PROB) 6( g) 4(
t () bga.f)w
(Normalized variate
t for 160.5 cm) Result: –1.633855948
( –1.634)
4( t () bhf.f)w
(Normalized variate
t for 175.5 cm) Result: 0.4963343361
( 0.496)
1(P() a.ejg)-
1(P() -b.gde)w
(Percentage of total) Result: 0.638921
(63.9% of total)
3(R() a.ejg)w
(Percentile) Result: 0.30995
(31.0 percentile)
6-29
k Drawing a Normal Probability Distribution Graph
You can draw a normal probability distribution graph using manual graphing with the
Run-Matrix mode.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Run-Matrix mode.
2. Input the commands to draw a rectangular coordinate graph.
3. Input the probability value.
Example To draw a normal probability P (0.5) graph.
1 m Run-Matrix
!m(SET UP)2(Line)J
2 !4(SKETCH) 1(Cls) w
5(GRAPH) 1(Y=)
3 K6( g) 3(PROB) 6( g) 1(P() a.f)w
k Calculations Using the Distribution Function
You can use special functions in the Run-Matrix mode or Program mode to perform
calculations that are the same as the Statistics mode distribution function calculation (page
6-49).
Example To calculate normal probability distribution in the Run-Matrix mode for
the data {1, 2, 3}, when the population standard deviation is
σ
= 1.5 and
the population mean is = 2.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Run-Matrix mode.
2. Press the keys as follows.
!m(SET UP)2(Line)J
K5(STAT) 3(DIST) 1(NORM)
1(Npd) !*( { ) b,c,d
!/( } ) ,b.f,c)w
• For details about what you can do with the distribution function and its syntax, see
“Performing Distribution Calculations in a Program” (page 8-41).
6-30
k Determining Sample Standard Deviation and Sample Variance from List
Data
You can use functions to determine sample standard deviation and sample variance for
specified list data. This calculation is performed in the Run-Matrix mode. You can perform
calculations using data you saved to a list (List 1 to List 26) with the Statistics mode List
Editor or list data you input directly on the Run-Matrix mode screen.
Syntax StdDev(List
n [,List m ])
Variance(List
n [,List m ])
List
n ........Sample data
List
m .......Frequency data
Example To store the
x -data below in List 1, the frequency values in List 2, and
determine the sample standard deviation and sample variance
x 60 70 80 90
Frequency 3 5 4 1
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Statistics mode.
2. Use the List Editor to store the above data.
3. From the Main Menu, enter the Run-Matrix mode.
4. Press the keys as follows.
K5 (STAT)4 (StdDev) J
1(LIST) 1(List) b,1(List) c)w
J5(STAT)5 (Var) J
1(LIST) 1(List) b,1(List) c)w
6-31
k Calculations Using the TEST Command
You can use special functions in the Run-Matrix mode or Program mode to perform
calculations that are the same as the Statistics mode Z Test, t Test, and other test calculations
(page 6-32).
Example To determine the
z score and p -value when a one-sample Z test is
performed under the conditions below:
test condition (
condition)
≠
0
*, assumed population mean 0
= 0,
population standard deviation = 1, sample mean
o
= 1, number of
samples n = 2
* “
condition ≠ 0
” can be specified by entering 0 as the initial argument of
the one-sample Z test command “OneSampleZTest”.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Run-Matrix mode.
2. Perform the following key operation.
!m(SET UP)2(Line)J
K5(STAT) 6( g) 1(TEST) 1(Z)
1(1-Sample) a,a,b,b
,cw
JJJ
1(LIST) 1(List) !-(Ans) w
The following calculation results are displayed as ListAns elements 1 through 4.
1:
z score
2:
p -value
3: o
4:
n
• For details about the function of the supported TEST command and their syntax, see “Using
the TEST Command to Execute a Command in a Program” (page 8-45).
6-32
5. Tests
The Z Test provides a variety of different standardization-based tests. They make it possible to
test whether or not a sample accurately represents the population when the standard deviation
of a population (such as the entire population of a country) is known from previous tests. Z
testing is used for market research and public opinion research, that need to be performed
repeatedly.
1-Sample
Z Test tests for the unknown population mean when the population standard
deviation is known.
2-Sample
Z Test tests the equality of the means of two populations based on independent
samples when both population standard deviations are known.
1-Prop
Z Test tests for an unknown proportion of successes.
2-Prop
Z Test tests to compare the proportion of successes from two populations.
The t Test tests the hypothesis when the population standard deviation is unknown. The
hypothesis that is the opposite of the hypothesis being proven is called the null hypothesis ,
while the hypothesis being proved is called the alternative hypothesis . The
t Test is normally
applied to test the null hypothesis. Then a determination is made whether the null hypothesis
or alternative hypothesis will be adopted.
1-Sample
t Test tests the hypothesis for a single unknown population mean when the
population standard deviation is unknown.
2-Sample
t Test compares the population means when the population standard deviations are
unknown.
LinearReg
t Test calculates the strength of the linear association of paired data.
With the
χ
χ 2
test , a number of independent groups are provided and a hypothesis is tested
relative to the probability of samples being included in each group.
The
χ
χ 2
GOF test ( χ 2
one-way Test) tests whether the observed count of sample data fits
a certain distribution. For example, it can be used to determine conformance with normal
distribution or binomial distribution.
The
χ
χ 2
two-way test creates a cross-tabulation table that structures mainly two qualitative
variables (such as “Yes” and “No”), and evaluates the independence of the variables.
2-Sample F Test tests the hypothesis for the ratio of sample variances. It could be used, for
example, to test the carcinogenic effects of multiple suspected factors such as tobacco use,
alcohol, vitamin deficiency, high coffee intake, inactivity, poor living habits, etc.
ANOVA tests the hypothesis that the population means of the samples are equal when
there are multiple samples. It could be used, for example, to test whether or not different
combinations of materials have an effect on the quality and life of a final product.
One-Way ANOVA is used when there is one independent variable and one dependent
variable.
Two-Way ANOVA is used when there are two independent variables and one dependent
variable.
6-33
The following pages explain various statistical calculation methods based on the principles
described above. Details concerning statistical principles and terminology can be found in any
standard statistics textbook.
On the initial Statistics mode screen, press 3(TEST) to display the test menu, which
contains the following items.
• 3(TEST) 1(Z) ...
Z Tests (below)
2(t) ...
t Tests (page 6-36)
3(CHI) ... χ 2
Test (page 6-39)
4(F) ... 2-Sample
F Test (page 6-41)
5(ANOVA) ... ANOVA (page 6-42)
After setting all the parameters, use c to move the highlighting to “Execute” and then press
one of the function keys shown below to perform the calculation or draw the graph.
• 1(CALC) ... Performs the calculation.
• 6(DRAW) ... Draws the graph.
k Test Common Functions
• You can use the procedure below to specify the graph line color before graphing test
calculation results.
1. Display the Z-test, t-test, χ2 Test, 2-Sample F Test, or Two-Way ANOVA screen.
• To display the 1-Sample Z Test input screen, for example, display the List Editor and then
press 3(TEST)1(Z)1(1-SAMPLE).
2. Move the highlighting to “GphColor” and then press 1(COLOR).
3. On the color selection dialog box that appears, use the cursor keys to move the
highlighting to the desired color and then press w.
• V-Window settings are automatically optimized for drawing the graph.
k Z Tests
u Z Test Common Functions
You can use the following graph analysis functions after drawing a Z Test result output graph.
• 1(Z) ... Displays z score.
Pressing 1(Z) displays the z score at the bottom of the display, and displays the pointer at
the corresponding location in the graph (unless the location is off the graph screen).
Two points are displayed in the case of a two-tail test. Use d and e to move the pointer.
• 2(P) ... Displays p -value.
Pressing 2(P) displays the p -value at the bottom of the display without displaying the pointer.
• Executing an analysis function automatically stores the z and p values in alpha variables Z
and P, respectively.
6-34
u 1-Sample Z Test
This test is used when the population standard deviation is known to test the hypothesis. The
1-Sample Z Test is applied to the normal distribution.
Perform the following key operations from the List Editor.
3(TEST)
1(Z)
1(1-SAMPLE)
The following shows the parameter data specification items that are different from list data
specification.
Calculation Result Output Example
μ
≠ 11.4 .......... direction of test
s
x
.................. Displayed only for Data:List setting.
• [Save Res] does not save the
μ
condition in line 2.
u 2-Sample Z Test
This test is used when the standard deviations for two populations are known to test the
hypothesis. The 2-Sample Z Test is applied to the normal distribution.
Perform the following key operations from the List Editor.
3(TEST)
1(Z)
2(2-SAMPLE)
6-35
The following shows the parameter data specification items that are different from list data
specification.
Calculation Result Output Example
μ
1
≠
μ
2
............ direction of test
s
x 1
................ Displayed only for Data:List setting.
s
x 2
................ Displayed only for Data:List setting.
• [Save Res] does not save the
μ
1
condition in line 2.
u 1-Prop Z Test
This test is used to test for an unknown proportion of successes. The 1-Prop Z Test is applied
to the normal distribution.
Perform the following key operations from the List Editor.
3(TEST)
1(Z)
3(1-PROP)
Calculation Result Output Example
Prop ≠ 0.5 ....... direction of test
• [Save Res] does not save the Prop condition in line 2.
6-36
u 2-Prop Z Test
This test is used to compare the proportion of successes. The 2-Prop Z Test is applied to the
normal distribution.
Perform the following key operation from the List Editor.
3(TEST)
1(Z)
4(2-PROP)
Calculation Result Output Example
p 1
> p 2
............ direction of test
• [Save Res] does not save the
p 1
condition in line 2.
k t Tests
u t Test Common Functions
You can use the following graph analysis functions after drawing a t Test result output graph.
• 1(T) ... Displays t score.
Pressing 1(T) displays the t score at the bottom of the display, and displays the pointer at the
corresponding location in the graph (unless the location is off the graph screen).
Two points are displayed in the case of a two-tail test. Use d and e to move the pointer.
• 2(P) ... Displays p -value.
Pressing 2(P) displays the p -value at the bottom of the display without displaying the pointer.
• Executing an analysis function automatically stores the
t and p values in alpha variables T
and P, respectively.
6-37
u 1-Sample t Test
This test uses the hypothesis test for a single unknown population mean when the population
standard deviation is unknown. The 1-Sample
t Test is applied to t distribution.
Perform the following key operations from the List Editor.
3(TEST)
2(t)
1(1-SAMPLE)
The following shows the parameter data specification items that are different from list data
specification.
Calculation Result Output Example
μ
≠ 11.3 .......... direction of test
• [Save Res] does not save the
μ
condition in line 2.
u 2-Sample t Test
2-Sample t Test compares the population means when the population standard deviations are
unknown. The 2-Sample t Test is applied to t distribution.
Perform the following key operations from the List Editor.
3(TEST)
2(t)
2(2-SAMPLE)
6-38
The following shows the parameter data specification items that are different from list data
specification.
Calculation Result Output Example
μ
1
≠
μ
2
............ direction of test
s
p
................. Displayed only when Pooled:On setting.
• [Save Res] does not save the
μ
1
condition in line 2.
u LinearReg t Test
LinearReg t Test treats paired-variable data sets as ( x , y ) pairs, and uses the method of least
squares to determine the most appropriate a , b coefficients of the data for the regression
formula y = a + bx . It also determines the correlation coefficient and t score, and calculates the
extent of the relationship between x and y .
Perform the following key operations from the List Editor.
3(TEST)
2(t)
3(REG)
Calculation Result Output Example
β
≠ 0 &
ρ
≠ 0 ......... direction of test
6-39
Pressing 6(COPY) while a calculation result is on the display copies the regression formula
to the graph relation list.
When there is a list specified for the [Resid List] item on the Setup screen, regression formula
residual data is automatically saved to the specified list after the calculation is finished.
• You cannot draw a graph for LinearReg
t Test.
• [Save Res] does not save the
β
&
ρ
conditions in line 2.
• When the list specified by [Save Res] is the same list specified by the [Resid List] item on the
Setup screen, only [Resid List] data is saved in the list.
k 2
Test
• 2
Test Common Functions
You can use the following graph analysis functions after drawing a graph.
• 1(CHI) ... Displays χ 2
value.
Pressing 1(CHI) displays the χ 2
value at the bottom of the display, and displays the pointer at
the corresponding location in the graph (unless the location is off the graph screen).
• 2(P) ... Displays p -value.
Pressing 2(P) displays the p -value at the bottom of the display without displaying the pointer.
• Executing an analysis function automatically stores the χ 2
and p values in alpha variables C
and P, respectively.
• 2
GOF Test ( 2
one-way Test)
The
χ
2
GOF Test ( 2
one-way test) tests whether the frequency of sample data fits a certain
distribution. For example, it can be used to determine conformance with normal distribution or
binomial distribution.
Perform the following key operations from the List Editor.
3(TEST)
3(CHI)
1(GOF)
6-40
Next, specify the lists that contain the data. The following shows the meaning of the above
items.
Observed ...... name of list (1 to 26) that contains observed counts (all cells positive
integers)
Expected ....... name of list (1 to 26) that is for saving expected frequency
CNTRB ......... Specifies a list (List 1 to List 26) as the storage location of the contribution
of each observed count obtained as calculation results.
Calculation Result Output Examples
CNTRB ......... list for output of contribution values
• 2
two-way Test
χ
2
two-way Test sets up a number of independent groups and tests hypothesis related to
the proportion of the sample included in each group. The χ 2
Test is applied to dichotomous
variables (variable with two possible values, such as yes/no).
Perform the following key operations from the List Editor.
3(TEST)
3(CHI)
2(2WAY)
Next, specify the matrix that contains the data. The following shows the meaning of the above
items.
Observed ...... name of matrix (A to Z) that contains observed counts (all cells positive
integers)
Expected ....... name of matrix (A to Z) that is for saving expected frequency
Calculation Result Output Example
6-41
• The matrix must be at least two lines by two columns. An error occurs if the matrix has only
one line or one column.
• Pressing 1(Mat) while the “Observed” and “Expected” parameter settings are highlighted
will display the Matrix (A to Z) setting screen.
• Pressing 2( 'MAT) while setting parameters enters the Matrix Editor, which you can use to
edit and view the contents of matrices.
• Pressing 6( 'MAT) while a calculation result is displayed enters the Matrix Editor, which
you can use to edit and view the contents of matrices.
k 2-Sample F Test
2-Sample F Test tests the hypothesis for the ratio of sample variances. The F Test is applied
to the F distribution.
Perform the following key operations from the List Editor.
3(TEST)
4(F)
The following shows the parameter data specification items that are different from list data
specification.
Calculation Result Output Example
σ
1
≠
σ
2
............ direction of test
¯ x 1
.................. Displayed only for Data:List setting.
¯ x 2
.................. Displayed only for Data:List setting.
6-42
You can use the following graph analysis functions after drawing a graph.
• 1(F) ... Displays F value.
Pressing 1(F) displays the F value at the bottom of the display, and displays the pointer at
the corresponding location in the graph (unless the location is off the graph screen).
Two points are displayed in the case of a two-tail test. Use d and e to move the pointer.
• 2(P) ... Displays p -value.
Pressing 2(P) displays the p -value at the bottom of the display without displaying the pointer.
• Executing an analysis function automatically stores the F and p values in variables F and P,
respectively.
• [Save Res] does not save the σ 1
condition in line 2.
k ANOVA
ANOVA tests the hypothesis that the population means of the samples are equal when there
are multiple samples.
One-Way ANOVA is used when there is one independent variable and one dependent
variable.
Two-Way ANOVA is used when there are two independent variables and one dependent
variable.
Perform the following key operations from the List Editor.
3(TEST)
5(ANOVA)
The following is the meaning of each item in the case of list data specification.
How Many ..... selects One-Way ANOVA or Two-Way ANOVA (number of levels)
Factor A ........ list to be used for category data (List 1 to 26)
Dependnt ...... list to be used for sample data (List 1 to 26)
Save Res ...... first list for storage of calculation results (None or List 1 to 22)*
1
Execute ......... executes a calculation or draws a graph (Two-Way ANOVA only)
*
1
[Save Res] saves each vertical column of the table into its own list. The leftmost column
is saved in the specified list, and each subsequent column to the right is saved in the next
sequentially numbered list. Up to five lists can be used for storing columns. You can specify
an first list number in the range of 1 to 22.
6-43
The following item appears in the case of Two-Way ANOVA only.
Factor B ........ list to be used for category data (List 1 to 26)
GphColor ...... specifies the graph line color (page 6-33)
After setting all the parameters, use c to move the highlighting to “Execute” and then press
one of the function keys shown below to perform the calculation or draw the graph.
• 1(CALC) ... Performs the calculation.
• 6(DRAW) ... Draws the graph (Two-Way ANOVA only).
Calculation results are displayed in table form, just as they appear in science books.
Calculation Result Output Example
One-Way ANOVA
Line 1 (A) .......... Factor A
df value, SS value, MS value, F value, p -value
Line 2 (ERR) ..... Error
df value, SS value, MS value
Two-Way ANOVA
Line 1 (A) .......... Factor A
df value, SS value, MS value, F value, p -value
Line 2 (B) .......... Factor B
df value, SS value, MS value, F value, p -value
Line 3 (AB) ........ Factor A × Factor B
df value, SS value, MS value, F value, p -value
* Line 3 does not appear when there is only one observation in each
cell.
Line 4 (ERR) ..... Error
df value, SS value, MS value
F ...................... F value
p ....................... p -value
df ..................... degrees of freedom
SS ..................... sum of squares
MS ................... mean squares
With Two-Way ANOVA, you can draw Interaction Plot graphs. The number of graphs depends
on Factor B, while the number of X-axis data depends on the Factor A. The Y-axis is the
average value of each category.
You can use the following graph analysis function after drawing a graph.
• 1(Trace) or !1(TRACE) ... Trace function
Pressing d or e moves the pointer on the graph in the corresponding direction. When there
are multiple graphs, you can move between graphs by pressing f and c.
6-44
• Graphing is available with Two-Way ANOVA only. V-Window settings are performed
automatically, regardless of Setup screen settings.
• Using the Trace function automatically stores the number of conditions to variable A and the
mean value to variable M, respectively.
k ANOVA (Two-Way)
u Description
The nearby table shows measurement results for a metal product produced by a heat
treatment process based on two treatment levels: time (A) and temperature (B). The
experiments were repeated twice each under identical conditions.
Perform analysis of variance on the following null hypothesis, using a significance level of 5%.
H
o
: No change in strength due to time
H
o
: No change in strength due to heat treatment temperature
H
o
: No change in strength due to interaction of time and heat treatment temperature
u Solution
Use Two-Way ANOVA to test the above hypothesis.
Input the above data as shown below.
List1={1,1,1,1,2,2,2,2}
List2={1,1,2,2,1,1,2,2}
List3={113,116,139,132,133,131,126,122}
Define List 3 (the data for each group) as Dependent. Define List 1 and List 2 (the factor
numbers for each data item in List 3) as Factor A and Factor B respectively.
Executing the test produces the following results.
• Time differential (A) level of significance P = 0.2458019517
The level of significance (
p = 0.2458019517) is greater than the significance level (0.05), so
the hypothesis is not rejected.
• Temperature differential (B) level of significance P = 0.04222398836
The level of significance (
p = 0.04222398836) is less than the significance level (0.05), so the
hypothesis is rejected.
• Interaction (A × B) level of significance P = 2.78169946e-3
The level of significance (
p = 2.78169946e-3) is less than the significance level (0.05), so the
hypothesis is rejected.
B (Heat Treatment Temperature) B1 B2
A1 113 , 116
133 , 131
139 , 132
126 , 122
A2
A (Time)
B (Heat Treatment Temperature) B1 B2
A1 113 , 116
133 , 131
139 , 132
126 , 122
A2
A (Time)
6-45
The above test indicates that the time differential is not significant, the temperature differential
is significant, and interaction is highly significant.
u Input Example
u Results
6-46
6. Confidence Interval
A confidence interval is a range (interval) that includes a statistical value, usually the
population mean.
A confidence interval that is too broad makes it difficult to get an idea of where the population
value (true value) is located. A narrow confidence interval, on the other hand, limits the
population value and makes it difficult to obtain reliable results. The most commonly used
confidence levels are 95% and 99%. Raising the confidence level broadens the confidence
interval, while lowering the confidence level narrows the confidence level, but it also
increases the chance of accidently overlooking the population value. With a 95% confidence
interval, for example, the population value is not included within the resulting intervals 5% of
the time.
When you plan to conduct a survey and then t test and Z test the data, you must also consider
the sample size, confidence interval width, and confidence level. The confidence level changes
in accordance with the application.
1-Sample Z Interval calculates the confidence interval for an unknown population mean when
the population standard deviation is known.
2-Sample
Z Interval calculates the confidence interval for the difference between two
population means when the population standard deviations of two samples are known.
1-Prop
Z Interval calculates the confidence interval for an unknown proportion of successes.
2-Prop
Z Interval calculates the confidence interval for the difference between the proportion
of successes in two populations.
1-Sample
t Interval calculates the confidence interval for an unknown population mean when
the population standard deviation is unknown.
2-Sample
t Interval calculates the confidence interval for the difference between two
population means when both population standard deviations are unknown.
On the initial Statistics mode screen, press 4(INTR) to display the confidence interval
menu, which contains the following items.
• 4(INTR) 1(Z) ... Z intervals (page 6-47)
2(t) ...
t intervals (page 6-48)
After setting all the parameters, use c to move the highlighting to “Execute” and then press
the function key shown below to perform the calculation.
• 1(CALC) ... Performs the calculation.
• There is no graphing for confidence interval functions.
6-47
u General Confidence Interval Precaution
Inputting a value in the range of 0 < C-Level < 1 for the C-Level setting sets a value you input.
Inputting a value in the range of 1 < C-Level < 100 sets a value equivalent to your input divided
by 100.
k Z Interval
u 1-Sample Z Interval
1-Sample Z Interval calculates the confidence interval for an unknown population mean when
the population standard deviation is known.
Perform the following key operations from the List Editor.
4(INTR)
1(Z)
1(1-SAMPLE)
The following shows the parameter data specification items that are different from list data
specification.
Calculation Result Output Example
u 2-Sample Z Interval
2-Sample Z Interval calculates the confidence interval for the difference between two
population means when the population standard deviations of two samples are known.
Perform the following key operations from the List Editor.
4(INTR)
1(Z)
2(2-SAMPLE)
6-48
u 1-Prop Z Interval
1-Prop Z Interval uses the number of data to calculate the confidence interval for an unknown
proportion of successes.
Perform the following key operations from the List Editor.
4(INTR)
1(Z)
3(1-PROP)
Data is specified using parameter specification.
Calculation Result Output Example
u 2-Prop Z Interval
2-Prop Z Interval uses the number of data items to calculate the confidence interval for the
defference between the proportion of successes in two populations.
Perform the following key operations from the List Editor.
4(INTR)
1(Z)
4(2-PROP)
k t Interval
u 1-Sample t Interval
1-Sample t Interval calculates the confidence interval for an unknown population mean when
the population standard deviation is unknown.
Perform the following key operations from the List Editor.
4(INTR)
2(t)
1(1-SAMPLE)
6-49
The following shows the parameter data specification items that are different from list data
specification.
Calculation Result Output Example
u 2-Sample t Interval
2-Sample t Interval calculates the confidence interval for the difference between two
population means when both population standard deviations are unknown. The t interval is
applied to t distribution.
Perform the following key operations from the List Editor.
4(INTR)
2(t)
2(2-SAMPLE)
7. Distribution
There is a variety of different types of distribution, but the most well-known is “normal
distribution”, which is essential for performing statistical calculations. Normal distribution
is a symmetrical distribution centered on the greatest occurrences of mean data (highest
frequency), with the frequency decreasing as you move away from the center. Poisson
distribution, geometric distribution, and various other distribution shapes are also used,
depending on the data type.
Certain trends can be determined once the distribution shape is determined. You can calculate
the probability of data taken from a distribution being less than a specific value.
For example, distribution can be used to calculate the yield rate when manufacturing some
product. Once a value is established as the criteria, you can calculate normal probability when
estimating what percent of the products meet the criteria. Conversely, a success rate target
(80% for example) is set up as the hypothesis, and normal distribution is used to estimate the
proportion of the products will reach this value.
6-50
Normal probability density calculates the probability density of normal distribution from a
specified
x value.
Normal cumulative distribution calculates the probability of normal distribution data falling
between two specific values.
Inverse normal cumulative distribution calculates a value that represents the location within
a normal distribution for a specific cumulative probability.
Student- t probability density calculates t probability density from a specified x value.
Student- t cumulative distribution calculates the probability of t distribution data falling
between two specific values.
Inverse Student- t cumulative distribution calculates the lower bound value of a Student- t
cumulative probability density for a specified percentage.
Like t distribution, probability density (or probability), cumulative distribution and inverse
cumulative distribution can also be calculated for
χ
2
, F , Binomial , Poisson , Geometric and
Hypergeometric distributions.
On the initial Statistics mode screen, press 5(DIST) to display the distribution menu, which
contains the following items.
• 5(DIST) 1(NORM) ... Normal distribution (page 6-51)
2(t) ... Student-
t distribution (page 6-53)
3(CHI) ... χ 2
distribution (page 6-54)
4(F) ...
F distribution (page 6-56)
5(BINOMIAL) ... Binomial distribution (page 6-57)
6( g) 1(POISSON) ... Poisson distribution (page 6-59)
6( g) 2(GEO) ... Geometric distribution (page 6-61)
6( g) 3(HYPRGEO) ... Hypergeometric distribution (page 6-63)
After setting all the parameters, use c to move the highlighting to “Execute” and then press
one of the function keys shown below to perform the calculation or draw the graph.
• 1(CALC) ... Performs the calculation.
• 6(DRAW) ... Draws the graph.
k Common Distribution Functions
• Before drawing the graph of a distribution calculation result, you can use the procedure
below to specify the graph line color (when Data:Variable only).
1. Display the distribution input screen.
• To display the normal probability density input screen, for example, display the List Editor
and then press 5(DIST)1(NORM)1(Npd).
2. Move the highlighting to “GphColor” and then press 1(COLOR).
3. On the color selection dialog box that appears, use the cursor keys to move the
highlighting to the desired color and then press w.
6-51
• V-Window settings for graph drawing are set automatically when the Setup screen’s “Stat
Wind” setting is “Auto”. Current V-Window settings are used for graph drawing when the “Stat
Wind” setting is “Manual”.
• After drawing a graph, you can use the P-CAL function to calculate an estimated
p -value for
a particular x value. The P-CAL function can be used only after a Normal Probability Density,
Student-
t Probability Density, 2
Probability Density, or F Probability Density graph is drawn.
The following is the general procedure for using the P-CAL function.
1. After drawing a distribution graph, press !5(G-SOLVE) 1(P-CAL) to display the
x
value input dialog box.
2. Input the value you want for
x and then press w.
• This causes the
x and p values to appear at the bottom of the display, and moves the
pointer to the corresponding point on the graph.
3. Pressing v or a number key at this time causes the
x value input dialog box to reappear
so you can perform another estimated value calculation if you want.
4. After you are finished, press J to clear the coordinate values and the pointer from the
display.
• Executing an analysis function automatically stores the
x and p values in variables X and P,
respectively.
k Normal Distribution
• Normal Probability Density 5(DIST) 1(NORM) 1(Npd)
Normal Probability Density calculates the probability
density (
p ) for a specified single x -value or a list. When a
list is specified, calculation results for each list element are
displayed in list form.
• Normal probability density is applied to standard normal distribution.
• Specifying
= 1 and = 0 specifies standard normal distribution.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified Graph when an
x -value is specified
• Graphing is supported only when a variable is specified and a single x -value is entered as
data.
6-52
Tail:Left
upper boundary
of integration
interval
Tail:Right
lower boundary
of integration
interval
Tail:Central
upper and lower
boundaries of
integration interval
Specify the probability and use this formula to obtain the integration interval.
• This calculator performs the above calculation using the following: ∞ = 1E99, – ∞ = –1E99
• There is no graphing for Inverse Normal Cumulative Distribution.
• Normal Cumulative Distribution 5(DIST) 1(NORM) 2(Ncd)
Normal Cumulative Distribution calculates the normal
cumulative probability of a normal distribution between a
lower bound and an upper bound.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified Graph when an
x -value is specified
• Graphing is supported only when a variable is specified and a single
x -value is entered as
data.
• Inverse Normal Cumulative Distribution 5(DIST) 1(NORM) 3(InvN)
Inverse Normal Cumulative Distribution calculates the
boundary value(s) of a normal cumulative distribution
probability for specified values.
Area: probability value
(0 < Area < 1)
Inverse cumulative normal distribution calculates a value that represents the location within a
normal distribution for a specific cumulative probability.
f(x)dx =p
−∞
∫
Upper
f(x)dx =p
+∞
∫
Lower
f(x)dx =p
∫
Upper
Lower
f(x)dx =p
−∞
∫
Upper
f(x)dx =p
+∞
∫
Lower
f(x)dx =p
∫
Upper
Lower
6-53
k Student- t Distribution
• Student- t Probability Density 5(DIST) 2(t) 1(tpd)
Student-
t Probability Density calculates the probability
density ( p ) for a specified single x -value or a list. When a
list is specified, calculation results for each list element are
displayed in list form.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified Graph when variable (
x ) is specified
• Graphing is supported only when a variable is specified and a single x -value is entered as
data.
• Student- t Cumulative Distribution 5(DIST) 2(t) 2(tcd)
Student-
t Cumulative Distribution calculates the Student- t
cumulative probability of a Student- t distribution between a
lower bound and an upper bound.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified Graph when variable (
x ) is specified
• Graphing is supported only when a variable is specified and a single x -value is entered as
data.
6-54
• Inverse Student- t Cumulative Distribution 5(DIST) 2(t) 3(Invt)
Inverse Student-
t Cumulative Distribution calculates the
lower bound value of a Student-
t cumulative distribution for
a specified
df (degrees of freedom) value.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified When variable (
x ) is specified
• There is no graphing for Inverse Student- t Cumulative Distribution.
k 2
Distribution
• 2
Probability Density 5(DIST) 3(CHI) 1(Cpd)
2
Probability Density calculates the 2
probability density
( p ) for a specified single x -value or a list. When a list is
specified, calculation results for each list element are
displayed in list form.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified Graph when variable (
x ) is specified
• Graphing is supported only when a variable is specified and a single x -value is entered as
data.
6-55
• 2
Cumulative Distribution 5(DIST) 3(CHI) 2(Ccd)
2
Cumulative Distribution calculates the cumulative
probability of a
2
distribution between a lower bound and
an upper bound.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified Graph when variable (
x ) is specified
• Graphing is supported only when a variable is specified and a single x -value is entered as
data.
• Inverse 2
Cumulative Distribution 5(DIST) 3(CHI) 3(InvC)
Inverse
2
Cumulative Distribution calculates the lower
bound value of a 2
cumulative distribution probability for a
specified df (degrees of freedom) value.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified When variable (
x ) is specified
• There is no graphing for Inverse 2
Cumulative Distribution.
6-56
k F Distribution
• F Probability Density 5(DIST) 4(F) 1(Fpd)
F Probability Density calculates the F probability density
( p ) for a specified single x -value or a list. When a list is
specified, calculation results for each list element are
displayed in list form.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified Graph when variable (
x ) is specified
• Graphing is supported only when a variable is specified and a single x -value is entered as
data.
• F Cumulative Distribution 5(DIST) 4(F) 2(Fcd)
F Cumulative Distribution calculates the cumulative
probability of an F distribution between a lower bound and
an upper bound.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified Graph when variable (
x ) is specified
• Graphing is supported only when a variable is specified and a single x -value is entered as
data.
6-57
• Inverse F Cumulative Distribution 5(DIST) 4(F) 3(InvF)
Inverse
F Cumulative Distribution calculates the lower
bound value of an
F cumulative distribution probability for
specified
n : df and d : df (degrees of freedom of numerator
and denominator) values.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified When variable (
x ) is specified
• There is no graphing for Inverse F Cumulative Distribution.
k Binomial Distribution
• Binomial Probability 5(DIST) 5(BINOMIAL) 1(Bpd)
Binomial Probability calculates a probability at a specific
single
x -value or each list element for the discrete binomial
distribution with the specified number of trials and
probability of success on each trial. When a list is specified,
calculation results for each list element are displayed in list
form.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified When variable (
x ) is specified
• There is no graphing for Binomial Probability.
6-58
• Binomial Cumulative Distribution 5(DIST) 5(BINOMIAL) 2(Bcd)
Binomial Cumulative Distribution determines the sum of
probabilities (cumulative probability) that x, in the Binomial
Probability p(x), will fall within a range specified from a
Lower value to an Upper value.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified When variable (
x ) is specified
• There is no graphing for Binomial Cumulative Distribution.
• Inverse Binomial Cumulative Distribution 5(DIST) 5(BINOMIAL) 3(InvB)
Inverse Binomial Cumulative Distribution calculates
the minimum number of trials of a binomial cumulative
distribution for specified values.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified When variable (
x ) is specified
• There is no graphing for Inverse Binomial Cumulative Distribution.
6-59
Important!
When executing the Inverse Binomial Cumulative Distribution calculation, the calculator uses
the specified Area value and the value that is one less than the Area value minimum number
of significant digits ( `Area value) to calculate minimum number of trials values.
The results are assigned to system variables
x Inv (calculation result using Area) and `x Inv
(calculation result using `Area). The calculator always displays the x Inv value only. However,
when the
x Inv and `x Inv values are different, the message shown below will appear with both
values.
The calculation results of Inverse Binomial Cumulative Distribution are integers. Accuracy
may be reduced when the Area value has 10 or more digits. Note that even a slight difference
in calculation accuracy affects calculation results. If a warning message appears, check the
displayed values.
k Poisson Distribution
• Poisson Probability 5(DIST) 6( g) 1(POISSON) 1(Ppd)
Poisson Probability calculates a probability at a specific
single
x -value or each list element for the discrete Poisson
distribution with the specified mean.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified When variable (
x ) is specified
• There is no graphing for Poisson Probability.
6-60
• Poisson Cumulative Distribution 5(DIST) 6( g) 1(POISSON) 2(Pcd)
Poisson Cumulative Distribution determines the sum of
probabilities (cumulative probability) that x, in the Poisson
Probability p(x), will fall within a range specified from a
Lower value to an Upper value.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified When variable (
x ) is specified
• There is no graphing for Poisson Cumulative Distribution.
• Inverse Poisson Cumulative Distribution
5(DIST) 6( g) 1(POISSON) 3(InvP)
Inverse Poisson Cumulative Distribution calculates
the minimum number of trials of a Poisson cumulative
probability distribution for specified values.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified When variable (
x ) is specified
• There is no graphing for Inverse Poisson Cumulative Distribution.
6-61
Important!
When executing the Inverse Poisson Cumulative Distribution calculation, the calculator uses
the specified Area value and the value that is one less than the Area value minimum number
of significant digits ( `Area value) to calculate minimum number of trials values.
The results are assigned to system variables
x Inv (calculation result using Area) and `x Inv
(calculation result using `Area). The calculator always displays the x Inv value only. However,
when the
x Inv and `x Inv values are different, the message will appear with both values.
The calculation results of Inverse Poisson Cumulative Distribution are integers. Accuracy may
be reduced when the Area value has 10 or more digits. Note that even a slight difference in
calculation accuracy affects calculation results. If a warning message appears, check the
displayed values.
k Geometric Distribution
• Geometric Probability 5(DIST) 6( g) 2(GEO) 1(Gpd)
Geometric Probability calculates the probability at a specific
single
x -value or each list element, and the number of the
trial on which the first success occurs, for the geometric
distribution with a specified probability of success.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified When variable (
x ) is specified
• There is no graphing for Geometric Probability.
6-62
• Geometric Cumulative Distribution 5(DIST) 6( g) 2(GEO) 2(Gcd)
Geometric Cumulative Distribution determines the sum of
probabilities (cumulative probability) that x, in the Geometric
Probability p(x), will fall within a range specified from a
Lower value to an Upper value.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified When variable (
x ) is specified
• There is no graphing for Geometric Cumulative Distribution.
• Inverse Geometric Cumulative Distribution 5(DIST) 6( g) 2(GEO) 3(InvG)
Inverse Geometric Cumulative Distribution calculates
the minimum number of trials of a geometric cumulative
probability distribution for specified values.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified When variable (
x ) is specified
• There is no graphing for Inverse Geometric Cumulative Distribution.
6-63
Important!
When executing the Inverse Geometric Cumulative Distribution calculation, the calculator uses
the specified Area value and the value that is one less than the Area value minimum number
of significant digits ( `Area value) to calculate minimum number of trials values.
The results are assigned to system variables
x Inv (calculation result using Area) and `x Inv
(calculation result using `Area). The calculator always displays the x Inv value only. However,
when the
x Inv and `x Inv values are different, the message will appear with both values.
The calculation results of Inverse Geometric Cumulative Distribution are integers. Accuracy
may be reduced when the Area value has 10 or more digits. Note that even a slight difference
in calculation accuracy affects calculation results. If a warning message appears, check the
displayed values.
k Hypergeometric Distribution
• Hypergeometric Probability 5(DIST) 6( g) 3(HYPRGEO) 1(Hpd)
Hypergeometric Probability calculates the probability at
a specific single
x -value or each list element, and the
number of the trial on which the first success occurs, for the
hypergeometric distribution with a specified probability of
success.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified When variable (
x ) is specified
• There is no graphing for Hypergeometric Probability.
• Hypergeometric Cumulative Distribution
5(DIST) 6( g) 3(HYPRGEO) 2(Hcd)
Hypergeometric Cumulative Distribution determines the
sum of probabilities (cumulative probability) that x, in the
Hypergeometric Probability p(x), will fall within a range
specified from a Lower value to an Upper value.
6-64
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified When variable (
x ) is specified
• There is no graphing for Hypergeometric Cumulative Distribution.
• Inverse Hypergeometric Cumulative Distribution
5(DIST) 6( g) 3(HYPRGEO) 3(InvH)
Inverse Hypergeometric Cumulative Distribution calculates
the minimum number of trials of a hypergeometric
cumulative probability distribution for specified values.
Calculation Result Output Examples
When a list is specified When variable (
x ) is specified
• There is no graphing for Inverse Hypergeometric Cumulative Distribution.
Important!
When executing the Inverse Hypergeometric Cumulative Distribution calculation, the calculator
uses the specified Area value and the value that is one less than the Area value minimum
number of significant digits ( `Area value) to calculate minimum number of trials values.
The results are assigned to system variables
x Inv (calculation result using Area) and `x Inv
(calculation result using `Area). The calculator always displays the
x Inv value only. However,
when the x Inv and `x Inv values are different, the message will appear with both values.
The calculation results of Inverse Hypergeometric Cumulative Distribution are integers.
Accuracy may be reduced when the Area value has 10 or more digits. Note that even a slight
difference in calculation accuracy affects calculation results. If a warning message appears,
check the displayed values.
6-65
8. Input and Output Terms of Tests, Confidence
Interval, and Distribution
The following explains the input and output terms that are used by tests, confidence interval,
and distribution.
k Input Terms
Data ...................................data type
(1-Sample Z Test) ...........population mean value test conditions (“ ≠ 0
” specifies two-tail test,
“< 0
” specifies lower one-tail test, “> 0
” specifies upper one-tail
test.)
1
(2-Sample Z Test) ..........population mean value test conditions (“ ≠ 2
” specifies two-tail test,
“< 2
” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is smaller than sample
2, “> 2
” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is greater than
sample 2.)
Prop (1-Prop
Z Test) ..........sample proportion test conditions (“ ≠ p 0
” specifies two-tail test,
“<
p 0
” specifies lower one-tail test, “> p 0
” specifies upper one-tail
test.)
p 1
(2-Prop Z Test) ...............sample proportion test conditions (“ ≠ p 2
” specifies two-tail test,
“<
p 2
” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is smaller than sample
2, “>
p 2
” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is greater than
sample 2.)
(1-Sample t Test) ............population mean value test conditions (“ ≠ 0
” specifies two-tail test,
“< 0
” specifies lower one-tail test, “> 0
” specifies upper one-tail
test.)
1
(2-Sample t Test) ...........sample mean value test conditions (“ ≠ 2
” specifies two-tail test,
“< 2
” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is smaller than sample
2, “> 2
” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is greater than
sample 2.)
β
&
ρ
(LinearReg t Test) .....
ρ
-value test conditions (“ ≠ 0” specifies two-tail test, “< 0” specifies
lower one-tail test, “> 0” specifies upper one-tail test.)
1
(2-Sample F Test) ..........population standard deviation test conditions (“ ≠ 2
” specifies
two-tail test, “< 2
” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is smaller
than sample 2, “> 2
” specifies one-tail test where sample 1 is
greater than sample 2.)
0
.......................................assumed population mean
.........................................population standard deviation ( > 0)
1
.......................................population standard deviation of sample 1 ( 1
> 0)
2
.......................................population standard deviation of sample 2 ( 2
> 0)
List .....................................list whose contents you want to use as data (List 1 to 26)
List1 ...................................list whose contents you want to use as sample 1 data (List 1 to 26)
List 2 ...................................list whose contents you want to use as sample 2 data (List 1 to 26)
6-66
Freq ....................................frequency (1 or List 1 to 26)
Freq1 ..................................frequency of sample 1 (1 or List 1 to 26)
Freq2 ..................................frequency of sample 2 (1 or List 1 to 26)
Execute ..............................executes a calculation or draws a graph
o .........................................mean of sample
o1
.......................................mean of sample 1
o2
........................................mean of sample 2
n .........................................size of sample (positive integer)
n 1
........................................size of sample 1 (positive integer)
n 2
........................................size of sample 2 (positive integer)
p 0
........................................expected sample proportion (0 < p 0
< 1)
p 1
........................................sample proportion test conditions
x (1-Prop Z Test) ................sample value ( x 0 integer)
x (1-Prop Z Interval) ...........data (0 or positive integer)
x 1
........................................data value of sample 1 ( x 1
0 integer)
x 2
........................................data value of sample 2 ( x 2
0 integer)
s
x
........................................sample standard deviation (s
x
> 0)
s
x 1
.......................................standard deviation of sample 1 (s
x 1
> 0)
s
x 2
.......................................standard deviation of sample 2 (s
x 2
> 0)
XList ...................................list for
x -axis data (List 1 to 26)
YList ...................................list for
y -axis data (List 1 to 26)
C-Level ...............................confidence level (0 C-Level < 1)
Pooled ................................pooling On (in effect) or Off (not in effect)
x (Distribution) ....................data
(Distribution) ...................standard deviation ( > 0)
(Distribution) ...................mean
(Distribution)....................mean
Lower (Distribution) ............lower boundary
Upper (Distribution) ............upper boundary
L.List (Distribution) .............list for lower bound data (List 1 to 26)
U.List (Distribution) ............list for upper bound data (List 1 to 26)
d f (Distribution) ..................degrees of freedom ( df > 0)
n : df (Distribution) ...............numerator degrees of freedom (positive integer)
d : df (Distribution) ...............denominator degrees of freedom (positive integer)
Numtrial (Distribution) ........number of trials
p (Distribution)....................success probability (0 p 1)
6-67
k Output Terms
z ......................................... z score
p ......................................... p -value
t .......................................... t score
2
........................................ 2
value
F ........................................ F value
pˆ ..........................................estimated sample proportion
pˆ
1
........................................estimated proportion of sample 1
pˆ 2
........................................estimated proportion of sample 2
o .........................................mean of sample
o1
........................................mean of sample 1
o2
........................................mean of sample 2
s
x
........................................sample standard deviation
s
x 1
.......................................standard deviation of sample 1
s
x 2
.......................................standard deviation of sample 2
s
p
........................................pooled sample standard deviation
n ........................................size of sample
n 1
........................................size of sample 1
n 2
........................................size of sample 2
d f ........................................degrees of freedom
a .........................................constant term
b .........................................coefficient
s
e
........................................standard error
r .........................................correlation coefficient
r 2
........................................coefficient of determination
Lower .................................confidence interval lower limit
Upper .................................confidence interval upper limit
6-68
9. Statistic Formula
k Test
Test
1-Sample
Z Test
z
= (o – μ0)/(σ/'n )
2-Sample Z Test
z
= (o1 – o2)/ (σ /n1) + (σ /n2)
2
1
2
2
1-Prop Z Test
z
= (x/n – p0)/ p0(1 – p0)/n
2-Prop
Z Test
z
= (x1/n1 – x2/n2)/ pˆ (1 – pˆ )(1/n1 + 1/n2)
1-Sample
t Test
t = (o – μ0)/(sx/'n )
2-Sample
t Test (pooled)
t = (o1 – o2)/ sp2(1/n1 + 1/n2)
df = n1 + n2 − 2
sp = ((n1 – 1)sx1
2 + (n2 – 1)sx2
2)/(n1 + n2 – 2)
2-Sample
t Test (not pooled)
t = (o1 – o2)/ sx1
2/n1 + sx2
2/n2
C = (sx1
2/n1)/(sx1
2/n1 + sx2
2/n2)
df = 1/(C2/(n1 – 1) + (1 – C)2/(n2 – 1))
LinearReg
t Test
t = r (n – 2)/(1 – r2)
b = Σ(xi – o)(yi – p)/Σ(xi – o)2a = p – bo
i=1
n
i=1
n
χ 2
GOF Test
O i
: The i -th element of the
observed list
E i
: The i -th element of the
expected list
χ 2
two-way Test
O ij
: The element at row i , column
j of the observed matrix
E ij
: The element at row i , column
j of the expected matrix
2-Sample
F Test
F = sx1
2 /sx2
2
ANOVA Test
F = MS/MSe
SS = Σni (oi − o)2
MS = SS/Fdf MSe = SSe/Ed
f
i=1
k
Fdf = k − 1 Edf = Σ(ni – 1)
SSe = Σ(ni – 1)sxi2
i=1
k
i=1
k
χ2 = Σ(Oi − Ei)2
/Ei
i
k
χ2 = Σ(Oi − Ei)2
/Ei
i
k
χ2 = ΣΣ(Oij − Eij)2
/Eij
i
k
j
R
Eij = ΣOij • ΣOij / Σ
ΣOi
j
i=1
k
i=1
k
j=1
R
j=1
R
χ2 = ΣΣ(Oij − Eij)2
/Eij
i
k
j
R
Eij = ΣOij • ΣOij / Σ
ΣOi
j
i=1
k
i=1
k
j=1
R
j=1
R
6-69
k Confidence Interval
Confidence Interval Lower: confidence interval lower limit
Upper: confidence interval upper limit
1-Sample
Z Interval Lower, Upper = o + Z( /2) · σ/
'
n
α
2-Sample Z Interval
Lower, Upper = (o1 – o2) + Z( /2) σ /n1 + σ /n2
2
1
2
2
α
1-Prop
Z Interval
Lower, Upper = x/n + Z( /2) 1/n · (x/n · (1 – x/n))
α
2-Prop
Z Interval
Lower, Upper = (x
1/
n
1 –
x
2/
n
2)
+ Z( /2) (x
1/
n
1 · (1 –
x
1/
n
1))/
n
1 + (
x
2/
n
2 · (1 –
x
2/
n
2))/
n
2
α
1-Sample
t Interval
Lower, Upper = o + tn−1( /2) · sx/'n
α
2-Sample
t Interval
(pooled)
Lower, Upper = (o1 – o2) + tn1+n2−2 ( /2) sp2(1/n1 + 1/n2)
sp = ((n1 – 1)sx1
2 + (n2 – 1)sx2
2)/(n1 + n2 – 2)
α
2-Sample
t Interval
(not pooled)
Lower, Upper
= (o
1
– o
2
) +
tdf
( /2) s
x
1
2
/
n
1
+ s
x
2
2
/
n
2
df
= 1/(C
2
/(
n
1
– 1) + (1 – C)
2
/(
n
2
– 1))
α
C = (s
x
1
2
/
n
1
)/(s
x
1
2
/
n
1
+ s
x
2
2
/
n
2
)
α
: level of significance
α
= 1 − [C-Level ] C-Level : confidence level (0 C-Level < 1)
Z (
α
/2): upper
α
/2 point of standard normal distribution
t df
(
α
/2): upper
α
/2 point of t distribution with df degrees of freedom
6-70
k Distribution (Continuous)
Distribution Probability Density
Cumulative Distribution
Normal
Distribution
πσ
2
p(x) = 1e–2 2
σ
(x – μ)2
μ
(
> 0)
σ
p = p(x)dx
Upper
Lower
∫
Student- t
Distribution
p(x) = ×
Γ
Γ
× df
π
– df+1
2
2
df
2
df + 1
df
x2
1 +
χ 2
Distribution
p(x) = ×
(x 0)
Γ
1
2
df
df
2
× x
2
1df
2–1x
2
–
× e
F Distribution
ndf
2x
ddf
ndf ndf
2–1
ddf
ndf × x
1 +
ndf + ddf
2
p(x) =
–
Γ2
ndf + ddf
Γ2
ndf × Γ 2
ddf
(x 0)
Distribution Inverse Cumulative Distribution
Normal
Distribution
p = p(x)dx
Upper
–∞
∫
p = p(x)dx
Lower
∞
∫
p = p(x)dx
Upper
Lower
∫
tail = Left tail = Right tail = Central
Student-
t
Distribution
p = p(x)dx
Lower
∞
∫
χ 2
Distribution
F Distribution
6-71
k Distribution (Discrete)
Distribution Probability
Binomial Distribution
p(x) = nCxpx(1–p)n – x(x = 0, 1, ·······, n) n : number of trials
Poisson Distribution (x = 0, 1, 2, ···)
p(x) =x!
e–
λ
λ
×x
λ
: mean (
λ
> 0)
Geometric Distribution
p(x) = p(1– p)x – 1 (x = 1, 2, 3, ···)
Hypergeometric
Distribution
p(x) =MCx × N – MCn – x
NCn
n : Number of elements extracted from population (0 x integer)
M : Number of elements contained in attribute A (0 M integer)
N : Number of population elements ( n N , M N integer)
Distribution Cumulative Distribution
Inverse Cumulative Distribution
Binomial Distribution
p = Σ p(x)
x=Lower
Upper
p H Σ p(x)
x=0
X
Poisson Distribution
Geometric Distribution
p = Σ p(x)
x=Lower
Upper
p H Σ p(x)
x=1
X
Hypergeometric
Distribution
p = Σ p(x)
x=Lower
Upper
p H Σ p(x)
x=0
X
7-1
Chapter 7 Financial Calculation
Important!
• Calculation results produced in this mode should be regarded as reference values only.
• Whenever performing an actual financial transaction, be sure to check any calculation results
obtained using this calculator with against the figures calculated by your financial institution.
1. Before Performing Financial Calculations
From the Main Menu, enter the Financial mode and display the Financial screen like the one
shown below.
Financial 1 screen Financial 2 screen
• { SIMPLE } … {simple interest}
• { COMPND } … {compound interest}
• { CASH } … {cash flow (investment appraisal)}
• { AMORTZN } … {amortization}
• { CONVERT } … {interest rate conversion}
• { COST } … {cost, selling price, margin}
• { DAYS } … {day/date calculations}
• { DEPREC } … {depreciation calculations}
• {BOND} … {bond calculations}
7
7-2
k Setup Items
indicates default setting.
u Payment
• { BEGIN }/{ END } … Specifies {beginning of the period}/{end of the period} payment
u Date Mode
• {365}/{360} … Specifies calculation according to a {365-day}/{360-day} year
u Periods/YR. (payment interval specification)
• {Annual}/{Semi} … {annual}/{semiannual}
u Graph Color
• {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellow} … Specifies a single border line
color.
Note the following points regarding Setup screen settings whenever using the Financial
mode.
• The following graph Setup screen settings are all turned off for graphing in the Financial
mode: Axes, Grid, Dual Screen.
• Drawing a financial graph while the Label item is turned on, displays the label CASH for the
vertical axis (deposits, withdrawals), and TIME for the horizontal axis (frequency).
• You can use the Setup “Background” setting to display a Financial mode graph screen
background image. This operation is the same as that for the Graph mode. For details, see
“Displaying a Graph Background Image” (page 5-10). Note, however, that you cannot perform
V-Window related operations while in the Financial mode.
• While a background image is being displayed on the Financial mode graph screen, you can
adjust the lightness of the background image. For information about this operation, see “To
adjust the lightness (Fade I/O) of the background image” (page 5-12).
k Graphing in the Financial Mode
After performing a financial calculation, you can use 6(GRAPH) to graph the results as
shown below.
7-3
• Pressing !1(TRACE) while a graph is on the display activates Trace, which can be used
to look up other financial values. In the case of simple interest, for example, pressing e
displays PV, SI, and SFV. Pressing d displays the same values in reverse sequence.
• While the graph screen is displayed, you can press !f(FORMAT) and then use the
dialog box that appears to change the graph color. The color specification you make on this
dialog box is also reflected by the “Graph Color” setting of the Setup screen.
• Zoom, Scroll, and Sketch cannot be used in the Financial mode.
• Whether you should use a positive or a negative value for the present value (PV) or the
purchase price (PRC) depends on the type of calculation you are trying to perform.
• Note that graphs should be used only for reference purposes when viewing Financial mode
calculation results.
2. Simple Interest
This calculator uses the following formulas to calculate simple interest.
u Formula
365-day Mode SI : interest
n : number of interest periods
360-day Mode PV : principal
I % : annual interest
SFV : principal plus interest
Press 1(SIMPLE) from the Financial 1 screen to display the following input screen for simple
interest.
1(SIMPLE)
n ........... number of interest periods (days)
I % ........ annual interest rate
P V ........ principal
After configuring the parameters, use one of the function menus noted below to perform the
corresponding calculation.
• { SI } … {simple interest}
• { SFV } … {simple future value}
SI' = n
365× PV × i
SI' = n
360× PV × i
I%
100
i =
I%
100
i =
SI' = n
365× PV × i
SI' = n
360× PV × i
I%
100
i =
I%
100
i =
SI = –SI'
SFV = –(PV + SI')
SI = –SI'
SFV = –(PV + SI')
7-4
• An error occurs if parameters are not configured correctly.
Use the following function menus to maneuver between calculation result screens.
• { REPEAT } … {parameter input screen}
• { GRAPH } … {draws graph}
After drawing a graph, you can press !1(TRACE) to turn on trace and read calculation
results along the graph.
Each press of e while trace is turned on cycles the displayed value in the sequence: present
value (
PV ) → simple interest ( SI ) → simple future value ( SFV ). Pressing d cycles in the
reverse direction.
Press J to return to the parameter input screen.
3. Compound Interest
This calculator uses the following standard formulas to calculate compound interest.
u PV, PMT, FV, n
I % ≠ 0
PMT = PV + × FV
β
α
–
FV =
β
α
PV + × PMT
–
n =
log (1+ iS) × PMT – FV × i
(1+ iS) × PMT + PV × i
{}
log (1+ i)
I % = 0
PV =  (PMT × n + FV ) PMT = – n
PV + FV
FV =  (PMT × n + PV) n = PMT
PV + FV
–
= (1+ i × S) × , = (1 + i)
i
1 ––n
ββ
α
0 .........Payment : End
(Setup Screen)
1 .........Payment : Begin
(Setup Screen)
i = 100
I%
I%
(1+ ) –1
C/Y
P/Y
100 × [C/Y ]
............................... (P/Y = C/Y = 1)
(Other than
those above)
{
S =
.....
{
PV = – (α × PMT + × FV)
β
PV = – (α × PMT + × FV)
β
7-5
u I %
i (effective interest rate)
i (effective interest rate) is calculated using Newton’s Method.
PV + α × PMT +
β
× FV = 0
To
I % from i (effective interest rate)
n ............ number of compound periods FV ......... future value
I % ......... annual interest rate P/Y ........ installment periods per year
P V ......... present value C/Y ........ compounding periods per year
PMT ...... payment
• A deposit is indicated by a plus sign (+), while a withdrawal is indicated by a minus sign (–).
Press 2(COMPND) from the Financial 1 screen to display the following input screen for
compound interest.
2(COMPND)
n ........... number of compound periods
I % ........ annual interest rate
P V ........ present value (loan amount in case of loan; principal in case of savings)
PMT ..... payment for each installment (payment in case of loan; deposit in case of savings)
F V ........ future value (unpaid balance in case of loan; principal plus interest in case of
savings)
P / Y ....... installment periods per year
C / Y ....... compounding periods per year
{ }
× C/Y × 100...
I% = (1+ i )–1
P/Y
C/Y(Other than those above)
i × 100 ................................. (P/Y = C/Y = 1)
{
{ }
× C/Y × 100...
I% = (1+ i )–1
P/Y
C/Y(Other than those above)
i × 100 ................................. (P/Y = C/Y = 1)
{
7-6
Important!
Inputting Values
A period (
n ) is expressed as a positive value. Either the present value ( PV ) or future value
(
FV ) is positive, while the other ( PV or FV ) is negative.
Precision
This calculator performs interest calculations using Newton’s Method, which produces
approximate values whose precision can be affected by various calculation conditions.
Because of this, interest calculation results produced by this calculator should be used
keeping the above limitation in mind or the results should be verified.
After configuring the parameters, use one of the function menus noted below to perform the
corresponding calculation.
• { n } … {number of compound periods}
• { I% } … {annual interest rate}
• { PV } … {present value} (Loan: loan amount; Savings: principal)
• { PMT } … {payment} (Loan: payment; Savings: deposit)
• { FV } … {future value} (Loan: unpaid balance; Savings: principal plus interest)
• { AMORTZN } … {amortization screen}
• An error occurs if parameters are not configured correctly.
Use the following function menus to maneuver between calculation result screens.
• { REPEAT } … {parameter input screen}
• { AMORTZN } … {amortization screen}
• { GRAPH } … {draws graph}
After drawing a graph, you can press !1(TRACE) to turn on trace and read calculation
results along the graph.
Press J to return to the parameter input screen.
7-7
4. Cash Flow (Investment Appraisal)
This calculator uses the discounted cash flow (DCF) method to perform investment appraisal
by totalling cash flow for a fixed period. This calculator can perform the following four types of
investment appraisal.
• Net present value (
NPV )
• Net future value (
NFV )
• Internal rate of return (
IRR )
• Payback period (
PBP )
A cash flow diagram like the one shown below helps to visualize the movement of funds.
With this graph, the initial investment amount is represented by CF 0 . The cash flow one year
later is shown by CF 1 , two years later by CF 2 , and so on.
Investment appraisal can be used to clearly determine whether an investment is realizing
profits that were originally targeted.
uNPV
n : natural number up to 254
uNFV
uIRR
In this formula, NPV = 0, and the value of IRR is equivalent to i × 100. It should be noted,
however, that minute fractional values tend to accumulate during the subsequent calculations
performed automatically by the calculator, so NPV never actually reaches exactly zero. IRR
becomes more accurate the closer that NPV approaches to zero.
CF0
CF1
CF2CF3CF4
CF5CF6
CF7
CF0
CF1
CF2CF3CF4
CF5CF6
CF7
NPV = CF0 + + + + … +
(1+ i)
CF1
(1+ i)2
CF2
(1+ i)3
CF3
(1+ i)n
CFni = 100
I %
NPV = CF0 + + + + … +
(1+ i)
CF1
(1+ i)2
CF2
(1+ i)3
CF3
(1+ i)n
CFni = 100
I %
NFV = NPV × (1 + i )
n
NFV = NPV × (1 + i )
n
0 = CF0 + + + + … +
(1+ i)
CF1
(1+ i)2
CF2
(1+ i)3
CF3
(1+ i)n
CFn
0 = CF0 + + + + … +
(1+ i)
CF1
(1+ i)2
CF2
(1+ i)3
CF3
(1+ i)n
CFn
7-8
uPBP
n : smallest positive integer that satisfies the conditions NPV n < 0, NPV n +1 > 0, or 0
Press 3(CASH) from the Financial 1 screen to display the following input screen for Cash
Flow.
3(CASH)
I % ........ interest rate
Csh ....... list to be used for cash flow data
If you have not yet input data into a list, press 5( 'LIST) and input data into a list.
After configuring the parameters, use one of the function menus noted below to perform the
corresponding calculation.
• { NPV } … {net present value}
• { IRR } … {internal rate of return}
• { PBP } … {payback period}
• { NFV } … {net future value}
• { 'LIST } … {inputs data into a list}
• { LIST } … {specifies a list}
• An error occurs if parameters are not configured correctly.
Use the following function menus to maneuver between calculation result screens.
• { REPEAT } … {parameter input screen}
• { GRAPH } … {draws graph}
After drawing a graph, you can press !1(TRACE) to turn on trace and read calculation
results along the graph.
Press J to return to the parameter input screen.
NPVn = Σ
n
k = 0
CFk
(1 + i)k
PBP =
{
0 .................................. (CF0 > 0)
n – NPVn
NPVn+1 – NPVn
(Other than those above)
... NPVn = Σ
n
k = 0
CFk
(1 + i)k
PBP =
{
0 .................................. (CF0 > 0)
n – NPVn
NPVn+1 – NPVn
(Other than those above)
...
7-9
5. Amortization
This calculator can be used to calculate the principal and interest portion of a monthly
installment, the remaining principal, and amount of principal and interest repaid up to any
point.
u Formula
a : interest portion of installment PM1 ( INT )
b : principal portion of installment PM1 ( PRN )
c : balance of principal after installment PM2 ( BAL )
d : total principal from installment PM1 to payment of installment PM2 ( Σ PRN )
e : total interest from installment PM1 to payment of installment PM2 ( Σ INT )
*
a + b = one repayment ( PMT )
c
a
1 payment
Number of Payments
1 PM1 PM2 Last............ ................... ..........
b
c
a
1 payment
Number of Payments
1 PM1 PM2 Last............ ................... ..........
b
1 payment
Number of Payments
1 PM1 PM2 Last............. ................ .............
e
d
1 payment
Number of Payments
1 PM1 PM2 Last............. ................ .............
e
d
a : INT
PM1
= I BAL
PM1–1
× i I × (PMT sign)
b : PRN
PM1
= PMT + BAL
PM1–1
× i
c : BAL
PM2
= BAL
PM2–1
+ PRN
PM2
d :
Σ
PRN = PRN
PM1
+ PRN
PM1+1
+ … + PRN
PM2
e :
Σ
INT = INT
PM1
+ INT
PM1+1
+ … + INT
PM2
PM2
PM1
PM2
PM1
a : INT
PM1
= I BAL
PM1–1
× i I × (PMT sign)
b : PRN
PM1
= PMT + BAL
PM1–1
× i
c : BAL
PM2
= BAL
PM2–1
+ PRN
PM2
d :
Σ
PRN = PRN
PM1
+ PRN
PM1+1
+ … + PRN
PM2
e :
Σ
INT = INT
PM1
+ INT
PM1+1
+ … + INT
PM2
PM2
PM1
PM2
PM1
7-10
• “End” selected for the Setup screen Payment setting: BAL0 = PV
• “Begin” selected for the Setup screen Payment setting: INT1 = 0 and PRN1 = PMT
u Converting between the nominal interest rate and effective interest rate
The nominal interest rate ( I % value input by user) is converted to an effective interest rate
(
I % ' ) for installment loans where the number of installments per year is different from the
number of compound interest calculation periods.
The following calculation is performed after conversion from the nominal interest rate to the
effective interest rate, and the result is used for all subsequent calculations.
Press 4(AMORTZN) from the Financial 1 screen to display the following input screen for
amortization.
4(AMORTZN)
PM1....... first installment of installments 1 through
n
PM2....... second installment of installments 1 through n
n ........... installments
I % ........ interest rate
P V ........ principal
PMT ..... payment for each installment
F V ........ balance following final installment
P / Y ....... installments per year
C / Y ....... compoundings per year
I
%' = I%
(1+ ) –1
[C/Y ]
[P/Y ]
{ }
×
100
100 × [C/Y ]
I
%' = I%
(1+ ) –1
[C/Y ]
[P/Y ]
{ }
×
100
100 × [C/Y ]
i = I%'÷100 i = I%'÷100
7-11
After configuring the parameters, use one of the function menus noted below to perform the
corresponding calculation.
• { BAL } … {balance of principal after installment PM2}
• { INT } … {interest portion of installment PM1}
• { PRN } … {principal portion of installment PM1}
• { Σ INT } … {total interest paid from installment PM1 to installment PM2}
• { Σ PRN } … {total principal paid from installment PM1 to installment PM2}
• { COMPND } … {compound interest screen}
• An error occurs if parameters are not configured correctly.
Use the following function menus to maneuver between calculation result screens.
• { REPEAT } … {parameter input screen}
• { COMPND } … {compound interest screen}
• { GRAPH } … {draws graph}
After drawing a graph, you can press !1(TRACE) to turn on trace and read calculation
results along the graph.
The first press of !1(TRACE) displays
INT and PRN when n = 1. Each press of e
shows INT and PRN when n = 2, n = 3, and so on.
Press J to return to the parameter input screen.
7-12
6. Interest Rate Conversion
The procedures in this section describe how to convert between the annual percent rate and
effective interest rate.
u Formula
APR : annual percent rate (%)
EFF : effective interest rate (%)
n : number of compoundings
Press 5(CONVERT) from the Financial 1 screen to display the following input screen for
interest rate conversion.
5(CONVERT)
n ........... number of compoundings
I % ......... interest rate
After configuring the parameters, use one of the function menus noted below to perform the
corresponding calculation.
• { 'EFF } … {converts annual percent rate to effective interest rate}
• { 'APR } … {converts effective interest rate to annual percent rate}
• An error occurs if parameters are not configured correctly.
Use the following function menu to maneuver between calculation result screens.
• { REPEAT } … {parameter input screen}
EFF = n
APR/100
1+ –1 × 100
n
EFF = n
APR/100
1+ –1 × 100
n
A
PR = 100
EFF
1+ –1 × n ×100
1
n
A
PR = 100
EFF
1+ –1 × n ×100
1
n
7-13
7. Cost, Selling Price, Margin
Cost, selling price, or margin can be calculated by inputting the other two values.
u Formula
CST : cost
SEL : selling price
MRG : margin
Press 1(COST) from the Financial 2 screen to display the following input screen.
6( g) 1(COST)
Cst......... cost
Sel ......... selling price
Mrg ........ margin
After configuring the parameters, use one of the function menus noted below to perform the
corresponding calculation.
• { COST } … {cost}
• { SELL } … {selling price}
• {MARGIN} … {margin}
• An error occurs if parameters are not configured correctly.
Use the following function menu to maneuver between calculation result screens.
• { REPEAT } … {parameter input screen}
CST = SEL 100
MRG
1–
SEL =
100
MRG
1–
CST
M
RG(%) = SEL
CST
1– ×100
CST = SEL 100
MRG
1–
SEL =
100
MRG
1–
CST
M
RG(%) = SEL
CST
1– ×100
7-14
8. Day/Date Calculations
You can calculate the number of days between two dates, or you can determine what date
comes a specific number of days before or after another date.
Press 2(DAYS) from the Financial 2 screen to display the
following input screen for day/date calculation.
6( g) 2(DAYS)
d1 .......... date 1
d2 .......... date 2
D .......... number of days
To input a date, first highlight d1 or d2. Pressing a number
key to input the month causes an input screen like the one
shown nearby to appear on the display.
Input the month, day, and year, pressing w after each.
After configuring the parameters, use one of the function menus noted below to perform the
corresponding calculation.
• { PRD } … {number of days from d1 to d2 (d2 – d1)}
• { d1+D } … {d1 plus a number of days (d1 + D)}
• { d1–D } … {d1 minus a number of days (d1 – D)}
• An error occurs if parameters are not configured correctly.
Use the following function menu to maneuver between calculation result screens.
• { REPEAT } … {parameter input screen}
• The Setup screen can be used to specify either a 365-day or 360-day year for financial
calculations. Day/date calculations are also performed in accordance with the current setting
for number of days in the year, but the following calculations cannot be performed when the
360-day year is set. Attempting to do so causes an error.
(Date) + (Number of Days)
(Date) – (Number of Days)
• The allowable calculation range is January 1, 1901 to December 31, 2099.
7-15
• 360-day Date Mode Calculations
The following describes how calculations are processed when 360 is specified for the Date
Mode item in the Setup screen.
• If d1 and d2 are both the last day of February (day 28 in a normal year, day 29 in a leap
year), d2 is treated as day 30.
• If d1 is the last day of February, d1 is treated as day 30.
• If d2 is day 31 of a month and d1 is day 30 or day 31 of a month, d2 is treated as day 30.
• If d1 is day 31 of a month, d1 is treated as day 30.
9. Depreciation
Depreciation lets you calculate the amount that a business expense can be offset by income
(depreciated) over a given year.
• This calculator supports the following four types of depreciation calculations.
straight-line (
SL ), fixed-percent ( FP ), sum-of-the-years’-digits ( SYD ), or declining-balance
( DB ).
• Any one of the above methods can be used to calculate depreciation for a specified period.
A table and graph of the depreciated amount and undepreciated amount in year
j .
u Straight-Line Method (SL)
SL j : depreciation charge for the j th year
n : useful life
P V : original cost (basis)
F V : residual book value
j : year for calculation of depreciation
cost
Y −1 : number of months in the first year
of depreciation
u Fixed-Percent Method (FP)
FP j : depreciation charge for the j th year
RDV j : remaining depreciable value at the
end of j th year
I % : depreciation ratio
{Y–1}(PV–FV )
SL1 = n12
u
(PV–FV )
SLj = n12–{Y–1}
({Y–1}≠12)
(PV–FV )
n12
u
SLn+1 =
{Y–1}(PV–FV )
SL1 = n12
u
(PV–FV )
SLj = n12–{Y–1}
({Y–1}≠12)
(PV–FV )
n12
u
SLn+1 =
100
I%
FPj = (RDVj–1 + FV ) ×
100 {Y–1}
I%
FP1 = PV × 12
×
FPn+1 = RDVn ({Y–1}≠12)
RDV1 = PV – FV – FP1
RDVj = RDVj–1 – FPj
RDVn+1 = 0 ({Y–1}≠12)
100
I%
FPj = (RDVj–1 + FV ) ×
100 {Y–1}
I%
FP1 = PV × 12
×
FPn+1 = RDVn ({Y–1}≠12)
RDV1 = PV – FV – FP1
RDVj = RDVj–1 – FPj
RDVn+1 = 0 ({Y–1}≠12)
7-16
u Sum-of-the-Years’-Digits Method (SYD)
SYD j : depreciation charge for the j th year
RDV j : remaining depreciable value at the
end of
j th year
u Declining-Balance Method (DB)
DB j : depreciation charge for the j th year
RDV j : remaining depreciable value at the
end of j th year
I % : depreciation factor
Press 3(DEPREC) from the Financial 2 screen to display the following input screen for
depreciation calculation.
6( g) 3(DEPREC)
n ............ useful life
I % ......... depreciation ratio in the case of the fixed percent (FP) method, depreciation factor in
the case of the declining balance (DB) method
P V ......... original cost (basis)
F V ......... residual book value
j ............. year for calculation of depreciation cost
Y −1 ........ number of months in the first year of depreciation
n (n +1)
Z = 2
2
(n' integer part +1)(n' integer part + 2*n' fraction part )
Z' =
SYD1 = {Y–1}
12
n
Z×(PV – FV )
n'– j+2
Z' )(PV – FV – SYD1)( j≠1)SYDj = (
RDV1 = PV – FV – SYD1
RDVj = RDVj –1 – SYDj
n'– (n +1)+2
Z' )(PV – FV – SYD1)({Y–1}≠12)
12–{Y–1}
12
×SYDn+1 = (
12
{Y–1}
n' = n –
n (n +1)
Z = 2
2
(n' integer part +1)(n' integer part + 2*n' fraction part )
Z' =
SYD1 = {Y–1}
12
n
Z×(PV – FV )
n'– j+2
Z' )(PV – FV – SYD1)( j≠1)SYDj = (
RDV1 = PV – FV – SYD1
RDVj = RDVj –1 – SYDj
n'– (n +1)+2
Z' )(PV – FV – SYD1)({Y–1}≠12)
12–{Y–1}
12
×SYDn+1 = (
12
{Y–1}
n' = n –
RDV1 = PV – FV – DB1
({Y–1}≠12)
({Y–1}≠12)
100n
Y–1I%
DB1 = PV ×
100n
I%
12
×
×
DBj = (RDVj–1 + FV )
RDVj = RDVj–1 – DBj
DBn +1 = RDVn
RDVn+1 = 0
RDV1 = PV – FV – DB1
({Y–1}≠12)
({Y–1}≠12)
100n
Y–1I%
DB1 = PV ×
100n
I%
12
×
×
DBj = (RDVj–1 + FV )
RDVj = RDVj–1 – DBj
DBn +1 = RDVn
RDVn+1 = 0
7-17
After configuring the parameters, use one of the function menus noted below to perform the
corresponding calculation.
• { SL } … {Calculate depreciation for year
j using the straight-line method}
• { FP } ... { FP } .... {Calculate depreciation for year
j using the fixed-percent method}
{ I% } .....{Calculate depreciation ratio}
• { SYD } … {Calculate depreciation for year
j using the sum-of-the-years’-digits method}
• { DB } … {Calculate depreciation for year
j calculated using the declining-balance method}
Calculation Result Output Examples
{SYD} {SYD} − {TABLE} {SYD} − {GRAPH}
An error occurs if parameters are not configured correctly.
Use the following function menu to maneuver between calculation result screens.
• { REPEAT } … {parameter input screen}
• { TABLE } … {displays table}
• { GRAPH } … {draws graph}
10. Bond Calculations
Bond calculation lets you calculate the purchase price or the annual yield of a bond.
Before starting bond calculations, use the Setup screen to configure “Date Mode” and
“Periods/YR.” settings (page 7-2).
u Formula
D
Issue date
Redemption date (d2)
Purchase date (d1) Coupon Payment dates
A B
7-18
PRC : price per $100 of face value
CPN : coupon rate (%)
YLD : annual yield (%)
A : accrued days
M : number of coupon payments per year (1=annual, 2=semi annual)
N : number of coupon payments between settlement date and maturity date
RDV : redemption price or call price per $100 of face value
D : number of days in coupon period where settlement occurs
B : number of days from settlement date until next coupon payment date = D − A
INT : accrued interest
CST : price including interest
• For one or fewer coupon period to redemption
• For more than one coupon period to redemption
u Annual Yield (YLD)
YLD is calculated using Newton’s Method.
Press 4(BOND) from the Financial 2 screen to display the following input screen for Bond
calculation.
6( g) 4(BOND)
PRC = + (– )
RDV + M
CPN
1+ ( ×)
D
B
M
YLD/100 ×
D
A
M
CPN
PRC = + (– )
RDV + M
CPN
1+ ( ×)
D
B
M
YLD/100 ×
D
A
M
CPN
×
D
A
M
CPN
INT = – CST = PRC + INT
+×
D
A
M
CP
N
PRC = – –
RDV
(1+ )
M
YLD/100 (1+ )
M
YLD/100
M
CPN
Σ
N
k=1
(N–1+B/D ) (k–1+B/D )
×
D
A
M
CPN
INT = – CST = PRC + INT
+×
D
A
M
CP
N
PRC = – –
RDV
(1+ )
M
YLD/100 (1+ )
M
YLD/100
M
CPN
Σ
N
k=1
(N–1+B/D ) (k–1+B/D )
7-19
d1 .......... purchase date (month, date, year)
d2 .......... redemption date (month, date, year)
RDV ...... redemption price per $100 of face value
CPN ...... coupon rate
PRC ...... price per $100 of face value
YLD ...... annual yield
• The allowable calculation range is January 1, 1902 to December 31, 2097.
After configuring the parameters, use one of the function menus noted below to perform the
corresponding calculation.
• {PRC} … {Calculate the bond’s price (PRC), accrued interest (INT), and cost of bond (CST)}
• {YLD} … {Calculate the yield to maturity}
Calculation Result Output Examples
{PRC} {PRC} − {GRAPH} {PRC} − {MEMO}
An error occurs if parameters are not configured correctly.
Use the following function menu to maneuver between calculation result screens.
• { REPEAT } … {parameter input screen}
• { MEMO } … {displays numbers of days used in calculations}
• { GRAPH } … {draws graph}
MEMO Screen
• The following describes the meaning of the MEMO screen display items.
PRD ... number of days from d1 to d2
N ......... number of coupon payments between settlement date and maturity date
A ......... accrued days
B ......... number of days from settlement date until next coupon payment date (D−A)
D ........ number of days in coupon period where settlement occurs
7-20
• Each press of w while the MEMO screen is displayed cycles the Coupon Payment Day
(CPD) display sequentially from the redemption year up to the purchase year. This is true
only when the “Date Mode” setting on the Setup screen is “365”.
11. Financial Calculations Using Functions
You can use special functions in the Run-Matrix mode or Program mode to perform
calculations that are the same as the Financial mode financial calculations.
Example To calculate the total interest and principal paid for a 2-year (730-day)
$300 loan at a simple annual interest rate of 5%. Use a Date Mode
setting of 365.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Run-Matrix mode.
2. Press the keys as follows.
K6(g)6(g)2(FINANCE)*
1(SIMPLE)1(SI)hda,f,
daa)w
2(SFV) hda,f,daa)
w
* Math input/output mode operation. In the Linear input/output mode, use the following
operation: K6(g)6(g)6(g)1(FINANCE).
• Use the Financial mode Setup screen (!m(SET UP)) to change the “Date Mode”
setting. You also can use special commands (DateMode365, DateMode360) in the Program
mode to change the setting.
• For details about what you can do with the financial calculation functions and their syntax,
see “Performing Financial Calculations in a Program” (page 8-48).
8-1
Chapter 8 Programming
Important!
Input in the Program mode is always performed using the Linear input/output mode.
1. Basic Programming Steps
Commands and calculations are executed sequentially.
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Program mode. When you do, a program list appears on the
display.
Selected program area
(use f and c to move)
Files are listed in the alphabetic sequence of their names.
2. Register a file name.
3. Input the program.
4. Run the program.
• The values to the right of the program list indicate the number of bytes used by each
program.
• A file name can be up to eight characters long.
• The following are the characters you can use in a file name: A through Z, {, }, ’, ~, 0 through 9
• Registering a file name uses 32 bytes of memory.
Example To calculate the surface area (cm
2
) and volume (cm
3
) of three regular
octahedrons when the length of one side is 7, 10, and 15 cm,
respectively
Store the calculation formula under the file name OCTA.
The following are the formulas used for calculating surface area S and volume
V of a regular octahedron for which the length of one side A is known.
AA
S = 2'3 A
2
, V = A
3
––––
'2
3
S = 2'3 A
2
, V = A
3
––––
'2
3
8
8-2
1 m Program
2 3(NEW) j(O) I(C) /(T) v(A) w
3 !J(PRGM) 4(?) aav(A) 6( g) 5(:)
c*!x( ') d*av(A) x6( g) 6( g) 5( ^)
!x( ') c/d*av(A) Md
JJ
4 1(EXE) or w
hw(Value of A) S when A = 7
w V when A = 7
ww
baw S when A = 10
w V when A = 10
ww
bfw S when A = 15
w*1 V when A = 15
*1 Pressing w while the program’s final result is on the display exits the program.
• You can also run a program while in the Run-Matrix mode by inputting: Prog "<file name>"
w.
• Pressing w while the final result of a program executed using this method is on the display
re-executes the program.
• An error occurs if the program specified by Prog "<file name>" cannot be found.
2. Program Mode Function Keys
u File List Function Menu
Only the {NEW} and {LOAD} function menus are displayed when there are no program files in
memory.
• {EXE}/{EDIT} ... program {execute}/{edit}
• {NEW} ... {new program}
• {DELETE}/{DEL-ALL} ... {specific program}/{all program} delete
• {SEARCH}/{RENAME} ... file name {search}/{change}
• {SAVE • AS} ... {saves program as a text file}
• {LOAD} ... {converts a text file to a program and saves it}
• { } ... {password protects a program or removes password protection}
8-3
u When you are registering a file name
• { RUN } / { BASE } ... {general calculation}/{number base} program input
• { } ... {password registration}
• { SYMBOL } ... {symbol menu}
u When you are inputting a program —— 1(RUN) … default
• { TOP } / { BOTTOM } ... {top}/{bottom} of program
• { SEARCH } ... {search}
• { MENU } ... {mode menu}
• { STAT } / { MAT } / { LIST } / { GRAPH } / { DYNA } / { TABLE } / { RECURSION }
... {statistics}/{matrix}/{list}/{graph}/{Dynamic Graph}/{Table}/{recursion} menu
• {A⇔a} ... {toggles between upper-case and lower-case input}
• { CHAR } ... {displays a screen for selecting various mathematical symbols, special symbols,
and accented characters}
• Pressing !J(PRGM) displays the following program (PRGM) menu.
• { COMMAND } ... {program command menu}
• { CONTROL } ... {program control command menu}
• { JUMP } ... {jump command menu}
• { ? } / { ^} ... {input}/{output} command
• { CLEAR } / { DISPLAY } ... {clear}/{display} command menu
• { RELATNL } ... {conditional jump relational operator menu}
• { I/O } ... {I/O control/transfer command menu}
• { : } ... {multi-statement command}
• { STR } ... {string command}
See “Command Reference” on page 8-11 for full details on each of these commands.
• Pressing !m(SET UP) displays the mode command menu shown below.
• {ANGLE}/{COORD}/{GRID}/{AXES}/{LABEL}/{DISPLAY}/{SKT/LIN}/{DRAW}/{DERIV}/
{BACK}/{FUNC}/{SIMUL}/{SGV-WIN}/{LIST}/{LOCUS}/{TBL-VAR}/{ΣDISP}/{RESID}/
{COMPLEX}/{FRAC}/{Y=SPEED}/{DATE}/{PMT}/{PERIODS}/{INEQ}/{SIMP}/{Q1Q3}/{P/L-
CLR}
See “Setup Screen Function Key Menus” on page 1-32 for details about each of these
commands.
• Pressing !f(FORMAT) displays the color/paint command menu. For details, see “Using
Color Commands in a Program” (page 8-28) and “Using Paint Commands in a Program”
(page 8-29).
8-4
u When you are inputting a program —— 2(BASE)*
* Programs input after pressing 2(BASE) are indicated by
B
to the right of the file name.
• {TOP}/{BOTTOM}/{SEARCH}
• { MENU }
• { d~o } ... {decimal}/{hexadecimal}/{binary}/{octal} value input
• { LOGIC } ... {bitwise operator}
• { DISPLAY } ... conversion of displayed value to {decimal}/{hexadecimal}/{binary}/{octal}
• {A⇔a}/{SYMBOL}
• Pressing !J(PRGM) displays the following program (PRGM) menu.
• { Prog } ... {program recall}
• { JUMP } / { ? } / { ^}
• { RELATNL } ... {conditional jump relational operator menu}
• { : } ... {multi-statement command}
• Pressing !m(SET UP) displays the mode command menu shown below.
• {Dec}/{Hex}/{Bin}/{Oct}
• Pressing !f(FORMAT) displays the color command menu. For details, see “Using Color
Commands in a Program” (page 8-28).
3. Editing Program Contents
k Debugging a Program
A problem in a program that keeps the program from running correctly is called a “ bug”,
and the process of eliminating such problems is called “ debugging”. Either of the following
symptoms indicates that your program contains bugs that require debugging.
• Error messages appearing when the program is run
• Results that are not within your expectations
u To eliminate bugs that cause error messages
An error message, like the one shown to the right, appears
whenever something illegal occurs during program execution.
When such a message appears, press J to display the place in the program where the
error was caused. The cursor will be flashing at the location of the problem. Check the “Error
Message Table” (page
α
-1) for steps you should take to correct the situation.
8-5
• Note that pressing J does not display the location of the error if the program is password
protected.
u To eliminate bugs that cause bad results
If your program produces results that are not what you normally expect, check the contents of
the program and make necessary changes.
1(TOP) ........... Moves the cursor to the top of
the program
2(BOTTOM) ... Moves the cursor to the bottom
of the program
k Searching for Data Inside a Program
Example To search for the letter “A” inside the program named OCTA
1. Recall the program.
2. Press 3(SEARCH) and input the data you want to find.
3(SEARCH)
av(A)
3. Press w to begin the search. The contents of the
program appear on the screen with the cursor located at
the first instance of the data you specified.*1
4. Each press of w or 1(SEARCH) causes the cursor to
jump to the next instance of the data you specified.*2
*
1
The message “Not Found” appears when the search data you specify cannot be found in
the program.
*
2
If there are no more instances of the data you specified, the search operation ends.
8-6
• You cannot specify the newline symbol ( _) or display command ( ^) for the search data.
• Once the contents of the program are on the screen, you can use the cursor keys to move
the cursor to another location before searching for the next instance of the data. Only the
part of the program starting from the current cursor location is searched when you press w.
• Once the search finds an instance of your data, inputting characters or moving the cursor
causes the search operation to be cancelled.
• If you make a mistake while inputting characters to search for, press A to clear your input
and re-input from the beginning.
4. File Management
k Deleting a Program
u To delete a specific program
1. While the program list is on the display, use f and c to move the highlighting to the
name of the program you want to delete.
2. Press 4(DELETE).
3. Press 1(YES) to delete the selected program or 6(NO) to abort the operation without
deleting anything.
u To delete all programs
1. While the program list is on the display, press 5(DEL-ALL).
2. Press 1(YES) to delete all the programs in the list or 6(NO) to abort the operation
without deleting anything.
• You also can delete all programs by entering the Memory mode from the Main Menu. See
“Chapter 11 Memory Manager” for details.
8-7
k Searching for a File
u To find a file using initial character search
Example To use initial character search to recall the program named OCTA
1. While the program list is on the display, press 6(g)1(SEARCH) and input the initial
characters of the file you want to find.
6(g)1(SEARCH)
j(O)I(C)/(T)
2. Press w to search.
• The name that starts with the characters you input
highlights.
• If there is no program whose file name starts with the characters you input, the message
“Not Found” appears on the display. If this happens, press J to clear the error message.
k Editing a File Name
1. While the program list is on the display, use f and c to move the highlighting to the file
whose name you want to edit and then press 6( g) 2(RENAME).
2. Make any changes you want.
3. Press w to register the new name and return to the program list.
The program list is resorted according to the changes you made in the file name.
• If the modifications you make result in a file name that is identical to the name of a program
already stored in memory, the message “Already Exists” appears. When this happens, press
J or A to clear the input file name and input a new one.
k Converting Programs and Text Files
You can convert programs created on this calculator to a text file, and then use a text editor
or other application on your computer to edit them. You also can convert text files created and
edited on your computer to a program that can be run by the calculator.
8-8
u Program and Text File Conversion Rules
Conversion of program and text files is subject to the following rules.
• Certain characters in the program name are automatically replaced and the result is
assigned as the file name whenever you convert a program to a text file. When you convert
from a text file to a program, the program name is assigned by converting in the opposite
direction.
Program Name Characters Text File Name Characters
r _r_
_t_
Leading/trailing spaces _s_
" _q_
Leading/trailing dots _p_
× _x_
÷ _d_
+ _+_
− _-_
• The following header information is added to the text file when converting from a program to
a text file.
'Program Mode: RUN (RUN Mode program)
'Program Mode: BASE (BASE Mode program)
• Converting a text file that contains the above header information to a program converts to a
program of the mode specified in the header information. The header information line text is
not included in the converted program.
• Converting a program to a text file causes all CASIO scientific function calculator-specific
commands in the program to be replaced by special corresponding character strings.
Conversely, converting from a text file to a program converts the special character strings
back to their corresponding commands. For information about program commands and their
corresponding special character strings, see “CASIO Scientific Function Calculator Special
Commands ⇔ Text Conversion Table” (page 8-59).
u To convert a program to a text file
1. In the program list, use f and c to move the highlighting to the name of the program
you want to convert to a text file.
2. Press 6(g)3(SAVE • AS).
• This starts conversion to a text file. The message “Complete!” appears after conversion is
complete. To close the message dialog box, press J.
• The resulting text file is stored in the storage memory’s PROGRAM folder, under a name
that is basically the same as the original file, except for certain special characters. For
details about special character exceptions, see “Program and Text File Conversion Rules”
above.
8-9
Important!
A program that is password protected cannot be converted to a text file. To convert a
password protected file, first use the procedure under “To remove password protection from a
program” (page 8-10) to remove password protection and then convert it.
u Auto Conversion from Text Files to Programs
Whenever you terminate the USB connection between the calculator and computer, all of the
text files that were transferred from the computer to Storage Memory\@MainMem\PROGRAM\
while they were connected will be automatically converted to programs and stored in the
calculator’s main memory.
For details, see “Transferring Data between the Calculator and a Personal Computer” (page
13-5).
u To convert a text file to a program
Important!
Using the procedure below to convert a text file to a program will create and save a program
under a name that is basically the same as the original file, except for certain special
characters. For details about special character exceptions, see “Program and Text File
Conversion Rules” (page 8-8).
If there is already a program in memory with the same name as the program created by
the conversion process, the existing program will be overwritten automatically with the new
program. If you do not want such an existing program to be overwritten, use the program list to
change its name before performing this procedure.
1. Copy the text file you want to convert to a program to the calculator’s storage memory root
directory.
• For information about the procedure for copying files from a computer or another
calculator to this calculator’s storage memory, see “Chapter 13 Data Communication”.
2. From the Main Menu, enter the Program mode.
3. On the program list, press 6(g)4(LOAD).
• This displays a list of folders and text files currently in the storage memory root directory.
4. Use f and c to move the highlighting to the text file you want to convert and then press
1(OPEN).
8-10
k Registering a password
When inputting a program, you can protect it with a password that limits access to the program
contents to those who know the password.
• You do not need to input the password to run a program.
• The password input procedure is identical to that used for file name input.
u To password protect a program as you are creating it
1. While the program list is on the display, press 3(NEW) and input the file name of the new
program file.
2. Press 5() and then input the password.
3. Press w to register the file name and password. Now you can input the contents of the
program file.
4. After inputting the program, press !J(QUIT) to
exit the program file and return to the program list.
Files that are password protected are indicated by an
asterisk to the right of the file name.
u To password protect an existing program
1. In the program list, use f and c to move the highlighting to the name of the program
you want to password protect.
2. Press 6(g)5() and then input the password.
3. Press w to register the password.
• This returns to the program list.
u To remove password protection from a program
1. In the program list, use f and c to move the highlighting to the name of the program
whose password you want to remove.
2. Press 6(g)5() and then input the programs current password.
3. To remove password protection, press w.
• This returns to the program list.
8-11
k Recalling a Password Protected Program
1. In the program list, use f and c to move the highlighting to the name of the program
you want to recall.
2. Press 2(EDIT).
3. Input the password and press w to recall the program.
• Inputting the wrong password when recalling a password protected program causes the
message “Mismatch” to appear.
5. Command Reference
k Command Index
Break....................................................8-15
CloseComport38k ................................8-24
ClrGraph ..............................................8-19
ClrList ..................................................8-19
ClrMat ..................................................8-20
ClrText .................................................8-20
DispF-Tbl, DispR-Tbl ...........................8-20
Do~LpWhile .........................................8-14
DrawDyna ........................................... 8-20
DrawFTG-Con, DrawFTG-Plt ..............8-20
DrawGraph ..........................................8-21
DrawR-Con, DrawR-Plt .......................8-21
DrawR Σ -Con, DrawR Σ -Plt ...................8-21
DrawStat ..............................................8-21
DrawWeb ............................................ 8-21
Dsz (Count Jump) ................................8-17
Exp(......................................................8-25
Exp 'Str( .............................................8-25
For~To~(Step~)Next ............................8-14
Getkey .................................................8-22
Goto~Lbl ..............................................8-17
If~Then~(Else~) IfEnd ..........................8-13
Isz (Count Jump) ..................................8-18
Locate ..................................................8-23
Menu ....................................................8-19
OpenComport38k ................................8-24
Prog .....................................................8-16
PlotPhase.............................................8-22
RclCapt ................................................8-27
Receive( ............................................... 8-24
Receive38k ..........................................8-24
Return ..................................................8-16
Send( ...................................................8-24
Send38k ...............................................8-24
Stop .....................................................8-17
StrCmp(................................................8-25
StrInv( ..................................................8-26
StrJoin(.................................................8-26
StrLeft( .................................................8-26
StrLen( .................................................8-26
StrLwr( .................................................8-26
StrMid( .................................................8-26
StrRight( ...............................................8-26
StrRotate(.............................................8-27
StrShift( ................................................8-27
StrSrc( ..................................................8-27
StrUpr( .................................................8-27
While~WhileEnd ..................................8-15
? (Input Command) ..............................8-12
^ (Output Command) .........................8-12
: (Multi-statement Command) ..............8-13
_ (Carriage Return) ...........................8-13
’ (Comment Text Delimiter) ..................8-13
S (Jump Code) ...................................8-18
=, ≠, >, <, ≥, ≤ (Relational Operators) ..8-24
+ (Joins two strings) .............................8-27
8-12
The following are conventions that are used in this section when describing the various
commands.
{Curly Brackets} ........... Curly brackets are used to enclose a number of items, one of which
must be selected when using a command. Do not input the curly
brackets when inputting a command.
[Square Brackets] ........ Square brackets are used to enclose items that are optional. Do not
input the square brackets when inputting a command.
Numeric Expressions ... Numeric expressions (such as 10, 10 + 20, A) indicate constants,
calculations, numeric constants, etc.
Alpha Characters ......... Alpha characters indicate literal strings (such as AB).
k Basic Operation Commands
? ( Input Command)
Function: Prompts for input of values for assignment to variables during program execution.
Syntax: ? → <variable name>, "<prompt>" ? → <variable name>
Example: ? → A
Description:
• This command momentarily interrupts program execution and prompts for input of a value
or expression for assignment to a variable. If you do not specify a prompt, execution of this
command causes “?” to appear indicating the calculator is standing by for input. If a prompt
is specified, “<prompt>?” appears to prompt input. Up to 255 bytes of text can be used for a
prompt.
• Input in response to the input command must be a value or an expression, and the
expression cannot be a multi-statement.
• You can specify a list name, matrix name, string name, function memory (fn), graph (Yn),
etc. as a variable name.
^ ( Output Command)
Function: Displays an intermediate result during program execution.
Description:
• This command momentarily interrupts program execution and displays alpha character text
or the result of the calculation immediately before the command.
• The output command should be used at locations where you would normally press the w
key during a manual calculation.
8-13
: ( Multi-statement Command)
Function: Connects two statements for sequential execution without stopping.
Description:
• Unlike the output command ( ^), statements connected with the multi-statement command
are executed non-stop.
• The multi-statement command can be used to link two calculation expressions or two
commands.
• You can also use a carriage return indicated by _ in place of the multi-statement command.
_ ( Carriage Return)
Function: Connects two statements for sequential execution without stopping.
Description:
• Operation of the carriage return is identical to that of the multi-statement command.
• You can create a blank line in a program by inputting a carriage return only. Using a carriage
return in place of the multi-statement command makes the displayed program easier to read.
’ ( Comment Text Delimiter)
Function: Indicates comment text inserted inside a program.
Description: Anything following the apostrophe is treated as non-executable comment text.
k Program Commands (COMMAND)
If~Then~(Else~)IfEnd
Function: The Then-statement is executed only when the If-condition is true (non-zero). The
Else-statement is executed when the If-condition is false (0). The IfEnd-statement is always
executed following either the Then-statement or Else-statement.
Syntax:
If <condition>
_
:
^
Then <statement>
_
:
^
<statement>
numeric expression
_
:
^
Else <statement>
_
:
^
<statement>
_
:
^
IfEnd
8-14
Parameters: condition, numeric expression
Description:
(1) If ~ Then ~ IfEnd
• When the condition is true, execution proceeds with the Then-statement and then
continues with the statement following IfEnd.
• When the condition is false, execution jumps to the statement following IfEnd.
(2) If ~ Then ~ Else ~ IfEnd
• When the condition is true, execution proceeds with the Then-statement and then jumps
to the statement following IfEnd.
• When the condition is false, execution jumps to the Else-statement and then continues
with the statement following IfEnd.
For~To~(Step~)Next
Function: This command repeats everything between the For-statement and the Next-
statement. The starting value is assigned to the control variable with the first execution, and
the value of the control variable is changed according to the step value with each execution.
Execution continues until the value of the control variable exceeds the ending value.
Syntax: For <starting value> → <control variable name> To <ending value>
Step <step value> <statement>
_
:
^
Next
Parameters:
• control variable name: A to Z, r,
• starting value: value or expression that produces a value (i.e. sin x , A, etc.)
• ending value: value or expression that produces a value (i.e. sin
x , A, etc.)
• step value: numeric value (default: 1)
Description:
• The default step value is 1.
• Making the starting value less than the ending value and specifying a positive step value
causes the control variable to be incremented with each execution. Making the starting
value greater than the ending value and specifying a negative step value causes the control
variable to be decremented with each execution.
Do~LpWhile
Function: This command repeats specific commands as long as its condition is true (non-
zero).
Syntax:
Do
_
:
^
<statement>
_
:
^
LpWhile < condition >
numeric expression
8-15
Parameters: expression
Description:
• This command repeats the commands contained in the loop as long as its condition is true
(non-zero). When the condition becomes false (0), execution proceeds from the statement
following the LpWhile-statement.
• Since the condition comes after the LpWhile-statement, the condition is tested (checked)
after all of the commands inside the loop are executed.
While~WhileEnd
Function: This command repeats specific commands as long as its condition is true (non-
zero).
Syntax:
While < condition >
_
:
^
<statement>
_
:
^
WhileEnd
numeric expression
Parameters: expression
Description:
• This command repeats the commands contained in the loop as long as its condition is true
(non-zero). When the condition becomes false (0), execution proceeds from the statement
following the WhileEnd-statement.
• Since the condition comes after the While-statement, the condition is tested (checked) before
the commands inside the loop are executed.
k Program Control Commands (CONTROL)
Break
Function: This command breaks execution of a loop and continues from the next command
following the loop.
Syntax: Break
Description:
• This command breaks execution of a loop and continues from the next command following
the loop.
• This command can be used to break execution of a For-statement, Do-statement, and While-
statement.
8-16
Prog
Function: This command specifies execution of another program as a subroutine. In the
Run-Matrix mode, this command executes a new program.
Syntax: Prog "file name"
Example: Prog "ABC"
Description:
• Even when this command is located inside of a loop, its execution immediately breaks the
loop and launches the subroutine.
• This command can be used as many times as necessary inside of a main routine to call up
independent subroutines to perform specific tasks.
• A subroutine can be used in multiple locations in the same main routine, or it can be called
up by any number of main routines.
Main Routine Subroutines
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
• Calling up a subroutine causes it to be executed from the beginning. After execution of the
subroutine is complete, execution returns to the main routine, continuing from the statement
following the Prog command.
• A Goto~Lbl command inside of a subroutine is valid inside of that subroutine only. It cannot
be used to jump to a label outside of the subroutine.
• If a subroutine with the file name specified by the Prog command does not exist, an error
occurs.
• In the Run-Matrix mode, inputting the Prog command and pressing w launches the
program specified by the command.
Return
Function: This command returns from a subroutine.
Syntax: Return
Description: Execution of the Return command inside a main routine causes execution of
the program to stop. Execution of the Return command within a subroutine terminates the
subroutine and returns to the program from which the subroutine was jumped to.
D
CEIJ
Prog "E" Prog "I" Prog "J"
A
Prog "D"
Prog "C"
D
CEIJ
Prog "E" Prog "I" Prog "J"
A
Prog "D"
Prog "C"
8-17
Stop
Function: This command terminates execution of a program.
Syntax: Stop
Description:
• This command terminates program execution.
• Execution of this command inside of a loop terminates program execution without an error
being generated.
k Jump Commands (JUMP)
Dsz (Count Jump)
Function: This command is a count jump that decrements the value of a control variable by 1,
and then jumps if the current value of the variable is zero.
Syntax:
Variable Value ≠ 0
Dsz <variable name> : <statement>
_
:
^
<statement>
Variable Value = 0
Parameters: variable name: A to Z, r ,
θ
[Example] Dsz B : Decrements the value assigned to variable B by 1.
Description: This command decrements the value of a control variable by 1, and then tests
(checks) it. If the current value is non-zero, execution continues with the next statement.
If the current value is zero, execution jumps to the statement following the multi-statement
command (:), display command ( ^), or carriage return ( _).
Goto~Lbl
Function: This command performs an unconditional jump to a specified location.
Syntax: Goto <label name> ~ Lbl <label name>
Parameters: label name: value (0 to 9), variable (A to Z,
r ,
θ
)
Description:
• This command consists of two parts: Goto
n (where n is a parameter as described above)
and Lbl n (where n is the parameter referenced by Goto n ). This command causes program
execution to jump to the Lbl-statement whose n parameter matches that specified by the
Goto-statement.
• This command can be used to loop back to the beginning of a program or to jump to any
location within the program.
• This command can be used in combination with conditional jumps and count jumps.
• If there is no Lbl-statement whose value matches that specified by the Goto-statement, an
error occurs.
8-18
Isz (Count Jump)
Function: This command is a count jump that increments the value of a control variable by 1,
and then jumps if the current value of the variable is zero.
Syntax:
Variable Value ≠ 0
Isz <variable name> : <statement>
_
:
^
<statement>
Variable Value = 0
Parameters: variable name: A to Z, r ,
θ
[Example] Isz A : Increments the value assigned to variable A by 1.
Description: This command increments the value of a control variable by 1, and then tests
(checks) it. If the current value is non-zero, execution continues with the next statement.
If the current value is zero, execution jumps to the statement following the multi-statement
command (:), display command ( ^), or carriage return ( _).
⇒ (Jump Code)
Function: This code is used to set up conditions for a conditional jump. The jump is executed
whenever the conditions are false.
Syntax:
True
<left side> <relational operator> <right side> ⇒ <statement>
_
:
^
<statement>
False
Parameters:
• left side/right side: variable (A to Z,
r ,
θ
), numeric constant, variable expression (such as:
A × 2)
• relational operator: =, ≠, >, <, ≥, ≤ (page 8-24)
Description:
• The conditional jump compares the contents of two variables or the results of two
expressions, and a decision is made whether or not to execute the jump based on the results
of the comparison.
• If the comparison returns a true result, execution continues with the statement following
the ⇒ command. If the comparison returns a false result, execution jumps to the statements
following the multi-statement command (:), display command ( ^), or carriage return ( _).
8-19
Menu
Function: Creates a branching menu in a program.
Syntax: Menu "<string (menu name)>", "<string (branch name) 1>", <value or variable 1>,
"<string (branch name) 2>" ,<value or variable 2>, ... , "<string (branch name)
n >", <value or
variable n >
Parameters: value (0 to 9), variable (A to Z,
r ,
θ
)
Description:
• Each "<string (branch name)
n >" ,<value or variable n > part is a branch set, and the entire
branch set must be included.
• From two to nine branching sets can be included. An error occurs when there is only one or
more than nine branching sets.
• Selecting a branch on the menu while the program is running jumps to the same type of label
(Lbl
n ) as the one used in combination with the Goto command. Specifying “"OK", 3” for the
“"<string (branch name) n >", <value or variable n >” part specifies a jump to Lbl 3.
Example: Lbl 2 _
Menu "IS IT DONE?", "OK", 1, "EXIT", 2 _
Lbl 1 _
"IT’S DONE !"
k Clear Commands (CLEAR)
ClrGraph
Function: This command clears the graph screen.
Syntax: ClrGraph
Description: This command clears the graph screen during program execution.
ClrList
Function: This command deletes list data.
Syntax: ClrList <list name>
ClrList
Parameters: list name: 1 to 26, Ans
Description: This command deletes the data in the list specified by “list name”. All list data is
deleted if nothing is specified for “list name”.
8-20
ClrMat
Function: This command deletes matrix data.
Syntax: ClrMat <matrix name>
ClrMat
Parameters: matrix name: A to Z, Ans
Description: This command deletes the data in the matrix specified by “matrix name”. All
matrix data is deleted if nothing is specified for “matrix name”.
ClrText
Function: This command clears the text screen.
Syntax: ClrText
Description: This command clears text from the screen during program execution.
k Display Commands (DISPLAY)
DispF-Tbl, DispR-Tbl No parameters
Function: These commands display numeric tables.
Description:
• These commands generate numeric tables during program execution in accordance with
conditions defined within the program.
• DispF-Tbl generates a function table, while DispR-Tbl generates a recursion table.
DrawDyna No parameters
Function: This command executes a Dynamic Graph draw operation.
Description: This command draws a Dynamic Graph during program execution in accordance
with the drawing conditions defined within the program.
DrawFTG-Con, DrawFTG-Plt No parameters
Function: This command uses values in a generated table to graph a function.
Description:
• This command draws a function graph in accordance with conditions defined within the
program.
• DrawFTG-Con produces a connect type graph, while DrawFTG-Plt produces a plot type
graph.
8-21
DrawGraph No parameters
Function: This command draws a graph.
Description: This command draws a graph in accordance with the drawing conditions defined
within the program.
DrawR-Con, DrawR-Plt No parameters
Function: These commands graph recursion expressions, with a n
( b n
or c n
) as the vertical axis
and n as the horizontal axis.
Description:
• These commands graph recursion expressions in accordance with conditions defined within
the program, with
a n
( b n
or c n
) as the vertical axis and n as the horizontal axis.
• DrawR-Con produces a connect type graph, while DrawR-Plt produces a plot type graph.
DrawRΣ-Con, DrawRΣ-Plt No parameters
Function: These commands graph recursion expressions, with Σ a n
( Σ b n
or Σ c n
) as the vertical
axis and n as the horizontal axis.
Description:
• These commands graph recursion expressions in accordance with conditions defined within
the program, with Σ a n
( Σ b n
or Σ c n
) as the vertical axis and n as the horizontal axis.
• DrawR Σ -Con produces a connect type graph, while DrawR Σ -Plt produces a plot type graph.
DrawStat
Function: This draws a statistical graph.
Syntax: See “Using Statistical Calculations and Graphs in a Program” on page 8-35.
Description: This command draws a statistical graph in accordance with conditions defined
within the program.
DrawWeb
Function: This command graphs convergence/divergence of a recursion expression (WEB
graph).
Syntax: DrawWeb <recursion type>[, <number of lines>]
Example: DrawWeb an+1 (bn+1 or cn+1), 5
Description:
• This command graphs convergence/divergence of a recursion expression (WEB graph).
• Omitting the number of lines specification automatically specifies the default value 30.
8-22
PlotPhase
Function: Graphs a phase plot based on numeric sequences that correspond to the
x -axis
and y -axis.
Syntax: PlotPhase <
x -axis numeric sequence name>, < y -axis numeric sequence name>
Description:
• Only the following commands can be input for each argument to specify the recursion table.
a n
, b n
, c n
, a n +1
, b n +1
, c n +1
, a n +2
, b n +2
, c n +2
, Σ a n
, Σ b n
, Σ c n
, Σ a n +1
, Σ b n +1
, Σ c n +1
, Σ a n +2
, Σ b n +2
, Σ c n +2
• A Memory ERROR occurs if you specify a numeric sequence name that does not have
values stored in the recursion table.
Example: PlotPhase Σ b n +1
, Σ a n +1
Graphs a phase plot using Σ b n +1
for the x -axis and Σ a n +1
for the y -axis.
k Input/Output Commands (I/O)
Getkey
Function: This command returns the code that corresponds to the last key pressed.
Syntax: Getkey
Description:
• This command returns the code that corresponds to the last key pressed.
• A value of zero is returned if no key was pressed previous to executing this command.
• This command can be used inside of a loop.
8-23
Locate
Function: This command displays alpha-numeric characters at a specific location on the text
screen.
Syntax: Locate <column number>, <line number>, <value>
Locate <column number>, <line number>, <numeric expression>
Locate <column number>, <line number>, "<string>"
[Example] Locate 1, 1, "AB"
Parameters:
• line number: number from 1 to 7
• column number: number from 1 to 21
• value and numeric expression
• string: character string
Description:
• This command displays values (including variable contents) or text at a specific location on
the text screen. If there is a calculation input, that calculation result is displayed.
• The line is designated by a value from 1 to 7, while the column is designated by a value from
1 to 21.
Example: Cls _
Blue Locate 7, 1, "CASIO FX"
This program displays the text “CASIO FX” in blue, in the center of the screen.
• In some cases, the ClrText command should be executed before running the above
program.
← (21, 1)
← (21, 7)
(1, 1) →
(1, 7) →
← (21, 1)
← (21, 7)
(1, 1) →
(1, 7) →
8-24
Receive( / Send(
Function: This command receives data from and sends data to a connected device.
Syntax: Receive(<data>) / Send(<data>)
Description:
• This command receives data from and sends data to a connected device.
• The following types of data can be received (sent) by this command.
• Individual values assigned to variables
• Matrix data (all values - individual values cannot be specified)
• List data (all values - individual values cannot be specified)
OpenComport38k / CloseComport38k
Function: Opens and closes the 3-pin COM port (serial).
Description: See the Receive38k/Send38k command below.
Receive38k / Send38k
Function: Executes data send and receive at a data rate of 38 kbps.
Syntax: Send38k <expression>
<variable name>
Receive38k
<list name>
Description:
• The OpenComport38k command must be executed before this command is executed.
• The CloseComport38k command must be executed after this command is executed.
• If this command is executed when the communication cable is not connected, program
execution will continue without generating an error.
k Conditional Jump Relational Operators (RELATNL)
=, ≠, >, <, ≥, ≤
Function: These relational operators are used in combination with the conditional jump
command.
Syntax: <left side> <relational operator> <right side>
Parameters:
• left side/right side: variable (A to Z,
r ,
θ
), numeric constant, variable expression (such as:
A × 2)
• relational operator: =, ≠ , >, <, ≥, ≤
8-25
k Strings
A string is a series of characters enclosed in double quotes. In a program, strings are used
to specify display text. A string made up of numbers (like "123") or an expression (like "
x –1")
cannot be processed as a calculation.
To display a string at a specific location on the screen, use the Locate command (page 8-23).
• To include double quotes (") or a backslash (\) in a string, put a backslash (\) in front of the
double quotes (") or backslash (\).
Example 1: To include Japan: “Tokyo” in a string
"Japan:\"Tokyo\""
Example 2: To include main\abc in a string
"main\\abc"
You can input a backslash from the menu that appears when you press 6(CHAR)
2(SYMBOL) in the Program mode, or from the String category of the catalog that appears
when you press !e(CATALOG).
• You can assign strings to string memory (Str 1 through Str 20). For details about strings, see
“String Memory” (page 2-8).
• You can use the “+” command (page 8-27) to connect strings inside of an argument.
• A function or command within a string function (Exp(, StrCmp(, etc.) is treated as a single
character. For example, the “sin” function is treated as a single character.
Exp(
Function: Converts a string to an expression, and executes the expression.
Syntax: Exp("<string>"[)]
Exp
'
'Str(
Function: Converts a graph expression to a string and assigns it to the specified variable.
Syntax: Exp 'Str(<formula>, <string variable name>[)]
Description: A graph expression (Y
n
, r, X
t
, Y
t
, X), recursion formula ( a n
, a n +1
, a n +2
, b n
, b n +1
, b n +2
,
c n
, c n +1
, c n +2
), or function memory (f
n
) can be used as the first argument (<formula>).
StrCmp(
Function: Compares “<string 1>” and “<string 2>” (character code comparison).
Syntax: StrCmp("<string 1>", "<string 2>"[)]
Description: Compares two strings and returns one of the following values.
Returns 0 when “<string 1>” = “<string 2>”.
Returns 1 when “<string 1>” > “<string 2>”.
Returns –1 when “<string 1>” < “<string 2>”.
8-26
Strlnv(
Function: Inverts the sequence of a string.
Syntax: StrInv("<string>"[)]
StrJoin(
Function: Joins “<string 1>” and “<string 2>”.
Syntax: StrJoin("<string 1>", "<string 2>"[)]
Note: The same result also can be achieved using the “+” command (page 8-27).
StrLeft(
Function: Copies a string up to the
n th character from the left.
Syntax: StrLeft("<string>",
n [)] (0 < n < 9999, n is a natural number)
StrLen(
Function: Returns the length of a string (the number of its characters).
Syntax: StrLen("<string>"[)]
StrLwr(
Function: Converts all the characters of a string to lower case.
Syntax: StrLwr("<string>"[)]
StrMid(
Function: Extracts from the
n -th to the m -th character of a string.
Syntax: StrMid("<string>", n [,m)] (1 < n < 9999, 0 < m < 9999, n and m are natural numbers)
Description: Omitting “
m ” will extract from the n -th character to the end of the string.
StrRight(
Function: Copies a string up to the
n th character from the right.
Syntax: StrRight("<string>",
n [)] (0 < n < 9999, n is a natural number)
8-27
StrRotate(
Function: Rotates the left side part and right side part of a string at the n th character.
Syntax: StrRotate("<string>", [,
n )] (–9999 < n < 9999, n is an integer)
Description: Rotation is to the left when “
n ” is positive, and to the right when “ n ” is negative.
Omitting “
n ” uses a default value of +1.
Example: StrRotate("abcde", 2) ........ Returns the string “cdeab”.
StrShift(
Function: Shifts a string left or right
n characters.
Syntax: StrShift("<string>", [,
n )] (–9999 < n < 9999, n is an integer)
Description: Shift is to the left when “
n ” is positive, and to the right when “ n ” is negative.
Omitting “ n ” uses a default value of +1.
Example: StrShift("abcde", 2) ........ Returns the string “cde”.
StrSrc(
Function: Searches “<string 1>” starting from the specified point ( n th character from
beginning of string) to determine if it contains the data specified by “<string 2>”. If the data is
found, this command returns the location of the first character of “<string 2>”, starting from the
beginning of “<string 1>”.
Syntax: StrSrc("<string 1>", "<string 2>"[,
n )] (1 < n < 9999, n is a natural number)
Description: Omitting the start point causes the search to start from the beginning of
“<string 1>”.
StrUpr(
Function: Converts all the characters of a string to upper case.
Syntax: StrUpr("<string>"[)]
+ (Joins two strings)
Function: Joins “<string 1>” and “<string 2>”.
Syntax: "<string 1>"+"<string 2>"
Example: "abc"+"de"→Str 1 .......... Assigns “abcde” to Str 1.
k Other
RclCapt
Function: Displayed the contents specified by the capture memory number.
Syntax: RclCapt <capture memory number> (capture memory number: 1 to 20)
8-28
6. Using Calculator Functions in Programs
k Using Color Commands in a Program
Color commands let you specify colors for on-screen lines, text, and other display elements.
The following color commands are supported.
RUN Mode: Black, Blue, Red, Magenta, Green, Cyan, Yellow, ColorAuto, ColorClr
BASE Mode: Black, Blue, Red, Magenta, Green, Cyan, Yellow
• Color commands are input with the dialog box shown below, which appears when you press
!f(FORMAT)b(Color Command) (!f(FORMAT) in a BASE Mode program).
For example, the following key operation would input the color command Blue.
RUN Mode: !f(FORMAT)b(Color Command)c(Blue)
BASE Mode: !f(FORMAT)c(Blue)
• Except for ColorAuto and ColorClr, color commands can be used in a program in
combination with the commands described below.
- Manual graph commands (page 5-25)
You can specify the color of a manual graph by placing a color command
before “Graph Y=” or any other graph commands that can be input following
!4(SKETCH)5(GRAPH).
Example: Red Graph Y = X2 − 1
- Sketch Commands
You can specify the draw color of a figure drawn with a Sketch command by placing a color
command before the following Sketch commands.
Tangent, Normal, Inverse, PlotOn, PlotChg, F-Line, Line, Circle, Vertical, Horizontal, Text,
PxlOn, PxlChg, SketchNormal, SketchThick, SketchBroken, SketchDot, SketchThin
Example: Green SketchThin Circle 2, 1, 2
- List Command
You can specify a color for a list using the syntaxes shown below.
<color command> List n (n = 1 to 26)
<color command> List "sub name"
You can specify a color for a specific element in a list using the syntaxes shown below.
<color command> List n [<element number>] (n = 1 to 26)
<color command> List "sub name" [<element number>]
Example: Blue List 1
Red List 1 [3]
8-29
- The following commands can also be used together with color commands. Refer to the
pages noted in parentheses for more information.
"<text>" (“Text Display”, page 8-30), Locate (page 8-23), SetG-Color (page 8-32), Plot/
Line-Color (page 8-32)
• Color commands also can be used when drawing graphs using Graph mode or Statistics
mode functions in a program. For details, see “Using Graph Functions in a Program” (page
8-32) and “Using Statistical Calculations and Graphs in a Program” (page 8-35).
k Using Paint Commands in a Program
Paint commands provide you with the means to add shading to graphs. The following are the
two paint commands.
ColorNormal, ColorLighter
• Paint commands are input with the dialog box shown below, which appears when you press
!f(FORMAT)c(Paint Command).
For example, the following key operation would input the paint command ColorLighter.
!f(FORMAT)c(Paint Command)c(Lighter)
• For details about syntaxes that can include paint commands, see “Using Statistical
Calculations and Graphs in a Program” (page 8-35).
8-30
k Text Display
You can include text in a program by simply enclosing it between double quotation marks.
Such text appears on the display during program execution, which means you can add labels
to input prompts and results.
Program Display
"CASIO" CASIO
? → X ?
"X =" ? → X X = ?
• The example below shows how you specify the display color of a text string by inserting a
color command before the string in the program.
Blue "CASIO"
• If the text is followed by a calculation formula, be sure to insert a display command (^)
between the text and calculation.
• Inputting more than 21 characters causes the text to move down to the next line.
• You can specify up to 255 bytes of text for a comment.
k Using Matrix Row Operations in a Program
These commands let you manipulate the rows of a matrix in a program.
• For this program, enter the Run-Matrix mode and then use the Matrix Editor to input the
matrix, and then enter the Program mode to input the program.
u To swap the contents of two rows (Swap)
Example 1 To swap the values of Row 2 and Row 3 in the following matrix:
Matrix A =
1 2
3 4
5 6
The following is the syntax to use for this program.
Swap A , 2 , 3 _
Rows to be swapped
Matrix name
Mat A
8-31
Executing this program produces the following result.
u To calculate a scalar multiplication (`Row)
Example 2 To calculate the product of Row 2 of the matrix in Example 1 and the
scalar 4
The following is the syntax to use for this program.
`Row 4, A, 2_
Row
Matrix name
Multiplier
Mat A
u To calculate a scalar multiplication and add the results to another row
(`Row+)
Example 3 To calculate the product of Row 2 of the matrix in Example 1 and the
scalar 4, then add the result to row 3
The following is the syntax to use for this program.
`Row+ 4, A, 2, 3_
Rows to be added
Row for which scalar multiplication is to be calculated
Matrix name
Multiplier
Mat A
u To add two rows (Row+)
Example 4 To add Row 2 to Row 3 of the matrix in Example 1
The following is the syntax to use for this program.
Row+ A , 2 , 3 _
Row number to be added to
Row number to be added
Matrix name
Mat A
8-32
k Using Graph Functions in a Program
You can incorporate graph functions into a program to draw complex graphs and to overlay
graphs on top of each other. The following shows various types of syntax you need to use
when programming with graph functions.
• V-Window View Window –5, 5, 1, –5, 5, 1_
• Graph Color SetG-Color Green_
• Graph function input Y = Type_ ....................Specifies graph type.
"X
2 – 3" → Y1*1_
• Graph draw operation DrawGraph
*
1
Input this Y1 with J4(GRAPH) 1(Y) b (displayed as ). A Syntax ERROR will occur
if you input “Y” with the calculator keys.
u Syntax of other graphing functions
• V-Window View Window <Xmin>, <Xmax>, <Xscale>, <Ymin>, <Ymax>, <Yscale>,
<T
θ
min>, <T
θ
max>, <T
θ
ptch>
StoV-Win <area of V-Win>............... area: 1 to 6
RclV-Win <area of V-Win> ............... area: 1 to 6
• Graph Color SetG-Color <color command>
• Zoom Factor <X factor>, <Y factor>
ZoomAuto ........................................ Non-parameter
• Pict StoPict <area of picture>................. area: 1 to 20
StoPict "folder name\file name"
RclPict <area of picture> ............... area: 1 to 20
RclPict "folder name\file name"
• Sketch Plot/Line-Color <color command>
Plot <X-coordinate>, <Y-coordinate>
PlotOn <X-coordinate>, <Y-coordinate>
PlotOff <X-coordinate>, <Y-coordinate>
PlotChg <X-coordinate>, <Y-coordinate>
PxlOn <line number>, <column number>
PxlOff <line number>, <column number>
PxlChg <line number>, <column number>
PxlTest(<line number>, <column number>[)]
Text <line number>, <column number>, "<text>"
Text <line number>, <column number>, <expression>
................line number: 1 to 187, column number: 1 to 379
8-33
SketchThick <Sketch or Graph statement>
SketchBroken <Sketch or Graph statement>
SketchDot <Sketch or Graph statement>
SketchNormal <Sketch or Graph statement>
SketchThin <Sketch or Graph statement>
Tangent <function>, <X-coordinate>
Normal <function>, <X-coordinate>
Inverse <function>
Line .................. Non-parameter
F-Line <X-coordinate 1>, <Y-coordinate 1>, <X-coordinate 2>,
<Y-coordinate 2>
Circle <center point X-coordinate>, <center point Y-coordinate>,
<radius R value>
Vertical <X-coordinate>
Horizontal <Y-coordinate>
k Using Background Picture in a Program
You can change the “Background” setting on the Setup screen from a program.
• Syntax when a background image is displayed
BG-Pict <area of picture> [,a] ... area: 1 to 20
BG-Pict "folder name\file name" [,a]
Appending “a” at the end loads V-Window values (that are saved with the image data) when
the background image is displayed.
• Syntax when a background image is not displayed (or hidden)
BG-None
k Using Dynamic Graph Functions in a Program
Using Dynamic Graph functions in a program makes it possible to perform repeated Dynamic
Graph operations. The following shows how to specify the Dynamic Graph range inside a
program.
• Dynamic Graph range
1 → D Start _
5 → D End _
1 → D pitch _
8-34
k Using Table & Graph Functions in a Program
Table & Graph functions in a program can generate numeric tables and perform graphing
operations. The following shows various types of syntax you need to use when programming
with Table & Graph functions.
• Table range setting • Graph draw operation
1 → F Start_ Connect type: DrawFTG-Con
5 → F End_ Plot type: DrawFTG-Plt
1 → F pitch_
• Numeric table generation
DispF-Tbl
k Using Recursion Table & Graph Functions in a Program
Incorporating Recursion Table & Graph functions in a program lets you generate numeric
tables and perform graphing operations. The following shows various types of syntax you
need to use when programming with Recursion Table & Graph functions.
• Recursion formula input
a
n+1 Type_ .... Specifies recursion type.
"3an + 2" → an+1_
"4bn + 6" → bn+1_
• Table range setting • Numeric table generation
1 → R Start_ DispR-Tbl
5 → R End_ • Graph draw operation
1 → a0_ Connect type: DrawR-Con, DrawRΣ-Con
2 → b0_ Plot type: DrawR-Plt, DrawRΣ-Plt
1 → an Start_ • Statistical convergence/divergence graph
3 → bn Start_ (WEB graph)
DrawWeb
an+1, 10
8-35
k Using List Sort Functions in a Program
These functions let you sort data in lists into ascending or descending order.
• Ascending order
SortA (List 1, List 2, List 3)
Lists to be sorted (up to six can be specified)
• Descending order
SortD (List 1, List 2, List 3)
Lists to be sorted (up to six can be specified)
k Using Statistical Calculations and Graphs in a Program
Including statistical calculations and graphing operations in a program lets you calculate and
graph statistical data.
u To set conditions and draw a statistical graph
Following a StatGraph command (“S-Gph1”, “S-Gph2”, or “S-Gph3”), you must specify the
following graph conditions:
• Graph draw/non-draw status (DrawOn/DrawOff)
• Graph Type
• x-axis data location (list name)
• y-axis data location (list name)
• Frequency data location (list name)
• Mark Type
• ColorLink setting (X&Y, OnlyX, OnlyY, On, Off, X&Freq)
• Graph Color setting (one of the seven colors* or ColorAuto)
When “Pie” is specified for the Graph Type:
• Display setting (% or Data)
• Percent data storage list specification (None or list name)
When “Pie” or “Hist” is specified for the Graph Type:
• Area color setting (one of the seven colors* or ColorAuto)
• Paint style setting (ColorNormal, ColorLighter)
• Border color setting (one of the seven colors* or ColorClr)
8-36
When “MedBox” is specified for the Graph Type:
• Outliers On/Off setting
• Box color setting (one of the seven colors*)
• Whisker color setting (one of the seven colors*)
• Outliers color setting (one of the seven colors*)
• Box inside color setting (one of the seven colors* or ColorAuto)
• Box inside paint setting (ColorNormal, ColorLighter)
When “Bar” is specified for the Graph Type:
• First bar graph data (list name)
• Second and third bar graph data (list name)
• Bar graph orientation (Length or Horizontal)
• Area color settings for each data (one of the seven colors* or ColorAuto)
• Paint style settings for each data (ColorNormal, ColorLighter)
• Border color settings for each data (one of the seven colors* or ColorClr)
* Black, Blue, Red, Magenta, Green, Cyan, Yellow
The graph conditions that are required depends on the graph type. See “General Graph
Settings” (page 6-2).
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a scatter diagram or xyLine graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Scatter, List 1, List 2, 1, Square, ColorLinkOff, ColorAuto
In the case of an xy line graph, replace “Scatter” in the above specification with “xyLine”.
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a normal probability plot.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, NPPlot, List 1, Square, ColorLinkOff, Blue
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a histogram.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Hist, List 1, List 2, ColorLinkOff, Blue ColorLighter
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a broken graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Broken, List 1, List 2, ColorLinkOff, Blue
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a normal distribution graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, N-Dist, List 1, List 2, Blue
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a med-box graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, MedBox, List 1, List 2, 1, Yellow, Green, Blue, Red
Outliers On/Off (1: On, 0: Off)
Outliers color
Box color
Whisker color
Box inside color
8-37
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a regression graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Linear, List 1, List 2, List 3, Blue
The same format can be used for the following types of graphs, by simply replacing “Linear”
in the above specification with the applicable graph type.
Linear Regression .......... Linear Logarithmic Regression ......Log
Med-Med......................... Med-Med Exponential Regression ......ExpReg(a·eˆb
x )
Quadratic Regression .... Quad ExpReg(a·bˆ
x )
Cubic Regression .......... Cubic Power Regression ...............Power
Quartic Regression ........ Quart
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a sinusoidal regression graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Sinusoidal, List 1, List 2, Blue
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a logistic regression graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Logistic, List 1, List 2, Blue
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a pie chart.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Pie, List 1, %, None, ColorLinkOff, ColorAuto ColorLighter, ColorClr
• The following is a typical graph condition specification for a bar graph.
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Bar, List 1, None, None, StickLength, ColorLinkOff, Blue ColorLighter,
Black, Red ColorLighter, Black, Green ColorLighter, Black
To draw a statistical graph, insert the “DrawStat” command following the graph condition
specification line.
ClrGraph _
S-Wind Auto _
{1, 2, 3} → List 1 _
{1, 2, 3} → List 2 _
S-Gph1 DrawOn, Scatter, List 1, List 2, 1, Square, ColorLinkOff, ColorAuto _
DrawStat
8-38
k Using Distribution Graphs in a Program
Special commands are used to draw distribution graphs in a program.
• To draw a normal cumulative distribution graph
DrawDistNorm <Lower>, <Upper> [,
σ
, ]
Population mean *
1
Population standard deviation *
1
Data upper limit
Data lower limit
*
1 This can be omitted. Omitting these items performs the calculation using = 1 and = 0.
• Executing DrawDistNorm performs the above calculation
in accordance with the specified conditions and draws
the graph. At this time the ZLow < x < ZUp region on the
graph is filled in.
• At the same time, the p, ZLow, and ZUp calculation result values are assigned respectively
to variables p, ZLow, and ZUp, and p is assigned to Ans.
• To draw a Student- t cumulative distribution graph
DrawDistT <Lower>, <Upper>, <df>
Degree of freedom
Data upper limit
Data lower limit
• Executing DrawDistT performs the above calculation in accordance with the specified
conditions and draws the graph. At this time the Lower <
x < Upper region on the graph is
filled in.
• At the same time, the
p calculation result value and the Lower and Upper input values are
assigned respectively to variables
p , tLow, and tUp, and p is assigned to Ans.
πσ
2
p = dx
1e–2 2
σ
(x – μ)2
μ
Upper
Lower
∫
ZUp =
σ
Upper –
μ
ZLow =
σ
Lower –
μ
πσ
2
p = dx
1e–2 2
σ
(x – μ)2
μ
Upper
Lower
∫
ZUp =
σ
Upper –
μ
ZLow =
σ
Lower –
μ
tLow = Lower tUp = Upper
Γ2
df + 1
df
x2
1 +
df + 1
2
p = ×
–
Γ2
df dx
df
×
π
Upper
Lower
∫
tLow = Lower tUp = Upper
Γ2
df + 1
df
x2
1 +
df + 1
2
p = ×
–
Γ2
df dx
df
×
π
Upper
Lower
∫
8-39
• To draw a 2
cumulative distribution graph
DrawDistChi <Lower>, <Upper>, <df>
Degree of freedom
Data upper limit
Data lower limit
• Executing DrawDistChi performs the above calculation in accordance with the specified
conditions and draws the graph. At this time the Lower < x < Upper region on the graph is
filled in.
• At the same time, calculation result is assigned to variables p and Ans.
• To draw an F cumulative distribution graph
DrawDistF <Lower>, <Upper>, <ndf>, <ddf>
Degrees of freedom of denominator
Degrees of freedom of numerator
Data upper limit
Data lower limit
• Executing DrawDistF performs the above calculation in accordance with the specified
conditions and draws the graph. At this time the Lower < x < Upper region on the graph is
filled in.
• At the same time, calculation result
p is assigned to variables p and Ans.
1
p = ×
Γ2
df
df
2df
2××
2
1dxx – 1 x
2
e–
Upper
Lower
∫
1
p = ×
Γ2
df
df
2df
2××
2
1dxx – 1 x
2
e–
Upper
Lower
∫
ndf
2ndf
2
p = ×××
–
Γ2
ndf + ddf
×
Γ2
ndf Γ2
ddf ddf
ndf
ndf + ddf
2
ddf
ndf × xdxx – 1 1 +
Upper
Lower
∫
ndf
2ndf
2
p = ×××
–
Γ2
ndf + ddf
×
Γ2
ndf Γ2
ddf ddf
ndf
ndf + ddf
2
ddf
ndf × xdxx – 1 1 +
Upper
Lower
∫
8-40
k Performing Statistical Calculations in a Program
• Single-variable statistical calculation
1-Variable List1, List 2
Frequency data (Frequency)
x -axis data (XList)
• Paired-variable statistical calculation
2-Variable List 1, List 2, List 3
Frequency data (Frequency)
y -axis data (YList)
x-axis data (XList)
• Regression statistical calculation
LinearReg(ax+b) List 1, List 2, List 3
Frequency data (Frequency)
y-axis data (YList)
x-axis data (XList)
* Any one of the following can be specified as the calculation type.
LinearReg(a
x +b) ......linear regression ( ax +
b type)
LinearReg(a+b
x ) ......linear regression ( a +
bx type)
Med-MedLine ..........Med-Med calculation
QuadReg .................quadratic regression
CubicReg .................cubic regression
QuartReg .................quartic regression
LogReg ...................logarithmic regression
ExpReg(a·eˆb
x )........exponential regression ( a · e bx
type)
ExpReg(a·bˆ
x )..........exponential regression ( a · b x
type)
PowerReg ...............power regression
• Sinusoidal regression statistical calculation
SinReg List 1 , List 2
y -axis data (YList)
x -axis data (XList)
Calculation
type*
Calculation
type*
8-41
• Logistic regression statistical calculation
LogisticReg List 1 , List 2
y -axis data (YList)
x -axis data (XList)
k Performing Distribution Calculations in a Program
• The following values are substituted whenever any of the arguments enclosed in brackets
([ ]) are omitted.
σ
=1, =0, tail=L (Left)
• For the calculation formula of each probability density function, see “Statistic Formula”
(page 6-68).
• Normal Distribution
NormPD(: Returns the normal probability density ( p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: NormPD(
x [,
σ
, )]
• A single value or a list can be specified for
x . Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
NormCD(: Returns the normal cumulative distribution (
p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: NormCD(Lower, Upper[,
σ
, )]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation results
p , ZLow, and
ZUp are assigned respectively to variables p , ZLow, and ZUp. Calculation result p also is
assigned to Ans (ListAns when Lower and Upper are lists).
InvNormCD(: Returns the inverse normal cumulative distribution (lower and/or upper value(s))
for the specified
p value.
Syntax: InvNormCD([ "L(or –1) or R(or 1) or C(or 0)" , ]
p [,
σ
, ])
tail (Left, Right, Central)
• A single value or a list can be specified for p . Calculation results are output in accordance
with the tail setting as described below.
tail = Left
The Upper value is assigned to variables
x 1InvN and Ans (ListAns when p is a list).
tail = Right
The Lower value is assigned to variables
x 1InvN and Ans (ListAns when p is a list).
tail = Central
The Lower and Upper values are assigned respectively to variables
x 1InvN and x 2InvN.
Lower only is assigned to Ans (ListAns when p is a list).
8-42
• Student- t Distribution
tPD(: Returns the Student- t probability density ( p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: tPD(
x , df [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for
x . Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
tCD(: Returns the Student-
t cumulative distribution ( p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: tCD(Lower,Upper,
df [)]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation results
p , tLow,
and tUp are assigned respectively to variables p , tLow, and tUp. Calculation result p also is
assigned to Ans (ListAns when Lower and Upper are lists).
InvTCD(: Returns the inverse Student-
t cumulative distribution (Lower value) for the specified
p value.
Syntax: InvTCD(
p , df [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for
p . The Lower value is assigned to the x Inv and
Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).
• 2
Distribution
ChiPD(: Returns the 2
probability density ( p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: ChiPD(
x , df [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for
x . Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
ChiCD(: Returns the
2
cumulative distribution ( p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: ChiCD(Lower,Upper,
df [)]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation result
p is assigned
to variables
p and Ans (ListAns when Lower and Upper are lists).
InvChiCD(: Returns the inverse
2
cumulative distribution (Lower value) for the specified p
value.
Syntax: InvChiCD(
p , df [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for
p . The Lower value is assigned to the x Inv and
Ans variables (ListAns when
p is a list).
8-43
• F Distribution
FPD(: Returns the F probability density ( p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: FPD(
x , ndf , ddf [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for
x . Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
FCD(: Returns the
F cumulative distribution ( p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: FCD(Lower,Upper,
ndf , ddf [)]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation result
p is assigned
to variables p and Ans (ListAns when Lower and Upper are lists).
InvFCD(: Returns the inverse
F cumulative distribution (Lower value) for the specified data.
Syntax: InvFCD(
p , ndf , ddf [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for
p . The Lower value is assigned to the x Inv and
Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).
• Binomial Distribution
BinomialPD(: Returns the binomial probability ( p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: BinomialPD([
x ,] n ,P[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for
x . Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
BinomialCD(: Returns the binomial cumulative distribution (
p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: BinomialCD([[Lower,] Upper,]
n ,P[)]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation result p is assigned
to variables p and Ans (or ListAns).
InvBinomialCD(: Returns the inverse binomial cumulative distribution for the specified data.
Syntax: InvBinomialCD(
p , n ,P[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for
p . The calculation result X value is assigned to
the x Inv and Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).
8-44
• Poisson Distribution
PoissonPD(: Returns the Poisson probability ( p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: PoissonPD(x, [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for
x . Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
PoissonCD(: Returns the Poisson cumulative distribution (
p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: PoissonCD([Lower,] Upper, [)]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation result
p is assigned
to variables p and Ans (or ListAns).
InvPoissonCD(: Returns the inverse Poisson cumulative distribution for the specified data.
Syntax: InvPoissonCD(p, [)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for
p . The calculation result X value is assigned to
the x Inv and Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).
• Geometric Distribution
GeoPD(: Returns the geometric probability ( p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: GeoPD(
x , P[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for
x . Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
GeoCD(: Returns the geometric cumulative distribution (
p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: GeoCD([Lower,] Upper,P[)]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation result p is assigned
to variables p and Ans (or ListAns).
InvGeoCD(: Returns the inverse geometric cumulative distribution for the specified data.
Syntax: InvGeoCD(
p ,P[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for
p . The calculation result is assigned to the x Inv
and Ans variables (ListAns when
p is a list).
8-45
• Hypergeometric Distribution
HypergeoPD(: Returns the hypergeometric probability ( p value) for the specified data.
Syntax: HypergeoPD(
x , n , M, N[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for
x . Calculation result p is assigned to variables p
and Ans (ListAns when x is a list).
HypergeoCD(: Returns the hypergeometric cumulative distribution (
p value) for the specified
data.
Syntax: HypergeoCD([Lower,] Upper, n, M, N[)]
• Single values or lists can be specified for Lower and Upper. Calculation result p is assigned
to variables p and Ans (or ListAns).
InvHypergeoCD(: Returns the inverse hypergeometric cumulative distribution for the specified
data.
Syntax: InvHypergeoCD(
p , n , M, N[)]
• A single value or a list can be specified for
p . The calculation result X value is assigned to
the x Inv and Ans variables (ListAns when p is a list).
k Using the TEST Command to Execute a Command in a Program
• The following are the specifications ranges for the “ condition” argument of the command.
“<” or –1 when
< 0
“ ≠ ” or 0 when ≠ 0
“>” or 1 when > 0
The above also apply for the “
ρ
condition” and “ &
ρ
condition” specification methods.
• For explanations of arguments, see “Tests” (page 6-32) and “Input and Output Terms of
Tests, Confidence Interval, and Distribution” (page 6-65).
• For the calculation formula of each command, see “Statistic Formula” (page 6-68).
• Z Test
OneSample Z Test: Executes 1-sample Z -test calculation.
Syntax: OneSample
Z Test " condition", 0
,
σ
, o, n
Output Values: z, p, o, n are assigned respectively to variables z, p, o, n and to ListAns
elements 1 through 4.
Syntax: OneSample
Z Test " condition", 0
,
σ
, List[, Freq]
Output Values:
z , p , o, s
x
, n are assigned respectively to variables z , p , o, s
x
, n and to
ListAns elements 1 through 5.
8-46
TwoSample Z Test: Executes 2-sample Z -test calculation.
Syntax: TwoSample
Z Test " 1
condition",
σ
1
,
σ
2
, o1
, n 1
, o2
, n 2
Output Values: z , p , o1
, o2
, n 1
, n
2
are assigned respectively to variables z , p , o1
, o2
, n 1
, n
2
and to ListAns elements 1 through 6.
Syntax: TwoSample
Z Test " 1
condition",
σ
1
,
σ
2
, List1, List2[, Freq1 [, Freq2]]
Output Values:
z , p , o1
, o2
,
s
x 1
, s
x 2
, n 1
, n 2
are assigned respectively to variables z , p , o1
, o2
,
s
x 1
, s
x 2
, n 1
, n 2
and to ListAns elements 1 through 8.
OneProp Z Test: Executes 1-proportion Z -test calculation.
Syntax: OneProp
Z Test " p condition", p 0
, x , n
Output Values: z , p , pˆ , n are assigned respectively to variables z , p , pˆ , n and to ListAns
elements 1 through 4.
TwoProp Z Test: Executes 2-proportion Z -test calculation.
Syntax: TwoProp
Z Test " p 1
condition", x 1
, n 1
, x 2
, n 2
Output Values: z , p , pˆ
1
, pˆ
2
, pˆ , n
1
, n
2
are assigned respectively to variables z , p , pˆ
1
, pˆ
2
, pˆ ,
n 1
, n
2
and to ListAns elements 1 through 7.
• t Test
OneSampleTTest: Executes 1-sample t -test calculation.
Syntax: OneSampleTTest "
condition", 0
, o, s
x
, n
OneSampleTTest "
condition", 0
, List[, Freq]
Output Values:
t , p , o, s
x
, n are assigned respectively to the variables with the same
names and to ListAns elements 1 through 5.
TwoSampleTTest: Executes 2-sample t -test calculation.
Syntax: TwoSampleTTest "
1
condition", o1
, s
x 1
, n 1
, o2
, s
x 2
, n 2
[,Pooled condition]
TwoSampleTTest " 1
condition", List1, List2, [, Freq1[, Freq2[,
Pooled condition ]]]
Output Values: When Pooled condition = 0,
t , p , df , o1
o2
, s
x 1
, s
x 2
, n 1
, n 2
are assigned
respectively to the variables with the same names and to ListAns
elements 1 through 9.
When Pooled condition = 1, t , p , df , o1
, o2
, s
x 1
, s
x 2
, s
p
, n 1
, n 2
are assigned
respectively to the variables with the same names and to ListAns
elements 1 through 10.
Note: Specify 0 when you want to turn off the Pooled condition and 1 when you
want to turn it on. Omitting the input is treated as Pooled condition off.
LinRegTTest: Executes linear regression t -test calculation.
Syntax: LinRegTTest "
&
ρ
condition", XList, YList[, Freq]
Output Values:
t , p , df , a, b, s, r, r
2
are assigned respectively to the variables with the
same names and to ListAns elements 1 through 8.
8-47
• 2
Test
ChiGOFTest: Executes a chi-square goodness of fit test.
Syntax: ChiGOFTest List 1, List 2, df, List 3
(List 1 is the Observed list, List 2 is the Expected list, and List 3 is the
CNTRB list.)
Output Values:
2
, p , df are assigned respectively to the variables with the same names
and to ListAns elements 1 through 3. The CNTRB list is stored in List 3.
ChiTest: Executes a chi-square test.
Syntax: ChiTest MatA, MatB
(MatA is the Observed matrix and MatB is the Expected matrix.)
Output Values:
2
, p , df are assigned respectively to the variables with the same names
and to ListAns elements 1 through 3. The Expected matrix is assigned to
MatB.
• F Test
TwoSample F Test: Executes 2-sample F -test calculation.
Syntax: TwoSample
F Test "
σ
1
condition", s
x 1
, n 1
, s
x 2
, n 2
Output Values: F , p , s
x 1
, s
x 2
, n 1
, n 2
are assigned respectively to the variables with the
same names and to ListAns elements 1 through 6.
Syntax: TwoSample
F Test "
σ
1
condition", List1, List2, [, Freq1 [, Freq2]]
Output Values:
F , p , o1
, o2
, s
x 1
, s
x 2
, n 1
, n 2
are assigned respectively to the variables with
the same names and to ListAns elements 1 through 8.
• ANOVA
OneWayANOVA: Executes one-factor ANOVA analysis of variance.
Syntax: OneWayANOVA List1, List2
(List1 is Factor list (A) and List2 is the Dependent list.)
Output Values: Adf, Ass, Ams, AF, Ap, ERRdf, ERRss, ERRms are assigned respectively
to variables Adf, SSa, MSa, Fa, pa, Edf, SSe, MSe.
Also, output values are assigned to MatAns as shown below.
TwoWayANOVA: Executes two-factor ANOVA analysis of variance.
Syntax: TwoWayANOVA List1, List2, List3
(List1 is Factor list (A), List2 is Factor list (B), and List3 is the Dependent
list.)
MatAns = Adf
ERRdf
Ass
ERRss
Ams
ERRms
AF
0
Ap
0
MatAns = Adf
ERRdf
Ass
ERRss
Ams
ERRms
AF
0
Ap
0
8-48
Output Values: Adf, Ass, Ams, AF, Ap, Bdf, Bss, Bms, BF, Bp, ABdf, ABss, ABms, ABF,
ABp, ERRdf, ERRss, ERRms are assigned respectively to variables Adf,
SSa, MSa, Fa, pa, Bdf, SSb, MSb, Fb, pb, ABdf, SSab, MSab, Fab, pab,
Edf, SSe, MSe.
Also, output values are assigned to MatAns as shown below.
k Performing Financial Calculations in a Program
• Setup Commands
• Date Mode Setting for Financial Calculations
DateMode365 ....... 365 days
DateMode360 ....... 360 days
• Payment Period Setting
PmtBgn ................. Start of period
PmtEnd ................. End of period
• Bond Calculation Payment Periods
PeriodsAnnual ...... Annual
PeriodsSemi ......... Semiannual
• Financial Calculation Commands
For the meaning of each argument, see “Chapter 7 Financial Calculation”.
• Simple Interest
Smpl_SI: Returns the interest based on simple interest calculation.
Syntax: Smpl_SI(
n , I %, PV)
Smpl_SFV: Returns the total of principal and interest based on simple interest calculation.
Syntax: Smpl_SFV(
n , I %, PV)
MatAns =
Adf
Bdf
ABdf
ERRdf
Ass
Bss
ABss
ERRss
Ams
Bms
ABms
ERRms
AF
BF
ABF
0
Ap
Bp
ABp
0
MatAns =
Adf
Bdf
ABdf
ERRdf
Ass
Bss
ABss
ERRss
Ams
Bms
ABms
ERRms
AF
BF
ABF
0
Ap
Bp
ABp
0
8-49
• Compound Interest
Note:
• P/Y and C/Y can be omitted for all compound interest calculations. When they are omitted,
calculations are performed using P/Y=12 and C/Y=12.
• If you perform a calculation that uses a compound interest function (Cmpd_n(, Cmpd_I%(,
Cmpd_PV(, Cmpd_PMT(, Cmpd_FV(), the argument(s) you input and the calculation results
will be saved to the applicable variables (
n , I %, PV , etc.). If you perform a calculation that
uses any other type of financial calculation function, the argument and calculation results are
not assigned to variables.
Cmpd_n: Returns the number of compound periods.
Syntax: Cmpd_
n ( I %, PV, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y)
Cmpd_I%: Returns the annual interest.
Syntax: Cmpd_
I %( n , PV, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y)
Cmpd_PV: Returns the present value (loan amount for installment payments, principal for
savings).
Syntax: Cmpd_PV(
n , I %, PMT, FV, P/Y, C/Y)
Cmpd_PMT: Returns equal input/output values (payment amounts for installment payments,
deposit amounts for savings) for a fixed period.
Syntax: Cmpd_PMT(
n , I %, PV, FV, P/Y, C/Y)
Cmpd_FV: Returns the final input/output amount or total principal and interest.
Syntax: Cmpd_FV(
n , I %, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)
• Cash Flow (Investment Appraisal)
Cash_NPV: Returns the net present value.
Syntax: Cash_NPV(
I %, Csh)
Cash_IRR: Returns the internal rate of return.
Syntax: Cash_IRR(Csh)
Cash_PBP: Returns the payback period.
Syntax: Cash_PBP(
I %, Csh)
Cash_NFV: Returns the net future value.
Syntax: Cash_NFV(
I %, Csh)
• Amortization
Amt_BAL: Returns the remaining principal balance following payment PM2.
Syntax: Amt_BAL(PM1, PM2,
I %, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)
Amt_INT: Returns the interest paid for payment PM1.
Syntax: Amt_INT(PM1, PM2,
I %, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)
Amt_PRN: Returns the principal and interest paid for payment PM1.
Syntax: Amt_PRN(PM1, PM2,
I %, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)
8-50
Amt_ Σ INT: Returns the total principal and interest paid from payment PM1 to PM2.
Syntax: Amt_ Σ INT(PM1, PM2,
I %, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)
Amt_ Σ PRN: Returns the total principal paid from payment PM1 to PM2.
Syntax: Amt_ Σ PRN(PM1, PM2,
I %, PV, PMT, P/Y, C/Y)
• Interest Rate Conversion
Cnvt_EFF: Returns the interest rate converted from the nominal interest rate to the effective
interest rate.
Syntax: Cnvt_EFF(
n , I %)
Cnvt_APR: Returns the interest rate converted from the effective interest rate to the nominal
interest rate.
Syntax: Cnvt_APR(
n , I %)
• Cost, Selling Price, Margin Calculations
Cost: Returns the cost based on a specified selling price and margin.
Syntax: Cost(Sell, Margin)
Sell: Returns the selling price based on a specified cost and margin.
Syntax: Sell(Cost, Margin)
Margin: Returns the margin based on a specified cost and selling price.
Syntax: Margin(Cost, Sell)
• Day/Date Calculations
Days_Prd: Returns the number of days from a specified d1 to specified d2.
Syntax: Days_Prd(MM1, DD1, YYYY1, MM2, DD2, YYYY2)
• Bond Calculations
Bond_PRC: Returns in list form bond prices based on specified conditions.
Syntax: Bond_PRC(MM1, DD1, YYYY1, MM2, DD2, YYYY2, RDV, CPN, YLD) = {PRC,
INT, CST}
Bond_YLD: Returns the yield based on specified conditions.
Syntax: Bond_YLD(MM1, DD1, YYYY1, MM2, DD2, YYYY2, RDV, CPN, PRC)
8-51
7. Program Mode Command List
RUN Program
4(MENU) key
Level 1Level 2Level 3 Command
STAT DRAW On DrawOn
Off DrawOff
GRAPH S-Gph1 S-Gph1_
S-Gph2 S-Gph2_
S-Gph3 S-Gph3_
Scatter Scatter
xyLine xyLine
Hist Hist
Box MedBox
Bar Bar
N-Dist N-Dist
Broken Broken
XLinear
Med Med-Med
X
2
Quad
X
3
Cubic
X
4
Quart
Log Log
*1 (see page 8-57)
Power Power
Sin Sinusoidal
NPPlot NPPlot
Logistic Logistic
Pie Pie
List List_
TYPE *2 (see page 8-57)
DIST DrawN DrawDistNorm_
DrawT DrawDistT_
DrawC DrawDistChi_
DrawF DrawDistF_
CALC 1-VAR 1-Variable_
2-VAR 2-Variable_
*3 (see page 8-57)
Med Med-MedLine_
X
2
QuadReg_
X
3
CubicReg_
X
4
QuartReg_
Log LogReg_
*4 (see page 8-57)
Power PowerReg_
Sin SinReg_
Logistic LogisticReg_
MAT Swap Swap_
Row `Row_
Row+ `Row+_
Row+ Row+_
LIST SortA SortA(
SortD SortD(
GRAPH SEL On G_SelOn_
Off G_SelOff_
TYPE Y= Y=Type
r= r=Type
Param ParamType
X= X=Type
Y> Y>Type
Y< Y<Type
Y≥Y≥
≥
Type
Y≤Y
≤
Type
X> X>Type
X< X<Type
X≥X
≥
Type
X≤X
≤
Type
STYLE — NormalG_
—ThickG_
·····
BrokenThickG_
······
DotG_
—
ThinG_
GPH-MEM Store StoGMEM_
Recall RclGMEM_
GRHCLR SetG-Color_
DYNA On D_SelOn_
Off D_SelOff_
Var D_Var_
TYPE Y= Y=Type
r= r=Type
Param ParamType
GRHCLR SetG-Color_
TABLE On T_SelOn_
Off T_SelOff_
TYPE Y= Y=Type
r= r=Type
Param ParamType
STYLE — NormalG_
—ThickG_
·····
BrokenThickG_
······
DotG_
—
ThinG_
GRHCLR SetG-Color_
RECURSION SEL+S On R_SelOn_
Off R_SelOff_
—NormalG_
—ThickG_
·····
BrokenThickG_
······
DotG_
—
ThinG
TYPE ananType
an+1 an+1Type
an+2 an+2Type
n.an.. nn
anan
an+1 an+1
an+2 an+2
bnbn
bn+1 bn+1
bn+2 bn+2
cncn
cn+1 cn+1
cn+2 cn+2
Σan
Σ
an
Σan+1
Σ
an+1
8-52
Σan+2 Σ
Σ
an+2
Σbn
Σ
bn
Σbn+1
Σ
bn+1
Σbn+2
Σ
bn+2
Σcn
Σ
cn
Σcn+1
Σ
cn+1
Σcn+2
Σ
cn+2
RANGE a0Sel_a0
a1Sel_a1
GRHCLR SetG-Color_
K key
Level 1Level 2Level 3 Command
LIST List List_
Lst→Mat List→Mat(
Dim Dim_
Fill( Fill(
Seq Seq(
Min Min(
Max Max(
Mean Mean(
Med Median(
Augment Augment(
Sum Sum_
Prod Prod_
Cuml Cuml_
%Percent_
ΔList Δ
Δ
List_
MAT Mat Mat_
Mat→Lst Mat→List(
Det Det_
Trn Trn_
Augment Augment(
Identity Identity_
Dim Dim_
Fill( Fill(
Ref Ref_
Rref Rref_
COMPLEX i i
Abs Abs_
Arg Arg_
Conjg Conjg_
ReP ReP_
ImP ImP_
'r∠
θ
'r∠
θ
'a+bi 'a+bi
CALC Solve Solve(
d/dxd/dx(
d
2
/dx
2
d
2
/dx
2
(
∫
dx
∫
∫
(
SolveN SolveN(
FMin FMin(
FMax FMax(
Σ(
Σ
Σ(
logablogab(
Int÷ _Int÷_
Rmdr _Rmdr_
Simp 'Simp_
STAT xˆxˆ
yˆ yˆ
DIST *5 (see page 8-57)
StdDev StdDev(
Var Variance(
TEST *6 (see page 8-57)
CONVERT*
7
(page 8-58) ''
LENGTH fm [fm]
Å[Å]
μm [μm]
mm [mm]
cm [cm]
m[m]
km [km]
AU [AU]
I.y. [I.y.]
pc [pc]
Mil [Mil]
in [in]
ft [ft]
yd [yd]
fath [fath]
rd [rd]
mile [mile]
n mile [n mile]
AREA cm² [cm²]
m² [m²]
ha [ha]
km² [km²]
in² [in²]
ft² [ft²]
yd² [yd²]
acre [acre]
mile² [mile²]
VOLUME cm³ [cm³]
mL [mL]
L[L]
m³ [m³]
in³ [in³]
ft³ [ft³]
fl_oz(UK) [fl_oz(UK)]
fl_oz(US) [fl_oz(US)]
gal(US) [gal(US)]
gal(UK) [gal(UK)]
pt [pt]
qt [qt]
tsp [tsp]
tbsp [tbsp]
cup [cup]
TIME ns [ns]
μs [μs]
ms [ms]
s[s]
min [min]
h[h]
day [day]
week [week]
yr [yr]
s-yr [s-yr]
t-yr [t-yr]
8-53
TEMP °C[°C]
K[K]
°F[°F]
°R[°R]
VELOCITY m/s [m/s]
km/h [km/h]
knot [knot]
ft/s [ft/s]
mile/h [mile/h]
MASS u [u]
mg [mg]
g[g]
kg [kg]
mton [mton]
oz [oz]
lb [lb]
slug [slug]
ton(short) [ton(short)]
ton(long) [ton(long)]
FORCE N [N]
lbf [lbf]
tonf [tonf]
dyne [dyne]
kgf [kgf]
PRESSURE Pa [Pa]
kPa [kPa]
mmH2O[mmH2O]
mmHg [mmHg]
atm [atm]
inH2O[inH2O]
inHg [inHg]
lbf/in² [lbf/in²]
bar [bar]
kgf/cm² [kgf/cm²]
ENERGY eV [eV]
J[J]
calth [calth]
cal15 [cal15]
calIT [calIT]
kcalth [kcalth]
kcal15 [kcal15]
kcalIT [kcalIT]
I-atm [I-atm]
kW•h[kW•h]
ft•lbf [ft•lbf]
Btu [Btu]
erg [erg]
kgf•m[kgf•m]
POWER W [W]
calth/s [calth/s]
hp [hp]
ft•lbf/s [ft•lbf/s]
Btu/min [Btu/min]
HYPERBL sinh sinh_
cosh cosh_
tanh tanh_
sinh
–1
sinh
–1
_
cosh
–1
cosh
–1
_
tanh
–1
tanh
–1
_
PROB x! !
nPr P
nCr C
RAND Ran# Ran#_
Int RanInt#(
Norm RanNorm#(
Bin RanBin#(
List RanList#(
P( P(
Q( Q(
R( R(
t( t(
NUMERIC Abs Abs_
Int Int_
Frac Frac_
Rnd Rnd
Intg Intg_
RndFix RndFix(
GCD GCD(
LCM LCM(
MOD MOD(
MOD_Exp MOD_Exp(
ANGLE °°
°
rr
gg
° ’ ’’
Pol( Pol(
Rec( Rec(
'DMS 'DMS
ENG-SYM m m
μμ
nn
pp
ff
kk
MM
GG
TT
PP
EE
PICTURE Store StoPict_
Recall RclPict_
OPEN *8 (see page 8-58)
FUNCMEM fn fn
LOGIC And _And_
Or _Or_
Not Not_
Xor Xor_
CAPTURE Recall RclCapt_
FINANCE SIMPLE SI Smpl_SI(
SFV Smpl_SFV(
COMPND n Cmpd_n(
I% Cmpd_I%(
PV Cmpd_PV(
PMT Cmpd_PMT(
FV Cmpd_FV(
CASH NPV Cash_NPV(
IRR Cash_IRR(
PBP Cash_PBP(
NFV Cash_NFV(
AMORTZN BAL Amt_BAL(
INT Amt_INT(
PRN Amt_PRN(
8-54
ΣINT Amt_ΣINT(
ΣPRN Amt_ΣPRN(
CONVERT EFF Cnvt_EFF(
APR Cnvt_APR(
COST Cost Cost(
Sell Sell(
Margin Margin(
DAYS PRD Days_Prd(
BOND PRC Bond_PRC(
YLD Bond_YLD(
J key
Level 1Level 2Level 3 Command
V-WIN X min Xmin
max Xmax
scale Xscl
dot Xdot
Ymin
Ymin
max Ymax
scale Yscl
T,
θ
min T
θ
θ
min
max T
θ
max
pitch T
θ
ptch
R-X min RightXmin
max RightXmax
scale RightXscl
dot RightXdot
R-Y min RightYmin
max RightYmax
scale RightYscl
R-T,
θ
min RightT
θ
min
max RightT
θ
max
pitch RightT
θ
ptch
FACTOR Xfct Xfct
Yfct Yfct
STAT X n n
xx
Σx
Σ
x
Σx
2
Σ
x
2
σx
σ
x
sx sx
minX minX
maxX maxX
Yy y
Σy
Σ
y
Σy
2
Σ
y
2
Σxy
Σ
xy
σy
σ
y
sy sy
minY minY
maxY maxY
GRAPH a a
bb
cc
dd
ee
rr
r
2
r
2
MSe MSe
Q1Q1
Med Med
Q3Q3
Mod Mod
Start H_Start
Pitch H_pitch
PTS x1x1
y1y1
x2x2
y2y2
x3x3
y3y3
INPUT n n
xx
sx sx
n1n1
n2n2
x1x1
x2x2
sx1sx1
sx2sx2
sp sp
RESULT *9 (see page 8-58)
GRAPH Y Y
rr
Xt Xt
Yt Yt
XX
DYNA Start D_Start
End D_End
Pitch D_pitch
TABLE Start F_Start
End F_End
Pitch F_pitch
Result F_Result
RECURSION FORMULA anan
an+1 an+1
an+2 an+2
bnbn
bn+1 bn+1
bn+2 bn+2
Cncn
Cn+1 cn+1
Cn+2 cn+2
RANGE Start R_Start
End R_End
a0a0
a1a1
a2a2
b0b0
b1b1
b2b2
C0c0
C1c1
C2c2
anStart anStart
bnStart bnStart
CnStart cnStart
Result R_Result
8-55
EQUATION SimRes Sim_Result
SimCoef Sim_Coef
PlyRes Ply_Result
PlyCoef Ply_Coef
FINANCE n n
I% I%
PV PV
PMT PMT
FV FV
P/Y P/Y
C/Y C/Y
Str Str_
!J(PRGM) key
Level 1Level 2Level 3 Command
COMMAND If If_
Then Then_
Else Else_
IfEnd IfEnd
For For_
To _To_
Step _Step_
Next Next
While While_
WEnd WhileEnd
Do Do
LpWhile LpWhile_
CONTROL Prog Prog_
Return Return
Break Break
Stop Stop
JUMP Lbl Lbl_
Goto Goto_
⇒ ⇒
⇒
Isz Isz_
Dsz Dsz_
Menu Menu_
??
^^
CLEAR Text ClrText
Graph ClrGraph
List ClrList_
Mat ClrMat_
DISPLAY Stat DrawStat
Graph DrawGraph
Dyna DrawDyna
FUNCTAB Table DispF-Tbl
Gph-Con DrawFTG-Con
Gph-Plt DrawFTG-Plt
RECRTAB Table DispR-Tbl
Phase PlotPhase
Web DrawWeb_
an-Cn DrawR-Con
Σa-Cn DrawR
Σ
-Con
an-Pl DrawR-Plt
Σa-Pl DrawR
Σ
-Plt
RELATNL = =
≠
≠
≠
>>
<<
≥≥
≥
≤
≤
≤
I/O Locate Locate_
Getkey Getkey
Send Send(
Receive Receive(
S38k Send38k_
R38k Receive38k_
Open
OpenComport38k
Close
CloseComport38k
:
:
STR Join StrJoin(
Len StrLen(
Cmp StrCmp(
Src StrSrc(
Left StrLeft(
Right StrRight(
Mid StrMid(
E→SExp'Str(
Exp Exp(
Upr StrUpr(
Lwr StrLwr(
Inverse StrInv(
Shift StrShift(
Rotate StrRotate(
!m(SET UP) key
Level 1Level 2Level 3 Command
ANGLE Deg Deg
Rad Rad
Gra Gra
COORD On CoordOn
Off CoordOff
GRID On GridOn
Off GridOff
Line GridLine
AXES On AxesOn
Off AxesOff
Scale AxesScale
LABEL On LabelOn
Off LabelOff
DISPLAY Fix Fix_
Sci Sci_
Norm Norm_
ENG On EngOn
Off EngOff
Eng Eng
SKT/LIN — S-L-Normal
—S-L-Thick
·····
S-L-Broken
······
S-L-Dot
—
S-L-Thin
DRAW Connect G-Connect
Plot G-Plot
DERIV On DerivOn
Off DerivOff
8-56
BACK None BG-None
Pict BG-Pict_
OPEN *8 (see page 8-58)
FUNC On FuncOn
Off FuncOff
SIMUL On SimulOn
Off SimulOff
SGV-WIN Auto S-WindAuto
Manual S-WindMan
LIST File File_
LOCUS On LocusOn
Off LocusOff
TBL-VAR Range VarRange
List VarList_
ΣDISP On Σ
Σ
dispOn
Off
Σ
dispOff
RESID None Resid-None
List Resid-List_
COMPLEX Real Real
a+bi a+bi
r∠
θ
r∠
θ
θ
FRAC d/c d/c
ab/c ab/c
Y=SPEED Norm
Y=DrawSpeedNorm
High
Y=DrawSpeedHigh
DATE 365 DateMode365
360 DateMode360
PMT Begin PmtBgn
End PmtEnd
PERIODS Annual PeriodsAnnual
Semi PeriodsSemi
INEQ Intsect IneqTypeIntsect
Union IneqTypeUnion
SIMP Auto SimplfyAuto
Manual SimplfyMan
Q1Q3 Std Q1Q3TypeStd
OnData
Q1Q3TypeOnData
P/L-CLR
Plot/Line-Color_
! key
Level 1Level 2Level 3 Command
ZOOM Factor Factor_
Auto ZoomAuto
V-WIN V-Win ViewWindow_
Store StoV-Win_
Recall RclV-Win_
SKETCH Cls Cls
Tangent Tangent_
Norm Normal_
Inverse Inverse_
GRAPH Y= Graph_Y=
r= Graph_r=
Param Graph(X,Y)=(
x=c Graph_X=
G·
∫
dX Graph_
∫
∫
Y> Graph_Y>
Y< Graph_Y<
Y≥Graph_Y
≥
Y≤Graph_Y
≤
≤
X> Graph_X>
X< Graph_X<
X≥Graph_X≥
≥
X≤Graph_X
≤
PLOT Plot Plot_
PlotOn PlotOn_
PlotOff PlotOff_
PlotChg PlotChg_
LINE Line Line
F-Line F-Line_
Circle Circle_
Vertical Vertical_
Horz Horizontal_
Text Text_
PIXEL On PxlOn_
Off PxlOff_
Pxlchg PxlChg_
Test PxlTest(
STYLE — SketchNormal_
—SketchThick_
·····
SketchBroken_
······
SketchDot_
—
SketchThin_
!f(FORMAT) key
Level 1Level 2Level 3 Command
1:Color 1:Black Black_
Command 2:Blue Blue_
3:Red Red_
4:Magenta Magenta_
5:Green Green_
6:Cyan Cyan_
7:Yellow Yellow_
9:Auto ColorAuto_
A:Clear ColorClr_
2:Paint 1:Normal ColorNormal_
Command 2:Lighter ColorLighter_
BASE Program
4(MENU) key
Level 1Level 2Level 3 Command
d~o d d
hh
bb
oo
LOGIC Neg Neg_
Not Not_
and and
or or
xor xor
xnor xnor
DISPLAY 'Dec 'Dec
'Hex 'Hex
'Bin 'Bin
'Oct 'Oct
8-57
!J(PRGM) key
Level 1Level 2Level 3 Command
Prog Prog_
JUMP Lbl Lbl_
Goto Goto_
⇒ ⇒
⇒
Isz Isz_
Dsz Dsz_
Menu Menu_
??
^^
RELATNL = =
≠≠
≠
>>
<<
≥≥
≥
≤
≤
≤
::
!m(SET UP) key
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Command
Dec Dec
Hex Hex
Bin Bin
Oct Oct
!f(FORMAT) key
Level 1Level 2Level 3 Command
1:Black Black_
2:Blue Blue_
3:Red Red_
4:Magenta Magenta_
5:Green Green_
6:Cyan Cyan_
7:Yellow Yellow_
Level 3 Level 4 Command
*1 Exp ae
bx
Exp(ae^bx)
ab
x
Exp(ab^x)
*2 MARK Square
Cross
Dot
STICK Length StickLength
Horz StickHoriz
%DATA % %
Data Data
None None
COLOR LINK BothXY ColorLinkX&Y
X&Freq ColorLinkX&Freq
OnlyX ColorLinkOnlyX
OnlyY ColorLinkOnlyY
On ColorLinkOn
Off ColorLinkOff
*3 X ax+b LinearReg(ax+b)
a+bx LinearReg(a+bx)
*4 EXP ae
bx
ExpReg(a•e^bx)
ab
x
ExpReg(a•b^x)
*5 NORM Npd NormPD(
Ncd NormCD(
InvN InvNormCD(
ttpd
tPD(
tcd tCD(
Invt InvTCD(
CHI Cpd ChiPD(
Ccd ChiCD(
InvC InvChiCD(
FFpd
FPD(
Fcd FCD(
InvF InvFCD(
BINOMIAL Bpd BinomialPD(
Bcd BinomialCD(
InvB InvBinomialCD(
POISSON Ppd PoissonPD(
Pcd PoissonCD(
InvP InvPoissonCD(
GEO Gpd GeoPD(
Gcd GeoCD(
InvG InvGeoCD(
HYPRGEO Hpd HypergeoPD(
Hcd HypergeoCD(
InvH InvHyperGeoCD(
*6 Z 1-Sample OneSampleZTest_
2-Sample TwoSampleZTest_
1-Prop OnePropZTest_
2-Prop TwoPropZTest_
t1-Sample
OneSampleTTest_
2-Sample TwoSampleTTest_
REG LinRegTTest_
CHI GOF ChiGOFTest_
2WAY ChiTest_
FTwoSampleFTest_
ANOVA 1WAYANO OneWayANOVA_
2WAYANO TwoWayANOVA_
8-58
*7 Metric conversion commands (commands
included in K6(g)1(CONVERT)) are
supported only when the Metric Conversion
add-in application is installed.
*8 Selecting “OPEN” displays a dialog box for
specifying an image file. The storage memory
location (folder name and file name) of the
specified image will be input. For example:
"Pict\Pict01.g3p".
Level 3 Level 4 Command
*9 TEST p p
zz
tt
Chi
2
FF
pˆ pˆ
pˆ 1pˆ 1
pˆ 2pˆ 2
df df
se se
rr
r
2
r
2
pa pa
Fa Fa
Adf Adf
SSa SSa
MSa MSa
pb pb
Fb Fb
Bdf Bdf
SSb SSb
MSb MSb
pab pab
Fab Fab
ABdf ABdf
SSab SSab
MSab MSab
Edf Edf
SSe SSe
MSe MSe
INTR Lower Lower
Upper Upper
pˆ pˆ
pˆ 1pˆ 1
pˆ 2pˆ 2
df df
DIST p p
xInv xInv
x1Inv x1Inv
x2Inv x2Inv
zLow zLow
zUp zUp
tLow tLow
tUp tUp
8-59
8. CASIO Scientific Function Calculator Special
Commands ⇔ Text Conversion Table
The table below shows the special text strings that correspond to commands when converting
between programs and text files. For details about the operations for converting between
programs and text files, see “Converting Programs and Text Files” (page 8-7).
Important!
• Converting a program that contains the types of commands described below to a text file will
cause the commands to be converted to text strings with underbar (_) characters appended
at the beginning and end, as shown in the table below.
- A command enclosed in quotation marks (" ")
- A command in a comment line, which is a line that begins with a single quotation mark (')
Note that non-command alpha-numeric characters in a program that are enclosed in quotation
marks (" ") or are in a comment line are output to the text file as-is.
Example:
In the program: In the text file (after conversion):
""˝ _Theta_ ˝
"Theta"*1˝ Theta ˝
"Tmax"*2˝ _TThetamax_ ˝
"TThetamax"*1˝ TThetamax ˝
"or"*3˝ _or_ ˝
"or"*1˝ or ˝
*1 Non-command alpha-numeric characters
*2 V-Window Tmax command
*3 Logical operator or
Converting from a text file to a program converts the special character strings back to their
corresponding commands, shown above.
• When converting a program that contains special characters input using 6(CHAR) when
editing the program on the calculator, the special characters will be converted to character
string codes as shown below.
Example:
In the program: In the text file (after conversion):
λ#E54A
#E5A5
1#E5F0
#E641
`#E69C
⇔#E6D6
These codes are not included in the tables on the pages 8-60 through 8-65.
8-60
Command Text
ffemto
ppico
nnano
μ
micro
mmilli
kkilo
MMega
GGiga
TTera
PPeta
EExa
^Disps
↵(CR)
→->
EExp
≤<=
G<>
≥>=
⇒=>
f1f1
f2f2
f3f3
f4f4
f5f5
f6f6
a&HA
b&HB
c&HC
d&HD
e&HE
f&HF

!Char!
"˝
##
$$
%%
&&
'’
((
))
€€€
+++
,,
-Char-
..
///
00
11
22
33
44
55
66
Command Text
77
88
99
::
;;
<<
==
>>
??
@@
AA
BB
CC
DD
EE
FF
GG
HH
II
JJ
KK
LL
MM
NN
OO
PP
QQ
RR
SS
TT
UU
VV
WW
XX
YY
ZZ
[[
\¥
]]
^^^
__
'`
aa
bb
cc
dd
ee
ff
gg
hh
ii
jj
kk
ll
Command Text
mm
nn
oo
pp
qq
rr
ss
tt
uu
vv
ww
xx
yy
zz
{{
||
}}
~˜
Pol( Pol(
sinsin
coscos
tantan
h&h
lnln
'Sqrt
-(-)
PnPr
++
xnor xnor
2^<2>
dms
∫(Integral(
Mod Mod
Σx2Sigmax^2
xX
sin1sin^-1
cos1cos^-1
tan1tan^-1
d&d
loglog
3'Cbrt
AbsAbs
cnCr
−
xor xor
1 ^<-1>
°deg
Med Med
ΣxSigmax
Rec( Rec(
sinhsinh
coshcosh
tanhtanh
o&o
* “” in the following tables indicates a space.
8-61
Command Text
e^ e^
IntInt
NotNot
^^
×€
or or
!!
rrad
minY minY
minX minX
nStatn
sinh1sinh^−1
cosh1cosh^−1
tanh1tanh^−1
b&b
10 (10)
FracFrac
NegNeg
x'Xrt
÷/
and and
{frac
ggra
maxY maxY
maxX maxX
∑y2Sigmay2
Ans Ans
Ran#Ran#
x¯ x-bar
y¯ y-bar
σxsigmax
sx Sx
σxsigmay
sy Sy
aRegression_a
bRegression_b
rRegression_r
x
^x-hat
y
^y-hat
r<r>
Theta
∑ySigmay
πpi
Cls Cls
Rnd Rnd
Dec &D
Hex &H
Bin &B
Oct &O
@D8
NormNorm
Deg Deg
Rad Rad
Gra Gra
Eng Eng
Command Text
IntgIntg
∑xy Sigmaxy
PlotPlot
Line Line
LblLbl
FixFix
SciSci
DszDsz
IszIsz
FactorFactor
ViewWindowViewWindow
GotoGoto
ProgProg
GraphY= GraphY=
GraphGraphIntegral
GraphY> GraphY>
GraphY< GraphY<
GraphY≥GraphY>=
GraphY≤GraphY<=
Graphr= Graphr=
Graph(X,Y)=( Graph(X,Y)=(
,Para,
P( ProbP(
Q( ProbQ(
R( ProbR(
t( Probt(
Xmin Xmin
Xmax Xmax
Xscl Xscl
Ymin Ymin
Ymax Ymax
Yscl Yscl
Tmin TThetamin
Tmax TThetamax
Tptch TThetaptch
Xfct Xfct
Yfct Yfct
DStart DStart
DEnd DEnd
Dpitch Dpitch
RightXmin RightXmin
RightXmax RightXmax
RightXscl RightXscl
RightYmin RightYmin
RightYmax RightYmax
RightYscl RightYscl
RightTmin RightTThetamin
RightTmax RightTThetamax
RightTptch RightTThetaptch
cRegression_c
dRegression_d
eRegression_e
Max( Max(
DetDet
ArgArg
Command Text
ConjgConjg
RePReP
ImPImP
d/dx(d/dx(
d2/dx2(d^2/dx^2(
Solve( Solve(
Σ(Sigma(
FMin( FMin(
FMax( FMax(
Seq( Seq(
Min( Min(
Mean( Mean(
Median( Median(
SolveN( SolveN(
RedRed
BlueBlue
GreenGreen
MOD( MOD(
MOD_Exp( MOD_Exp(
GCD( GCD(
LCM( LCM(
StdDev( StdDev(
Variance( Variance(
MatMat
TrnTrn
€Row€Row
€Row+€Row+
Row+Row+
SwapSwap
DimDim
Fill( Fill(
IdentityIdentity
Augment( Augment(
List→Mat( List->Mat(
Mat→List( Mat->List(
SumSum
ProdProd
PercentPercent
CumlCuml
iImaginary
ListList
ΔListDlist
∞Infinity
∠Angle
RefRef
RrefRref
'Conv
SimCoef SimCoef
PlyCoef PlyCoef
SimResult SimResult
PlyResult PlyResult
nFinancialn
I%FinancialI%
PV FinancialPV
PMT FinancialPMT
8-62
Command Text
FV FinancialFV
List1 List1
List2 List2
List3 List3
List4 List4
List5 List5
List6 List6
Q1Q1
Q3Q3
x1x1
y1y1
x2x2
y2y2
x3x3
y3y3
logab( logab(
RndFix( RndFix(
RanInt#( RanInt#(
RanList#( RanList#(
RanBin#( RanBin#(
RanNorm#( RanNorm#(
ΣanSigmaan
ΣbnSigmabn
ΣcnSigmacn
Getkey Getkey
FResult FResult
FStart FStart
FEnd FEnd
Fpitch Fpitch
RResult RResult
RStart RStart
REnd REnd
HStart HStart
Hpitch Hpitch
'Simp>Simp
anan
an+1an+1
an+2an+2
nSubscriptn
a0a0
a1a1
a2a2
bnbn
bn+1bn+1
bn+2bn+2
b0b0
b1b1
b2b2
anStart anStart
bnStart bnStart
AndAnd
OrOr
NotNot
XorXor
Σan+1Sigmaan+1
Σbn+1Sigmabn+1
Command Text
Σcn+1Sigmacn+1
Σan+2Sigmaan+2
Σbn+2Sigmabn+2
Σcn+2Sigmacn+2
Int÷Int/
RmdrRmdr
Fa Fa
n1 n1
n2 n2
x¯1 x-bar1
x¯2 x-bar2
sx1 sx1
sx2 sx2
sp Sxp
pˆ p-hat
pˆ1 p-hat1
pˆ2 p-hat2
Lower Lower
Upper Upper
P/Y P/Year
C/Y C/Year
Fb Fb
FF-Value
zz-Value
pp-Value
tt-Value
se se
χ2x^2
r2r^2
Adf Adf
Edf Edf
df df
SSa SSa
MSa MSa
SSe SSe
MSe MSe
Fab Fab
Bdf Bdf
ABdf ABdf
pa pa
pb pb
pab pab
CellSum( CellSum(
CellProd( CellProd(
CellMin( CellMin(
CellMax( CellMax(
CellMean( CellMean(
CellMedian( CellMedian(
CellIf( CellIf(
YGraphY
rGraphr
Xt GraphXt
Yt GraphYt
XGraphX
SSb SSb
Command Text
SSab SSab
MSb MSb
MSab MSab
[ns] [ns]
[ƫs] [micros]
[ms] [ms]
[s] [s]
[min] [min]
[h] [h]
[day] [day]
[week] [week]
[yr] [yr]
[s-yr] [s-yr]
[t-yr] [t-yr]
[C] [Centigrade]
[K] [Kel]
[F] [Fahrenheit]
[R] [Rankine]
[u] [u]
[g] [g]
[kg] [kg]
[lb] [lb]
[oz] [oz]
[slug] [slug]
[ton(short)] [ton(short)]
[ton(long)] [ton(long)]
[mton] [mton]
[l-atm] [l-atm]
[ft·lbf] [ftlbf]
[calIT] [calIT]
[calth] [calth]
[Btu] [Btu]
[kW·h] [kWh]
[kgf·m] [kgfm]
[Pa] [Pa]
[kPa] [kPa]
[bar] [bar]
[mmH2O] [mmH2O]
[mmHg] [mmHg]
[inH2O] [inH2O]
[inHg] [inHg]
[lbf/in2][lbf/in^2]
[kgf/cm2][kgf/cm^2]
[atm] [atm]
[dyne] [dyne]
[N] [New]
[kgf] [kgf]
[lbf] [lbf]
[tonf] [tonf]
[fm] [fm]
[mm] [mm]
[cm] [cm]
[m] [m]
[km] [km]
[Mil] [Mil]
[in] [in]
8-63
Command Text
[ft] [ft]
[yd] [yd]
[fath] [fath]
[rd] [rd]
[mile] [mile]
[nmile] [n_mile]
[acre] [acre]
[ha] [ha]
[cm2][cm^2]
[m2][m^2]
[km2][km^2]
[in2][in^2]
[ft2][ft^2]
[yd2][yd^2]
[mile2][mile^2]
[m/s] [m/s]
[km/h] [km/h]
[ft/s] [ft/s]
[mile/h] [mile/h]
[knot] [knot]
[mL] [mL]
[L] [Lit]
[tsp] [tsp]
[cm3][cm^3]
[m3][m^3]
[tbsp] [tbsp]
[in3][in^3]
[ft3][ft^3]
[fl_oz(UK)] [fl_oz(UK)]
[fl_oz(US)] [fl_oz(US)]
[cup] [cup]
[pt] [pt]
[qt] [qt]
[gal(US)] [gal(US)]
[gal(UK)] [gal(UK)]
[ƫm] [microm]
[mg] [mg]
[A] [Ang]
[AU] [AstU]
[l.y.] [l.y.]
[pc] [pc]
[ft·lbf/s] [ftlbf/s]
[calth/s] [calth/s]
[hp] [hp]
[Btu/min] [Btu/min]
[W] [Wat]
[eV] [eV]
[erg] [erg]
[J] [Jou]
[cal15][cal15]
[kcal15][kcal15]
[kcalth] [kcalth]
[kcalIT] [kcalIT]
IfIf
ThenThen
ElseElse
Command Text
IfEnd IfEnd
ForFor
ToTo
StepStep
Next Next
WhileWhile
WhileEnd WhileEnd
Do Do
LpWhileLpWhile
Return Return
Break Break
Stop Stop
LocateLocate
Send( Send(
Receive( Receive(
OpenComport38k
OpenComport38k
CloseComport38k
CloseComport38k
Send38kSend38k
Recieve38kRecieve38k
ClrText ClrText
ClrGraph ClrGraph
ClrListClrList
LinearReg(a+bx)
LinearReg(a+bx)
S-L-Normal S-L-Normal
S-L-Thick S-L-Thick
S-L-Broken S-L-Broken
S-L-Dot S-L-Dot
DrawGraph DrawGraph
PlotPhasePlotPhase
DrawDyna DrawDyna
DrawStat DrawStat
DrawFTG-Con DrawFTG-Con
DrawFTG-Plt DrawFTG-Plt
DrawR-Con DrawR-Con
DrawR-Plt DrawR-Plt
DrawRΣ-Con
DrawRSigma-Con
DrawRΣ-Plt DrawRSigma-Plt
DrawWebDrawWeb
NormalGNormalG
ThickGThickG
BrokenThickG
BrokenThickG
DispF-Tbl DispF-Tbl
DispR-Tbl DispR-Tbl
SimplifyAuto SimplifyAuto
SimplifyMan SimplifyMan
NPPlot NPPlot
Sinusoidal Sinusoidal
SinRegSinReg
Logistic Logistic
LogisticRegLogisticReg
Pie Pie
Bar Bar
DotGDotG
1-Variable1-Variable
2-Variable2-Variable
Command Text
LinearReg(ax+b)
LinearReg(ax+b)
Med-MedLineMed-MedLine
QuadRegQuadReg
CubicRegCubicReg
QuartRegQuartReg
LogRegLogReg
ExpReg(a·e^bx)
ExpReg(ae^bx)
PowerRegPowerReg
S-Gph1S-Gph1
S-Gph2S-Gph2
S-Gph3S-Gph3
Square Square
Cross Cross
Dot Dot
Scatter Scatter
xyLine xyLine
Hist Hist
MedBox MedBox
N-Dist N-Dist
Broken Broken
Linear Linear
Med-Med Med-Med
Quad Quad
Cubic Cubic
Quart Quart
Log Log
Exp(a·e^bx) Exp(ae^bx)
Power Power
ExpReg(a·b^x)
ExpReg(ab^x)
S-WindAuto S-WindAuto
S-WindMan S-WindMan
GraphX= GraphX=
Y=Type Y=Type
r=Type r=Type
ParamType ParamType
X=Type X=Type
X>Type X>Type
X<Type X<Type
Y>Type Y>Type
Y<Type Y<Type
YtType Y>=Type
YsType Y<=Type
XtType X>=Type
XsType X<=Type
G-Connect G-Connect
G-Plot G-Plot
Resid-None Resid-None
Resid-ListResid-List
BG-None BG-None
BG-PictBG-Pict
GridOff GridOff
GridLine GridLine
GridOn GridOn
Exp(a·b^x) Exp(a^bx)
DVarDVar
8-64
Command Text
Q1Q3TypeStd Q1Q3TypeStd
VarRange VarRange
Q1Q3TypeOnData
Q1Q3TypeOnData
SketchNormal
SketchNormal
SketchThickSketchThick
SketchBroken
SketchBroken
SketchDotSketchDot
anType anType
an+1Type an+1Type
an+2Type an+2Type
StoPictStoPict
RclPictRclPict
StoGMEMStoGMEM
RclGMEMRclGMEM
StoV-WinStoV-Win
RclV-WinRclV-Win
% Display%
Data DisplayData
MenuMenu
RclCaptRclCapt
TangentTangent
NormalNormal
InverseInverse
VerticalVertical
HorizontalHorizontal
TextText
CircleCircle
F-LineF-Line
PlotOnPlotOn
PlotOffPlotOff
PlotChgPlotChg
PxlOnPxlOn
PxlOffPxlOff
PxlChgPxlChg
PxlTest( PxlTest(
SortA( SortA(
SortD( SortD(
VarList1 VarList1
VarList2 VarList2
VarList3 VarList3
VarList4 VarList4
VarList5 VarList5
VarList6 VarList6
File1 File1
File2 File2
File3 File3
File4 File4
File5 File5
File6 File6
Y=DrawSpeedNorm
Y=DrawSpeedNorm
Y=DrawSpeedHigh
Y=DrawSpeedHigh
FuncOn FuncOn
SimulOn SimulOn
AxesOn AxesOn
CoordOn CoordOn
Command Text
LabelOn LabelOn
DerivOn DerivOn
LocusOn LocusOn
ΣdispOn SigmadispOn
GSelOnGSelOn
TSelOnTSelOn
DSelOnDSelOn
RSelOnRSelOn
DrawOn DrawOn
ab/c ab/c
d/c d/c
FuncOff FuncOff
SimulOff SimulOff
AxesOff AxesOff
CoordOff CoordOff
LabelOff LabelOff
DerivOff DerivOff
LocusOff LocusOff
ΣdispOff SigmadispOff
GSelOffGSelOff
TSelOffTSelOff
DSelOffDSelOff
RSelOffRSelOff
DrawOff DrawOff
'Dec >&D
'Hex >&H
'Bin >&B
'Oct >&O
'DMS >DMS
'a+bi>a+bi
'r∠Ƨ>re^Theta
Real Real
a+bia+bi
r∠Ƨre^Theta
EngOn EngOn
EngOff EngOff
Sela0Sela0
Sela1Sela1
cncn
cn+1cn+1
cn+2cn+2
c0c0
c1c1
c2c2
cnStart CnStart
IneqTypeIntsect
IneqTypeIntsect
fnfn
FileFile
VarListVarList
ClrMatClrMat
ZoomAuto ZoomAuto
Xdot Xdot
RightXdot R-Xdot
DrawDistNorm
DrawDistNorm
DrawDistTDrawDistT
Command Text
DrawDistChiDrawDistChi
DrawDistFDrawDistF
None None
StickLength StickLength
StickHoriz StickHoriz
IneqTypeUnion IneqTypeUnion
GraphX> GraphX>
GraphX< GraphX<
GraphX≥GraphX>=
GraphX≤GraphX<=
StrJoin( StrJoin(
StrLen( StrLen(
StrCmp( StrCmp(
StrSrc( StrSrc(
StrLeft( StrLeft(
StrRight( StrRight(
StrMid( StrMid(
Exp'Str( Exp>Str(
Exp( Exp(
StrUpr( StrUpr(
StrLwr( StrLwr(
StrInv( StrInv(
StrShift( StrShift(
StrRotate( StrRotate(
StrStr
ColorAutoColorAuto
ColorLighter
ColorLighter
ColorLinkX&Y ColorLinkX&Y
ColorLinkOnlyX
ColorLinkOnlyX
ColorLinkOnlyY
ColorLinkOnlyY
ColorLinkOn ColorLinkOn
ColorLinkOff ColorLinkOff
ColorNormalColorNormal
ERROR ERROR
BLANK BLANK
ColorClrColorClr
ColorLinkX&Freq
ColorLinkX&Freq
NormPD( NormPD(
NormCD( NormCD(
InvNormCD( InvNormCD(
tPD( tPD(
tCD( tCD(
InvTCD( InvTCD(
ChiPD( ChiPD(
ChiCD( ChiCD(
InvChiCD( InvChiCD(
FPD( FPD(
FCD( FCD(
InvFCD( InvFCD(
BinomialPD( BinomialPD(
BinomialCD( BinomialCD(
InvBinomialCD(
InvBinomialCD(
PoissonPD( PoissonPD(
PoissonCD( PoissonCD(
InvPoissonCD( InvPoissonCD(
GeoPD( GeoPD(
8-65
Command Text
GeoCD( GeoCD(
InvGeoCD( InvGeoCD(
HypergeoPD( HypergeoPD(
HypergeoCD( HypergeoCD(
InvHypergeoCD(
InvHypergeoCD(
SetG-ColorSetG-Color
Plot/Line-Color
Plot/Line-Color
AxesScale AxesScale
BlackBlack
MagentaMagenta
CyanCyan
YellowYellow
Smpl_SI( Smpl_SI(
Smpl_SFV( Smpl_SFV(
Cmpd_n( Cmpd_n(
Cmpd_I%(Cmpd_I%(
Cmpd_PV( Cmpd_PV(
Cmpd_PMT( Cmpd_PMT(
Cmpd_FV( Cmpd_FV(
Cash_NPV( Cash_NPV(
Cash_IRR( Cash_IRR(
Cash_PBP( Cash_PBP(
Cash_NFV( Cash_NFV(
Amt_BAL( Amt_BAL(
Amt_INT( Amt_INT(
Amt_PRN( Amt_PRN(
Amt_ΣINT( Amt_SigmaINT(
Amt_ΣPRN( Amt_SigmaPRN(
Cnvt_EFF( Cnvt_EFF(
Cnvt_APR( Cnvt_APR(
Cost( Cost(
Sell( Sell(
Margin( Margin(
PmtEnd PmtEnd
PmtBgn PmtBgn
Bond_PRC( Bond_PRC(
Bond_YLD( Bond_YLD(
DateMode365 DateMode365
DateMode360 DateMode360
PeriodsAnnual PeriodsAnnual
PeriodsSemi PeriodsSemi
Days_Prd( Days_Prd(
OneSampleZTest
OneSampleZTest
TwoSampleZTest
TwoSampleZTest
OnePropZTest
OnePropZTest
TwoPropZTest
TwoPropZTest
OneSampleTTest
OneSampleTTest
TwoSampleTTest
TwoSampleTTest
LinRegTTestLinRegTTest
ChiGOFTestChiGOFTest
ChiTestChiTest
TwoSampleFTest
TwoSampleFTest
OneWayANOVA
OneWayANOVA
TwoWayANOVA
TwoWayANOVA
x1InvN x1InvN
x2InvN x2InvN
Command Text
xInv xInv
SketchThinSketchThin
S-L-Thin S-L-Thin
ThinGThinG
zLow zLow
zUp zUp
tLow tLow
tUp tUp
On Version OS 1.01,
following commands are
converted as follows.
Command Text
!!!
2^2
–1 ^-1
anan
bnbn
[K] [K]
[N] [N]
[L] [L]
[A] [A]
[AU] [AU]
[W] [W]
[J] [J]
cncn
E^E
---
rGamma
8-66
9. Program Library
• Be sure to check how many bytes of unused memory are remaining before attempting to
perform any programming.
Program Name Prime Factorization
Description
This program continually divides a natural number by factors until all its prime factors are
produced.
Purpose
This program accepts input of natural number A, and divides it by B (2, 3, 5, 7....) to find the
prime factors of A.
• If a division operation does not produce a remainder, the result of the operation is assigned
to A.
• The above procedure is repeated until B > A.
Example 462 = 2 × 3 × 7 × 11
egcw
w
ww
w
8-67
Program Name Ellipse
Description
This program displays a number table of the following values based on input of the foci of an
ellipse, the sum of the distance between the loci and foci, and the pitch (step size) of X.
Y1: Coordinate values of upper half of ellipse
Y2: Coordinate values of lower half of ellipse
Y3: Distances between right focus and loci
Y4: Distances between left focus and loci
Y5: Sum of Y3 and Y4
Next, the program plots the foci and values in Y1 and Y2.
Purpose
This program shows that the sums of the distances between the loci and two foci of an ellipse
are equal.
dw
baw
bw
w
9-1
Chapter 9 Spreadsheet
The Spreadsheet application provides you with powerful, take-along-anywhere spreadsheet
capabilities.
All of the operations in this section are performed in the Spreadsheet
mode.
Note
A Memory ERROR may occur during a Spreadsheet mode operation if main memory capacity
is low. If this happens, delete some input data or Memory mode data in order to increase
available free space.
1. Spreadsheet Basics and the Function Menu
Selecting Spreadsheet
on the Main Menu will display a spreadsheet screen. Entering the
Spreadsheet
mode automatically creates a new spreadsheet file named “SHEET”.
The spreadsheet screen shows a number of cells (squares) and the data contained in each
cell.
File name
Shows as many characters
as possible of the fi le name. Column letters (A to Z)
Row numbers
(1 to 999) Cell cursor
Edit box
Shows the contents of the cell where the cell
cursor is currently located. When multiple
cells are selected, the edit box indicates the
selected cell range.
Function menu
You can enter the following types of data into a cell.
Constants A constant is something whose value is fixed as soon as you finalize its input. A
constant can be either a numeric value, or a calculation formula (such as 7+3,
sin30, A1 × 2, etc.) that does not have an equal sign (=) in front of it.
Text A character string that starts with a quote mark (") is treated as text.
Formula A formula that starts out with an equal sign (=) , such as =A1 × 2, is executed as it
is written.
Note that complex numbers are not supported in the Spreadsheet
mode.
9
9-2
Note
Though the maximum file size that can be handled by the Spreadsheet mode is 30KB, the
maximum size can be modified by changing the data type or conditional formatting. Also note
that the maximum file size changes in accordance with the amount of main memory available.
The following are examples of two conditions that would exceed the maximum file size.
(1) Inputting numeric value data into cells A1 through A999, B1 through B999, and C1 through
C520.
• In this case, the Spreadsheet strip in the eActivity mode will show up to cells A1 through
A999, B1 through B80.
(2) No data input, assigning the conditional formatting to cells A1 through A999 and B1
through B430.
Type: Expression
Expre: B1=2 A1^3+3 A1^2+4 A1+5
• In this case, the Spreadsheet strip in the eActivity mode will show up to cells A1 through
A999 and B1 through B410.
k Spreadsheet Screen Function Menu
• { FILE } ... Displays the following FILE submenu.
• { NEW } / { OPEN } / { SAVE
•
AS } / { RECALCS }/{CSV}
• { EDIT } ... Displays the following EDIT submenu.
• { CUT } / { PASTE } / { COPY } / { CELL } / { JUMP } / { SEQ } / { FILL } / { SORTASC } / { SORTDES }
• PASTE is displayed only immediately after CUT or COPY is executed.
• { DELETE } ... Displays the following DELETE submenu.
• { ROW } / { COLUMN } / { ALL }
• { INSERT } ... Displays the following INSERT submenu.
• { ROW } / { COLUMN }
• {CLEAR} ... Displays the following CLEAR submenu.
• {CONTENT}/{FORMAT}/{ALL}
• { GRAPH } ... Displays the following GRAPH menu. (Same as in the Statistics mode.)
• { GRAPH1 } / { GRAPH2 } / { GRAPH3 } / { SELECT } / { SET }
• { CALC } ... Displays the following CALC (statistical calculation) menu. (Same as in the
Statistics mode.)
• { 1-VAR } / { 2-VAR } / { REG } / { SET }
• { STORE } ... Displays the following STORE submenu.
• { VAR } / { LIST } / { FILE } / { MAT }
• { RECALL } ... Displays the following RECALL submenu.
• { LIST } / { FILE } / { MAT }
• {CONDIT} ... Displays the conditional formatting setting screen.
• {COND1}/{COND2} ... Displays the {Condition1}/{Condition2} screens.
9-3
Data Entry Function Menu
• { GRAB } ... Enters the GRAB mode for entering a cell reference name.
• { $ } ... Inputs the cell absolute reference command ($).
• { : } ... Inputs the cell range specification command (:).
• { If } ... Inputs the CellIf( command.
• { CELL } ... Displays a submenu for inputting the following commands.
• CellMin(, CellMax(, CellMean(, CellMedian(, CellSum(, CellProd(
• { RELATNL } ... Displays a submenu for inputting the following relational operators.
• =, ≠ , >, <, ≥ , ≤
2. Basic Spreadsheet Operations
This section explains spreadsheet file operations, how to move the cursor and select one or
more cells, and how to enter and edit data.
k Spreadsheet File Operations
u To create a new file
1. Press 1(FILE) 1(NEW).
2. On the dialog box that appears, enter up to eight characters for the file name, and then
press w.
• This will create a new file and display a blank spreadsheet.
• A new file will not be created it there is already a file with the same file name you enter in
step 2. Instead, the existing file will be opened.
u To open a file
1. Press 1(FILE) 2(OPEN).
2. On the file list that appears, use f and c to select the file you want and then press w.
u Auto Save
In the Spreadsheet
mode, Auto Save saves the currently open file automatically whenever
you edit it. This means you do not need to perform any manual save operation.
u To save a file under a new name
1. Press 1(FILE) 3(SAVE
•
AS).
2. On the dialog box that appears, enter up to eight characters for the new file name, and then
press w.
• If a file already exists with the same file name you enter in step 2, a message will appear
asking if you want to replace the existing file with the new one. Press 1(Yes) to replace
the existing file, or 6(No) to cancel the save operation and return to the file name input
dialog box in step 2.
9-4
u To delete a file
1. Press 1(FILE) 2(OPEN).
2. On the file list that appears, use f and c to select the file you want to delete and then
press 1(DELETE).
3. This causes a confirmation message to appear. Press 1(Yes) to delete the file, or 6(No)
to cancel without deleting anything.
4. To return to the spreadsheet from the file list, press J.
• Deleting the currently open file will automatically create a new file named “SHEET” and
display its spreadsheet.
k Transferring Data between a Spreadsheet and CSV Files
You can import the contents of a CSV file stored with this calculator or transferred from a
computer into a spreadsheet. You also can save the contents of a spreadsheet as a CSV file.
u To import the contents of a CSV file to a spreadsheet
1. Prepare the CSV file you want to import.
• See “Import CSV File Requirements” (page 3-18).
2. Press 1(FILE)5(CSV)1(LOAD).
• Pressing w in the next step will overwrite all of the data on the spreadsheet with the CSV
file data.
3. On the select file dialog box that appears, use f and c to move the highlighting to the
file you want to import and then press w.
• This imports the contents of the CSV file you specified to the spreadsheet.
Important!
• All blank data in the CSV file is imported as a blank cell.
• An error occurs if a CSV file contains even a single text string data item.
• If the CSV file includes data that cannot be converted, an error message will appear showing
the location in the CSV file (Example: row 2, column 3) where the data that cannot be
converted is located.
• Attempting to import a CSV file that has more than 26 columns or 999 rows will cause an
“Invalid Data Size” error.
u To save spreadsheet contents as a CSV file
1. If required, press 1(FILE)4(RECALCS) to recalculate the spreadsheet contents.
• Note that recalculation is not performed automatically when you save spreadsheet
contents to a CSV file. Be sure to perform recalculation if the spreadsheet contains a
formula, which starts with an equals symbol (=). See “Inputting a Formula into a Cell”
(page 9-10) for more information.
• Formulas are not saved to the CSV file. Only calculation results are saved.
• All ERROR cell data on the spreadsheet is saved as blank data.
9-5
2. Press 1(FILE)5(CSV)2(SAVE • AS).
• This displays a folder selection screen.
3. Select the folder where you want to save the CSV file.
• To store the CSV file in the root directory, highlight “Root”.
• To store the CSV file in a folder, use f and c to move the highlighting to the desired
folder and then press 1(OPEN).
4. Press 1(SAVE • AS).
5. Input up to eight characters for the file name and then press w.
• For information about how certain types of data is converted when being saved to a CSV
file, see the “Important!” note under “To save matrix contents as a CSV file” (page 2-47).
u To specify the CSV file delimiter symbol and decimal point
Press 1(FILE)5(CSV)3(SET) to display the CSV format setting screen. Next, perform the
procedure from step 3 under “Specifying the CSV File Delimiter Symbol and Decimal Point”
(page 3-20).
k Recalculating All of the Formulas in the Currently Open Spreadsheet
The Spreadsheet
mode has an Auto Calc features that automatically recalculates all of the
formulas in a spreadsheet whenever you open it or perform any editing operation. Auto Calc is
enabled under initial factory default settings. You also can execute a recalculation manually, if
you want.
Note
Stopping a recalculation part way through does not return spreadsheet contents to what
they were before the recalculation was started. The spreadsheet will show the results of the
recalculation up the point it was stopped.
u Auto Calc
Auto Calc is an Spreadsheet
mode Setup item (page 1-35).
When Auto Calc is enabled (On), all of the formulas in a spreadsheet are recalculated when
the spreadsheet is opened or when any editing operation is performed. It should be noted,
however, that recalculation can slow down the overall processing speed. When Auto Calc is
disabled (Off), you need to execute recalculation manually as required.
u To execute spreadsheet re-calculation manually
Press 1(FILE) 4(RECALCS). This recalculates all of the formulas in the currently open file
and displays the applicable results.
9-6
k Using the Cell Cursor
The cell cursor shows the cell that is selected on a spreadsheet. The highlighted cell is the one
that is currently selected by the cell cursor.
Cell cursor
Edit box
When a single cell is selected by the cell cursor, the contents of that cell are displayed in the
edit box. The cell contents can be edited in the edit box.
When a multiple cells are selected by the cell cursor, the selection range is displayed in the
edit box. In this case, you can copy, delete, or perform other cell operations on the entire range
of selected cells.
u To select cells
To select this: Do this:
A single cell Use the cursor keys to move the cell cursor to the cell
you want, or use the JUMP comment to jump directly
to the cell.
A range of cells See “To select a range of cells” (page 9-7).
An entire row of cells
Move the cell cursor to column A of the row whose
cells you want to select and then press d. Pressing
d while the cell cursor is located at cell A2, for
example, will select the entire second row (from A2 to
Z2). This will cause A2:Z2 (which indicates the selected
range) to appear in the edit box.
An entire column of cells
Move the cell cursor to row 1 of the column whose cells
you want to select and then press f. Pressing f
while the cell cursor is located at cell C1, for example,
will select the entire column C (from C1 to C999).
This will cause C1:C999 (which indicates the selected
range) to appear in the edit box.
All of the cells in the spreadsheet
Press d while the entire column A is selected or
press f while the entire row 1 is selected. This will
select all of the cells in the spreadsheet and display the
spreadsheet file name in the edit box.
9-7
u Using the JUMP Command to Move the Cell Cursor
To move the cell cursor to here: Do this:
A particular cell 1. Press 2(EDIT) 4(JUMP) 1(GO).
2. On the dialog box that appears, enter the name
of the cell (A1 to Z999) to which you want to
jump.
3. Press w.
Line 1 of the current column Press 2(EDIT) 4(JUMP) 2(TOP ↑ ).
Column A of the current row Press 2(EDIT) 4(JUMP) 3(TOP ← ).
Last line of the current column Press 2(EDIT) 4(JUMP) 4(BTM ↓ ).
Column Z of the current row Press 2(EDIT) 4(JUMP) 5(BTM → ).
u To select a range of cells
1. Move the cell cursor to the start point of the range of cells you want to select.
• You could select and entire row or column of cells as the start point, if you want. For details
about selecting cells, see “To select cells” on page 9-6.
2. Press !i(CLIP).
• This will change the cell cursor to a thick-line boundary instead of the normal highlighting.
3. Use the cursor keys to move the cell cursor to the end
point of the range of cells you want to select.
• The edit box will show the range of the selected cells.
• To cancel cell selection, press J. If you do, the cell
cursor will be located at the end point of the range you
selected.
9-8
k Data (Constants, Text, Formula) Input Basics
First let’s have a look at a few basic procedures that apply regardless of the type of data you
are inputting.
u To overwrite data currently in a cell with new data
1. Move the cell cursor to the cell where you want to input data.
• If the cell you select already contains data, the following step will overwrite the existing
data with new input.
2. Use the calculator’s keys to input data.
• As you perform key operations to input values or text
(such as b, al(B), etc.), the applicable figures
will appear aligned left inside the edit box.
• To cancel an input operation part way through at any
point before advancing to step 3 below, press J. This
will return the cell contents to what they were in step 1
of this procedure.
3. To finalize and apply your input, press w.
u To edit cell data
1. Move the cell cursor to the cell whose contents you want to edit.
2. Press 2(EDIT) 3(CELL).
• Cell contents in the edit box will change from align right
to align left. A text cursor will appear in the edit box so
you can edit its contents.
3. Use e and d to move the cursor around the contents of the cell, and edit them as
required.
• To cancel an edit operation part way through at any point before advancing to step 4
below, press J. This will return the cell contents to what they were in step 1 of this
procedure.
4. To finalize and apply your edits, press w.
u To move the cell cursor while inputting data into a cell
Under factory default settings, pressing w while inputting data into a cell will cause the cell
cursor to move to the next line. You can specify movement to the next column instead using the
“Move” setting as described on page 1-35.
9-9
k Inputting a Constant (Value, Calculation Result, Number Sequence) into
a Cell
A constant is something whose value is fixed as soon as you finalize its input. A constant can
be either a numeric value, or a calculation formula (such as 7+3, sin30, A1 × 2, etc.) that does
not have an equal sign (=) in front of it. Inputting sdaw, for example will cause the
value 0.5 (the calculation result) to appear in the cell (when Deg is selected as the Angle unit).
u To input a number sequence automatically based on a function expression
1. Move the cell cursor to the cell where you want number sequence input to start.
• Under initial default settings, automatic input of the number sequence will proceed
downwards from the start cell. You can specify a different direction using the “Move” setting
as described on page 1-35.
2. Press 2(EDIT) 5(SEQ) to display the Sequence screen, and then specify the function
expression and values required to generate the required number sequence.
You can input data for the item that is highlighted on
the screen.
Reference name of the cell selected in step 1
Item Description
Expr Input the function expression
f ( x ) for generating the number sequence.
Example: a+(X) x+bw (X
2
+ 1)
Var Input the variable name used in the function expression input for Expr.
Example: a+(X) w (X)
Start Input the starting value (X
1
) of the value to be substituted for the variable
specified by Var.
Example: cw
End Input the ending value (X
n
) of the value to be substituted for the variable
specified by Var.
Example: baw
Incre Input the increment value ( m ) for successive value of X
1
, as in: (X
2
= X
1
+ m ),
(X
3
= X
2
+ m ), and so on. The number sequence is generated in the range of
X
1
+ ( n – 1) m < X
n
.
Example: cw
9-10
Item Description
1st Cell Input the reference name (A1, B2, etc.) of the cell where you want the first
value of the number sequence to be input. Specify a cell here only if the
starting cell is different from the one you specified in step 1 of this procedure.
Example: al(B) bw (B1)
• Each time you press w after inputting data for a setting item, the highlighting will move to
the next setting item. You also can use f and c to move the highlighting upwards and
downwards as required.
• Performing the next step will input the number string automatically starting from the
specified cell. If any cell that is within the range of cells where the number sequence
values will be input already contains data, the existing data will be replaced with the
number sequence values.
3. After inputting data for all the setting items, press 6(EXE) or the w key to start number
sequence generation and input.
k Inputting Text into a Cell
To input text, make sure the first thing you input into the cell is aE(”). The quote mark (")
tells the calculator that what follows is text, and should be displayed as-is without calculation.
The quote mark (") is not displayed as part of the text.
k Inputting a Formula into a Cell
For the sake of example, let’s try making a table that contains data based on the formula
<PRICE> × <QUANTITY> = <TOTAL>. To do this, we would put <PRICE> values in column
A, <QUANTITY> values in column B, and calculation formulas (like = A1 × B1, = A2 × B2, and
so on) in column C. If the Auto Calc feature is enabled (On), the values in column C would be
recalculated and updated any time we change the values in column A or B.
In this example, note that we must start out the data in column C with the equal sign (=) in
order to indicate it is a formula. In addition to values, arithmetic operators, and cell reference
names, a formula also can contain built-in function commands (page 2-14) and special
Spreadsheet
mode commands (page 9-19).
→→
9-11
u Formula Input Example
A B C
1 PRICE QUANTITY TOTAL
2 35 15 525
3 52 15 780
4 78 20 1560
Procedure
1. Input the text for line 1, and the applicable values in cells A2 through B4.
2. Move the cursor to cell C2, and input the formula for A2 × B2.
!.(=) av(A) c*al(B) cw
3. Copy the formula in cell C2 and copy it into cells C3 and C4. Move the cell cursor to cell C2
and then perform the following operation.
2(EDIT) 2(COPY) c1(PASTE) c1(PASTE) J
• For details about the copy and paste operations, see
“Copying and Pasting Cell Contents” (page 9-14).
k Inputting a Cell Reference Name
Each cell on a spreadsheet has what is called a “reference name”, which is derived by
combining its column name (A through Z) with its row name (1 through 999). A cell reference
name can be used inside of a formula, which makes the value of the called cell part of the
formula. See “Inputting a Formula into a Cell” above for more information. There are two
methods you can use to input a cell reference name: direct input of the name and input using
the GRAB command. The following illustrates how you would use each of these methods to
input =A1+5 into cell B1.
u To input a cell reference name using direct input
Move the cell cursor to cell B1 and then perform the following operation.
!.(=) av(A) b+fw
9-12
u To input a cell reference name using the GRAB command
Move the cell cursor to cell B1 and then perform the following operation.
!.(=) 1(GRAB) d1(SET) +fw
• Commands 2(GO) through 6(BTM → ) on the submenu that appears when you press
1(GRAB) are identical to commands 1(GO) through 5(BTM → ) of the JUMP command
submenu. See “Using the JUMP Command to Move the Cell Cursor” on page 9-7 about
these commands.
k Relative and Absolute Cell Reference Names
There are two types of cell reference names: relative and absolute. Normally, cell reference
names are treated as being relative.
Relative Cell Reference Names
In the formula =A1+5, the cell reference name A1 indicates a relative cell reference. It is
“relative” because copying the formula and pasting in a different cell will cause the cell
reference name to change in accordance with the location of cell where it is pasted. If the
formula =A1+5 is originally located in cell B1, for example, copying at pasting in cell C3 will
result in =B3+5 in cell C3. Moving from column B to column C (one column) causes A to
change to B, while moving from row 1 to row 3 changes (two rows) changes the 1 to 3.
Important! If the result of a copy and paste operation causes a relative cell reference name
to change to something that is outside the range of the spreadsheet cells, the applicable
column letter and/or row number will be replaced by a question mark (?), and “ERROR” will be
displayed as the cell’s data.
Absolute Reference Names
If you want the row or the column, or both the row and the column parts of a cell reference
name to remain the same to matter where you paste them, you need to create an absolute cell
reference name. You do this by affixing a dollar sign ($) in front of the part of the cell reference
name you want to remain unchanged. You have three options when using the dollar sign ($)
to create an absolute cell reference name: absolute column with relative row ($A1), relative
column with absolute row (A$1), and absolute row and column ($A$1).
u To input the absolute cell reference name symbol ($)
When inputting a cell reference into a spreadsheet cell, press 2($).
For example, the following key operation inputs the absolute cell reference name = $B$1.
!.(=) 2($) al(B) 2($) b
9-13
k Specifying Cell Formatting
For each cell, you can specify the text color, cell color, and cell color lightness (Normal or
Lighter).
u To specify cell formatting
1. Select the range of cells whose formatting you want to specify.
2. Press !f(FORMAT) to display the FORMAT dialog
box.
3. Configure the above dialog box with the following settings.
To specify this: Perform this operation:
Specify the text color Press b(Char Color) and then use keys b through i
to specify the desired color.
Specify the cell color Press c(Area Color) and then use keys b through i
to specify the desired color.
Specify the lightness of the
cell color
Press d(Paint Style) and then press b(Normal) or
c(Lighter).
4. To apply the settings you configure, return to the
FORMAT dialog box and then press J.
9-14
k Copying and Pasting Cell Contents
You can copy the contents of one or more cells and paste them into another location. Once
you perform the copy operation, you can copy the contents to multiple locations, if you want.
u To copy and paste spreadsheet data
1. Select the cell(s) you want to copy.
• See “To select cells” (page 9-6) for more information.
2. Press 2(EDIT) 2(COPY).
• This will go into paste standby for the selected data, indicated by the 1 menu item
changing to (PASTE).
• You can exit the paste standby at any time before you perform step 4 below by pressing
J.
3. Use the cursor keys to move the cell cursor to location where you want to paste the data.
• If you selected a range of cells in step 1, the cell you select with the cell cursor will be the
upper left cell of the paste range.
• If the location you select is within the range that you copied, performing step below will
cause the exiting data to be overwritten with the pasted data.
4. Press 1(PASTE).
• This will paste the copied data.
• To paste the same data in other locations, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. After you are finish pasting the data, press J to exit paste standby.
k Cutting and Pasting Cell Contents
You can use cut and paste to move the contents of one or more cells to another location. Cell
contents (regardless of whether it includes relative or absolute cell name references) generally
are unchanged by a cut and paste operation.
Cutting the formula =A1+5 in cell B1 and pasting it into cell B2. The A1 reference name is
unchanged.
→→
9-15
When you are cut and paste a range cells, reference names that affect relationships within
the range are changed accordingly when the range is pasted in order to maintain the correct
relationship, regardless of whether they are relative or absolute reference names.
Cutting the B1:C1 range of cells that includes the formula =B1+5 and pasting it into B2:C2.
The formula pasted into C2 is changed to =B2+5 in order to maintain the relationship with
the cell to the left, which was also part of the pasted range.
u To cut and paste spreadsheet data
1. Select the cell(s) you want to cut.
• See “To select cells” (page 9-6) for more information.
2. Press 2(EDIT) 1(CUT).
• This will go into paste standby for the selected data, indicated by the 1 menu item
changing to (PASTE).
• You can exit the paste standby at any time before you perform step 4 below by pressing
J.
3. Use the cursor keys to move the cell cursor to location where you want to paste the data.
• If you selected a range of cells in step 1, the cell you select with the cell cursor will be the
upper left cell of the paste range.
• If the location you select is within the range that you cut, performing step below will cause
the exiting data to be overwritten with the pasted data.
4. Press 1(PASTE).
• This will paste the data from the cell(s) you selected in step 1 and paste it into the location
you selected in step 3.
• Regardless of whether Auto Calc is enabled or disabled (page 9-5), pasting cut data will
cause all of the formulas in the spreadsheet to be recalculated.
→→
9-16
k Inputting the Same Formula into a Range of Cells
Use the Fill command when you want to input the same formula into a specified range of cells.
The rules governing relative and absolute cell name references are the same as those for copy
and paste.
When you need to input the same formula into cells B1, B2, and B3, for example, the Fill
command lets you do so by inputting the formula once, into cell B1. Note the following about
how the Fill command handles cell name references in this case.
When cell B1 contains this: The Fill command will do this:
=A1 × 2 A B
1 =A1 × 2
2 =A2 × 2
3 =A3 × 2 * Note that in actual practice
cells B1, B2, and B3
will show the calculation
results, not the formulas as
shown here.
=$A$2 × 2 A B
1 =$A$2 × 2
2 =$A$2 × 2
3 =$A$2 × 2
u To input the same formula into a range of cells
1. Select the range of cells into which you want to input the same formula.
• In this example we will assume the B1:B3 is selected. See “To select a range of cells”
(page 9-7).
2. Press 2(EDIT) 6( g) 1(FILL).
3. On the Fill screen that appears, enter the formula you want to input.
You can input data for the item that is
highlighted on the screen.
This is the range of cells you selected in step 1.
• In the “Formula” line, input =A1 × 2 ( !.(=) av(A) b*cw). Pressing w will
cause the cell cursor to move to the “Cell Range” line.
• If any cell within the cell range already contains data, performing the next step will cause
the existing data to be overwritten with the new fill data (formula).
4. Press 6(EXE) or the w key.
• This will input the formula into the range of cells you specified.
9-17
k Sorting Constant Data
Note that only constant data can be sorted. You can select multiple columns within a single line
or multiple lines within a single column for sorting.
u To sort constant data
1. Select a range of column cells in a single row or a range of row cells in a single column.
• See “To select a range of cells” (page 9-7).
• A Syntax ERROR message will appear if any of the cells in the range you select contain
data other than constant data.
2. Depending on the type of sort you want to perform, perform either one of the following
operations.
To sort ascending: 2(EDIT) 6( g) 2(SORTASC)
To sort descending: 2(EDIT) 6( g) 3(SORTDES)
k Deleting and Inserting Cells
u To delete an entire line or column of cells
Select the row(s) or column(s) you want to delete and then press 3(DELETE). This will
delete the selected row(s) or column(s) immediately, without displaying a confirmation
message.
You also can perform the following steps to delete a row or column.
1. Select one or more cells inside the row(s) or column(s) you want to delete.
• If you want to delete lines 2 through 4, for example, you could select A2:B4, C2:C4, or any
other range of cells that includes the lines to be deleted.
• If you want to delete columns A and B, for example, you could select A1:B1, A2:B4, etc.
2. Press 3(DELETE).
• This enters delete standby. If you decide you want to cancel the delete operation at this
time, press J.
3. To delete the entire line(s) that include the cells you selected in step 1, press 1(ROW). To
delete the entire column, press 2(COLUMN).
u To delete the contents of all the cells in a spreadsheet
1. Press 3(DELETE) 3(ALL).
2. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the data or
6(No) to cancel without deleting anything.
9-18
u To insert a row or column of blank cells
1. Perform one of the following operations to specify the location of the insert and the number
of rows or columns to be inserted.
• To insert rows
Starting with the row immediately below of the row where you want the insert to be
performed, select the same number of rows that you want to insert.
Example: To insert three rows above row 2, you could select A2:A4, B2:C4, etc.
• To insert columns
Starting with the column immediately to the right of the column where you want the insert
to be performed, select the same number of columns that you want to insert.
Example: To insert three columns to the left of column B, you could select B2:D4,
B10:D20, etc.
2. Press 4(INSERT).
• This will enter insert standby. If you decide you want to cancel the insert operation at this
time, press J.
3. Press 1(ROW) to insert the applicable number of rows or 2(COLUMN) to insert
columns.
• A Range ERROR occurs if an insert operation causes existing cells that contain data to
move outside the range of A1:Z999.
k Clearing Cell Contents and Formatting
You can clear cell contents only, formatting only, or both contents and formatting.
• Content clear: Clears values, formulas, and other cell data.
• Format clear: Returns the character color, area color, and paint style settings of the cells to
their initial default settings. This operation also clears conditional formatting (page 9-21).
u To clear cell contents and formatting
1. Select the cell or range of cells you want to clear.
2. Perform the operations below to specify the cells you want to clear.
To clear this: Perform this key operation:
Cell contents only 5(CLEAR)1(CONTENT)
Cell formatting only 5(CLEAR)2(FORMAT)
Cell contents and formatting 5(CLEAR)3(ALL)
9-19
3. Using Special Spreadsheet
Mode Commands
The Spreadsheet
mode has a number of special commands like CellSum(, which returns
the sum of a range of cells, and CellIf(, which specifies branching conditions. These special
commands can be used inside of formulas.
k Special Spreadsheet
Mode Command List
“Input Key Operation” operations can be performed during cell input only.
You can omit anything enclosed in brackets ([ ]) in the Syntax of each command.
Command Description
CellIf(
(Branch Condition)
Returns Expression 1 when the equality or inequality provided as
the branch condition is true, and Expression 2 when it is false.
Input Key Operation: 4(If)
Syntax: CellIf(equality, expression 1, expression 2[)] or
CellIf(inequality, expression 1, expression 2[)]
Example: =CellIf(A1>B1, A1, B1)
Returns the value of A1 when {Cell A1 value} > {Cell B1 value}.
Otherwise, returns the value of B1.
CellMin(
(Cell Minimum Value)
Returns the minimum value in a specified range of cells.
Input Key Operation: 5(CELL) 1(Min)
Syntax: CellMin(start cell:end cell[)]
Example: =CellMin(A3:C5)
Returns the minimum value of the data in cell range A3:C5.
CellMax(
(Cell Maximum Value)
Returns the maximum value in a specified range of cells.
Input Key Operation: 5(CELL) 2(Max)
Syntax: CellMax(start cell:end cell[)]
Example: =CellMax(A3:C5)
Returns the maximum value of the data in cell range A3:C5.
CellMean(
(Mean of Cells)
Returns the mean value in a specified range of cells.
Input Key Operation: 5(CELL) 3(Mean)
Syntax: CellMean(start cell:end cell[)]
Example: =CellMean(A3:C5)
Returns the mean value of the data in cell range A3:C5.
9-20
Command Description
CellMedian(
(Median of Cells)
Returns the median value in a specified range of cells.
Input Key Operation: 5(CELL) 4(Med)
Syntax: CellMedian(start cell:end cell[)]
Example: =CellMedian(A3:C5)
Returns the median value of the data in cell range A3:C5.
CellSum(
(Sum of Cells)
Returns the sum of the data in a specified range of cells.
Input Key Operation: 5(CELL) 5(Sum)
Syntax: CellSum(start cell:end cell[)]
Example: =CellSum(A3:C5)
Returns the sum of the data in cell range A3:C5.
CellProd(
(Product of Cells)
Returns the product of the data in a specified range of cells.
Input Key Operation: 5(CELL) 6(Prod)
Syntax: CellProd(start cell:end cell[)]
Example: =CellProd(B3:B5)
Returns the product of the data in cell range B3:B5.
k Spreadsheet
Mode Command Example
This example inputs the special Spreadsheet
mode formula CellSum( into cell C1 in order to
calculate the sum of all the data in cell range A1:B5. It is assumed that there is already data in
the cell range A1:B5.
1. Move the cell cursor to cell C1 and then perform the following operation.
!.(=) 5(CELL) 5(Sum)
Jav(A) b3(:) al(b) f)
• You can perform the following operation, which uses the
GRAB function (page 9-12) and CLIP function (page
9-7) in place of the underlined part in the above
operation.
J1(GRAB) 4(TOP ← ) (Enters the GRAB mode and moves the cursor to A1.)
!i(CLIP) ecccc (Specifies the selection range for the CLIP function.)
w)
2. Press w to finalize input of the formula.
9-21
4. Conditional Formatting
The conditional formatting function can be used to define conditional expressions (such as
A1<0) that determine the formatting (text color, area color, paint style) of a cell.
k Conditional Formatting Overview
You can specify up to two conditions for each cell.
Pressing 6(g)5(CONDIT) displays the Condition screen.
To select a particular condition, move the highlighting to the “Condition” line and then press
1(COND1) for Condition1 or 2(COND2) for Condition2.
u Condition Priority Sequence
When you have multiple conditions defined for a cell, they are applied starting from the lower
numbered condition first. If Condition1 is 0≤A1≤10 and Condition2 is 10≤A1≤20, for example,
both conditions are satisfied when A1=10 and the formatting specified by Condition1 is
applied.
If a cell is configured directly using the procedure under “To specify cell formatting” (page 9-13)
and with conditional formatting, application of the conditional formatting is given priority over
the direct settings.
u Condition Types
There are two different condition types: Value Of Cell and Expression.
• Type: Value Of Cell
Use this condition type to define a condition based on a formula (such as A1<0) that
references a value input into the cell. For example you could configure cell A1 so its text is red
when A1<0, and blue when 1<A1.
9-22
• Type: Expression
Use this condition type to define a condition based on a formula (such as CelMin(A1:B10)≤C1)
that references one or more cells. This condition type provides a wide range of versatility to set
up conditions such as the ones shown below.
• When A1×30>100, A1 text is blue.
• When CellSum(B1:B30)≤A1, A1 text is blue, and when A1<CellSum(B1:B30), A1 text is red.
k Configuring Conditional Formatting Settings
This section provides the basic operational flow for configuring conditional formatting settings.
For full details about each individual setting, see the pages referred to within the procedure
below.
u To configure conditional formatting settings
1. Select the cell or range of cells for which you want to configure conditional formatting.
2. Press 6(g)5(CONDIT) to display the Condition
screen.
3. Use f and c to move the highlighting to “Condition” and then use the function menu to
select the condition you want to configure (1 or 2).
4. Use f and c to move the highlighting to “Type” and then press 1(CELLVAL) to select
“Value Of Cell” or 2(EXPRESS) to select “Expression” as the condition type.
• For details about conditions types, see “Condition Types” (page 9-21).
5. Use f and c to move the highlighting to “Expre” and then perform one of the following
operations.
If you selected
this in step 4: Do this:
Value Of Cell Use the function menu to select a conditional expression, and
then use the “Value”, “V1”, and “V2” lines to assign values for the
conditional expression. For details, see “Configuring Settings for
Value Of Cell Type Conditions” (page 9-23).
Expression Directly input the conditional expression. For details, see “Configuring
Settings for Expression Type Conditions” (page 9-24).
9-23
6. Use f and c to move the highlighting to “Format” and then press 1(SETFORM).
• On the FORMAT dialog box that appears, perform steps 3 and 4 of the procedure under
“To specify cell formatting” (page 9-13) to configure format settings.
• Including format settings will cause a sample of the format to appear in the “Format” line.
→
7. If you want to configure multiple conditions, repeat steps 3 through 6.
8. After the settings are the way you want, press J.
• This returns to the screen in step 1. The icon is displayed in the status bar while the
cell cursor is located at a cell with conditional formatting.
u Configuring Settings for Value Of Cell Type Conditions
The following condition settings can be configured when “Value Of Cell” is selected as the
condition type in step 4 under “To configure conditional formatting settings” (page 9-22).
• Expre (Expression) ... Specifies the conditional expression (Cell = input value), which is
selected using the function menu. In the function menu formulas “C” is used in place of “Cell”.
• V1, V2 (Value 1, Value 2) ... When 1(≤C≤) or 2(C<,<C) is selected for “Expre”,
use these lines to input values for assignment to the V1 and V2 variables in the conditional
expression.
• Value ... When a function menu item other than 1 or 2 is selected for “Expre”, use this
line to input a value for assignment to the Value variable in the conditional expression.
Example: 0≤Cell≤1Example: Cell=BLANK
9-24
The following is the basic syntax for inputting values for V1, V2, and Value.
• Move the highlighting to the line whose setting you want to change, input a value or
calculation formula, and then press w. If you input a calculation formula, the final value will
be the calculation result.
• If 3(C=) or 4(C≠) is selected for “Expre”, you can specify 2(ERROR) or
3(BLANK) for “Value”.
- 2(ERROR) ... Decision depends on whether or not “ERROR” is displayed in the cell
whose settings are being configured.
- 3(BLANK) ... Decision depends on whether or not the cell whose settings are being
configured is blank.
u Configuring Settings for Expression Type Conditions
The following condition settings can be configured when “Expression” is selected as the
condition type in step 4 under “To configure conditional formatting settings” (page 9-22).
Expre (Expression)
Use this line to directly input the conditional expression to be used for true/false judgment.
Input rules are virtually identical to those that apply when inputting an expression that starts
with an equal sign (=) into a spreadsheet cell, except for the following points.
• Do not include an equal sign (=) at the beginning of the expression.
• The function menu is identical to the one displayed during cell editing, except for the
2(TYPE) item. For details about using other menu items besides 2, see the following.
- “Inputting a Cell Reference Name” (page 9-11)
- “Relative and Absolute Cell Reference Names” (page 9-12)
- “Using Special Spreadsheet Mode Commands” (page 9-19)
• Pressing 2(TYPE) displays the submenu shown below.
- 1($) ... Inputs the dollar sign ($) used for specifying an absolute cell reference in a
conditional expression. See “Relative and Absolute Cell Reference Names” (page 9-12).
9-25
- 2(ERROR) ... Inputs “ERROR” into the conditional expression. For example, you can use
this to input A1=ERROR. Decision depends on whether or not “ERROR” is displayed in the
cell being referenced in the conditional expression (A1 in the example here).
- 3(BLANK) ... Inputs “BLANK” into the conditional expression. Decision depends on
whether or not the cell being referenced in the conditional expression is blank.
- 4(And) ... Inputs the logical operator “And” into the conditional expression.
- 5(Or) ... Inputs the logical operator “Or” into the conditional expression.
Note
• You can input up to 255 bytes of data for a conditional expression.
• ERROR, BLANK, and text strings can be used in a conditional expression only in the
syntaxes shown below or their inverses (ERROR=<Cell>, etc.). <Cell> stands for a single cell
reference (such as A1).
<Cell>=ERROR, <Cell>=BLANK, <Cell>≠ERROR, <Cell>≠BLANK, <Cell>=<text string>,
<Cell>≠<text string>
u To delete conditional formatting settings
1. Select the cell or range of cells whose conditional formatting you want to delete.
• Performing step 2 below will immediately clear, without any confirmation message, both
the conditional formatting as well as any character color, area color, and paint style
settings configured for the selected cell(s).
2. Press 5(CLEAR)2(FORMAT).
k Conditional Formatting Setting Example
In this example we will show how to configure the range of cells B3:C4 with the conditional
formatting shown below. This procedure assumes that the cells already contain values.
Condition
When the value input in
the cell (=C) satisfies this
condition:
This formatting is applied:
Character
Color Area Color Paint Style
1 C<0 Red Yellow Normal
20≤C≤100 Blue Magenta Lighter
9-26
u Procedure
1. Select the range of cells B3:C4.
2. Press 6(g)5(CONDIT) to display the Condition screen.
• Condition1 appears first, so configure the first condition here.
3. Use c to move the highlighting to “Expre” (Expression) and then press 6(g)1(C<䊐).
• Initially, “Cell < Value” is displayed in the Expre line.
4. Use c to move the highlighting to “Value” and then press aw to input 0.
5. Use c to move the highlighting to “Format” and then press 1(SETFORM).
• On the FORMAT dialog box that appears, configure the following settings:
Character Color: Red, Area Color: Yellow, Paint Style: Normal.
6. Use f to move the highlighting to “Condition1” and then press 2(COND2) to display
Condition2.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 5 above to configure the Condition2 settings.
• Input 1(䊐≤C≤䉭) in the “Expre” line, aw in the “V1” line, and baaw in the
“V2” line.
• In the “Format” line, press 1(SETFORM) and then configure the following settings:
Character Color: Blue, Area Color: Magenta, Paint Style: Lighter.
8 Press J.
• This returns to the screen in step 1 of this procedure
and applies the formatting you configured to each cell.
Note
• It may take some time to display calculation results when a large number of cells containing
conditional formatting are selected.
• Cell modification and recalculation may take some time to complete when there is a large
amount of conditional formatting.
9-27
5. Drawing Statistical Graphs, and Performing
Statistical and Regression Calculations
When you want to check the correlation between two sets of data (such as temperature and
the price of some product), trends become easier to spot if you draw a graph that uses one set
of data as the
x -axis and the other set of data as the y -axis.
With the spreadsheet you can input the values for each set of data and draw a scatter plot or
other types of graphs. Performing regression calculations on the data will produce a regression
formula and correlation coefficient, and you can overlay a regression graph over the scatter
plot.
Spreadsheet
mode graphing, statistical calculations, and regression calculations use the
same functions as the Statistics mode. The following shows an operation example that is
unique to the Spreadsheet
mode.
k Example of Statistical Graph Operations (GRAPH Menu)
Input the following data and draw a statistical graph (scatter plot in this example).
0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2 (
x -axis data)
–2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4 (
y -axis data)
u To input data and draw a statistical graph (scatter plot)
1. Input the statistical calculation data into the spreadsheet.
• Here we will input the
x -axis data into column A, and the y -axis data into column B.
2. Select the range of cells you want to graph (A1:B5).
3. Press 6( g) 1(GRAPH) to display the GRAPH menu, and then press 1(GRAPH1).
• This will produce a scatter plot of the data in the range
of cells you selected in step 2 of this procedure.
• The graph shown here is what is produced under initial
default Spreadsheet
mode settings. You can change
the configuration of graph settings on the screen that
appears when you press 6(SET) on the GRAPH
menu. For details see “General Graph Settings Screen
Operations” below.
9-28
k General Graph Settings Screen Operations
You can use the general graph setting screen to specify the range of data to be used for
graphing, and to select the type of graph to be drawn.
u To configure statistical graph settings
1. Input the statistical calculation data into the spreadsheet and then select the range of cells
you want to graph.
• Actually, the above step is not necessary at this point. You also could configure settings
first before inputting data and selecting the range of cells to be graphed.
2. Press 6( g) 1(GRAPH) 6(SET).
• This will display the general graph settings screen (StatGraph1 in this example).
You can configure the setting for the item that is
highlighted on the screen.
A function menu will appear when certain
setting items are selected.
• The number of columns you select in step 1 will determine what information is input
automatically on the general graph settings screen.
If you select this
number of columns: This information will be input automatically:
1 XCellRange
2 XCellRange, YCellRange
3 XCellRange, YCellRange, Frequency
• The following describes each of the setting items for this screen.
Item Description
StatGraph1 Select the name of the setup you want. You can have up to three
different setups registered, named StatGraph 1, 2, or 3.
Graph Type Select the graph type. The initial default setting is Scatter (scatter plot).
XCellRange Specifies the cell range assigned to the graph
x -axis (XCellRange).
Only XCellRange is displayed for some Graph Types.
YCellRange Specifies the cell range assigned to the graph
y -axis (YCellRange).
The YCellRange is not displayed for some Graph Types.
9-29
Item Description
Frequency Specifies the range cells that contain values indicating the frequency
of each graph data item. Select 1(1) if you do not want to use
frequency values.
Mark Type Specify the type of mark ( , , or ) to use as the mark on the
scatter plot.
3. Use f and c to move the highlighting to the setting item you want to change. On the
function menu that appears, select the setting you want.
• For details about the StatGraph1, Graph Type, and Mark Type settings, see “To display the
general graph settings screen” (page 6-3).
• If you want to change the XCellRange, YCellRange, or Frequency setting, move the
highlighting to the item you want to change and then input the cell range directly, or select
1(CELL) ( 2(CELL) for Frequency) and then edit the currently input range. When
inputting a cell range manually, use 1(:) to enter a colon (:) between two cells that define
the range.
4. After configuring the required settings, press J or w.
k Example of Statistical Calculation Operation (CALC Menu)
This example uses the data from the “Drawing a Scatter Diagram and xy Line Graph” (page
6-14) to perform paired-variable statistical calculations.
0.5, 1.2, 2.4, 4.0, 5.2 (
x -data)
–2.1, 0.3, 1.5, 2.0, 2.4 (
y -data)
u To perform paired-variable statistical calculations and regression
calculations
1. Input the above x -data into cells A1:A5 of the
spreadsheet and the y -data into cells B1:B5, and then
select the range of the cells where you input the data (A1:
B5).
2. Press 6( g) 2(CALC) to display the CALC menu, and
then press 2(2-VAR).
• This will display a screen of paired variable calculation
results based on the data you selected in step 1. Use
c and f to scroll the result screen. To close the
screen, press J.
• For information about the meaning of each of the values on the result screen, see
“Displaying the Calculation Results of a Drawn Paired-Variable Graph” on page 6-21.
3. To return to the spreadsheet screen, press J.
9-30
k Using the Statistical Calculation Data Range Specification Screen
You can use a special setting screen to specify the range of data to be used for statistical
calculation.
u To specify the data range for statistical calculation
1. Input the statistical calculation data into the spreadsheet and then select its range of cells.
2. Press 6( g) 2(CALC) 6(SET).
• This will display a setting screen like the one shown to
the right.
• The number of columns you select in step 1 will determine what information is input
automatically on the statistical calculation data range specification screen.
If you select this
number of columns: This information will be input automatically:
1 1Var XCell and 2Var XCell
2 1Var Freq and 2Var YCell
3 2Var Freq
• The following describes each of the setting items for this screen.
Item Description
1Var XCell
1Var Freq
The cell range data specified here is used for variable
x and
Frequency values when performing single-variable statistical
calculations.
2Var XCell
2Var YCell
2Var Freq
The cell range data specified here is used for variable
x , variable y ,
and Frequency values when performing paired-variable statistical
calculations.
3. If you want to change the cell range, use f and c to move the highlighting to the item
you want to change and the input the new cell range.
• To input the colon (:), press 1(:).
• To edit the currently input cell range, press 1(CELL) (in the case of 1Var XCell, 2Var
XCell, and 2Var YCell) or 2(CELL) (in the case of 1Var Freq and 2Var Freq).
4. After configuring the required settings, press J or w.
9-31
k Statistics Mode and Spreadsheet
Mode Function Menu
Correspondence Table
In both the Statistics mode and the Spreadsheet
mode, statistical graph functions are on
the GRAPH function menu and statistical/regression calculation functions are on the CALC
function menu. The structures of these menus and their submenus are the same in the
Statistics mode and the Spreadsheet
mode. For details about each menu item, refer to the
pages referenced in the table below.
For information about
this menu item: Refer to:
{GRAPH} - {GRAPH1} “Statistical Graph Parameters” (page 6-1)
{GRAPH} - {GRAPH2}
{GRAPH} - {GRAPH3}
{GRAPH} - {SELECT} “Graph Draw/Non-draw Status” (page 6-7)
{GRAPH} - {SET} “Statistical Graph Parameters” (page 6-1)
“General Graph Settings”(page 6-2)
“To display the general graph settings screen”(page 6-3)
“General Graph Settings Screen Operations” (page 9-28)
{CALC} - {1-VAR} “Single-Variable Statistical Calculations” (page 6-22)
{CALC} - {2-VAR} “Paired-Variable Statistical Calculations” (page 6-23)
{CALC} - {REG} “Regression Calculation” (page 6-23)
{CALC} - {SET} “Using the Statistical Calculation Data Range Specification
Screen” (page 9-30)
9-32
When drawing a pie chart or bar graph, only the Color Link settings (page 6-3) are different
from the settings in the Statistics mode and Spreadsheet mode.
For this
graph
type:
Selecting
this for
Color Link:
Causes this to happen:
Pie Category Of the data being used to draw the graph, the text color of the
cells in the range specified by the StatGraph screen “Category”
setting is reflected in the graph.
Data Of the data being used to draw the graph, the text color of the
cells in the range specified by the StatGraph screen “Data” setting
is reflected in the graph.
Off The text color of the data being used to draw the graph is ignored.
Bar Category Same as the pie chart, above.
Data Of the data being used to draw the graph, the text colors of the
cells in the range specified by the StatGraph screen “Data1”,
“Data2”, and “Data3” settings are reflected in the graph.
Off Same as the pie chart, above.
• When “Pie” is selected as the Graph Type, the “Pie Area” setting is always “Link” whenever
anything other than “Off” is selected for the “Color Link” setting.
• When “Bar” is selected as the Graph Type, the “Data1 Area”, “Data1 Border”, “Data2 Area”,
“Data2 Border”, “Data3 Area”, and “Data3 Border” settings are always “Link” whenever
anything other than “Off” is selected for the “Color Link” setting.
u Graphing examples using Color Link
Example: To input the data below into a spreadsheet and then draw a pie chart
with “Category” selected as the Color Link setting
1. Input the data shown nearby, with the text color of cells from A1 through A5 as shown.
• For information about specifying the text color, see “Specifying Cell Formatting” (page
9-13).
2. Select the cells in the range A1:B5.
• For information about selecting cells, see “To select a range of cells” (page 9-7).
9-33
3. Perform the following operation to display the general graph settings screen: 6(g)
1(GRAPH)6(SET).
• The “Category” and “Data” settings are configured automatically. Check to make sure that
A1:A5 is shown for “Category” and B1:B5 is shown for “Data”.
4. Use f and c to move the highlighting to “Graph Type” and then press 4(Pie).
5. Use f and c to move the highlighting to “Color Link”
and then press 1(Cat).
6. Press J to exit the general graph settings screen.
7. Press 1(GRAPH1).
• The graph will reflect the text colors in the “Category”
cell range (A1:A5).
• This completes graphing with Color Link. Next, let’s change the colors on the graph
screen.
8. Press !1(TRACE).
• This will highlight label A and display a pointer in area A of the graph.
9. Use f and c to move the pointer to area D and then pres !f(FORMAT).
10. On the color selection dialog box that appears, press c(Blue).
• This will close the dialog box and change the color of
area D to blue.
11. Press J to close the graph screen.
• The color you change to on the graph screen will be
reflected as the text color in the applicable cell of the
“Category” cell range.
9-34
6. Spreadsheet
Mode Memory
You can use the calculator’s different types of memory (variables, list memory, file memory,
matrix memory) to store data, and recall data from a memory into the spreadsheet.
k Saving Spreadsheet Data to a Memory
The following table shows an overview of the store operations for each type of memory. For
details about each operation, see the example operations following the table.
Memory Type Store Operation
Variables
(A ~ Z,
r ,
θ
)
You can assign the content of a single cell to a variable.
While a single cell is selected, press 6( g) 3(STORE) 1(VAR),
and then specify the variable name on the screen that appears.
List Memory
(List 1 ~ List 26)
You can store data in a range of cells in a single row or a single
column in list memory.
While a range of cells in a single row or single column is selected,
press 6( g) 3(STORE) 2(LIST), and then specify the list
number on the screen that appears.
File Memory
(File 1 ~ File 6)
You can store data in a range of cells that spans a multiple rows
and columns in file memory. While a range of cells is selected, press
6( g) 3(STORE) 3(FILE), and then specify the file number on
the screen that appears.
The first column of the selected range is stored in the specified file
as List 1, the second column is saved as List 2, and so on.
Matrix Memory
(Mat A ~ Mat Z)
You can store data in a range of cells that spans a multiple rows and
columns in matrix memory. While a range of cells is selected, press
6( g) 3(STORE) 4(MAT), and then specify the matrix name on
the screen that appears.
The first column of the selected range is stored in the specified
matrix as List 1, the second column is saved as List 2, and so on.
Note
When spreadsheet data is saved to list memory or file memory, the text color information
of each cell is inherited by the destination memory. Text color information is ignored when
spreadsheet data is saved to a variable or to matrix memory.
Important!
The following describes what happens if you try to store data in memory when a cell does not
contain any data, when a cell contains text, or when ERROR is displayed for a cell.
• If you are assigning data to a variable, an error occurs.
• If you are storing data in list memory, file memory, or matrix memory, 0 is written into the
applicable cell(s).
9-35
u Example: To store column data in list memory
1. In a single column, select the range of cells you want to store in list memory.
• For example, you could select A1:A10.
2. Press 6( g) 3(STORE) 2(LIST).
• This will display a screen like the one shown to the right.
The “Cell Range” setting will show the range of cells you
selected in step 1.
3. Press c to move the highlighting to “List[1~26]”.
4. Input the List number (1 to 26) of the list memory where you want to store the data and then
press w.
• Performing the next step will overwrite any data currently stored under the list memory
number you specified here with the data in the range of cells specified by “CellRange”.
5. Press 6(EXE) or the w key to store the data.
k Recalling Data from Memory to a Spreadsheet
The following table shows an overview of the recall operations for each type of memory. For
details about each operation, see the example operations following the table.
Memory Type Recall Operation
List Memory
(List 1 ~ List 26)
You can recall data from a specified list memory to a range of
cells in a single row or a single column. While the first cell of
the range in a single row or single column is selected, press
6( g) 4(RECALL) 1(LIST), and then specify the list number on
the screen that appears.
Whether the data is recalled in a column direction or row direction
depends on the Setup screen’s “Move” setting (page 1-35).
File Memory
(File 1 ~ File 6)
You can recall data from a specified file memory to the spreadsheet.
Select the cell you want to be the upper left corner of the recalled
data and then press 6( g) 4(RECALL) 2(FILE). Next, specify
the file memory number on the screen that appears.
Matrix Memory
(Mat A ~ Mat Z)
You can recall data from a specified matrix memory to the
spreadsheet. Select the cell you want to be the upper left corner
of the recalled data and then press 6( g) 4(RECALL) 3(MAT).
Next, specify the matrix name on the screen that appears.
9-36
Note
• When data is recalled to a spreadsheet from list memory or file memory, the text color
information of each element is inherited by the spreadsheet cells. The area color and paint
style colors of the destination cells are set to their initial defaults of the destination cells.
• When data is recalled to a spreadsheet from matrix memory, the text color, area color, and
paint style are set to the initial defaults of the destination cells.
u Example: To recall data from a matrix memory to a spreadsheet
1. On the spreadsheet, select the upper left cell of the range where you want the recalled data
to be input.
2. Press 6( g) 4(RECALL) 3(MAT).
• This will display a screen like the one shown to the right.
The “1st Cell” setting will show the name of the cell you
selected in step 1.
3. Input the name (A to Z) of the matrix memory whose data you want to recall and then press
w.
4. Press 6(EXE) or w to recall the data.
Important!
When recalling list memory, file memory, or matrix memory data, an error will occur if the
recalled data runs outside the allowable range of the spreadsheet (A1:Z999).
10-1
Chapter 10 eActivity
You can use the eActivity mode to input data into an eActivity file. You can input text, numeric
expressions and pictures, and also paste data (like graphs, tables, etc.) from the calculator’s
built-in applications as “strips”.
eActivity files can be used by a teacher, for example, to create math problems or exercises that
provide hints to solutions, for distribution to students. Students can use eActivity files to keep
classroom notes, memos of problems and their solutions, etc.
1. eActivity Overview
The first thing that appears when you select the eActivity
mode on the Main Menu is the file
menu.
No eActivity
mode files in memory At least one folder or an eActivity mode
file in memory
Opening a file in the eActivity mode will display a workspace screen that you can use for
inputting and editing text, calculation expressions, and other data.
Scroll bar
Text lines
Calculator’s
display area
Strip
Picture line
Math lines
Stop line
10
10-2
The following explains the type of data you can input and edit in an eActivity file.
Text line .................A text line can be used to input characters, numbers, and expressions as
text.
Calculation line......Use the calculation line to enter an executable calculation formula. The
result will appear in the following line. Calculations are performed the same
way as they are performed in the Run-Matrix
mode, while the Math input/
output mode is selected.
Stop line ................A stop line can be used to stop calculation at a particular point.
Picture line ............A picture line can be used to insert an image.
Strip ......................A strip can be used to embed data into an eActivity from the Graph, Conic
Graphs, Spreadsheet, or other built-in applications.
2. eActivity Function Menus
k File List Function Menu
• { OPEN } ... Opens an eActivity file or folder.
• { NEW } ... Creates a new eActivity file.
• { DELETE } ... Deletes an eActivity file.
• { SEARCH } ... Searches for an eActivity file.
• {MEMO} ... Displays a list of memos included in the eActivity file currently selected in the file
list.
• {JUMP} ... Opens the eActivity file and jumps to the eActivity line where the memo selected
in the list is located.
• {EDIT} ... Displays a screen for editing the memo selected in the list.
• {DETAIL} ... Opens a details screen for the memo selected in the list.
• {DELETE} ... Deletes the memo selected in the list.
• {DEL-ALL} ... Deletes all memos in the eActivity file.
• At least 128 kbytes of memory area is required when the eActivity
mode is used for the first
time. A Memory Full error will appear if there is not enough memory available.
10-3
k Workspace Screen Function Menu
Part of the content of the workspace function menu depends on the line (or strip) that is
currently selected.
• Workspace Screen Common Menu Items
Only the menu items marked with an asterisk (*) below are supported while a picture line is
selected.
• { FILE }* ... Displays the following file operation submenu.
• { SAVE } ... Saves the file currently being edited.
• { SAVE
•
AS } ... Saves the file currently being edited under another name.
• { OPT } ... See “Optimizing Storage Memory” on page 11-13.
• { CAPACITY } ... Displays a screen showing the data size of the file being edited and how
much memory capacity remains.
• { STRIP }* ... Inserts a strip.
• { JUMP }* ... Displays the following submenu to control cursor movement.
• { TOP } / { BOTTOM } / { PageUp } / { PageDown } ... See page 10-6.
• { DEL-LINE }/{ DELETE }* ... Deletes the line that is currently selected or where the cursor is
located.
• { INSERT }* ... Displays the following insert submenu, for inserting a new line above the line
that is currently selected or where the cursor is located.
• { TEXT } ... Inserts a text line.
• { CALC } ... Inserts a calculation line.
• { STOP } ... Inserts a calculation stop line.
• {PICTURE} ... Inserts a picture line.
• { '
MAT } ... Displays the Matrix Editor (page 10-9).
• { '
LIST } ... Displays the List Editor (page 10-9).
• Menu when a Text Line is Selected
• { TEXT } ... Changes the current line from a text line to a calculation line.
• { CHAR } ... Displays a menu for inputting math symbols, special symbols, and characters of
various languages.
• { A
⇔
a } ... Toggles between uppercase and lowercase input while alpha character input is
enabled (by pressing the a key).
• { MATH } ... Displays the MATH menu (page 1-14).
10-4
• {COLOR} ... Displays the following COLOR submenu.
• {MARKER} ... Enters the marker mode for highlighting text (page 10-10).
• {CHAR} ... Enters the color mode for coloring text (page 10-11).
• {MEMO} ... Displays the following MEMO submenu.
• {INSERT} ... Appends a memo at the current cursor position.
• {DELETE} ... Deletes the memo at the current cursor position.
• {Catalog} ... Displays a list of memos included in a file.
• {VIEW} ... Displays the memo at the current cursor position.
• Menu when a Calculation Line or Stop Line is Selected
Only the menu items marked with an asterisk (*) below are supported while a stop line is
selected.
• { CALC }* ... Changes the current line from a calculation line to a text line.
• { MATH }* ... Same as {MATH} under “Menu when a Text Line is Selected”.
• {COLOR} ... Same as {COLOR} under “Menu when a Text Line is Selected”.
• {MEMO} ... Same as {MEMO} under “Menu when a Text Line is Selected”.
• Menu when a Strip is Selected
• { FILE } ... Displays the following file operation submenu.
• { SAVE } / { SAVE
•
AS } / { OPT } / { CAPACITY } ... Same as the {FILE} submenus under
“Workspace Screen Common Menu Items”.
• { SIZE } ... Displays the size of the strip at the current cursor position.
• { CHAR } ... Same as {CHAR} under “Menu when a Text Line is Selected”.
• { A
⇔
a } ... Same as {A ⇔ a} under “Menu when a Text Line is Selected”.
3. eActivity File Operations
This section explains the different file operations you can perform from the eActivity file menu
screen. All of the operations in this section can be performed while the file menu is displayed.
• For information about the 5(MEMO) function menu displayed for an eActivity file menu, see
“Appending a Memo to a Text Line or Calculation Line” (page 10-11).
• This section does not cover folder operations. For details about folders, see “Chapter 11
Memory Manager”.
u To create a new file
1. While the file menu is displayed, press 2(NEW).
• This will display a file name input screen.
10-5
2. Input up to 8 characters for the file name and then press w.
• This displays a blank workspace screen.
Cursor
• The following are the characters allowed in a file name.
A to Z, {, }, ’, ~, 0 to 9
u To open a file
Use f and c to highlight the file you want to open, and then press 1(OPEN) or w*.
* If an error occurs, delete capture memory and clipboard data, or transfer the data to your
computer.
u To delete a file
1. Use f and c to highlight the file you want to delete, and then press 3(DELETE).
• This will display a “Delete eActivity?” confirmation message.
2. Press 1(Yes) to delete the file or 6(No) to cancel without deleting anything.
u To search for a file
1. While the file menu is displayed, press 4(SEARCH).
• This will display a file search screen.
2. Enter part or the entire name of the file you want to find.
• File name characters are searched from left to right. Entering “IT” will count names like
ITXX, ITABC, IT123 as hits, but not names like XXIT or ABITC.
3. Press w.
• If a name matches the text you input in step 2, it will be
selected on the file menu.
• The message “Not Found” will appear if a match cannot be found. Press the J key to
close the message dialog box.
10-6
4. Inputting and Editing Data
All of the operations in this section are performed on the eActivity workspace screen. Use the
procedures under “eActivity File Operations” (page 10-4) to create a new file or to open an
existing file.
k Cursor Movement and Scroll Operations
When you want to do this: Use this key operation:
Move the cursor forward and back f or c
Scroll one screen back !f or
6( g) 1(JUMP) 3(PageUp)
Scroll one screen forward !c or
6( g) 1(JUMP) 4(PageDown)
Move the cursor to the beginning of the workspace
screen
6( g) 1(JUMP) 1(TOP)
Move the cursor to the end of the workspace screen 6( g) 1(JUMP) 2(BOTTOM)
k Inputting into a Text Line
Use a text line to input alphanumeric characters, expressions, etc.
u Inputting characters and expressions as text
1. Move the cursor to a text line.
• While the cursor is in a text line, “TEXT” will be displayed for the F3 function menu item.
This indicates that text input is enabled.
Text line cursor
3 key menu becomes “TEXT”.
10-7
• “CALC” will be displayed for the F3 function menu item if the cursor is located in a
calculation line. Pressing 3(CALC) will change the calculation line to a text line.
• If the cursor is located in a strip, use f and c to move to the cursor to a text line.
• On the function menu, selecting {INSERT} and then {TEXT} will insert a new text line
above the line where the cursor is currently located.
2. Input the text or expression you want into the text strip.
• See “Text Line Input and Editing Operations” described below.
u Text Line Input and Editing Operations
• You can input up to 255 bytes of text into a single text line. Text in the text line wraps
automatically to fit inside the display area (Word Wrap Function). Note, however, that
numeric expressions and commands do not wrap.*
1
Scroll arrows ( ]') will appear on the
left and right sides of the calculation line to let you know some of the calculation does not fit
within the calculation line display area. In this case, you can use the left and right cursor keys
to scroll the calculation.
• The 5(A⇔a) function key toggles between upper-case and lower-case input. This function
is available only while alpha text input is enabled. See page 2-8 for details. When upper-case
input is selected, is displayed in the status bar, and is displayed while lower-case input
is selected.
• Press w to input a carriage return into text. No symbol will be displayed for a carriage
return.
• If the text is wrapped into multiple lines, pressing the A key will delete the line where the
cursor is currently located only. The part of the text that is wrapped to other lines will not be
deleted.
• Always use the Math input/output mode (page 1-13) to input an expression into a text line.
*
1
Also, any word that includes the symbol “ ’ ”, “ { ” or “ ”, which are input using the menu
that appears when you press 4(CHAR), does not wrap.
k Inputting into a Calculation Line
Inputting a calculation expression into an eActivity calculation line and pressing w will display
the calculation result in the following line. Such a calculation line can be used in the same way
as the Run-Matrix
mode (page 1-3). A calculation line and its result make up one set.
• Note that the word wrap function does not apply in the case of math lines. Scroll arrows
( ]') will appear on the left and right sides of the calculation line to let you know some of
the calculation does not fit within the calculation line display area. In this case, you can use
the left and right cursor keys to scroll the calculation.
10-8
u To input a calculation formula into an eActivity
1. Move the cursor to a calculation line.
• While the cursor is in a calculation line, “CALC” will be displayed for the F3 function menu
item. This indicates that calculation expression input is enabled.
Math line cursor
This will cause the 3 key menu to change to
“CALC”.
• “TEXT” will be displayed for the F3 function menu item if the cursor is located in a text line.
Pressing 3(CALC) will change the calculation line to a text line.
• If the cursor is located in a strip, use f and c to move to the cursor to a calculation
line.
• On the function menu, selecting {INSERT} and then {CALC} will insert a new calculation
line above the line where the cursor is currently located.
2. Input a calculation expression (Example: s$!E( π ) cg).
• Calculation line input and editing operations are the
same as those in the Run-Matrix
mode while the Math
input/output mode is selected.
3. To obtain the result of the calculation, press w.
10-9
u Matrix Calculations Using the Matrix Editor
Selecting { 'MAT} on the function menu displays the Matrix Editor.
Matrix Editor operations and matrix calculations in the eActivity mode are the fundamentally
identical to those in the Run-Matrix
mode. For details about the Matrix Editor and matrix
calculation operations, see “Matrix Calculations” (page 2-41). Note, however, that eActivity
mode Matrix Editor operations and matrix calculations differ from those in the Run-Matrix
mode as described below.
• eActivity mode matrix memory is saved separately for each file. Matrix memory will be
different from those produced when called from a non-eActivity mode.
u List Calculations Using the List Editor
Selecting { 'LIST} on the function menu displays the List Editor.
List Editor operations in the eActivity mode are identical to those in the Statistics mode
(“Inputting and Editing a List”, page 3-1). This processing and calculations are fundamentally
the identical to those in the Run-Matrix
mode (“Manipulating List Data” on page 3-7,
“Arithmetic Calculations Using Lists” on page 3-13). Note, however, that eActivity mode List
Editor operations and list calculations differ from those in other modes as described below.
• The eActivity mode List Editor function menu provides only screen two of the Statistics
mode List Editor function menu.
• To return to the workspace screen from the List Editor in the eActivity mode, press J.
• In the eActivity mode, values for list memory is saved separately for each file. List memory
will be different from those produced when called from a non-eActivity mode.
k Inserting a Calculation Stop Line
Pressing w after you edit a calculation line on a workspace screen that contains multiple
calculation lines will cause all of the calculations following the edited line to be re-calculated.
Re-calculation can take quite a bit of time if there are a large number of calculation lines or
if some of the calculations are complex. Inserting a calculation stop line will stop the re-
calculation process at the point where the line is located.
u To insert a stop line
On the function menu, select {INSERT} and then {STOP} to insert a stop line above the
currently selected line or strip.
10-10
k Highlighting and Changing the Color of Text
You can highlight or change the color of text line or calculation line text in order to add
emphasis.
• You cannot mark or change the color of the text of a calculation line result.
u To highlight text
1. Move the cursor to the beginning (or end) of the text you
want to highlight.
2. Press 6(g)5(COLOR)1(MARKER).
3. On the dialog box that appears, press the number key that corresponds to the highlighting
color (magenta, green, cyan, yellow) you want to use.
• This closes the dialog box. The cursor will now be the
color you selected.
4. Use e and d to move the cursor in the direction of the text you want to highlight.
• The text the cursor passed over will become highlighted.
• You also can highlight across multiple lines by using f
and c to change lines before moving the cursor left
and right.
5. To apply the highlighting, press 1(SET).
• To cancel highlighting, press J.
u To unhighlight text
Perform the same operation you used to highlight text under “To highlight text” to unhighlight it.
In step 3, press v(Clear) instead of selecting a highlight color.
10-11
u To change the text color
1. Move the cursor to the beginning (or end) of the text whose color you want to change.
2. Press 6(g)5(COLOR)2(CHAR).
3. On the dialog box that appears, press the number key that corresponds to the color you
want to use.
• This closes the dialog box. The cursor will now be the color you selected.
4. Use e and d to move the cursor in the direction of the text whose color you want to
change.
• You also can change text color across multiple lines by using f and c to change lines
before moving the cursor left and right.
5. To register the character color change, press 1(SET).
• To cancel the character color change, press J.
k Appending a Memo to a Text Line or Calculation Line
After you append a memo to a text line or calculation line in an eActivity file, you can jump to
that line from the memo list.
Memo icon
→
Memo list Jumping to the line where
the memo is located
• You can append one memo per line.* The memo icon will appear in the upper right corner of
the screen if there is a memo appended to the line where the cursor is currently located.
* Note that a line of text runs from the beginning of the line up to the next new line operation
(which is not displayed) and may span multiple display lines.
• In addition to being able to display the memory list while an eActivity file is open, you also
can open it by pressing 5(MEMO) in the file menu before opening the eActivity file.
• A memo can be appended to a text line or calculation line only.
• You cannot append a memo to a calculation line result.
10-12
u To append a memo to a line
1. Move the cursor to the text line or calculation line where you want to append a memo.
2. If the cursor is located at a text line, press 6(g)6(g)3(MEMO)1(INSERT). If it is at a
calculation line, press 6(g)6(g)1(MEMO)1(INSERT).
• This displays a memo color selection dialog box.
3. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the color you want to select and then press
w. Or you can use the number keys to enter the number next to the color you want to
select.
• A memo window appears in the center of the screen, ready for text input.
Memo Window
4. Enter the text you want. You can enter an explanation of the line, some symbol, etc.
• You can enter up to 255 bytes of text.
5. Press w.
• This closes the memo window. At this time the memo icon will appear in the upper right
corner of the screen because there is now a memo appended to the line where the cursor
is located.
u To jump to a line that has a memo appended
1. If the cursor is currently located at a text line, press 6(g)6(g)3(MEMO)3(Catalog).
If it is at a calculation line, press 6(g)6(g)1(MEMO)3(Catalog).
• This displays a list of memos contained in the file.
2. Use f and c to move the highlighting to the memo for your jump destination and then
press w.
• This jumps to the line where the selected memo is located, with the cursor at the first
character of the line.
10-13
u To edit the text of an existing memo
1. Move the cursor to the line where the memo you want to edit is appended.
2. If the cursor is located at a text line, press 6(g)6(g)3(MEMO)4(VIEW). If it is at a
calculation line, press 6(g)6(g)1(MEMO)4(VIEW).
• This will display the memo window as shown in the screen shot on the left, below. Pressing
3(DETAIL) here will display a memo detail editing screen like the screen shot on the
right. You can use either of these screens to edit memo text. The detail editing screen is
best when the memo contains a lot of text.
→
3. Edit the text and then press w.
• This returns to step 1 of this procedure.
u To remove a memo
1. Move the cursor to the line where the memo you want to remove is appended.
2. If the cursor is located at a text line, press 6(g)6(g)3(MEMO)2(DELETE). If it is at
a calculation line, press 6(g)6(g)1(MEMO)2(DELETE).
3. In response to the confirmation dialog that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the memo or
6(No) to cancel the delete operation.
10-14
k Inserting an Image (Picture)
The following table shows the image file sizes that are supported for insertion into an eActivity
file.
Width × Height
(dots) Size Example Screen
(a) 384 × 216 This is the overall screen size for this
model. The graphic images stored
in picture memory (page 5-21) are
this size. The 48 vertical dots that are
outside of the eActivity display range
can be displayed by scrolling.
(b) 384 × 192 This is the screen size when a graph
screen is saved to picture memory
(page 5-21).
• The line on the eActivity workspace screen where an image is inserted is called a “picture
line”. You can insert only one image per picture line, and you cannot enter text or numbers
into the same line where a picture line is inserted.
• You can insert a 16-bit g3p format file or a screen image (3-bit g3p format file) saved to
capture memory (page 1-36).
10-15
u To insert an image
1. Use f and c to move the cursor to the location where you want to insert the image.
2. If the cursor is located at a text line, press 6(g)3(INSERT)4(PICTURE). If it is at a
calculation line, press 5(INSERT)4(PICTURE).
• This displays a list of g3p files stored in the PICT folder in storage memory.
3. Use f and c to move the highlighting to the image you want to insert and then press
w.
• This inserts the image with a red boundary around it. The red boundary means that the
image is selected.
u To select an image
You can use f and c to move the cursor between lines and select images. The following
shows how images appear on the display when they are selected.
Selecting an image that does not have a boundary causes a red boundary to appear around it.
→
Selecting an image that has a boundary causes the boundary to change color, indicating it is
highlighted.
→
10-16
u To add a boundary line around an image
1. Use f and c to select the image to which you want to add a boundary line.
2. Press !f(FORMAT).
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the style and color of the boundary line.
3. Specify the boundary line style and color.
• Use f and c to move the highlighting to Line Style or Line Color and then press w.
On the option dialog box that appears, highlight the option you want to select and then
press w.
• The following are the settings that are available for Line Style and Line Color.
Line Style: 1.Normal, 2.Thick, 3.Thin
Line Color: 1.Black, 2.Blue, 3.Red, 4.Magenta, 5.Green, 6.Cyan, 7.Yellow, 8.White
4. After the settings are the way you want, press J.
u To remove a boundary line from around an image
1. Use f and c to select the image whose boundary line you want to remove.
2. Press !f(FORMAT)c(Line Color)j(Clear)w.
3. Press J.
u To delete an image
1. Use f and c to select the image you want to delete.
2. Press 6(g)2(DELETE).
3. In response to the confirmation dialog that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the image or
6(No) to cancel the delete operation.
k Using Strips
Strips are tools that let you embed built-in application data into an eActivity file. Only one
built-in application screen can be associated with each strip, and the strip can store the data
(graphs, etc.) produced by the screen.
The table below shows the built-in application screens that can be inserted into strips. The
“Strip Name” column shows the names included on the dialog box that appears when you
press 2(STRIP).
10-17
Strip Data Type Table
Data Type Strip Name
Run-Matrix
mode calculation data (When the Run-Matrix
mode is
called from an eActivity, it starts up in the Math input/output mode.)
RUN
Graph mode graph screen data Graph
Graph mode graph relation list screen data Graph Editor
Table mode table relation list screen data Table Editor
Conic Graphs mode graph screen data Conics Graph
Conic Graphs mode function list screen data Conics Editor
Statistics mode statistical graph screen data Stat Graph
Statistics mode List Editor data List Editor
Equation mode calculation solution screen data Solver
Recursion mode recursion type selection screen Recur Editor
Notes screen data (Notes is a special eActivity application. See “Notes
Strips” on page 10-19 for more information.)
Notes
Run-Matrix
mode Matrix Editor data Matrix Editor
Equation mode simultaneous equation solution screen data Simul Equation
Equation mode high-order equation solution screen data Poly Equation
Dyna Graph mode graph screen data Dynamic Graph
Financial mode calculation solution screen data Financial
Spreadsheet mode spreadsheet screen data SpreadSheet
E-Con2 mode setup wizard data Econ SetupWizard
E-Con2 mode advanced setup data Econ AdvancSetup
E-Con2 mode advanced setup data
(Executing this strip starts sampling immediately based on the setup
information that is recorded to the strip the first time the strip is
executed.)
Econ Sampling
E-Con2 mode advanced setup data
(Executing this strip graphs sampled data that is recorded to the strip
the first time the strip is executed.)
Econ Graph
Geometry mode screen data Geometry
Picture Plot mode screen data Picture Plot
10-18
u To insert a strip
1. Move the cursor to the location where you want to insert
the strip.
2. Press 2(STRIP).
• This will display a dialog box with a list of insertable
strips. For information about the display names and
data types that appear on this dialog box, see the “Strip
Data Type Table” (page 10-17).
3. Use c and f to select the strip that corresponds to the type of data you want to insert.
• In this example we will select “Graph” ( Graph mode graph screen data).
4. Press w.
• This will insert the type of strip you selected (Graph strip in this example) one line above
the line where you located the cursor in step 1 of this procedure.
5. Input up to 16 characters for the strip title, and then press
w.
6. Press w again to start creating strip data.
• This will start up the built in application for the selected
strip type ( Graph mode in this example), and display
the graph screen. At this point, a blank graph screen
appears because there is no data yet.
7. Press J to display the graph relation list screen.
10-19
8. Enter the function you want to graph.
(Example: Y =
2
1 x
2
– 1)
9. Press 6(DRAW).
• This will graph the function you entered.
10. To return to the eActivity workspace screen, press !a( ' ).
• The data that is graphed in step 8 will be saved in the Graph strip.
• The saved graph data is linked to this Graph strip only. It is independent of data for
modes that are entered from the Main Menu.
11. Pressing w here again will display the graph screen, and draw the graph based on the
data saved by the strip.
u Notes Strips
“Notes” is a special eActivity text editor that comes in handy when you want to write long text
explanations on the workspace screen. You can call up the Notes screen from a Notes strip on
the workspace screen. Input and editing operations on the Notes screen are identical to those
you use for an eActivity text line.
10-20
The following describes the Notes screen function menu items.
• { JUMP }... Displays a JUMP menu that you can use to jump to the top ( 1(TOP)) of the data,
the bottom ( 2(BOTTOM)) of the data, the previous page ( 3(PageUp)), or the next
page ( 4(PageDown)).
• { DEL-LINE } ... Deletes the line that is currently selected or where the cursor is located.
• { INSERT } ... Inserts one new line above the line where the cursor is currently located.
• { MATH } ... Displays the MATH menu (page 1-14).
• { CHAR } ... Displays a menu for inputting math symbols, special symbols, and characters of
various languages.
• { A
⇔
a } ... Toggles between uppercase and lowercase input while alpha character input is
enabled (by pressing the a key).
u To change the title of a strip
1. Use c and f to select the strip whose title you want to change.
2. Input up to 16 characters for the strip title, and then press w.
• The remainder of the existing title will disappear as soon as you input the first character.
Input the new title in its entirety. If you want to partially edit the existing title, press d or
e first to move the cursor.
• Pressing J instead of w will exit trip title editing without changing anything.
u To call an application from a strip
Use c and f to select the strip whose application you want to call and then press w.
• This will display the application screen that corresponds to the selected strip. If the strip
already contains data, the application is called using the data that was last saved.
• The background color of the status bar changes from its normal white to light cyan to indicate
that the displayed application screen was called from a strip.
• If you select a Conics Graph strip and press w without inputting any graph data, the Conics
Editor screen appears in place of the Conics Graph screen.
10-21
u To toggle between the eActivity workspace screen and an application
screen called from a strip
Press !a( ' ).
Each press of !a( ' ) toggles between the eActivity workspace screen and the
application screen called from the strip.
u To switch from an application screen called up from a strip to another
application screen
Press !,( , ). On the dialog box that appears, use c and f to select the name of
an application and then press w.
u To display the strip memory usage screen
1. Use c and f to select the strip whose memory usage screen you want to view.
2. Press 1(FILE) 5(SIZE).
• This will display the memory usage screen of the
currently selected strip.
3. To exit the memory usage screen, press J.
u To delete a line or strip
1. Move the cursor to the line or strip you want to delete.
• If you move the cursor to a calculation line, note that both the calculation and the result will
be deleted.
2. Press 6( g) 2(DEL-LINE).
• This causes a confirmation message to appear.
3. Press 1(Yes) to delete, or 6(No) to cancel without deleting anything.
10-22
k Saving a File
Use the procedures in this section to save a file after inputting or editing it on the workspace
screen.
An eActivity file for the fx-CG10/fx-CG20 may have a file name extension of “g3e”. Performing
either of the following operations on the fx-CG10/fx-CG20 to save an eActivity file always will
cause the extension “g3e” to be appended to the file name.
• Saving a newly created file
• Saving an existing file using the “save as” operation ( 1(FILE) 2(SAVE • AS))
If you save an eActivity file using the fx-CG10/fx-CG20 to save a file with a file name extension
“g2e” (a file transferred from an older version calculator), the file name extension will be
determined according to the following rules.
• The “g3e” extension is used for an eActivity file that includes data for new features added by
the fx-CG10/fx-CG20.
Here, the expression “data for new features added by the fx-CG10/fx-CG20” means, for
example, colored text data, memo data appended to a line, picture line data, etc.
• The “g2e” extension is used for eActivity files other than those described above.
u To replace the existing file with the new version
Press 1(FILE) 1(SAVE) to save the currently open file.
u To save a file under a new name
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, press 1(FILE) 2(SAVE • AS).
• This will display a file name input screen.
2. Input up to 8 characters for the file name and then press w.
• If a file already exists with the same file name you enter in step 2, a message will appear
asking if you want to replace the existing file with the new one. Press 1(Yes) to replace
the existing file, or 6(No) to cancel the save operation and return to the file name input
dialog box in step 2.
Important!
• An eActivity file with the g3e file name extension cannot be opened by any CASIO calculator
model older than the fx-CG10/fx-CG20.
• Using the fx-CG10 or fx-CG20 to open an eActivity file with a file name extension of g1e
or g2e, which was created on an older model CASIO calculator (fx-9860G, fx-9860GII, fx-
9860G AU, fx-9860G AU PLUS, GRAPH 85/85 SD, GRAPH 95/75), will cause any G-MEM
(Graph memory) or DYNA MEM (Dynamic Graph memory) instances in the eActivity strips to
be deleted.
10-23
k Displaying the eActivity Memory Usage Screen
The maximum size of an eActivity file is approximately 29,000 bytes.* You can use the
eActivity file memory usage screen to check how much memory capacity remains for the file
you are currently working on.
* Actual maximum file size depends on capture memory and clipboard memory usage, and
may be less than 29,000 bytes.
u To display the eActivity memory usage screen
On the workspace screen, press 1(FILE) 4(CAPACITY).
File usage
Remaining file memory capacity
To exit the memory usage screen, press J.
u To return to the file list from the workspace screen
Press J.
If a confirmation message appears asking if you want to save the current file appears, perform
one of the operations described below.
To do this: Press this key:
Overwrite the existing eActivity file with the edited version and return
to the file list 1(Yes)
Return to the file list without saving the file you are currently editing 6(No)
Return to the eActivity workspace screen A
11-1
Chapter 11 Memory Manager
This calculator includes main memory and storage memory for data storage.
The main memory is a work area where you can input data, perform calculations, and run
programs. Data in the main memory can be deleted by batteries going dead or when you
perform a reset.
Storage memory is an area for storing eActivity files, picture data (g3p files), and other
relatively large-volume data. The storage memory uses “flash memory,” so data is safe even
when power is interrupted. Normally, you should use the storage memory for data you need to
store securely for long periods, loading data into the main memory only when you need it.
1. Using the Memory Manager
From the Main Menu, enter the Memory mode.
• { MAIN } ... {displays main memory information}
• { STRGMEM } ... {displays storage memory information}
• { BACKUP } ... {main memory backup}
• { OPT } ... {storage memory optimization}
k Memory Information Screen
The memory information screen shows information about one memory at a time: the
calculator’s main memory or storage memory.
To display this memory information screen: Press this key:
Main memory 1(MAIN)
Storage memory 2(STRGMEM)
11
11-2
• Use the cursor f and c keys to move the highlighting and check the number of bytes
used by each type of data.
• The status bar shows the remaining capacity of the currently displayed memory area (main
or storage).
• If the name of a file transferred to storage memory from your computer or other source
has a file name that is more than eight characters long, its name will abbreviated to
eight characters when displayed on the storage memory information screen (Example:
AAAABBBBCC.txt > AAAABB~1.txt). Also, if a file name extension has more than three
characters, everything after the third character of the file name extension will be trimmed off.
• Up to 300 files per folder can be displayed on the main memory information screen. If a
folder has more than 300 files and you need to display them all, divide them among multiple
folders so the total number of files in a single folder is not greater than 300.
• Up to 200 files per folder can be displayed on the storage memory information screen. If a
folder has more than 200 files and you need to display them all, divide them among multiple
folders so the total number of files in a single folder is not greater than 200.
• Though you can create folders on your computer nested to more than three levels in storage
memory, this calculator will display only up to the third level.
• Moving the highlighting to a data group or folder and pressing w will display the data group
or folder contents. Pressing J will return to the previous screen.
• While storage memory folder contents are displayed, the top line of the screen shows the file
path to the current directory level. “SMEM” stands for “Storage Memory”.
• The following are characters that can be used in file names and folder names.
A-Z, a-z, 0-9, !, #, $, %, ', ,(comma), (, ), +, –, ., ;, =, @, [, ], ^, _, `, ~, space
11-3
The following data can be checked.
Main Memory
Note
For information about the “Overwrite Check” column in the table below, see “To execute a
send operation” (page 13-12) and “Error Checks During Data Copy” (page 11-9).
Icon/Data Name Contents Overwrite
Check
ALPHA MEM Alpha letter variables No
CONICS Conics setting data No
DYNA MEM Dynamic Graph memory Yes
E-CON2 E-Con2 group —
ECON2 E-Con2 mode current data Yes
SUnnn E-Con2 mode setup data Yes
EQUATION Equation data No
F-MEM Function memory group —
F-MEM n (n = 1 to 20) Function memory No
G-MEM Graph memory group —
G-MEM n (n = 1 to 20) Graph memory Yes
@GEOM Geometry group —
@IMAGE Geometry mode current data Yes
Each Geometry file name Geometry data Yes
LISTFILE List file group —
LIST n (n = 1 to 26, and Ans) List memory contents Yes
LISTFILE n (n = 1 to 6) List file Yes
MATRIX Matrix group —
MAT n (n = A to Z, and Ans) Matrix Yes
@PICTPLT Picture Plot group —
PICTPLOT Picture Plot data Yes
PROGRAM Program group —
Each program name Programs Yes
RECURSION Recursion data No
S-SHEET Spreadsheet group —
11-4
Icon/Data Name Contents Overwrite
Check
_SETTING Spreadsheet mode setting data No
Each spreadsheet name Spreadsheet data Yes
SETUP Setup data No
STAT Stat result data No
STRING String memory group —
STRING n (n = 1 to 20) String memory No
SYSTEM OS and data shared by applications
(clipboard, replay, history, etc.) No
TABLE Table data No
FINANCE Financial mode data No
V-WIN V-Window memory group —
V-WIN n (n = 1 to 6) V-Window memory No
Y=DATA Graph expression No
Each add-in application name Application-specific data Yes
Storage Memory*1
Icon File Extension Description
.g1m, .g2m, .g3m,
.g1r, or .g2r Data items listed in the main memory information
screen that has been copied to storage memory.
.g1e, .g2e, or .g3e eActivity files
.g3a, .g3l .g3a: Add-in applications
.g3l: Add-in languages and add-in menus
.g3p Picture files
.g3b Flipbook files
.bmp Bitmap files
.txt Text files
.csv CSV files
Other file name
extensions These files are not supported by this calculator.
*
1
“No Data” is displayed when there is no data in storage memory.
11-5
k Creating a Folder in Storage Memory
u To create a new folder
1. While storage memory data is on the display, press 4(FOLDER)1(MKEFLDR) to display
the folder name input screen.
2. Input up to eight characters for the name you want to give
to the folder.
• Only the following characters are supported: A through
Z, {, }, ’, ~, 0 through 9
• An “Invalid Name” error occurs if the name you input is
already being used by an existing file.
• To cancel folder creation, press J.
3. Press w to create the folder and return to the storage
memory information screen.
• This calculator supports nesting of folders up to three levels only.
• Though you can create folders on your computer nested to more than three levels in storage
memory, this calculator will display only up to the third level. In this case you will be able to
see folders stored in a level three folder, but you will not be able to open them.
• Selecting a folder stored in a level three folder and then performing the delete operation
(page 11-10) will delete the selected (level 4) folder and everything inside it.
u To rename a folder
1. On the storage memory information screen, select the folder you want to rename.
2. Press 4(FOLDER)2(RENFLDR) to display the rename folder screen.
• The remaining steps of this procedure are the same as those starting with step 2 under
“To create a new folder” above.
11-6
k Viewing Detailed Information about a File in Storage Memory
On the storage memory information screen, you can highlight a file and then press
5(DETAIL) or e to display its DETAIL screen. If you select a g3p or g3b file, these
operations will display a preview of the file’s image.
Non g3p/g3b File
5(DETAIL)
or e
→
←
J or d
g3p/g3b File
5(DETAIL)
or e
→
←
J or d
e
→
←
d
• You can use e and d to move between the storage memory information screen, file
DETAIL screen, and image preview screen (g3p or g3b file only) as shown above.
• Pressing f or c while a file DETAIL screen or image preview screen is displayed will
scroll either up or down to the DETAIL screen or image preview screen of the next file in the
sequence that the files are listed on the storage memory information screen.
• Pressing f or c while a file DETAIL screen is displayed will scroll to the DETAIL screen
of the next file in the sequence that the files are listed on the storage memory information
screen.
11-7
k Selecting Data
• Press 1(SELECT) to select the currently highlighted item, which is indicated by the
selection pointer ( ) appearing next to it. Pressing 1(SELECT) again will deselect the item,
causing the selection pointer to disappear.
• You can select multiple files, if you want.
→
1(SELECT)
←
• Selecting a group or folder also selects everything inside of it. Deselecting a group or folder
deselects all of its contents.
w
→
• If you select one or more individual items inside of a data group or folder, the selection
pointer ( ) appears next to each item, while a selection pointer ( ) appears next to the
group or folder name.
J
→
• Returning to the Memory mode initial screen deselects all currently selected items.
11-8
k Copying Data
u To copy from main memory to storage memory
The following procedure saves the selected data into a single file. You assign a name to the
file, which is stored in storage memory.
1. On the main memory information screen, select the data you want to copy.
2. Press 2(COPY).
• This displays the folder selection screen. “ROOT” is the
storage memory root directory.
3. Specify the folder you want.
• Highlight ROOT to copy the data to the root directory.
• To copy the data to a specific folder, use f and c to move the highlighting to the
desired folder and then press 1(OPEN).
4. Press 1(SAVE • AS).
• This displays the file name input screen.
5. Input the file name you want to give to the file.
• To cancel the copy operation, press J.
6. Press 5(g3m) or 6(g2m) as required to specify the file format.
• g3m is the fx-CG10/fx-CG20 file type. g2m is the file format used to transfer data to the
fx-9860GII and other older model calculators via Program-Link Software (FA-124).
7. Press w to copy the data.
• The message “Complete!” appears when the copy operation is complete.
11-9
u To copy from storage memory to main memory
1. On the storage memory information screen, select the file you want to copy.
• The only files that can be copied to main memory are those with one of the following
file name extensions: g1m, g2m, g3m, g1r, g2r. Selecting a file of any other format and
performing the following step will cause an “Invalid Type” error.
• Performing the following step causes the files stored in storage memory to be expanded
into individual component data (SETUP, STAT, and other data described on page 11-3),
and copy the data to main memory.
2. Press 2(COPY) to copy the data.
• Depending on the data type, an overwrite confirmation message will appear if there
is always data with the same name in main memory as the data being copied. For
information about which types of data cause a confirmation message to appear, see the
“Overwrite Check” column in the data table on page 11-3. “Yes” means that a confirmation
message is displayed, while “No” indicates that the copy operation is performed without
any confirmation message.
• The message “Complete!” appears when the copy operation is complete.
u Error Checks During Data Copy
The following error checks are performed while a data copy operation is being executed.
Low battery check
The calculator performs low battery check before starting the data copy operation. If the
battery is at Level 1, a low battery error occurs and the copy operation is not performed.
Available memory check
The calculator checks to see if there is enough free memory available to store the copied data.
A “Memory Full” error occurs if there is not enough memory available.
A “Too Many Data” error occurs when the number of data items is too great.
Overwrite check
The calculator checks to see if there is any existing data at the copy destination with the same
name as the data being copied.
An overwrite confirmation message appears if there is data
with the same name.
• 1(Yes) ... overwrites the existing data with the new
data
• 6(No) ... advances to the next data item without
copying the data with the same name
• Pressing A will cancel the copy operation.
11-10
Type mismatch error check
Only files whose names have the extension .g1m, .g2m, .g3m, .g1r, or .g2r can be copied from
storage memory to main memory. Any other type of error will cause a type mismatch error.
k Other File Operations
u To delete a file or folder
1. Display the main memory information screen or the storage memory information screen.
2. Select all of the files and folders you want to delete.
• For details about selecting files and folders, see “Selecting Data” (page 11-7).
3. Press 6(DELETE).
4. In response to the confirmation dialog that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete or 6(No) to
cancel the delete operation.
u To search for a file
Example To search for all files in the main memory (or storage memory) whose
names begin with the letter “R”
1. Display the main memory (or storage memory) information screen.
2. Press 3(SEARCH).
• Input the letter “R” for the keyword.
• The first file name that begins with the letter “R” appears
highlighted on display.
• You can input up to eight characters for the keyword.
• The message “Not Found” appears if there are no file names that match your keyword.
11-11
k Backing Up Main Memory Data
u To back up main memory data
1. On the initial Memory mode screen press 4(BACKUP).
2. Press 1(SAVE).
• This displays a folder selection screen.
3 . Use f and c to select the folder where you want to save the data.
4. Press w to start the backup.
• A “Memory Full” occurs when there is not enough space available in the storage memory
to complete the backup operation.
• The following message appears if there is already
backup data in the storage memory.
Press 1(Yes) to back up the data, or 6(No) to cancel the backup operation.
The message “Complete!” appears when the backup operation is finished.
• Backup data is saved in a file named BACKUP.g3m.
5. Press J to return to the screen displayed in step 1.
11-12
u To restore backup data to the main memory
1. On the initial Memory mode screen press 4(BACKUP).
• On the screen that appears, you can confirm whether or not there is backup data in the
storage memory.
2. Press 2(LOAD).
• This displays the folder selection screen.
3. Use f and c to select a folder.
4. Press w.*
1
• A message appears to confirm whether or not you really
want to restore the backed up data.
*
1
The message “No Data” will appear if there is no
backup data stored in the selected folder. Pressing J
will return the screen in step 1.
Press 1(Yes) to restore the data and delete any data currently in the area.
Press 6(No) to cancel the data backup operation.
The message “Complete!” appears when the restore operation is finished.
Press J to return to the screen displayed in step 1.
11-13
k Optimizing Storage Memory
Storage memory can become fragmented after many store and load operations, causing
entire blocks of memory to become unavailable for data storage. Because of this, you should
periodically perform the storage memory optimization procedure, which rearranges the data in
the storage memory and makes memory usage more economical.
• Note that the calculator performs storage memory optimization automatically whenever you
perform a save operation and the calculator discovers storage memory is running low.
u To optimize the storage memory
On the initial Memory mode screen, press 5(OPT) to optimize the storage memory.
The message “Complete!” appears when the optimize operation is complete.
Press J to return to the initial Memory mode screen.
• In some cases, the amount of free memory capacity may be unchanged when you check
it after performing the optimization procedure. This does not indicate any problem with the
calculator.
12-1
Chapter 12 System Manager
Use the System Manager to view system information and make system settings.
1. Using the System Manager
From the Main Menu, enter the System mode and display the following menu items.
• 1(DISPLAY) ... {display brightness adjustment}
• 2(PWRProp) ... {power properties settings}
• 3(LANGUAGE) ... {system language}
• 4(VERSION) ... {version}
• 5(RESET) ... {system reset operations}
• 6(g)1(BattSet) ... {battery settings}
• 6(g)2(UserName) ... {user name registration}
• 6(g)5(OS Update) ... {OS update}
2. System Settings
k Display Brightness Adjustment
While the initial System mode screen is displayed, press 1(DISPLAY) to display the
brightness adjustment screen.
• The e cursor key makes display brightness lighter.
• The d cursor key makes display brightness darker.
• 1(INITIAL) returns display brightness to its initial default.
Press J or !J(QUIT) to return to the initial System mode screen.
12
12-2
k Power Properties Settings
u To specify the Auto Power Off trigger time
While the initial System mode screen is displayed, press 2(PWRProp) to display the Power
Properties setting screen.
• 1(10Min) ... {10 minutes} (initial default setting)
• 2(60Min) ... {60 minutes}
Press J or !J(QUIT) to return to the initial System mode screen.
u To specify the backlight duration
1. While the initial System mode screen is displayed, press 2(PWRProp) to display the
Power Properties setting screen.
2. Use f and c to select “Backlight Duration”.
• 1(30Sec) ... {turns off the backlight 30 seconds after the last key operation is performed}
(initial default setting)
• 2(1Min) ... {turns off the backlight one minute after the last key operation is performed}
• 3(3Min) ... {turns off the backlight three minutes after the last key operation is performed}
3. Press J or !J(QUIT) to return to the initial System mode screen.
12-3
k System Language Setting
Use LANGUAGE to specify the display language for built-in applications.
u To select the message language
1. While the initial System mode screen is displayed, press 3(LANGUAGE) to display the
Message Language selection screen.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to select the language you want, and then press
1(SELECT).
3. The pop up window appears using the language you selected. Check the contents and then
press J.
4. Press J or !J(QUIT) to return to the initial System mode screen.
u To select the menu language
1. While the initial System mode screen is displayed, press 3(LANGUAGE) to display the
Message Language selection screen.
2. Press 6(MENU).
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to select the language you want, and then press
1(SELECT).
4. The pop up window appears using the language you selected. Check the contents and then
press J.
• Press 6(MESSAGE) to return to the Message Language selection screen.
5. Press J or !J(QUIT) to return to the initial System mode screen.
12-4
k Version List
Use VERSION to display the operating system version.
u To display version information
1. While the initial System mode screen is displayed, press 4(VERSION) to display the
Version list.
2. Use f and c to scroll the screen. The contents of the list are shown below.
- Operating system version
- Add-in application names and versions (only installed add-ins are displayed)
- Message languages and versions
- Menu languages and versions
3. Press J or !J(QUIT) to return to the initial System mode screen.
k Reset
1. While the initial System mode screen is displayed, press 5(RESET) to display the Reset
Screen 1.
• 1(SETUP) ... {setup initialization}
• 2(MAIN) ... {main memory data clear}
• 3(ADD-IN) ... {add-in application clear}
• 4(STRGMEM) ... {storage memory data clear}
• 5(A&S) ... {add-in application and storage memory
data clear}
Pressing 6( g) on the above screen displays the Reset Screen 2 shown below.
• 1(M&S) ... {main memory data and storage memory
data clear}
• 2(ALL) ... {all memory clear}
• 3 (LANGUAGE) ... {add-in language clear}
12-5
The following table shows the functions of the function keys. You can use the function keys
to delete the specific data you want.
Function Key Functions
Initialize
Setup
Information
Delete Main
Memory
Data
Delete
Add-in
Applications
Delete
Add-in
Languages
Delete Storage
Memory Data
(Excluding Add-in
Applications and
Languages)
1(SETUP)
2(MAIN)
3(ADD-IN)
4(STRGMEM)
5(A&S)
6( g) 1(M&S)
6( g) 2(ALL) *1
6( g)
3(LANGUAGE)
*
1 If an add-in language is selected for the System Language Setting (page 12-3), the add-in
language file (g3l) is not deleted.
2. Press the function key that corresponds to the reset operation you want to perform.
3. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to perform the reset
operation you specified, or 6(No) to cancel.
4. A message appears to let you know when the reset operation is complete.
→
Screen produced when
2(MAIN) is pressed in step 2.
Screen produced when
1(Yes) is pressed in step 3.
Important!
Note that deleting add-in language data causes the language setting to switch automatically to
English. The deleted language will no longer be available for display.
12-6
Note
After pressing 6(g)2(ALL) to execute initialize all you will need to configure a number of
initial settings, the same way you do the first time you turn on the calculator after purchasing
it. The following screens will appear automatically in sequence. Use each one to configure the
required settings.
• Message Language selection screen (page 12-3)
• Display Settings screen (page 12-1)
• Power Properties screen (page 12-2)
• Battery Settings screen (shown below)
k Battery Settings
Important!
Whenever you replace batteries, be sure to perform the operation below to specify the type of
batteries you are loading.
u To change the battery type
1. From the initial System mode screen, press
6(g)1(BattSet).
2. Use f and c to move the highlighting to the battery
type that matches the batteries you are using and then
press 1(SELECT).
3. Press 1(Yes) to change the setting, or 6(No) to cancel without changing anything.
12-7
k User Name
Use the procedure in this section to identify yourself as the user of the calculator by registering
your name and organization.
Important!
• In order to protect against misuse of your calculator, be sure to also register a password
when you register your name and organization. You will need to enter the correct password
whenever you want to change or delete the registered user name and/or organization. Take
care that you do not forget the password.
If you do, you will need to contact your original retailer or nearest CASIO authorized service
center when you want to change the user name and/or organization.
• Do not remove batteries or press the RESTART button while the operation below is in
progress. Doing so can corrupt data.
u To register or edit a user name and organization
1. While the initial System mode screen is displayed, press
6(g)2(UserName) to display the user name screen.
2. Press 1(EDIT).
• If nothing is registered yet, the cursor will appear in the “User Name” field.
• If there is already data registered, the cursor will appear in the “Password” field. If this
happens, enter the correct password and then press w. If the password matches the one
that is registered, the cursor will move to the “User Name” field. If the password does not
match, the cursor will remain in the “Password” field.
3. Input information in the sequence shown below.
(1) Input a User Name (up to 19 characters) and then press c or w.
(2) Input your Organization (up to 19 characters) and then press c or w.
(3) Input a Password (up to eight characters) and then press w.
• Inputting a password and pressing w will display a registration confirmation dialog box to
appear.
4. Press 1(Yes) to register the information or 6(No) to cancel the registration operation.
12-8
u To delete the user name and organization name
1. While the initial System mode screen is displayed, press 6(g)2(UserName) to display
the user name screen.
2. Press 2(DELETE).
• This will display the cursor in the “Password” field.
3. Enter the correct password and then press w.
• This causes a confirmation dialog box to appear.
4. Press 1(Yes) to delete or 6(No) to cancel the delete operation.
k OS Update
You can update the operating system by connecting the calculator to a computer. For details,
see the text of releases that are issued when a new operating system version is released.
13-1
Chapter 13 Data Communication
This chapter explains how to transfer data between a calculator and a computer, or between
two calculators. Data communication operations are performed in the Link mode.
From the Main Menu, enter the Link mode. The following data communication main menu
appears on the display.
• { TRANSMIT } ... {displays the data send screen}
• { RECV } ... {displays the data receive screen}
• { CABLE } ... {displays the cable type selection screen}
• { WAKEUP } ... {displays the wakeup setting screen}
• { CAPTURE } ... {displays the screen image capture setting
screen}
Communication parameters are fixed at the following settings.
• 3-pin serial port
• Speed ( BPS): 9600 bps max. (Connected with CFX-9850G series or fx-7400G series
calculator)
115200 bps max. (Connected with another fx-CG10, fx-CG20, fx-9860G
II
SD, fx-9860G II , fx-9860G AU PLUS, fx-9750G II , fx-7400G II , fx-9860G Slim
(OS 1.11), fx-9860G SD (OS 2.00), fx-9860G (OS 2.00) or fx-9860G AU (OS
2.00) calculator)
• Parity (PARITY): NONE
• USB port
• Communication speed is in accordance with USB standards.
k Configuring the Receiver’s Wakeup Feature
When Wakeup is turned on the receiver, the receiver turns on automatically when data transfer
starts.
• When communicating between two calculators (3PIN selected as the cable type), the
receiver enters the receive mode automatically after it wakes up.
• When communication is with a computer (USB selected as the cable type), connecting the
USB cable to a computer and then to the calculator (while the calculator is turned off) will
cause the calculator to turn on and the “Select Connection Mode” dialog box to appear.
1. On the receiver’s data communication main menu, press
5(WAKEUP).
This displays the Wakeup setting screen.
• { On } ... {turns Wakeup on}
• { Off } ... {turns Wakeup off}
2. Press 1(On).
This turns on Wakeup and returns of the data communication main menu.
13
13-2
3. Turn off the receiver.
4. Connect the receiver to the sender.
5. Starting a send operation on the sender causes the receiver to turn on automatically and
performs the data transfer operation.
k Capture Set Mode
You can specify either g3p format or bmp format for screen images saved by the operation
!h(CAPTURE).
The data communication menu provides the following operations.
6(CAPTURE) 1(Memory) ... Saves screen capture images in g3p format.
6(CAPTURE) 2(BMP) ... Saves screen capture images in bmp format.
For details about the screen capture operation, see “Using Screen Capture” (page 1-36).
k Select Connection Mode Screen
Connecting the USB cable to the calculator will cause the “Select Connection Mode” dialog
box to appear. The key operation you should perform on this screen depends on the device
currently connected to the calculator.
• 1(USB Flash) ... Mode for connecting the calculator to
a computer for data transfer. See
“To establish a connection between the
calculator and a computer” (page 13-3).
• 2(ScreenRecv) ... Mode for using the Screen Receiver
software on a Windows Vista® or
Windows® 7 computer to display the
calculator screen on the computer. For details, see the separate “Screen
Receiver User’s Guide”.
Wait until the calculator screen appears on the Screen Receiver window
before performing any calculator operation.
• 3(ScreenR(XP)) ... Mode for using the Screen Receiver software on a Windows® XP
computer to display the calculator screen on the computer.
• 4(Projector) ... Mode for connecting the calculator to a projector and projecting the
calculator screen. See “Connecting the Calculator to a Projector” (page
13-16).
Important!
The “Select Connection Mode” dialog box will not appear if you connect the USB cable to the
calculator while the busy indicator is on the display or while a graph, Geometry mode figure,
or other figure is flashing on the display. Wait until the busy indicator disappears, or perform
the required operation to stop the flashing of the graph or figure, and then try connecting the
USB cable again.
13-3
1. Performing Data Communication between the
Calculator and a Personal Computer
Establishing a USB connection between the calculator and a computer will cause the
computer to recognize the calculator’s storage memory as a mass storage drive. Connection
immediately causes main memory contents to be read into storage memory automatically,
so main memory data can be accessed from the computer. After a connection is established,
data can be transferred between the calculator and computer using computer operations only.
k Minimum Computer System Requirements
The following are the minimum requirements for a computer to exchange data with the
calculator.
• USB port
• Running one of the following operating systems.
Windows
®
XP Home Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows
®
XP Professional (32-bit, SP1 or later)
Windows Vista
®
(32-bit, SP1 or later)
Windows
®
7 (32-bit, 64-bit)
Mac OS
®
X (10.5.6 or later, 10.6.2 or later)
k Connecting and Disconnecting with a Computer in the Mass Storage
Mode
Use the USB cable that comes with the calculator to connect to your computer.
Important!
Never touch the USB cable plugs and screen while a data communication operation is in
progress. Static electricity from your fingers can cause data communication to be terminated.
u To establish a connection between the calculator and a computer
1. Start up your computer.
2. After starting up your computer, use the USB cable to connect it to the calculator.
• The calculator will turn on automatically and the “Select Connection Mode” screen will
appear.
13-4
3. Press 1(USB Flash).
• The message “Preparing USB” will appear on the
calculator screen. Stand by and do not perform any
operation on the calculator. Establishing a connection
between the calculator and a computer will cause the
screen shown nearby to appear.
4. On your computer, open the calculator drive.
• The calculator drive will appear inside My Computer under Windows XP, and inside
Computer under Windows Vista or Windows 7. Use Windows Explorer to open the
calculator drive.
• Under Mac OS X, the calculator drive icon appears on the Mac desktop. Double-click the
icon to open it.
• The calculator drive represents calculator’s storage memory.
5. Perform the required operation on your computer to transfer the data.
• For details about data transfer operations, see “Transferring Data between the Calculator
and a Personal Computer” (page 13-5).
u To terminate the connection between the calculator and a computer
1. If the calculator is connected to a Windows computer, note the drive letter (E, F, G, etc.)
assigned to the calculator drive.
2. Depending on the type of operating system your computer is running, perform one of the
following operations.
• Windows: Click the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon in the toolbar in the lower right corner
of the display. On the menu that appears, select “USB mass storage device” whose letter
matches the calculator drive letter you noted in step 1 above. Check to make sure the
“Safe To Remove Hardware” message is displayed.
• Mac OS: Drag the calculator drive icon to the Eject icon (Trash icon). Check to make sure
that the calculator drive icon is no longer on your desktop.
3. The message “Updating Main Memory” will appear on the calculator screen. Stand by and
do not perform any operation on the calculator. The message “Complete!” will appear after
updating of main memory is complete. To close the message dialog box, press J.
4. Disconnect the USB cable from the calculator.
13-5
k Transferring Data between the Calculator and a Personal Computer
This section explains how to connect the calculator to the computer and open the calculator
drive on the computer to transfer data.
u Main Memory Data during a USB Connection
The contents of the @MainMem folder in the calculator drive correspond to the contents of the
calculator’s main memory. Each time you establish a connection between the calculator and a
computer, the contents of the calculator’s main memory are copied to storage memory.
If there is not enough storage memory capacity to support the copy operation, the message
“Storage Memory Full” will be displayed on the calculator and the copy operation will not be
performed. If this happens, delete files you no longer need from storage memory to increase
capacity, and then try establishing a USB connection again.
Each group in main memory is displayed as a folder in the @MainMem folder. Also, each data
item in main memory is displayed as a file in the @MainMem folder.
Main Memory group names and data item names are displayed in the @MainMem folder as
shown in the table below.
Main Memory
Group Name
@MainMem
Folder Name
Main Memory
Item Name @MainMem File Name
E-CON2 ECON2 Econ2 ECON2.g3m
SUxxx SUxxx.g3m
F-MEM FMEM F-MEM xx FMEMxx.g3m
@GEOM GEOM @IMAGE @IMAGE.g3m
<Data name> <Data name>.g3m
G-MEM GMEM G-MEM xx GMEMxx.g3m
LISTFILE LISTFILE LIST xx LISTxx.g3m
LISTFILE x FILEx.g3m
MATRIX MATRIX MAT ANS MATANS.g3m
MAT x MATx.g3m
@PICTPLT @PICTPLT PICTPLOT PICTPLOT.g3m
PROGRAM PROGRAM <Program name> <Program name>.g3m
<Program name>.txt
S-SHEET SSHEET <Data name> <Data name>.g3m
V-WIN VMEM V-WIN x VMEMx.g3m
ROOT ROOT
ALPHA MEM ALPHAMEM.g3m
RECURSION RECUR.g3m
SETUP SETUP.g3m
STRING STRING.g3m
CONICS CONICS.g3m
13-6
Main Memory
Group Name
@MainMem
Folder Name
Main Memory
Item Name @MainMem File Name
ROOT ROOT
DYNA MEM DYNA MEM.g3m
EQUATION EQUATION.g3m
FINANCIAL FINANCE.g3m
STAT STAT.g3m
SYSTEM SYSTEM.g3m
TABLE TABLE.g3m
Y=DATA Y=DATA.g3m
u Main Memory Data Updating upon Termination of a USB Connection
While there is a USB connection between the calculator and a computer, you can use the
computer to edit the @MainMem folder contents by deleting folders and files, editing files,
adding files, etc. When you terminate the USB connection, the calculator’s main memory data
is updated with the current contents of the @MainMem folder. Note the following important
points.
• Deleting the @MainMem folder will cause all data in the calculator’s main memory to be
initialized.
• Updating the @MainMem folder affects up to three levels of folders inside the storage
memory root folder.
SMEM ← Storage memory root folder
@MainMem (Level 1)
Folder (Level 2)
Folder (Level 3) ← Updating affects files up to this
Any folders and files past Level 3 are moved to a folder named “SAVE-F” in storage memory.
• Adding a g3m file to the @MainMem folder while there is a USB connection between
the calculator and a computer will copy the data item(s) included in the g3m file to the
calculator’s main memory. For details about the main memory data item names that
correspond to the g3m file names in the @MainMem folder, see “Main Memory Data during
a USB Connection” (page 13-5). If there is no group in main memory that corresponds to the
data items included in the g3m file, a corresponding group will be created automatically and
the data items will be copied to that group.
• Depending on the data type, an overwrite confirmation message will appear if there is
already data with the same name in calculator’s main memory as the data being copied from
@MainMem folder. For information about which types of data cause a confirmation message
to appear, see the “Overwrite Check” column in the data table on page 11-3. “Yes” means
that a confirmation message is displayed, while “No” indicates that the copy operation is
performed without any confirmation message.
13-7
• If you place a file or folder that is not supported by the calculator into the @MainMem folder,
it will be transferred to a folder named “SAVE-F” in the calculator’s storage memory and will
not be shown in main memory.
• If the size of the data in the @MainMem folder exceeds the available capacity of main
memory, the message “Memory ERROR” will appear on the calculator when you terminate
the USB connection and main memory will not be updated.
• If there is an add-in file (.g3a/.g3l) in the @MainMem folder, that file will be moved to the
storage memory root directory. Note, however, that if there is already and add-in with the
same name in storage memory root directory, the existing add-in will be overwritten with the
new one, without displaying a confirmation message.
• If a text file (.txt) has been added to the @MainMem\PROGRAM folder, it will be
automatically converted to a program with same name as the file and stored in the main
memory PROGRAM group. For details about the rules that govern file names and other
conversion issues, see “Program and Text File Conversion Rules” (page 8-8).
u To transfer data between the calculator and a computer
1. Connect the calculator and computer, and open the calculator drive on the computer.
• See “To establish a connection between the calculator and a computer” (page 13-3).
2. Copy, edit, delete, or add files as desired.
• Use the same file operations that you normally do on your computer.
• For information about the folders and files in the @MainMem folder, see “Main Memory
Data during a USB Connection” (page 13-5) and “Main Memory Data Updating upon
Termination of a USB Connection” (page 13-6).
3. After you finish all the operations you want to perform, terminate the connection between
the calculator and a computer.
• See “To terminate the connection between the calculator and a computer” (page 13-4).
Note
Copying the storage memory folder to a file can cause the connection between the calculator
and computer to be dropped. If this happens, enter the Memory mode and execute an
Optimize operation (page 11-13), and then re-establish a connection between the calculator
and computer.
13-8
u To use your computer to edit a program created on the calculator
1. Use the calculator’s Program mode to create the program. (See “Chapter 8 Programming.”)
2. Connect the calculator and computer, and open the calculator drive on the computer.
3. Display the contents of the @MainMem\PROGRAM folder, and then use a text editor to
open the text file with the same name as the program you want to edit.
• If you are running Windows you could use Notepad, etc. With the Mac OS, you can use
TextEdit, etc.
4. Perform the required edits.
• For information about calculator commands and their corresponding special character
strings, see “CASIO Scientific Function Calculator Special Commands ⇔ Text Conversion
Table” (page 8-59).
5. After you are finished editing, save and close the text file.
• Save the edits under a different file name, as required. If you use Save As to save your
edits, be sure to save the new file in @MainMem\PROGRAM\.
• Be sure to save the file in ASCII or ANSI code txt format.
6. Terminate the connection between the calculator and a computer
• See “To terminate the connection between the calculator and a computer” (page 13-4).
k Installing Add-In Files
Add-in files can be installed on the calculator to give it additional functions. The following are
types of add-in files that are available.
• Add-in applications (.g3a): These files add new applications to the Main Menu.
• Add-in languages (.g3l): These files add languages to those that can be selected with the
“System Language Setting” procedure (page 12-3) for on-screen messages.
• Add-in menus (.g3l): These files add languages to those that can be selected with the
“System Language Setting” procedure (page 12-3) for function menus.
u To install an add-in file
In step 2 of the procedure under “To transfer data between the calculator and a computer”
(page 13-7), copy the add-in file (.g3a/.g3l) you want to install to the calculator drive root
directory.
13-9
k USB Connection Precautions
• Depending on the operating system your computer is running, perform one of the following
operations on the computer to terminate a connection with the calculator.
- Windows: Click the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon in the toolbar in the lower left corner of
the display. On the menu that appears, select “USB mass storage device”. Check to make
sure the “Safe To Remove Hardware” message is displayed.
- Mac OS: Drag the calculator drive to Trash. Check to make sure that the calculator drive is
no longer on your desktop.
• Never use a computer operation to format the calculator drive.
Doing so will cause a “File System ERROR” message to appear on the calculator screen
after you terminate the USB connection between the calculator and computer. When this
happens, you will not be able to start up the calculator unless you perform an Initialize All
operation, which deletes all data currently in calculator memory. For details, see “File System
ERROR” (page α-8).
• When copying a file from your computer’s local disk to the calculator drive, it may take
several minutes before copying starts. This is because copying automatically performs
optimization of the calculator’s storage memory. It does not indicate malfunction. For
information about storage memory optimization, see “Optimizing Storage Memory” (page
11-13).
• A USB connection between the calculator and a computer may be terminated automatically if
the computer enters a power save mode, sleep mode, or any other standby state.
13-10
2. Performing Data Communication between Two
Calculators
k Connecting Two Calculators
The following procedure describes how to connect two calculators with the connecting cable
that comes equipped as a standard accessory.
u To connect two calculators
1. Check to make sure that the power of both calculators is off.
2. Connect the two calculators using the cable.
3. Perform the following steps on both calculators to specify 3PIN as the cable type.
(1) From the Main Menu, enter the Link mode.
(2) Press 4(CABLE). This displays the cable type selection screen.
(3) Press 2(3PIN).
Cable
• Models that are supported for this configuration are shown below.
fx-CG10, fx-CG20, fx-9860G
II SD, fx-9860G II , fx-9860G AU PLUS, fx-9750G II , fx-7400G II ,
fx-9860G Slim (OS 1.11), fx-9860G SD (OS 2.00), fx-9860G (OS 2.00), fx-9860G AU (OS
2.00), CFX-9850G series
13-11
k Performing a Data Transfer Operation
Connect the two calculators and then perform the following procedures.
Receiving calculator
To set up the calculator to receive data, press 2(RECV)
while the data communication main menu is displayed.
The calculator enters a data receive standby mode and waits for data to arrive. Actual data
receive starts as soon as data is sent from the sending calculator.
Sending calculator
To set up the calculator to send data, press 1(TRANSMIT) while the data communication
main menu is displayed.
This displays a screen for specifying the data selection method.
• {SELECT} ... {selects new data}
• {CURRENT} ... {automatically selects previously selected
data*1}
*1 The previously selected data memory is cleared whenever you change to another mode.
u To send selected data items (Example: To send user data)
Press 1(SELECT) or 2(CURRENT) to display a data item selection screen.
• { SELECT } ... {selects data item where cursor is located}
• { ALL } ... {selects all data}
• {TRANSMIT} ... {sends selected data items}
Use the f and c cursor keys to move the cursor to the data item you want to select and
press 1(SELECT) to select it. Currently selected data items are marked with “
”. Pressing
6(TRANSMIT) sends all the selected data items.
• To deselect a data item, move the cursor to it and press 1(SELECT) again.
13-12
Only items that contain data appear on the data item selection screen. If there are too many
data items to fit on a single screen, the list scrolls when you move the cursor to the bottom line
of the items on the screen.
u To execute a send operation
After selecting the data items to send, press 6(TRANSMIT). A message appears to confirm
that you want to execute the send operation.
• 1(Yes) ... sends data
• 6(No) ... returns to data selection screen
Press 1(Yes) to send the data.
• You can interrupt a data operation at any time by pressing A.
The following shows what the displays of the sending and receiving calculator look like after
the data communication operation is complete.
Press J to return to the data communication main menu.
For information about the types of data items that can be sent, see “Main Memory” (pages
11-3 and 11-4). The following explains the meanings of the “Yes” and “No” indications in the
“Overwrite Check” column on those pages.
Yes: Overwrite check is performed. If the receiving calculator already contains the same type
of data, the message below appears to ask if the existing data should be overwritten with the
new data.
Data item name
13-13
Press 1(Yes) to replace the receiving calculator’s existing data with the new data, or 6(No)
to skip to next data item.
No: Overwrite check is not performed. If the receiving calculator already contains the same
type of data, the existing data is overwritten with the new data.
k Data Communication Precautions
Note the following precautions whenever you perform data communication.
• An error occurs whenever you try to send data to a receiving calculator that is not yet
standing by to receive data. When this happens, press J to clear the error and try again,
after setting up the receiving calculator to receive data.
• An error occurs whenever the receiving calculator does not receive any data approximately
six minutes after it is set up to receive data. When this happens, press J to clear the error.
• An error occurs during data communication if the cable becomes disconnected, if the
parameters of the two calculators do not match, or if any other communication problem
occurs. When this happens, press J to clear the error, then correct the problem before
trying data communication again. If data communication is interrupted by the J key
operation or an error, any data successfully received up to the interruption will be in the
memory of the receiving calculator.
• An error occurs if the receiving calculator memory becomes full during data communication.
When this happens, press J to clear the error and delete unneeded data from the
receiving calculator to make room for the new data, and then try again.
• When sending data from the fx-CG10/fx-CG20 to an older model calculator, folders in
storage memory are not sent. In this case, send individual files (no folders).
k Exchanging Data with another Model Calculator
Though it is possible to exchange data between this calculator (fx-CG10/fx-CG20) and the
other CASIO calculator models listed under “To connect two calculators” (page 13-10), there
are certain restrictions that apply when exchanging data with an older model calculator.
u Transferring Data from this Calculator to an Older Calculator Model
Basically, only data for functions that are available on both this calculator (fx-CG10/fx-CG20)
and the older model can be transferred.
Data for a function that is available on this calculator but not on the older model cannot be
transferred. Transferring Graph mode graph expression data (Y=DATA) from this calculator to
the fx-9860G II , for example, will cause color information to be dropped automatically, because
the fx-9860G
II does not support color.
13-14
The following table shows how each type of data is handled when transferring from this
calculator (fx-CG10/fx-CG20) to an older model CASIO calculator.
Data Item *1 fx-9750GII fx-7400GII CFX-9850G
ALPHAMEM ◎◎◎◎
CONICS *2 *2 × *2
DYNA × × × ×
E-CON2 ◎◎ ××
EQUATION ◎◎◎◎
FMEM ◎◎◎◎
@GEOM × × × ×
GMEM *2 *3 *2 *3 *2 *3 *2 *3
LIST
n *2 *2 *2 *2
LIST FILE
n *2 *2 *2 *2
MAT
n ◎◎◎◎
@PICTPLT × × × ×
PROGRAM *4 *4 *4 *4
RECUR *2 *2 *2 *2
SETUP *5 *5 *5 *5
SSHEET *2 *6 × × ×
STAT *2 *2 *2 *2
STRING
n ◎◎◎ ×
SYSTEM × × × ×
TABLE ◎◎◎◎
FINANCE *2 *2 *2 *2
VMEM *7 *7 *7 *7
Y=DATA *2 *3 *7 *2 *3 *7 *2 *3 *7 *2 *3 *7
◎: Sent as-is ×: Not sent
*1 fx-9860G
II SD, fx-9860G II , fx-9860G AU PLUS, fx-9860G Slim (OS 2.00), fx-9860G SD
(OS 2.00), fx-9860G (OS 2.00), fx-9860G AU (OS 2.00)
*2 Color data not sent.
*3 “Thin” line style changed to “Normal”.
*4 Program contents are sent as-is, without conversion.
The pixel values in the arguments of Text, PxlOn, PxlOff, Pxlchg, and PxlTest( commands
are transferred as-is. Because of this, executing a program that includes these commands
on an older calculator model will result in incorrect display or a Syntax ERROR.
*5 When a Setup item is configured to settings supported by this calculator (fx-CG10/fx-
CG20) but not supported by the receiving calculator, the receiving calculator’s setting is set
to its default value. If “Thin” is selected for the fx-CG10/fx-CG20 “Sketch Line” Setup item,
for example, the setting will be changed to “Normal” on the receiving calculator. Setup
items that are supported by this calculator (fx-CG10/fx-CG20) but not by the receiving
calculator are not transferred.
*6 Conditional formatting data is not sent.
*7 The V-Window dot value is recalculated in accordance with the number of screen dots of
the receiving calculator.
13-15
u Transferring Data from an Older Calculator Model to this Calculator
Almost all data produced by an older model CASIO calculator can be transferred to this
calculator (fx-CG10/fx-CG20).
• Some data may be converted in order to make it compatible with this calculator’s
specifications. Transferring Graph mode graph expression data (Y=DATA) from the fx-
9860G
II to this calculator, for example, will cause the V-Window dot value to be corrected
because the displays of the two models have different numbers of dots.
• In some cases, color data may be appended to data and other adjustments may be
performed automatically. In this case, the adjustments use initial default values. Transferring
Graph mode graph expression data (Y=DATA) from the fx-9860G
II to this calculator, for
example, the default color (blue) is applied for the graph color.
• Even if Wakeup is turned on (page 13-1), the Wakeup function is disabled.
The following table shows how each type of data is handled when transferring from an older
model CASIO calculator to this calculator (fx-CG10/fx-CG20).
Data Item Description
ALPHAMEM, CONICS, DYNA,
EQUATION, FMEM, Geometry,
LIST
n , LIST FILE n , MAT n ,
RECUR, SSHEET, STRING n ,
TABLE
Data is transferred as-is.
CAPT
n , PICT n , SYSTEM Not sent.
E-CON2, SETUP, STAT,
FINANCE
Original data is transferred as-is. However, Setup items
that are supported by this calculator (fx-CG10/fx-CG20)
but not by the sending calculator will be set to their initial
default values.
GMEM Original data is transferred as-is. However, the default
color is assigned to expressions.
Program • Pixel values specified by the Text command argument
are converted to match this calculator’s screen size.
• Pixel values specified by the PxlOn, PxlOff, Pxlchg,
PxlTest command arguments are not converted to match
this calculator’s screen size.
VMEM, Y=DATA Original data is transferred as-is. However, the dot value
is recalculated in accordance with the number of dots for
this calculator’s (fx-CG10/fx-CG20) display.
13-16
3. Connecting the Calculator to a Projector
You can connect the calculator to a CASIO projector and project calculator screen contents
onto a screen.
k Connectable Projectors (As of September 2010)
XJ-A135, XJ-A145, XJ-A235, XJ-A245
u To project calculator screen contents from a projector
1. Use the USB cable that comes with the calculator to connect to the projector.
• Connecting the USB cable to the calculator will cause the “Select Connection Mode” dialog
box to appear.
2. Press 4(Projector).
k Precautions when Connecting
• An hourglass figure may remain projected on the screen after you connect the calculator to
a projector. If this happens, performing some operation on the calculator will restore normal
display.
• If the calculator stops operating normally, disconnect the USB cable and then reconnect it. If
this does not correct the problem, disconnect the USB cable, turn the projector off and then
back on, and then reconnect the USB cable.
• Connecting the calculator to a projector with the USB cable immediately after starting up
the projector may cause the projected image to appear in grayscale and not in color. If this
happens, disconnect and then reconnect the USB cable.
14-1
Chapter 14 Geometry
1. Geometry Mode Overview
The Geometry mode allows you to draw and analyze geometric objects.
From the Main Menu, enter the Geometry mode.
k Geometry Mode Menus
Unlike other modes, the Geometry mode does not have function menus along the bottom of
the screen. Instead, it uses menus named [F1] through [F6] and [OPT], like the ones shown
below.
The following is a general explanation of Geometry mode menus.
• Pressing a key that corresponds to a menu ([F1] through [F6] or [OPT]) will display the menu
for that tab.
• After displaying a menu, use e and d to move between menu screens.
• To close a menu without selecting anything, press J.
u Menu Operations in This Chapter
Menu operations are shown using the following form in this chapter: 3(Draw) – 5:Vector.
When you see this, it means you can perform either of the following two operations.
• Press 3 to display the Draw menu, use c and f to highlight “5:Vector”, and then press
w.
• Press 3 to display the Draw menu and then press f.
14
14-2
k Menu Reference
The following tables describe the menu items that appear on each of the Geometry mode
menus.
u 1(File)
To do this: Select this menu item:
Create a new file 1:New
Open a file 2:Open
Save a file under a new name 3:Save as
Display a list of functions assigned to each key 4:Key Help
u 1e(View)
To do this: Select this menu item:
Start a box zoom operation 1:Zoom Box
Enter the pan mode (page 14-35) 2:Pan
Enter the scroll mode (page 14-36) 3:Scroll
Enlarge the display image 4:Zoom In
Reduce the size of the display image 5:Zoom Out
Adjust the size of the display image so it fills the display 6:Zoom to Fit
u 2(Edit)
To do this: Select this menu item:
Undo or redo the last operation 1:Undo/Redo
Select all objects on the screen 2:Select All
Deselect all objects on the screen 3:Deselect All
Select an entire polygon (page 14-19) 4:Select Figure
Delete the currently selected object 5:Delete
Clear the screen 6:Clear All
14-3
u 3(Draw)
To do this: Select this menu item:
Plot a point 1:Point
Draw a line segment 2:Line Segment
Draw a straight line 3:Infinite Line
Draw a ray 4:Ray
Draw a vector 5:Vector
Draw a circle 6:Circle
Draw an arc 7:Arc
Draw a semi circle 8:SemiCirc (Diam)
u 3e(Draw Spec)
To do this: Select this menu item:
Draw a triangle 1:Triangle
Draw an isosceles triangle 2:Isosc Triangle
Draw a rectangle 3:Rectangle
Draw a square 4:Square
Draw a polygon 5:Polygon
Draw a regular n-gon 6:Regular n-gon
Draw a function graph 7:Function f(x)
u 4(Construct)
To do this: Select this menu item:
Construct a perpendicular bisector 1:Perp Bisector
Construct a perpendicular 2:Perpendicular
Construct a midpoint 3:Midpoint
Construct an intersection 4:Intersection
Construct an angle bisector 5:Angle Bisector
Construct a parallel 6:Parallel
Construct a tangent 7:Tangent
Attach an angle measurement to a figure 8:Attached Angle
14-4
u 5(Transform)
To do this: Select this menu item:
Reflect an object 1:Reflection
Translate an object by specified values 2:Translation
Translate an object using an existing vector 3:Trans(Sel Vec)
Rotate an object 4:Rotation
Dilate an object 5:Dilation
Rotate an object 180 degrees on a specified point 6:Symmetry
u 6(Animate)
To do this: Select this menu item:
Add animation to two selected objects 1:Add Animation
Replace the current animation assigned to two selected
objects 2:Replace Anima
Turn on trace for a point and trace the movement of the
point while animation is being executed 3:Trace
Display the animation editing screen 4:Edit Animation
Perform an animation sequence once 5:Go (once)
Perform an animation sequence repeatedly 6:Go (repeat)
Add one or more values to the animation table (page 14-62) 7:Add Table
Display the animation table 8:Display Table
u K(Option)
To do this: Select this menu item:
Input text 1:Text
Input an expression 2:Expression
Specify the number format Geometry mode measurements 3:Number Format
Unlock all measurements 4:Clr Constraint
Display all objects 5:Show All
Hide the currently selected object 6:Hide
Perform an arithmetic operation or another type of operation
using the surface area of one or more figure. 7:Area Calc
14-5
u K(Option)e(Properties)
To do this: Select this menu item:
Move the selected object to the front 1:to the front
Move the selected object to the back 2:to the back
Move all text to the front 3:All TEXT
Adjust the lightness of the background image 4:Fade I/O
Save Geometry mode screen contents as an image (g3p
File) 5:Store Picture
k Using the Pointer
You can use the following operations to move the on-screen pointer ( ) around the display
when drawing objects, editing objects, etc.
u To move the pointer
Use the cursor keys to move the pointer around the display. Holding down a cursor key moves
the pointer at high speed.
u To make the pointer jump to a particular location
Pressing a number key (b to j) will cause the pointer to jump to the corresponding section
of the screen as shown below.
hij
efg
bcd
k Using Key Help
Pressing 1(File) – 4:Key Help or the a key will display Key Help, which provides
information the function of each key in the Geometry mode.
Use the c and f keys to navigate between the three Key Help screens.
To exit the Key Help screens, press J.
Note
The key operations shown on the Key Help screens apply to the drawing screen only.
14-6
k Managing Geometry Mode Files
This section explains how to save Geometry mode data to files, and how to manage your
files.
u To create a new file
1. Perform the following operation: 1(File) – 1:New.
• The following dialog box will appear if you have a
drawing on the screen.
2. To clear the current drawing and create a new file, press 1(Yes).
• This will create a new file and display a blank drawing screen.
u To open an existing file
1. Perform the following operation: 1(File) – 2:Open.
• This displays a menu of existing files.
• Pressing 6(STRGMEM) here will display the storage memory file list where you can
open a g3p file. For details, see “Displaying a Geometry Mode Screen Background
Image” (page 14-8).
2. Use c and f to move the highlighting to the file you want to open and then press w.
• The following dialog box will appear if you have a
drawing on the screen.
3. To clear the current drawing, press 1(Yes).
• This will open the file you selected in step 2.
14-7
u To delete a file
1. Perform the following operation: 1(File) – 2:Open.
• This displays a menu of existing files.
2. Use c and f to move the highlighting to the file you want to delete and then press
1(DELETE).
• This causes a confirmation dialog box to appear.
3. Press 1(Yes) to delete the selected file or 6(No) to cancel the delete operation.
4. To exit the file menu, press J.
u To save a file under a different name
1. While the file you want to save is open, perform the following operation: 1(File) – 3:Save
as.
• This will display the file name input screen and
automatically switch the calculator’s keys to Alpha Lock.
2. Input up to 8 characters for the file name and then press w.
• You can use the following characters in a file name.
- Uppercase alphabetic characters A through Z
- Numerals 0 through 9
- Braces ({ })
• After inputting the name you want, press w to save the file and return to its drawing
screen.
14-8
k Displaying a Geometry Mode Screen Background Image
In the Geometry mode, you can open an image file (g3p) and use it as a background image
for a Geometry mode drawing.
• If you open a g3p file, draw something, and then save the result to a file, the g3p file will be
saved along with the Geometry mode data.
• After opening a background image, you adjust its lightness on the display. See “Adjusting the
Lightness of the Background Image” (page 14-37).
• Once you add a background image and save it, you will not be able to change the
background image of the file or remove it.
u To open a g3p file in the Geometry mode
1. Perform the following operation: 1(File) – 2:Open.
2. Press 6(STRGMEM).
• This displays the storage memory file list screen.
3. Use c and f to move the highlighting to the background image file you want to use and
then press w.
• If a drawing is currently on the screen, the “Clear current image?” confirmation dialog box
will appear.
4. To clear the current drawing, press 1(Yes).
• If the file does not contain any Geometry mode data, a dialog box will appear at this
point asking if you want to use the Geometry V-Window initial default value. To open the
file using the Geometry V-Window initial default value, press 1. To cancel the open file
operation, press 6.
• If the file already contains Geometry mode data, the file will open immediately.
14-9
k Saving Current Screen Contents as an Image (g3p File) in the Geometry
Mode
You can save a Geometry mode screen shot as an image (g3p) file. The saved file includes
current V-Window setting information.
u To save current screen contents as an image in picture memory
1. While the screen you want to save is displayed, perform the following operation:
K(Option)e(Properties) – 5:Store Picture w(Pict [1~20]).
2. On the Store In Picture Memory screen that appears, enter a value from 1 to 20 and then
press w.
• Storing a graphic image in a memory area that already contains a graphic image replaces
the existing graphic image with the new one.
u To save current screen contents under a file name
1. While the screen you want to save is displayed, perform the following operation:
K(Option)e(Properties) – 5:Store Picture cw(Save As).
2. Perform the procedure starting from step 2 under “To store a graph screen image under a
file name” (page 5-21).
14-10
k Key Functions
The figure below shows the keys that are used for Geometry mode drawing screen
operations.
Displays menus.
(Page 14-1)
Selects an entire polygon.
(Valid for polygons only.)
(Page 14-19)
Displays Key Help.
(Page 14-5)
Selects, deselects,
executes.
Selects, deselects,
executes.
Zooms in/out.
(Page 14-37)
Undoes/Redoes an
operation.
(Page 14-30)
Moves the pointer.
Selects, deselects,
executes.
Selects an object to
move it. (Page 14-31)
!b Adds an
animation table.
(Page 14-63)
Causes the pointer to
jump to a particular
position. (Page 14-5)
Enters the Scroll
mode.
(Page 14-36)
Zooms the screen
image to fit the
window area.
(Page 14-37)
Displays the
measurement box.
(Page 14-41)
Cancels an operation,
or returns to the
previous menu or
screen.
Deletes the currently
selected object.
(Page 14-32)
Deselects all, cancels
an operation, deletes
all (when pressed
twice).
Displays menus.
(Page 14-1)
Selects an entire polygon.
(Valid for polygons only.)
(Page 14-19)
Displays Key Help.
(Page 14-5)
Selects, deselects,
executes.
Selects, deselects,
executes.
Zooms in/out.
(Page 14-37)
Undoes/Redoes an
operation.
(Page 14-30)
Moves the pointer.
Selects, deselects,
executes.
Selects an object to
move it. (Page 14-31)
!b Adds an
animation table.
(Page 14-63)
Causes the pointer to
jump to a particular
position. (Page 14-5)
Enters the Scroll
mode.
(Page 14-36)
Zooms the screen
image to fit the
window area.
(Page 14-37)
Displays the
measurement box.
(Page 14-41)
Cancels an operation,
or returns to the
previous menu or
screen.
Deletes the currently
selected object.
(Page 14-32)
Deselects all, cancels
an operation, deletes
all (when pressed
twice).
14-11
2. Drawing and Editing Objects
This section explains how to perform the following operations.
• Plot points, draw line segments, polygons, etc. ([F3](Draw) menu)
• Select and deselect objects ([F2](Edit) menu)
• For a drawn object, construct a perpendicular bisector, perpendicular, etc. ([F4](Construct)
menu)
• For a drawn object, perform various transform operations ([F5](Transform) menu)
• Undo an operation, move an object, delete an object and other editing operations ([F2](Edit)
menu)
k Using the Draw Menu
Press 3(Draw) to display the Draw menu. You can use the Draw menu to plot points, and
draw line segments, triangles, polygons, and other objects.
u To plot a point
1. Perform the following operation: 3(Draw) – 1:Point.
2. Move the pointer to the location on the screen where you want to plot a point and then press
w.
• This will plot a point at the pointer location.
• The icon will remain on the display, which means you repeat step 2 to plot more points,
if you want.
3. After you are finished plotting all the points you want, press o or J to deselect the
Point tool.
Note
Some drawing tools remain after you draw something, like the Point tool. To deselect such a
tool, press o or J.
14-12
u To add a labeled point to an existing line
Note
You can use the following procedure to add a labeled point to an existing line, to a side of a
polygon, to the periphery of a circle, etc.
1. Perform the following operation: 3(Draw) – 1:Point.
2. Move the pointer on the screen towards the line where you want to add the labeled point.
• This selects the line, which is indicated by “”.
→
3. Press w.
• This will add a point on the line at the pointer location.
u To draw a line segment
1. Perform the following operation: 3(Draw) – 2:Line Segment.
2. Move the pointer to the location on the display from where you want to draw the line
segment and then press w.
3. Move the pointer to the location on the display to where you want to draw the line segment
and then press w.
• This will draw a line segment between the two points.
Note
In steps 2 and 3 of the above procedure, you can move the pointer to an existing point on the
screen and press w. This will make the existing point one of the ends of the line segment.
14-13
u To draw an infinite line
1. Perform the following operation: 3(Draw) – 3:Infinite Line.
2. Move the pointer to any location on the display and then press w.
3. Move the pointer to another location on the display and then press w.
• This will draw a line that passes between the two
points.
u To draw a ray
1. Perform the following operation: 3(Draw) – 4:Ray.
2. Move the pointer to any location on the display and then press w.
3. Move the pointer to another location on the display and then press w.
• This will draw a ray that starts from the first point you
selected and that passes through the second point.
u To draw a vector
1. Perform the following operation: 3(Draw) – 5:Vector.
2. Move the pointer to the location on the display from where you want to draw the vector and
then press w.
3. Move the pointer to the location on the display to where you want to draw the vector and
then press w.
• This draws the vector.
14-14
u To draw a circle
1. Perform the following operation: 3(Draw) – 6:Circle.
2. Move the pointer to the location on the display where you want the center point of the circle
to be and then press w.
3. Move the pointer to the location on the display where you want the circumference of the
circle to be and then press w.
• This draws a circle. The distance between the two points you specify is the radius of the
circle.
Note
In steps 2 and 3 of the above procedure, you can move the pointer to an existing point on
the screen and press w. This will make the existing point either the center point or the
circumference point.
u To draw an arc
1. Perform the following operation: 3(Draw) – 7:Arc.
2. Move the pointer to the location on the display where you want the center point of the arc to
be and then press w.
3. Move the pointer to the location on the display where you want the start point of the arc to
be and then press w.
4. Move the pointer to the location where you want the end point of the arc to be.
.....
5. Move the pointer and the line segment to the location on the display where you want the
end point of the arc to be and then press w.
• An arc will be drawn from the start point to the end
point, in a counterclockwise direction.
14-15
u To draw a semi circle
1. Perform the following operation: 3(Draw) – 8:SemiCirc (Diam).
2. Move the pointer to the point you want to specify as one end of the semi circle diameter and
then press w.
3. Move the pointer to the point you want to specify as the
other end of the semi circle diameter.
• In accordance with the pointer movement, a circle whose diameter passes through the first
point and the current point will appear on the display. Pressing w in the following step
will draw a semi circle with a diameter that forms an arc that goes counterclockwise from
the first point you specified to the second point.
4. Press w to draw the semi circle.
u To draw a triangle
1. Perform the following operation: 3e(Draw Spec) – 1:Triangle.
2. Move the pointer to any location on the display and then press w.
3. Move the pointer to another location.
• This causes a selection boundary to appear, indicating the size of the triangle that will be
drawn.
14-16
4. Press w.
• This draws a triangle.
→
• If the location of the pointer when you press w is very close to the point you specified in
step 2, the triangle that is drawn will be the maximum size that fits in the screen.
Note
The same type of two-point selection boundary in the above procedure is also used when
drawing an isosceles triangle, rectangle, square, or regular n-gon.
In each case, the resulting object will be the maximum size that fits in the screen if the second
point specified is too close to or at the same location of the first point.
u To draw an isosceles triangle
1. Perform the following operation: 3e(Draw Spec) – 2:Isosc Triangle.
2. Perform steps 2 through 4 under “To draw a triangle” (page 14-15).
• This draws an isosceles triangle.
u To draw a rectangle or a square
1. Perform either of the following operations: 3e(Draw Spec) – 3:Rectangle or
3e(Draw Spec) – 4:Square.
2. Move the pointer to any location on the display and then press w.
3. Move the pointer to another location.
• This causes a selection boundary to appear, indicating the size of the rectangle (or
square) that will be drawn.
14-17
4. Press w.
• This draws a rectangle or square.
• If the location of the pointer when you press w is very close to the point you specified in
step 2, the object that is drawn will be the maximum size that fits in the screen.
Note
In the case of a square, each side will be the length of the shorter side of the rectangle you
specify with the selection boundary in step 3.
u To draw a polygon
1. Perform the following operation: 3e(Draw Spec) – 5:Polygon.
2. Move the pointer to the location on the display where you want a vertex of the polygon to be
and then press w.
• Repeat this step as many times as required to specify the other vertices of the polygon.
3. To complete the polygon, move the pointer to the location of the first vertex and then press
w.
→
Note
If you press J in place of step 3, the figure will be finalized as-is, resulting in an unclosed
non-polygon.
14-18
u To draw a regular n-gon
1. Perform the following operation: 3e(Draw Spec) – 6:Regular n-gon.
• This displays a dialog box prompting you to specify the number of sides.
2. Input a value from 3 to 12 and then press w.
3. Perform steps 2 through 4 under “To draw a triangle” (page 14-15).
• This will draw a regular n-gon using the number of sides you specified in step 2.
u To draw a function
1. Perform the following operation: 3e(Draw Spec) – 7:Function f(x).
• This causes the Function dialog box to appear.
2. Input the function.
3. Press w to draw it.
→
Note
• The only graph type that can be drawn is Y=f(x).
• The angle unit of the graph that is drawn is always Rad, regardless of the Angle setting on
the Setup screen.
14-19
k Selecting and Deselecting Objects
Before you can edit (move or delete) an object or create a figure using an object, you first
need to select part of it or all of it. This section explains how to select and deselect objects.
u To select a particular object
1. If any tool icon is in the upper right corner of the screen, press J or o to deselect the
tool.
2. Move the pointer close to the object you want to select.
• This will cause one or more marks to appear on the object. At this time the object will
begin to flash. Note that the object will not flash if it is a point and a mark is displayed
on the point.
3. Press w.
• This will cause the to change to k and will change the outline of the object to become a
thick line, which indicates that the object is selected.
→
• Now you can repeat steps 2 and 3 to select other objects, if you want.
u To select an entire polygon
1. If any tool icon is in the upper right corner of the screen, press J or o to deselect the
tool.
2. Move the pointer close to the object you want to select.
• This will cause marks to appear on some part
(vertex, side, etc.) of the object.
14-20
3. Press x or perform the following operation: 2(Edit) – 4:Select Figure.
• This selects the entire object.
u To deselect a particular object
1. If any tool icon is in the upper right corner of the screen, press J or o to deselect the
tool.
2. Move the pointer close to the object you want to deselect.
• This will cause the k marks to become highlighted. At this time the object will begin to
flash. Note that the object will not flash if it is a point and a mark is displayed on the
point.
→
3. Press w.
• This will deselect the object, which causes the k mark(s) to disappear.
u To select all objects on the screen
Perform the following operation: 2(Edit) – 2:Select All.
u To deselect all objects on the screen
Press o or perform the following operation: 2(Edit) – 3:Deselect All.
14-21
k Specifying the Color and Line Type of a Displayed Object
You can use the procedure below to specify the color and line type for the outline of a
displayed figure, the fill color inside a figure, or the color of text, labels, and other non-figure
objects.
u To specify the color and line type of all the displayed objects
1. Perform the following operation: 2(Edit) – 2:Select All.
2. Press !f(FORMAT) to display the dialog box shown below.
• The dialog box will show only supported settings, which depend on the composition of the
selected object.
3. Configure the above dialog box with the following settings.
To specify this: Perform this operation:
Specify the text color Press b(Char Color) and then use keys b through i
to specify the desired color.
Specify the line type Press c(Line Style) and then press one of the following
keys: b(Norm), c(Thick), f(Thin).
Specify the line color Press d(Line Color) and then use keys b through i
to specify the desired color.
Specify the figure fill color Press e(Area Color) and then use keys b through i
to specify the desired color. To specify no fill color, press
A(Clear).
Specify the lightness of the
figure fill color
Press f(Paint Style) and then press b(Normal) or
c(Lighter).
14-22
4. To apply the settings you configure, return to the dialog box in step 2 of this procedure and
then press J.
→
u To specifying the color and line type of a particular object
1. Use the procedure under “Selecting and Deselecting Objects” (page 14-19) to select the
object whose color and/or line type you want to specify.
2. Press !f(FORMAT).
• This displays a dialog box that shows supported settings, which depend on the
composition of the selected object.
3. Perform the procedure starting from step 3 under “To specify the color and line type of all
the displayed objects” (page 14-21).
k Using the Construct Menu
Press 4(Construct) to display the Construct menu. You can use the Construct menu to
construct various types of geometric objects, such as a perpendicular bisector, parallel, angle
bisector, etc.
u To construct a perpendicular bisector
1. Draw a line segment and select it.
2. Perform the following operation: 4(Construct) – 1:Perp Bisector.
• This will draw the perpendicular bisector of the line segment you selected.
→
Note
You can perform a perpendicular bisector construct operation while a single line segment, one
side of a polygon, or two points are selected on the screen.
14-23
u To construct a perpendicular
1. Draw a line segment, plot a point, and select the line and point.
2. Perform the following operation: 4(Construct) – 2:Perpendicular.
• This will draw a perpendicular to the selected line segment and passes through the
selected point.
→
Note
You can perform a perpendicular construct operation while a single line segment and single
point, a single line and single point, a single ray and a single point, a single vector and a single
point, or one side of a polygon and a single point are selected on the screen.
u To construct a midpoint
1. Draw a line segment and select it.
2. Perform the following operation: 4(Construct) – 3:Midpoint.
• This will plot the midpoint of the line segment you selected.
→
Note
You can perform a midpoint construct operation while a single line segment, one side of a
polygon, or two points are selected on the screen.
14-24
u To construct the point of intersection of two lines
1. Draw to intersecting line segments and select them.
2. Perform the following operation: 4(Construct) – 4:Intersection.
• This plots the point where the two line segments intersect.
→
Note
You can construct the point of intersection of two lines while two of any of the following objects
(two of the same object or two different objects) are selected on the screen: line segment, line,
rays, vector, side of a polygon, circle, or arc.
u To construct an angle bisector
1. Draw a triangle and select two of its sides.
2. Perform the following operation: 4(Construct) – 5:Angle Bisector.
• This draws the bisector of the angle formed by the two sides of the triangle that you
selected.
→
Note
• You can perform an angle bisector construct operation while two of any of the following
objects (two of the same object or two different objects) are selected on the screen: line
segment, line, ray, vector, or one side of a polygon.
• If the two objects you select are intersecting, the angle bisector construct operation will
construct two angle bisectors.
14-25
u To construct a parallel
1. Draw a line segment, plot a point, and select the line and point.
2. Perform the following operation: 4(Construct) – 6:Parallel.
• This will draw an infinite line that is parallel to the selected line segment and passes
through the selected point. Marks ( ) appear on both the line segment and the infinite line
to indicate they are parallel.
→
Note
You can perform a parallel construct operation while any of the following combination objects
is selected.
• A single line segment and a single point, a single line and a single point, a single ray and a
single point, a single vector and a single point
• One side of a polygon and a single point
u To construct a tangent
1. Draw a circle.
2. Perform the following operation: 4(Construct) – 7:Tangent.
• This will cause the message “Select Curve” to appear.
3. Move the pointer close to the location on the circle where you want to construct the tangent.
• Move the pointer towards the circle until marks appear on it.
4. Press w.
• This will draw a line that is tangent to the circle at the location you selected with the
pointer.
→
Note
You can perform the tangent construct operation while a circle, semi circle, arc, or function
graph is selected.
14-26
u To attach an angle measurement to a figure
1. Draw a triangle and select two of its sides.
2. Perform the following operation: 4(Construct) – 8:Attached Angle.
• This attaches the angle measurement to the figure.
→
• While the “Select Display Position” message is displayed, you can use the cursor keys to
specify which angle measurement is displayed for the two selected sides.
→ → →
3. To view the angle measurement, press w.
k Using the Transform Menu
Press 5(Transform) to display the Transform menu. You can use the Transform menu to
perform various transform operations, such as object reflection, object rotation, etc.
u To reflect an object
1. Draw the object you want to reflect. Here, we will use a triangle.
2. Draw a line segment that represents the axis of the reflection.
3. Perform the following operation: 5(Transform) – 1:Reflection.
• This will cause the message “Select Axis” to appear.
4. Move the pointer close to the line segment that you want to use as the axis of the reflection.
• Move the pointer towards the line segment until marks appears on it.
14-27
5. Press w.
• This reflects the object using the line segment as the axis.
→ →
Note
You can specify a line segment, line, ray, one side of a polygon, or the x-axis or y-axis as the
axis of reflection.
u To translate an object by specified values
1. Draw the object you want to translate. Here, we will use a triangle.
2. Perform the following operation: 5(Transform) – 2:Translation.
• This displays the Translation screen.
3. Input vector format values to specify the distance of parallel translation.
• The value in line 1 is the translation distance along the X-axis, while the value in line 2 is
the distance along the Y-axis.
4. After the values are the way you want, press w.
• This performs parallel translation of the object by the distance specified by the values you
input in step 3.
→ →
Note
If you select only part of an object before performing step 2 of the above procedure, only the
selected part will be translated.
u To translate an object using an existing vector
1. Draw the object you want to translate. Here, we will use a triangle. Next, draw the vector
you want to use for parallel translation.
2. Perform the following operation: 5(Transform) – 3:Trans(Sel Vec).
• This will cause the message “Select Vector” to appear.
3. Move the pointer close to the vector you want to use for the parallel translation.
• Move the pointer towards the vector until marks appears on it.
14-28
4. Press w.
• This will perform parallel translation of the original object in the direction of the vector you
selected.
→ →
Note
If you select only part of an object before performing step 2 of the above procedure, only the
selected part will be translated.
u To rotate an object
1. Draw the object you want to rotate. Here, we will use a triangle.
2. Perform the following operation: 5(Transform) – 4:Rotation.
• This will cause the message “Sel Rotation Center” to appear.
3. Move the pointer to the location you want to specify as the center of rotation.
4. Press w.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the angle of rotation.
5. Input the angle of rotation (counterclockwise) in degrees and then press w.
• This will draw the original object, rotated the specified amount.
→ →
Note
If you select only part of an object before performing step 2 of the above procedure, only the
selected part will be rotated.
u To dilate an object
1. Draw the object you want to dilate. Here, we will use a triangle.
2. Perform the following operation: 5(Transform) – 5:Dilation.
• This will cause the message “Sel Dilation Center” to appear.
• See the figure in the notes below for details about meanings of the terms used during the
dilation operation.
3. Move the pointer to the location you want to specify as the center of dilation.
4. Press w.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the dilation scale.
14-29
5. Input a scale value in the range of 0.1 < | x | < 10 and then press w.
• This will draw a resized version of the original object.
→ →
Note
• If you select only part of an object before performing step 2 of the above procedure, only the
selected part will be dilated.
• The following figure illustrates the meanings of the terms used in the above procedure.
Center of
Dilation
Scale: –1 Scale: 2
Original
Object
Scale: 0.5
u To rotate a figure 180 degrees on a specified point
1. Draw the figure you want to rotate and select it. Here, we will use a triangle.
2. Perform the following operation: 5(Transform) – 6:Symmetry.
• This will cause the message “Select Center Point” to appear.
3. Move the pointer to the point you want to use as the center point of the rotation and then
press w.
• This will draw the figure rotated 180 degrees on the selected point. In addition, a point is
plotted at the center point.
→
14-30
k Undoing and Redoing an Operation
The Undo command lets you undo the last operation you performed, while Redo lets you
restore an operation you have undone.
u To undo the last operation you performed
Immediately after performing the operation you want to undo, press * or perform the
following operation: 2(Edit) – 1:Undo/Redo.
Important!
Note that the following operations cannot be undone.
• Clear all objects operation: 2(Edit) – 6:Clear All (page 14-32).
• View Window setting configuration (page 14-35)
• Zoom operation (page 14-36)
• Scroll operation (page 14-36)
• Pan operation (page 14-35)
• Setup change (page 14-33)
u To redo an operation
Immediately after undoing the operation, press * or perform the following operation:
2(Edit) – 1:Undo/Redo.
k Moving and Deleting an Object
Before you can move or delete an object, you first need to select it. For details, see “Selecting
and Deselecting Objects” (page 14-19).
u To move an object
Note
Sometimes you may find that an object will not move the way you want it to. If this happens,
try locking the part(s) of the object that you do not want to move (page 14-47), or temporarily
unlock all objects (Clr Constraint, page 14-48).
1. Select the object you want to move.
• If you want to move only one of the vertices of a triangle for example, select the vertex. To
move only one side of the triangle, select the side.
One vertex selected One side selected Three sides selected
14-31
2. Press v.
• This causes the icon to appear in the upper right corner of the screen and the pointer
to change from to . Also, a rectangle will enclose the object that you selected in step
1.
One vertex selected One side selected Three sides selected
3. Use the cursor keys to move the object in the direction you want.
• The rectangle will move in corresponding direction.
One vertex selected One side selected Three sides selected
4. To move the object to the current location of the rectangle, press w.
One vertex selected One side selected Three sides selected
Note
If you press v when nothing is selected on the screen, the pointer will change to a ,
which you can use to pan (shift) the entire screen.
→ →
14-32
u To delete an object
1. Select the object you want to delete.
• If you want to delete only one of the vertices of a triangle for example, select the vertex.
To delete only one side of the triangle, select the side.
2. Press D or perform the following operation: 2(Edit) – 5:Delete.
• This deletes the selected object.
u To delete all objects on the screen
1. Perform the following operation: 2(Edit) – 6:Clear All.
• This causes a confirmation dialog box to appear.
Important!
Pressing 1(Yes) in the following step will delete all the objects currently on the screen.
This operation cannot be undone.
2. Press 1(Yes) to delete all the objects on the screen or 6(No) to cancel the delete
operation.
Note
You can also delete all objects by pressing o twice while nothing is selected on the screen.
k Hiding and Showing Objects
Use the following operations to hide specific objects and to show all currently hidden objects.
u To hide an object
1. Select the object you want to hide.
2. Perform the following operation: K(Option) – 6:Hide.
• This hides the selected objects.
u To show all hidden objects
Perform the following operation: K(Option) – 5:Show All. This shows all currently hidden
objects.
k Changing the Display Priority of Objects
Basically, objects you draw in the Geometry mode are stacked in the order they are drawn
(newest drawing on top). You can use the operations in this section to move drawn object
upwards or downwards in the stack. You also can move all text to the front, if you want.
• To move a particular object to the front: K(Option)e(Properties) – 1:to the front.
• To move a particular object to the back: K(Option)e(Properties) – 2:to the back.
• To move all text to the front: K(Option)e(Properties) – 3:All TEXT.
14-33
3. Controlling the Appearance of the Geometry
Window
This section provides information about how to control the appearance of the screen by
scrolling or zooming, and by showing or hiding axes and the grid.
Important!
Settings you configure on the Geometry mode Setup screen are applied in the Geometry
mode only. Even if another mode has settings of the same name, the Geometry mode
settings will not affect them. Conversely, changing setting with the same name in another
mode will not affect the Geometry mode settings.
k Displaying the Axes and Grid
You can display axes and grid points (or grid lines) on the Geometry mode screen. You also
can specify the pitch (spacing) of the grid points and lines.
→
Axes: On, Grid: On Axes: Scale, Grid: Line
u To specify the axis and grid settings
1. Press !m(SET UP) to display the Setup screen.
2. Use f and c to move the highlighting to “Grid” and then use the following operations to
configure the settings you want.
To select this setting: Press this key:
Show grid points 1(On)
Hide the grid 2(Off)
Show grid lines 3(Line)
• If you select Off to hide the grid, you can skip steps 3 and 4.
3. Use f and c to move the highlighting to “Grid Space” and then press 1(Space).
4. On the dialog box that appears, enter a value to specify the pitch of the grid and then press
w.
• You can specify a value from 0.01 to 1000, in increments of 0.01.
14-34
5. Use f and c to move the highlighting to “Axes” and then use the following operations to
configure the settings you want.
To select this setting: Press this key:
Show on-screen axes 1(On)
Hide on-screen axes 2(Off)
Show on-screen axes and scale values 3(Scale)
6. After the setting is the way you want, press J.
k Specifying Angle and Length Display Units
You can use the procedure in this section to show or hide the units of angle and length values.
You also can specify which units should be used for angle and length values.
Angle unit: Deg, Rad
Length: mm, cm, m, km, inch, feet, yard, mile
→
Angle: Rad, Angle Unit: On Length Unit: On (mm)
u To specify angle and length display units
1. Press !m(SET UP) to display the Setup screen.
2. Perform the following operations to configure the settings you want.
To select this setting: Perform this operation:
Degrees for display and
calculation angle unit
Highlight “Angle” and then press 1(Deg).
Radians for display and
calculation angle unit
Highlight “Angle” and then press 2(Rad).
Show unit for angle values Highlight “Angle Unit” and then press 1(On).
Hide unit for angle values Highlight “Angle Unit” and then press 2(Off).
Show unit for length values 1. Highlight “Length Unit” and then press 1(On).
2. When the dialog box appears, use keys b
through i to specify the length unit.
Hide unit for length values Highlight “Length Unit” and then press 2(Off).
3. After the setting is the way you want, press J.
14-35
k Configuring View Window Settings
You can configure View Window settings to specify the coordinates of the screen’s left edge
(Xmin) and right edges (Xmax). The length of the y-axis is configured automatically using a
ratio of 1:2 (y-axis:x-axis), but you can specify what part of the y-axis is in the middle of the
screen (Ymid).
Ymid
Xmin Xmax
u To configure View Window settings
1. Perform the following operation to display the View
Window screen: !3(V-WIN).
2. Input values for Xmin, Xmax, and Ymid.
• If you want to return these settings to their initial defaults, press 1(INITIAL).
3. After all the settings are the way you want, press J.
k Using Pan and Scroll to Shift the Display Image
There are two methods available for shifting the contents of the screen. In addition to scrolling,
you can also use pan, which lets you grab a specific point on the screen and shift it to the
position you want.
u To pan the screen
1. Perform the following operation: 1e(View) – 2:Pan.
• This enters the Pan mode, which is indicated by the icon in the upper right corner of
the screen.
2. Move the pointer to the location on the screen you want to grab and then press w.
• This causes the pointer to change from to .
3. Use the cursor keys to shift the screen in the direction you want.
14-36
4. To exit the Pan mode, press J.
→
Note
In the Pan mode, each press of w toggles the shape of the pointer between and . While
the pointer is displayed, you can use the cursor keys to move it to another location on the
screen. Pressing the cursor keys while the pointer is displayed will shift (pan) the screen
contents.
u To scroll the screen
1. Press . or perform the following operation: 1e(View) – 3:Scroll.
• This enters the Scroll mode, which is indicated by the icon in the upper right corner of
the screen. The pointer disappears from the screen at this time.
2. Use the cursor keys to scroll the screen in the direction you want.
3. To exit the Scroll mode, press J.
k Zooming
The Geometry mode provides you with a selection of zoom commands that you can use to
enlarge or reduce an entire screen image or a specific area of an object.
u To zoom using the zoom box
1. Perform the following operation: 1e(View) – 1:Zoom Box.
• This causes the icon to appear in the upper right corner of the screen.
2. Move the pointer to the location on the display on one edge of the area you want to select
as the zoom box area and then press w.
3. Move the pointer in the direction of the opposite edges of the zoom box area.
• As you do, the calculator will display a selection boundary that will expand as you move
the pointer.
4. After selecting the zoom box area you want, press w.
• The area within the zoom box area expands to fill the entire screen.
→
14-37
u To zoom in and out
To double the size of the displayed image, press + or perform the following operation:
1e(View) – 4:Zoom In.
To halve the size of the displayed image, press - or perform the following operation:
1e(View) – 5:Zoom Out.
u To zoom the screen image to fit the window area
Press - or perform the following operation: 1e(View) – 6:Zoom to Fit.
• This will enlarge or reduce the currently display image so it fills the screen.
→
Note
The above operation does not apply in the case of a graph drawn using 3e(Draw Spec)
7: Function f(x).
k Adjusting the Lightness of the Background Image
You can adjust the lightness of the background image while a g3p file is open in the Geometry
mode. To adjust image lightness, press K(Option)e(Properties) 4:Fade I/O and then
perform the procedure from step 2 under “To adjust the lightness (Fade I/O) of the background
image” (page 5-12).
4. Using Text and Labels in a Screen Image
You can use the procedures in this section to insert text into a screen image. You can also edit
the labels that the calculator inserts automatically for objects, and add labels to objects.
k Inserting Text into Screen Images
You can use the following procedure to insert text into a screen image and to edit existing text.
u To insert text into a screen image
1. Move the pointer to the location on the screen where you want to insert the text.
2. Perform the following operation: K(Option) – 1:Text.
• This will display a text input dialog box and automatically switch the calculator’s keys to
Alpha Lock.
14-38
3. Input up to 31 characters of text and then press w.
• The text you input is inserted into the screen image at the location of the pointer.
→
4. Now you can move the text to another location on the screen, if you want.
• For details, see “To move an object” (page 14-30).
→
u To edit screen text
1. Select the text you want to edit.
2. Press J.
• This displays the measurement box at the bottom of the screen.
3. Press w.
• This displays the text input dialog box.
4. Edit the text and then press w.
• This causes the newly edited text to appear on the screen.
→
5. To close the measurement box, press J twice.
14-39
k Adding or Modifying a Label
Label operations are explained in this section using a triangle. In the first example we modify
an existing label, while in the second example we add a label to one side of the triangle.
u To modify an existing label
1. On the triangle, select the vertex whose label you want to
change. In this example we will select point A.
2. Press J.
• This displays the measurement box at the bottom of the
screen.
3. Press d to highlight the up arrow button on the left side of the measurement box and then
press w.
• This displays an icon palette.
4. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the icon on the icon palette and then
press w.
5. Press e to move the highlighting back to the measurement box and then press w.
• This will display a label editing dialog box and
automatically switch the calculator’s keys to Alpha Lock.
14-40
6. Input up to 14 characters for the label text and then press w.
• This will modify the label.
→
7. To close the measurement box, press J twice.
u To add a new label
1. Select the side of the triangle to which you want to add
the label.
2. Press J to display the measurement box.
3. Press d to highlight the up arrow button on the left side of the measurement box and then
press w.
• This displays an icon palette.
4. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the icon on the icon palette and then
press w.
5. Press e to move the highlighting back to the measurement box and then press w.
• This will display the label edit dialog box.
6. Input up to 14 characters for the new label text and then press w.
• This will add the label.
→
7. To close the measurement box, press J twice.
14-41
5. Using the Measurement Box
Pressing J displays a measurement box at the bottom of the screen as shown below.
Measurement Box
You can use the measurement box to perform the following operations.
View the measurements of an object
Displaying the measurement box and selecting an object displays combinations of the
following measurements, depending on the type of object you select: coordinates, distance/
length, slope, equation, vector, radius, circumference, perimeter, area, angle, supplementary
angle, tangency, congruence, incidence, or point on curve.
Specify the measurement of part of an object
After you display the measurement box, you can select part of an object and then change
numeric values for the applicable measurement. You can specify the coordinates of a point,
the length of a line segment (distance between endpoints), the angle formed by two lines, etc.
Lock the measurement of part of an object
After you display the measurement box, you can select part of an object and then lock the
applicable measurement. You can lock the coordinates of a point, the length of a line segment,
the angle formed by two lines, etc.
k Viewing the Measurements of an Object
The type of information that appears in the measurement box depends on the object that is
currently selected on the display. If a line segment is selected, for example, the measurement
box shows the distance, slope, or the equation for that line. You can specify the type of
information you want to view by highlighting the up arrow button to the left of the measurement
box, pressing the w (or f) key, and then using the cursor keys to highlight the appropriate
icon on the icon palette that appears.
14-42
The following table describes the information that appears when you highlight each icon, and
explains when each icon is available for selection.
Icon Icon Name This icon appears
when this is selected:
Highlighting this icon
displays: Lockable
Coordinates A single point Coordinates of the point Yes
Distance/
length
Two points on one object
or two different objects,
or a single line segment
or a vector
Distance between two
points, length of a line
segment or vector
Yes
Slope Single line, ray, line
segment, or vector
Slope of the line, ray,
line segment or vector Yes
Equation
Any single line or line
segment, ray, circle,
semi circle, arc or
function graph
Function of the object
(using rectangular
coordinates)
No
Expression A single expression
(“EXPR=” object) Calculation formula No
Vector A single vector Vector components Yes
Radius A single circle, semi
circle or arc
Radius of circle, semi
circle or arc Yes
Circumference A single circle, semi
circle or arc
Length of the
circumference No*3
Perimeter A single polygon Sum of the lengths of the
sides No
Area
Any three points, a
single circle, semi circle,
arc, or polygon
Area No*3
Angle*1Two lines, line segments,
rays, or vectors*2 in any
combination
Angle and its
supplement formed by
the two objects
Yes
Supplementary
Angle*1
Tangency
Two circles or arcs, line
and circle, or a line and
arc
Whether the two items
are tangent Yes
*1 The angle and supplementary angle is always displayed as degrees.
*2 When two vectors are selected, the angle that is no the angle formed mathematically by the
two vectors. It merely indicates the simple angle that would be formed if the vectors were
two lines.
*3 The circle itself can be locked.
14-43
Icon Icon Name This icon appears
when this is selected:
Highlighting this icon
displays: Lockable
Congruence Two line segments
Whether the line
segments are the same
length
Yes
Incidence Point and a line, arc,
circle or a vector
Whether the point is on
the line/curve Yes
Rotation angle
Two points created by
the 5 – 4:Rotation
command
Angle of rotation No
Scale of
dilation
Two points created by
the 5 – 5:Dilation
command
Scale of dilation No
Label/Text
A point that has a label
or an object that can be
named
Label text No
You can use the measurement box to determine certain measurements.
The first example below shows how to view the measurements of a line segment. In the
second example, three points are selected on the screen and the measurement box shows the
area of the triangle formed by them.
u To view the measurements of a line segment
1. Draw a line segment and select it.
2. Press J to display the measurement box.
• This displays the length of the line segment.
3. Press d to highlight the up arrow button on the left side of the measurement box and then
press w.
• This displays an icon palette.
14-44
4. Select the icons on the icon palette to display other measurements.
• In the case of the line segment, for example, you can view its length, slope, and equation.
Slope Equation
5. To close the measurement box, press J twice.
u To display the area of a rectangular area
You can use the measurement box to display the area of a triangle formed by any three points
you select on the display.
Example: To use the rectangle ABCD to determine the areas of the triangles
formed by points A, D, and B, and points A, D, and C
1. Draw the rectangle.
2. Select points A, D, and B.
3. Press J.
• This causes the area of the triangle ADB to appear in
the measurement box.
4. To make the drawing screen active, press J.
• This causes the measurement box to become
unhighlighted and the pointer to reappear on the
drawing screen.
5. Press o to deselect the current points and then select points A, D, and C.
• This causes the area of the triangle ADC to appear in
the measurement box. The above procedure shows that
the areas of the two triangles are the same.
6. To close the measurement box, press J.
14-45
Note
A value that shows the area of an object whose lines intersect is indicated by double asterisks
(``) to the left of the value. This indicates that the value may not indicate the correct area.
k Specifying a Measurement of an Object
In the following examples, we specify the angle of a triangle and the length of one side of a
triangle.
u To specify the angle of a triangle
1. Draw a triangle.
2. Select side AC and then select side BC.
3. Press J to display the measurement box.
• This displays the size of ∠ACB (in degrees) in the
measurement box.
4. Input the value you want to specify for ∠ACB (in degrees) into the measurement box and
then press w.
• In this example we input 90, which makes ∠ACB 90 degrees.
→
5. To close the measurement box, press J twice.
14-46
Note
• Performing step 5 in the above procedure not only changes the measurement value, it
also locks the measurement. For details about locking and unlocking measurements, see
“Locking or Unlocking a Measurement of an Object” (page 14-47).
• Specifying a value can change an object in a way that is unexpected. If this happens, try
locking part(s) of the object (page 14-47) or temporarily unlock all objects (Clr Constraint,
page 14-48).
u To specify the length of one side of a triangle
Note
• Specifying any one of the following measurements for the first time in the file you are editing
(or immediately after an all clear operation: 2(Edit) – 6:Clear All) will cause the resulting
object to be resized so it fits within the display area.
- Length of one side of a triangle
- Length of a line segment or vector
- Length of one side of a rectangle, square, polygon, or regular n-gon
- Circumference of a circle or length of an arc
View Window settings will be reconfigured automatically so the size of the object on the
display may not appear to change very much.
The following example shows what happens when the length of the base of a triangle drawn
with default View Window settings (with a screen width of 10.7) is changed to 120.
→
View Window settings are reconfigured in order to ensure that specifying a measurement of
an object does not make it too bit to fit on the screen or too small to see. Note that all other
objects currently on the screen also will be resized by the same amount at the object whose
measurement you are specifying.
• Once you specify one measurement of an object, it will not be resized further if you specify
another of its measurements.
14-47
k Locking or Unlocking a Measurement of an Object
By “locking a measurement” we mean that the corresponding object cannot be moved. For
example, if we lock a point to a circle and move the circle, the point will also move.
u To lock or unlock a measurement
The icon to the right of the measurement box indicates whether a measurement is locked or
unlocked.
Measurement is unlocked.
Measurement is locked.
u To lock a particular measurement
You can lock a particular measurement by performing any one of the following operations.
• Perform the procedure under “Specifying a Measurement of an Object” (page 14-45) to
specify the measurement. This will cause the specified measurement to become locked
automatically.
→
• If the icon to the right of the measurement box is , move the highlighting to the icon and
press w.
→
• Move the highlighting to the up arrow button to the right of the icon and press w. On the
menu that appears, select [Lock] and then press w.
→
14-48
Note
• Some measurements cannot be locked. For details, see the “Lockable” column in the table
under “Viewing the Measurements of an Object” (page 14-41).
u To unlock a particular measurement
You can unlock a particular measurement by performing any one of the following operations.
• If the icon to the right of the measurement box is , move the highlighting to the icon and
press w.
• Move the highlighting to the up arrow button to the right of the icon and press w.
On the menu that appears, select [Unlock] and then press w.
u To unlock all objects on the screen
Perform the following operation: K(Option) – 4:Clr Constraint.
This unlocks all locked settings.
Note
The above operation unlocks both measurements you locked manually, as well as objects that
are locked automatically whenever they are drawn. For example, the above operation unlocks
all of the following lock conditions.
• The lock that is applied when you draw a rectangle that keeps its opposing sides equal
(opposing side congruence lock)
• The lock that is applied when you draw an isosceles triangle (ABC) that keeps side AB and
side BC equal (side AB and side BC congruence lock)
• The lock that is applied when you draw an infinite line that keeps the line passing through
two points (point A and point B) (infinite line and point A, B incidence lock)
• The relationship between the line segment and perpendicular bisector that is formed when
you select a line segment and perform the following operation: 4(Construct) – 1:Perp
Bisector.
• The (locked) similarities of objects when you select the objects and perform the following
operation: 5(Transform) – 5:Dilation.
14-49
k Pasting Measurements into a Screen Image
You can use the procedures in this section to paste object measurements into the image on
the screen. The measurements change dynamically as you manipulate the object.
The following types of measurements can be pasted into a screen image: coordinates,
distance/length, slope, equation, vector components, radius, circumference, perimeter, area,
angle, supplementary angle.
u To paste a measurement into a screen image
Example: To paste an internal angle measurement into a screen image
1. Draw a triangle and select two of its sides.
2. Press J to display the measurement box.
3. Press e to highlight the up arrow button on the right side of the measurement box and
then press w.
• This will display a menu.
4. Use f to move the highlighting to [Paste] and then press w.
• This will cause the measurement in the measurement box to be pasted into the screen
image. At this time, the pasted measurement text is selected.
→
14-50
5. Move the text to another location on the screen, if you want.
• Press v and then use the cursor keys to move the pasted measurement around the
screen. For details, see “To move an object” (page 14-30).
→
Note
You can also paste the measurement that is currently in the measurement box into the screen
image by pressing !j(PASTE) while the measurement box is highlighted in step 2 of the
above procedure.
k Editing a Measurement Type Tag
When you paste a measurement into a screen image using the “To paste a measurement
into a screen image” procedure on page 14-49, a measurement type tag (text or a symbol) is
appended in front of the measurement value to indicate the measurement type.
Examples: Length
Angle (Internal)
Angle (Supplementary)
You can edit or delete the measurement type tag as required.
u To edit a measurement type tag
1. Select the measurement whose type tag you want to edit and then press J.
• This will display the measurement box and display the
type tag of the selected measurement inside it.
2. Press w.
• This will display the label edit dialog box.
14-51
3. Input up to 14 characters for the label type tag.
• To delete the label type tag, press o.
4. Press w.
• This changes the measurement, which is highlighted on
the display.
5. To close the measurement box, press J twice.
k Displaying the Result of a Calculation that Uses On-screen
Measurement Values
You can use the procedure in this section to perform calculations using the angle value, line
length, and other measurement values attached to an object, and display the result on the
screen.
u To display the result of a calculation that uses on-screen measurement
values
Example: With line segment AB and line segment CD (point C being on AB) drawn
on the display as shown here, calculate the sum of ∠ACD and ∠DCB,
and display the result on the screen. (54.72 + 125.28 = 180.00)
• For information about displaying measurement values of ∠ACD and ∠DCB,
see “Pasting Measurements into a Screen Image” (page 14-49).
14-52
1. Perform the following operation: K(Option) – 2:Expression.
• This will display “EXPR=” at the pointer location and display the measurement box.
• The above will also display labels for each measurement currently on the screen.
Labels
2. Now you can use the labels to specify measurement values in the calculation you input in
the measurement box.
• To input a measurement value in the measurement box, input the at sign (@) followed by
the numeric label of the value: @1, @2, etc. Since we want to calculate the sum of angles
DCB (@1) and ACD (@2) here, you would input the following: @1+@2.
• You can input “@” by pressing 1.
3. After inputting the calculation expression, press w.
• The calculation result is displayed to the right of
“EXPR=”.
Note
When a measurement is a coordinate or vector component, the label format becomes, “@1X”,
“@1Y”, etc. “@1X” indicates the x-value of a coordinate or the x-component value of a vector,
while “@1Y” indicates the y-value of a coordinate or the y-component value of a vector.
14-53
k Calculation Using the Surface Area of Displayed Figures
You can use the procedures in this section to perform calculations using the surface area of
figures, and display both the expression and calculation results. For example, calculation of
the sum of the surface areas of triangle ABC and triangle A’B’C’ can be displayed as shown
below.
Figures that can be specified for a calculation are those with fill colors (those whose Area
Color is anything other than “Clear”). For information about the Area Color setting, see
“Specifying the Color and Line Type of a Displayed Object” (page 14-21).
u To perform a calculation using the surface area of displayed figures
Example: To calculate the sum of the surface areas of two displayed triangles,
and display the expression and calculation results
1. Draw the triangles, and then specify blue for the Area
Color of one, and red for the Area Color of the other.
2. Perform the following operation: K(Option) – 7:Area Calc.
• This display the measurement box with one of the triangles highlighted. The highlighted
figure is the one that is currently selected for surface area calculation. You can use d
and e to move the highlighting between the two figures.
3. Select the first figure to be calculated (the left one in this example) and then press w.
• This will highlight the measurement box, indicating that
the contents of the box can be edited.
• “@1 DABC” appears on the left triangle, and “@1” (the
symbol for DABC) is input into the measurement box.
14-54
4. Press +.
5. Press f to return the editing focus to the drawing screen from the measurement box, and
then press ew to select the other triangle on the right side of the screen.
• “@2 DA’B’C’ ” appears on the right triangle, and “@2”
(the symbol for DA’B’C’) is input into the measurement
box.
6. Press w.
• This causes the calculation expression DABC+DA’B’C’
to appear at the top of the screen.
7. Press J to close the measurement box.
• Now you can move the text on the screen as you like.
• For more information, see “To move an object” (page 14-30).
14-55
k Specifying the Number Format of a Measurement
You can specify the number format for each measurement on the screen.
Note
• The initial default number format is “Fix2”. For details about number formats, see “Specifying
the Angle Unit and Display Format” (page 2-12).
• Regardless of the current number format setting, integer values are always displayed with
their decimal parts cut off.
u To specify the number format of a measurement
Example: To specify one decimal places for measurement values
1. Select the measurement whose number format you want
to change.
2. Perform the following operation: K(Option) – 3:Number Format.
• This displays the Number Format dialog box.
3. Move the highlighting to the number format you want. Since we want to specify one decimal
places, we will select “Fix1” here.
4. Press w.
→
14-56
6. Working with Animations
An animation consists of one or more point/curve pairs, in which the curve can be a line
segment, circle, semi circle, arc, or function. You build an animation by selecting a point/curve
pair and then adding it to an animation.
k Creating and Running an Animation
u To add an animation and run it
Example: To animate a point around a circle
1. Plot a point and draw a circle, and select them.
2. Perform the following operation: 6(Animate) – 1:Add Animation.
• This will add an animation effect that causes a point to
move along the circumference of the circle.
3. Perform either of the following operations: 6(Animate) – 5:Go (once) or 6(Animate) –
6:Go (repeat).
• This cause the point to move along the circumference of the circle.
→...
4. To stop the animation, press J or o.
14-57
Note
• You can repeat the above procedure to create multiple points that move simultaneously.
Try this:
- Draw a line segment and plot another point.
- Select the line segment and the point.
- Repeat steps 2 and 3 above.
Notice that both animations go at the same time!
• To start a new animation, perform the procedure under “To replace the current animation
with a new one” below.
u To replace the current animation with a new one
1. Select the point and curve for the new animation.
2. Perform the following operation: 6(Animate) – 2:Replace Anima.
• This discards the current animations and sets up an animation for a new point and curve
set.
3. To execute the new animation, perform either of the following operations:
6(Animate) – 5:Go (once) or 6(Animate) – 6:Go (repeat)
4. To stop the animation, press J or o.
u To trace a locus of points
Note
Using trace leaves a trail of points when the animation is run.
Example: To use the Trace command to draw a parabola
A parabola is the locus of points equidistant from a point (the focus) and a line (the directrix).
Use the Trace command to draw a parabola using a line segment (AB) as the directrix and a
point (C) as the focus.
1. Draw a line segment AB and plot point C, which is not on line segment AB.
2. Plot point D, which should also not be on line segment AB, but should be on the same side
of the line segment as point C.
3. Draw a line segment that connects point D with point C.
4. Draw another line segment that connects point D with line
segment AB. This is line segment DE.
5. Select line segments AB and DE, and then press J.
• This displays the measurement box, which shows the angle between line segments AB
and DE.
14-58
6. Input 90 into the measurement box by pressing jaw.
• This makes the angle between line segments AB and
DE 90 degrees, and locks it.
7. Press Jo to deselect all objects on the screen.
8. Select line segments DE and DC, and then press J.
9. Press dw to display the icon palette, move the highlighting to the icon, and then
press w.
w
→
10. Use e to move the highlighting to the icon and then press w.
• This changes the icon to .
• This makes line segments DE and DC congruent in
length.
11. Press JJo and then select point E and line segment AB.
12. Perform the following operation: 6(Animate) – 1:Add Animation.
13. Press o and then select point D.
14-59
14. Perform the following operation: 6(Animate) – 3:Trace.
• This specifies point D (the one you selected in step 13) as the “trace point”.
15. Perform the following operation: 6(Animate) – 5:Go (once).
• This should cause a parabola to be traced on the
display. Note that line segment AB is the directrix and
point C is the focus of the parabola.
Note
• All of the points that are currently selected on the screen become trace points when you
perform the following operation: 6(Animate) – 3:Trace. This operation also cancels Trace
for any point that is currently configured as a trace point.
• The calculator’s auto power off feature will turn off power if an animation is being performed.
If calculator power is turned off (either by auto power off or manually) while an animation is
being performed, the animation will be stopped.
u To edit an animation
Example: While the animation screen created with the procedure under “To trace
a locus of points”, use the Edit Animations screen to edit the animation
1. While the animation screen you want to edit is on the display, perform the following
operation: 6(Animate) – 4:Edit Animation.
• This will display the Edit Animations screen.
2. Edit the animation using one of the procedures below.
When you want to do
this: Perform this procedure:
Specify how many times
the animation should
be executed when you
perform the operation:
6(Animate) –
6:Go (repeat)
1. Use c and f to move the highlighting on the Edit
Animations screen to “Times” and then press 1(Times).
→
2. On the dialog box that appears, input the number of repeats
you want to specify and then press w.
• Inputting 0 here will cause the animation to repeat until
you press J or o stop it.
14-60
When you want to do
this: Perform this procedure:
Specify the number of
steps to be used as point E
travels along line segment
AB
1. Use c and f to move the highlighting on the Edit
Animations screen to “Steps” and then press 1(STEPS).
→
2. On the dialog box that appears, input an integer from 2
through 100 and then press w.
Specify the start point
and the end point of the
movement of point E along
line segment AB
1. Use c and f to move the highlighting on the Edit
Animations screen to “t0”, which is located just under the
“E” of “Animations”.
2. Input a number from –10 to 10.
• t0 specifies the start point for point E movement along
line segment AB. Inputting a value of 0 specifies point
A as the start point, while a value of 1 specifies point B.
Specifying 0.5 specifies the center of line segment AB. A
value smaller than 0.5 shifts the start point towards point
A, while a larger values shift towards point B.
3. After specifying a value for t0, press w.
• This will highlight “t1”.
4. Input a value from –10 to 10 and then press w.
• t1 specifies the end point for point E movement along line
segment AB. Inputting a value of 1 specifies point B as the
end point, while a value of 0 specifies point A.
14-61
When you want to do
this: Perform this procedure:
Delete the animation
assigned to point E
1. Use c and f to move the highlighting on the Edit
Animations screen to “E”, which is located under
“Animations”.
2. Press 1(DELETE).
• This deletes the animation assigned to point E and
causes “E” (along with the “t0” and “t1” values under it) to
disappear from under “Animations” screen.
Note
Selecting “Animations” in step 1 and then pressing
1(DELETE) will delete the animations assigned to all points.
Turn off trace for point D 1. Use c and f to move the highlighting on the Edit
Animations screen to “D” under “Traces”.
2. Press 1(DELETE).
• This turns off trace for point D and causes “D” to
disappear from under “Traces”.
Note
Selecting “Traces” in step 1 and then pressing 1(DELETE)
will turn off trace for all points.
3. After all the settings are the way you want, press J.
• This will close the Edit Animations screen.
14-62
k Generating an Animation Table
Under default settings, an animation causes a specified point to move along a specified line
segment, circle, or arc in 20 steps. You can configure the calculator to generate a table,
called an “animation table”, which records the coordinates of each step, the length of the line
segment, the area of the object, etc.
Any of the following data can be added to the animation table: coordinates (x, y), distance/
length, slope, radius, circumference, perimeter, area, angle, supplementary angle, vector
segments (x, y), and expression.
u To add columns to the animation table
Example: Draw the triangle CDE with a base parallel to and a vertex (point D)
located on horizontal line AB. Next, generate an animation table that
includes the length of line segment CD and the area of the triangle as
point D moves along line segment AB.
1. Draw line segment AB and triangle CDE.
2. Select line segment AB and point D, and then perform the following operation:
6(Animate) – 1:Add Animation.
• This will add an animation effect that causes point D to move along line segment AB.
3. Here we will generate an animation table for the length of line segment CD, so first select
line segment CD.
4. Press J to display the measurement box.
• If the icon does not appear on the left edge of the screen, highlight the up arrow to the
left of the measurement box and then press w. On the icon palette that appears, select
the icon.
5. Press e to highlight the up arrow button on the right side of the measurement box and
then press w.
• This will display a menu.
14-63
6. Use f to move the highlighting to [Add Table] and then press w.
• This will display an animation table that shows the
length of line segment CD at each step of the animation
in a column labeled “Length”.
7. Press J to close the animation table screen.
8. Press J again to make the drawing screen active.
9. Select sides CD, DE, and CE of the triangle.
10. Press J to display the measurement box.
• If the icon does not appear on the left edge of the screen, highlight the up arrow to
the left of the measurement box and then press w. On the icon palette that appears,
select the icon.
11. Perform steps 5 through 6 above.
• Now when the animation table appears, it will include
the “Length” column we created in step 6, long with a
new “Area” column, which contains the area of triangle
CDE at each step of the animation.
• As can be seen here, the area of triangle CDE does not change as point D moves along
line segment AB, which is parallel to the base (CE) of the triangle.
12. To exit the animation table screen, press J.
13. To close the measurement box, press J twice.
Note
• You can add up to 26 columns to the animation table.
• In place of steps 4 through 6 in the above procedure, you can use either of the following
operations to add a column to the animation table: 6(Animate) – 7:Add Table or !b.
14-64
u To display the animation table
To display the animation table you generated with the procedure under “To add columns to the
animation table”, perform the following operation: 6(Animate) – 8:Display Table.
u To save an animation table column to a list
1. Display the animation table.
2. Use d and e to move the highlighting to the column
you want to save as list data.
3. Press 1(STORE)1(LIST).
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the number of the list where you want to save the
column.
4. Input the list number as an integer from 1 to 26 and then press w.
• For details about list data, see “Chapter 3 List Function”.
u To save an entire animation table as spreadsheet data
1. Display the animation table.
2. Press 1(STORE)2(S-SHT).
• This displays a dialog box for inputting the spreadsheet file name.
3. Input up to 8 characters for the file name and then press w.
• For details about spreadsheet data, see “Chapter 9 Spreadsheet”.
u To delete a particular column from an animation table
1. Display the animation table.
2. Use d and e to move the highlighting to the column you want to delete.
3. Press 2(DELETE)1(DELETE).
u To delete all of the columns from an animation table
1. Display the animation table.
2. Press 2(DELETE)2(DEL-ALL).
• This causes a confirmation dialog box to appear.
3. Press 1(Yes) to delete the selected file or 6(No) to cancel the delete operation.
15-1
Chapter 15 Picture Plot
Picture Plot is an application that lets you plot points (that represent coordinates) on a
photograph, illustration, or other graphic and perform various types of analysis based on the
plotted data (coordinate values).
For example, the photograph below shows the nozzles of a fountain shooting thin streams of
water at different angles.
If we view the plane traced by the water of the nozzle closest to us in the photograph as an XY
Cartesian coordinate plane, we then will be able to express any point on the path traced by the
water as a coordinate (X, Y). The Picture Plot plot function makes it easy to plot points on a
photograph such as this or some other image, and extract the coordinate values of the plots.
Plotting points Coordinates (plot list screen)
You can use the plots to perform the following types of operations.
• Register and graph a Y=f(x) form equation and overlay it on a photograph and plot. You
also can use the graph Modify function (page 5-36) to adjust the coefficient values of the
expression and find a function that lines up better with the plots.
• Perform regression calculation based on the plotted coordinate values and draw a regression
graph that overlays the plots. This makes it possible to produce the mathematical expression
and graph of a path of movement.
15
15-2
• Add time values (T) to the coordinate values (X, Y) and plot points on the T-X plane or T-Y
plane. This makes it possible to produce the mathematical expressions and graphs of the
correlation between horizontal direction movement and time, and the correlation between
vertical direction movement and time.
Regression graph T-X regression graph
(left side)
During full-screen display of an X-Y coordinate graph, SKETCH and G-SOLVE operations can
be used the same way they are in the Graph mode.
k Picture Plot Specific Setup Items
The items described below are Picture Plot specific Setup screen items that appear only after
you press !m(SET UP).
indicates default setting.
• Axtrans Wind
• {Auto}/{Manual} ... Specifies {link to the V-Window settings on the left side (T-Y or T-X) of
the AXTRANS screen for auto setting}/{do not link to the V-Window settings on the left
side (T-Y or T-X) of the AXTRANS screen}
• Plot Color
• {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellow} ... Specifies a color for plots.
• Plot Type
• {}/{}/{} ... Specifies the plot figure.
• Sketch Color
• {Black}/{Blue}/{Red}/{Magenta}/{Green}/{Cyan}/{Yellow} ... Specifies a draw color for the
Sketch function.
15-3
1. Picture Plot Function Menus
k File List Screen Function Menu
• {OPEN} ... Opens a g3p/g3b file or folder.
• {DELETE} ... Deletes a g3p/g3b file.
• {SEARCH} ... Searches for a g3p/g3b file.
• {DETAIL} ... Displays the file DETAIL screen (page 11-6).
k Picture Plot Screen Function Menu
• {FILE} ... Displays the following submenu.
• {OPEN} ... Opens the file list.
• {SAVE} ... Saves the currently open file and overwrites its previously save version (if any).
• {SAVE • AS} ... Saves the currently open file under a new name (Save As).
• {Plot} ... Enters the plot mode (for plotting points on the screen).
• {List} ... Displays a plot coordinate value list (Plot List screen).
• For information about Plot List function menu items, see “Plot List Function Menu” (page
15-4).
• {DefG} ... Displays a screen for registering graph expressions.
• {MODIFY} ... Enters the Modify mode (page 5-36).
• {AXTRNS} ... Displays the following submenu.
• {T-Y}/{T-X} ... Splits the screen in half (left and right) and specifies {horizontal axis = T,
vertical axis = Y}/{horizontal axis = T, vertical axis = X} for the right side.
• {REG} ... Displays a submenu (same as the one on page 6-23) for executing regression
calculation based on plots.
• {EDIT} ... Enters the plot editing mode (only when plots are on the display).
• {DELETE} ... Enters the plot delete mode (only when plots are on the display).
• {PLAY} ... When the currently open image is a g3b file, sequentially displays the image in the
file.
• {Auto} ... Sequentially displays all of the images in a g3b file three times automatically.
• {Manual} ... Allows manual display of the images in a g3b file using d(back) and
e(forward).
• {PICTURE} ... Displays the following submenu.
• {1~20} ... Saves the current screen as an image in Picture Memory.
• {SAVE • AS} ... Saves the current screen as an image under a name specified by you.
• {PAN} ... Enters the Pan mode (page 5-10).
• {FadeI/O} ... Adjusts the lightness of an image (page 15-12).
15-4
k Plot List Function Menu
• {AXTRNS} ... Same as {AXTRNS} under “Picture Plot Screen Function Menu”.
• {EDIT} ... Selects to edit the currently highlighted value on the plot list.
• {DEL • BTM} ... Deletes the last line of data on the plot list.
• {DEL-ALL} ... Deletes all of the data on the plot list.
• {SET} ... Selects to configure the time (T) value (page 15-15).
• {JUMP} ... Displays the following submenu.
• {TOP}/{BOTTOM} ... {jump to the top line}/{jump to the bottom line}
• {Plot} ... Exits the plot list screen and enters the plot mode.
• {REG} ... Same as {REG} under “Picture Plot Screen Function Menu”.
• {STORE} ... Saves the specified Plot List column (X or Y) to list memory.
• {RECALL} ... Recalls list memory data to the Plot List X-column or Y-column.
k Plot Mode Function Menu
• {PICTURE} ... Same as {PICTURE} under “Picture Plot Screen Function Menu”.
• {UNDO} ... Deletes the last point plotted. Executing {UNDO} again will plot the deleted point.
• {EDIT} ... Same as {EDIT} under “Picture Plot Screen Function Menu”.
k AXTRANS Screen Function Menu
• {Switch} ... Switches the display mode of the left side (X-Y coordinate system) of the
AXTRANS screen.
• {Cutout} ... Specifies the trimming range of the left side (X-Y coordinate system) of the
AXTRANS screen.
• {List} ... Returns to the plot list screen.
• {REG} ... Displays a submenu (same as the one on page 6-23) for executing regression
calculation based on plots on the right side (T-Y or T-X coordinate system) of the
AXTRANS screen.
• {P-LINK} ... Causes plots on the left side and right side of the AXTRANS screen that
correspond to each other to flash.
15-5
2. Managing Picture Plot Files
Picture Plot requires the use of a background image file. The following types of image files can
be opened by Picture Plot.
g3p file ... A file that contains a single image.
g3b file ... A file that contains multiple images.
You can use an image file that is already built into the calculator, or you can use CASIO
original contents you download from http://edu.casio.com.
k Starting a Picture Plot Operation
A Picture Plot operation is started by entering the Picture Plot mode and opening an image
file (g3p or g3b).
Note
Opening an image file is required when you enter the Picture Plot mode for the first time
after purchasing or resetting the calculator. After that, the image file you last opened will be
opened automatically whenever you enter the Picture Plot mode. After opening an image file,
you do not need to do so again unless you want to change to another image file or reset the
calculator.
u To open a file
1. From the Main Menu, enter the Picture Plot mode.
• This displays the file list screen.
• If the file you opened the last time you used the Picture Plot mode is displayed (or if the
Picture Plot screen is currently displayed), press K1(FILE)1(OPEN) to display the
file list screen.
2. Use f and c to highlight the file you want to open, and then press 1(OPEN) or w.
k Saving a File
Plotting points on the Picture Plot screen and saving the file will cause the Picture Plot plot
data to be added to the image file (g3p or g3b). This does not affect the image data of the
original image file and the file name extension remains the same as what it was before the
Picture Plot data was added. This means that even if you add Picture Plot data to an image
file, you will be able to use that file in other modes. Note, however, that the plots will not be
displayed if you open such an image file in another mode. Also using an image file in another
mode does not affect its Picture Plot data.
15-6
u Picture Plot Settings Saved to Image Files
• Picture Plot settings that can be changed on the Setup screen are divided into two groups:
settings that are saved in the image file and settings that are saved by the calculator.
Item name Settings saved to the
image file
Settings saved by the
calculator
Axtrans Wind *1
Graph Func
Plot Color *1
Plot Type *1
Sketch Color *1
Sketch Line *2
Angle
Complex Mode
Coord
Grid *2
Axes *2
Label *2
Display
*1 Picture Plot specific setup item
*2 Common setting in all modes. If you enter the Picture Plot mode after changing these
settings in another mode, the setting of the file that was opened the last time you were in
the Picture Plot mode will be recalled.
• For V-Window settings, the settings stored with a file will be recalled whenever the file is
opened in the Picture Plot mode. This means that if you change V-Window settings in
another mode and then return to the Picture Plot mode, the V-Window settings will revert
to the settings for the file that is currently opened in the Picture Plot mode. If you go from
the Picture Plot mode to another mode, the Picture Plot V-Window settings are retained.
Settings do not change in accordance with the mode being entered.
u To save a file
While the Picture Plot screen is displayed, press K1(FILE)2(SAVE). This will save the
file you are editing by replacing the currently stored version (if any).
15-7
u To save a file under a different name
1. While the Picture Plot screen is displayed, press K1(FILE)3(SAVE • AS).
• This displays a folder selection screen.
2. Specify the folder you want.
• Highlight ROOT to save the file to the root directory.
• To save the file in a specific folder, use f and c to move the highlighting to the desired
folder and then press 1(OPEN).
3. Press 1(SAVE • AS).
4. On the File Name dialog box that appears, enter a name up to eight characters long and
then press w.
3. Using the Plot Function
You can plot points on the screen, overlay them with a graph of an expression in the form
Y=f(x), and draw a regression graph that approximates the plots.
k Plotting Points
u To plot points on the screen
1. Enter the Picture Plot mode and then open a g3p or g3b file.
• This displays the Picture Plot screen.
• For information about how to open a file, see “To open
a file” (page 15-5).
2. Press K2(Plot) to enter the Plot mode.
• A pointer will appear in the center of the screen.
3. Use the cursor keys (or number keys) to move the pointer to the location of the point you
want to plot and then press w.
• This plots a point at the current pointer location.
• If the currently open file is a g3b file, plotting a point will switch to the next image in the file.
For details, see “Plotting Points in a g3b File” (page 15-8).
• To delete the last point you plotted, press K2(UNDO).
• For information about using the number keys to move the pointer to a particular location,
see “To make the pointer jump to a particular location” (page 15-8).
15-8
4. Repeat step 3 as many times as required to plot all of the
points you want.
• Here, you could press K3(EDIT), select a plot, and move it to another location. For
details, see “To move a plot” (page 15-9).
• You can plot up to 50 points in the case of a g3p file. For a g3b file, you can plot one point
for each of the images contained in the file.
5. After you are finished plotting all of the points you want, press J or !J(QUIT).
u To make the pointer jump to a particular location
In the Plot mode, pressing a number key (b to j) will cause the pointer to jump to the
corresponding section of the screen as shown below.
hij
efg
bcd
u Plotting Points in a g3b File
A g3b file is a special Picture Plot file that can contain up to 30 images in a single file.
• Opening a g3b file with Picture Plot and plotting a point will switch to the next sequential
image in the file.
→ →
• To view the images contained in a g3b file, press K6(g)5(PLAY) and then perform
one of the playback operations described below.
- Press 1(Auto). This sequentially displays all of the images in the file three times
automatically.
- Press 2(Manual). Use d and e to scroll the images in the file.
Press J to return to the screen that was displayed before you pressed K6(g)
5(PLAY).
• g3b files can be opened in the Picture Plot mode only.
15-9
u To move a plot
1. While the Picture Plot screen is displayed, press K6(g)3(EDIT).
• You also could press K2(Plot)K3(EDIT) instead.
• This enters the plot editing mode with the pointer located at the first point that was plotted
on the image.
Plot T-value of pointer
position (page 15-14)
Plot number of pointer
position
Total number of plots
2. Use e and d to move the pointer to the plot you want to move and then press w.
• This selects the plot, causing it to flash.
3. Use the cursor keys (or number keys) to move the pointer to the location to which you want
to move the plot and then press w.
• This will move the plot. The pointer will move to the next sequential plot, when there is
one.
→
• If you want to move another plot, repeat steps 3 and 4.
4. After you are finished moving all of the plots you want, press J or !J(QUIT).
u To change the color of all the plots
Either of the following operations can be used to change the color of all the plots currently on
the screen.
• On the Setup screen, change the “Plot Color” setting.
• While the Picture Plot screen is displayed, press !f(FORMAT) to display the FORMAT
dialog box, and then change the color setting.
Changing the color using the FORMAT dialog box also changes the Setup screen’s “Plot
Color” setting. The color you change to is also reflected in the text color on the plot list screen.
15-10
u To delete all plots
Press K6(g)4(DELETE), and a confirmation dialog box will appear. Press 1(Yes) to
delete all of the plots. To cancel the delete operation, press 6(No) instead.
Note
• In addition to using the plot list screen to delete all plots, you also can sequentially delete
plots one-by-one, starting from the last point plotted. See “Deleting the Last Plot Data Line”
(page 15-14).
k Inputting an Expression of the Form Y=f(x) and Graphing It
You can draw a graph based on an expression with the form Y=f(x) on the Picture Plot screen.
From the Picture Plot screen, press K4(DefG) to display the graph relation list screen.
From there, operations are identical to those in the Graph mode.
Note
• The data on the graph relation list screen is shared with the Graph mode. Note, however,
that only Y= type graphs can be used in the Picture Plot mode. Because of this, calling up
the graph relation list screen from the Picture Plot mode will display a “Y” (Y= type) item for
function menu key 3. Also note that the 5(MODIFY) function menu item is not displayed
on the graph relation list screen. The Modify function can be executed from the Picture Plot
screen.
• Y= type expressions on the graph relation list screen that include variables can be modified
by pressing K5(MODIFY) while the Picture Plot screen is displayed. For details about
this operation, see “Modifying a Graph” (page 5-36).
k Using Regression Graphs
You can perform regression calculation based on plotted coordinate values and draw a
regression graph.
u To draw a regression graph overlaid on plots
1. Perform the procedure under “To plot points on the screen” (page 15-7).
2. Press K6(g)2(REG).
• This displays the regression calculation type function
menu.
15-11
3. Press the function key that corresponds to the type of regression calculation*1 you want to
perform.
• To perform quadratic regression, for example, press
3(X2). This performs the regression calculation and
displays the results.*2
• You can press 5(COPY) here to copy the obtained regression formula to the graph
relation list screen. See “Inputting an Expression of the Form Y=f(x) and Graphing It”
(page 15-10) for more information.
4. To draw a regression graph, press 6(DRAW).
*1 For information about regression calculation types, see “Selecting the Regression Type”
(page 6-15).
*2 For information about the meanings of the values that appear on this screen, see
“Displaying Regression Calculation Results” (page 6-16) and the regression graph
explanations on pages 6-16 through 6-20.
Note
• Besides regression graphs, you also can specify your own expressions and graph them. See
“Inputting an Expression of the Form Y=f(x) and Graphing It” (page 15-10).
u Scrolling and Panning a Plot or Graph Screen
On the Picture Plot screen, you can use the cursor keys to scroll the XY-coordinate axes up,
down, left, and right. Note that the background image is fixed and does not scroll.
You also can press K6(g)6(g)2(PAN) and pan (grab-and-drag) the XY-coordinate
axes. The pan operation is the same as that in the Graph mode (page 5-10).
15-12
u To maneuver between the Picture Plot screen, AXTRANS screen, and plot
list screen
Once you display the plot list screen and AXTRANS screen (page 15-14), each press of
!6(G⇔T) cycles between the Picture Plot screen, AXTRANS screen, and plot list screen.
k Adjusting the Lightness (Fade I/O) of an Image
You can adjust the lightness of an image within a range of 0% (as-is) to 100% (not displayed).
A higher setting value makes the image lighter, and a setting of 100% displays all white.
→
You can adjust the lightness for optimum viewing of plots and graphs.
• Note that the lightness setting can be adjusted only when the image is a 16-bit image data.
• After you adjust the lightness level, the setting is stored in the image file when you perform
either of the following operations: K1(FILE)2(SAVE) or 3(SAVE • AS).
u To adjust the lightness (Fade I/O) of an image
1. While the Picture Plot screen is displayed, press K6(g)6(g)3(FadeI/O).
• This causes a slider for adjusting image lightness to appear on the display.
2. Use d and e to adjust the lightness value.
• You can also input values directly, if you want. To specify a lightness value of 20%, for
example, press caw.
3. After the setting is the way you want, press w.
!6(G⇔T)
!6(G⇔T)
!6(G⇔T)
!6(G⇔T)
!6(G⇔T)
!6(G⇔T)
15-13
4. Using the Plot List
Each plot on the Picture Plot screen has coordinate value data. You can use the plot list to
display and edit these coordinates.
k Displaying Coordinate Values of Plots (Plot List)
You can use the procedures in this section to display a list of plot coordinates (X, Y), and use
the list to edit values, delete plot data, and change plot colors. You also can specify a time
value (T) for each plot and draw a T-X or T-Y graph (AXTRANS) function.
u To edit plot coordinate values
1. While the Picture Plot screen is displayed, press
K3(List) to display the plot list screen.
• The X and Y values of the plot list screen show plot coordinates. The T-value indicates
time. (For more information about T-values, see “Displaying Plots on T-Y Coordinates and
T-X Coordinates (AXTRANS Screen)” on page 15-14.) On this screen you can edit the X
and Y values only.
2. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the X-column or Y-column value you want to
edit and then press 2(EDIT).
3. Edit the values and then press w.
• If you want to edit other values, repeat steps 2 and 3.
• To return to the Picture Plot screen, press J or !J(QUIT).
• Changing a value cause the change to be reflected by the corresponding plot on the
Picture Plot screen.
Note
• While the plot list screen is displayed, you can use 6(g)4(STORE) to store list data on
the plot list to list memory and 6(g)5(RECALL) to recall plot list data from list memory.
Note, however, that both the store and recall operations ignore any color information
associated with list data.
15-14
u Deleting the Last Plot Data Line
Perform one of the following operations, depending on the type of cell that is currently
highlighted.
• If the X-value or Y-value of the last line of the plot list screen is selected, press
3(DEL • BTM) once to delete the last line of plot data.
• If the X-value or Y-value of any line besides the last line of the plot list screen is selected,
press 3(DEL • BTM) once to move the highlighting to the last line and then press
3(DEL • BTM) again to delete the last line of plot data.
u To delete all plots
Press 4(DEL-ALL), and a confirmation dialog box will appear. Press 1(Yes) to delete all of
the plots. To cancel the delete operation, press 6(No) instead.
u To return to the Picture Plot screen from the plot list screen
Press J, !J(QUIT), or !6(G⇔T).
k Displaying Plots on T-Y Coordinates and T-X Coordinates (AXTRANS
Screen)
As can be seen on the plot list screen, the data for each plot includes X and Y-coordinates, as
well as a time value T.
On the Picture Plot screen each plot is normally displayed as coordinates (X, Y) on an X-Y
plane, but time value T can be used to display plots as coordinates (T, Y) on a T-Y plane or as
coordinates (T, X) on a T-X plane.
• Under initial default settings, time values are 0, 1, 2, and so on (arithmetic progression with
a start value of 0 and a step value of 1), in accordance with the sequence that the points are
plotted. You can change the T value assigned to each plot by changing the start value and
step value.
• T-Y coordinate plots and T-X coordinate plots are displayed on a special screen called the
AXTRANS screen. The AXTRANS screen simultaneously displays the X-Y coordinate plots
and the T-Y or T-X coordinate plots as shown in the example below.
X-Y coordinate plots T-X coordinate plots
15-15
u To configure the time (T) value
1. While the plot list screen is displayed, press 5(SET).
2. On the screen that appears, specify the start value and step value.
• If you want to specify a start value of 1 and a step of 1.5, for example, press bwb.
fw.
3. After the settings are the way you want, press w (or J).
• This returns to the plot list screen, where you can check
whether the T-value has changed as you intended.
Note
The following are the ranges for the start value and the step value.
–1.0E+10 < Start < 1.0E+10
0 < Step < 1.0E+10
u To display plots on T-Y coordinates or T-X coordinates
1. While the plot list screen is displayed, press 1(AXTRNS). From the Picture Plot screen,
you also could press K6(g)1(AXTRNS).
2. Depending on the coordinate system you want to use to display the plots, press 1(T-Y) or
2(T-X).
• This displays the AXTRANS screen, which shows the
X-Y coordinate system plots on the left and the T-Y or
T-X coordinate system plots on the right.
15-16
Note
• While the AXTRANS screen is displayed, the “Grid” setting on the Setup screen is
always “Off”, while the “Label” setting is always “On”. For the “Axes” setting, you can
select “On” or “Scale” only. If you try to select “Off” for this setting, it will change back to
“On” automatically.
• As soon as the AXTRANS screen is displayed, the left screen T-axis V-Window is
always configured automatically, regardless of the current “Axtrans Wind” setup.
• Pressing K while this screen is shown will display a function menu you can use to
perform the following operations.
To do this: Press this key: And then perform the procedure
located here:
Change the display mode
of the left-side screen
1(Switch) “To switch the display mode of the
left side (X-Y coordinate system) of
the AXTRANS screen” below
Go to the plot list screen 3(List) —
Draw a regression graph
overlaid on the plots in
the right-side screen
4(REG) From step 3 under “To draw a
regression graph overlaid on plots”
(page 15-10)
Cause plots on the left
side and right side of the
AXTRANS screen that
correspond to each other
to flash
5(P-LINK) “To make plots on the left side and
right side of the AXTRANS screen
that correspond to each other to
flash” (page 15-17)
3. To return to the plot list screen, press J.
u To switch the display mode of the left side (X-Y coordinate system) of the
AXTRANS screen
1. While the AXTRANS screen is displayed, press K to display the function menu.
2. Press 1(Switch).
• Each press of 1(Switch) cycles the left-side display mode in the sequence shown below.
→ →
(1) Full screen with horizontal squeeze
(2) Cut off screen (no squeeze)
15-17
(3) Compressed screen, maintaining aspect ratio
• When (2) (no squeeze) is selected as the display mode, you can specify what part
of the screen is cut off. To do so, press 2(Cutout) and then use the d and e
keys to move the boundary so it encloses the part of the screen you want to display.
Finally, press w.
→
3. When the display mode is the way you want, press J.
u To make plots on the left side and right side of the AXTRANS screen that
correspond to each other to flash
1. While the AXTRANS screen is on the display, press K5(P-LINK).
• This will cause the plots on the left-side (X-Y
coordinates) and right-side (T-X coordinates) that
correspond to the first line of data (the first plots) to
flash.
• Use d and e to move the flashing back and forth between plots. This feature is useful
to determine how the plots on either side of the screen correspond to each other.
2. To stop the flashing, press J.
u To return to the plot list screen from the AXTRANS screen
Press J or !6(G⇔T).
15-18
5. Common Functions with the Graph Mode
On the Picture Plot screen, !1 to 5 function menu items are the same as those in the
Graph mode. See the pages below for more information.
• !1(TRACE) ... “Reading Coordinates on a Graph Line” (page 5-52)
• !2(ZOOM) ... “Zoom” (page 5-8)
• !3(V-WIN) ... “V-Window (View Window) Settings” (page 5-4)
• !4(SKETCH) ... “Drawing Dots, Lines, and Text on the Graph Screen (Sketch)” (page
5-50)
• !5(G-SOLVE) ... “Analyzing Graphs (G-SOLVE Menu)” (page 5-54)
Note
After you start a trace operation by pressing !1(TRACE), you can change the color of the
plot where the trace pointer is currently located. Perform the following steps to change the plot
color.
1. While the Picture Plot screen contains plotted points, press !1(TRACE).
• This causes a trace pointer to appear at the first point that was plotted on the image.
• If there are both plots and a graph on the Picture Plot screen, pressing !1(TRACE)
will cause the trace pointer to appear on the graph first. In this case, use f and c to
move the trace pointer between the graph and the plots.
2. Use e and d to move the trace pointer to the plot whose color you want to change.
3. Press !f(FORMAT) to display the FORMAT dialog box.
4. Use the cursor keys to move the highlighting to the desired color and then press w.
• The color you change to is also reflected in the text color of the corresponding plot data.
α-1
Appendix
1. Error Message Table
• General calculation errors
When you see
this message: It means this: So you need to do this:
Syntax
ERROR
• Illegal syntax
• Attempt to input an illegal command
Press J to display the error and
make necessary corrections.
Ma ERROR • Calculation result that exceeds the
calculation range.
• Mathematical error (division by zero,
etc.)
Check input values and make
corrections to ensure that values are
within allowable limits.
Stack ERROR Execution of calculations that exceed
the capacity of the stack for numeric
values or stack for commands.
• Simplify the formulas to keep
stacks within 10 levels for the
numeric values and 26 levels for the
commands.
• Divide the formula into two or more
parts.
Input value
must be
integer.
Attempting to input a non-integer value
in a location that requires integer input.
Input an integer value.
Input value
must be
matrix.
Attempting to input a non-matrix value
in a location that requires matrix input.
Input a matrix value.
Input value
must be list.
Attempting to input a non-list value in a
location that requires list input.
Input a list value.
Input value
must be real
number.
Attempting to input a non-real number
value in a location that requires real
number input.
Input a real number value.
Invalid polar
form
Attempting to input an imaginary
number for polar form (r∠
θ
) r or
θ
.
Check the polar form.
Wrong
argument size
relationship.
The size relationship between two
arguments is opposite from what it
should be.
Example: nCr(3,10)
Change the values so the size
relationship required by the syntax is
maintained.
Non-Real
ERROR
Calculation that produces a complex
number when Real is specified for the
Complex Mode setting on the Setup
screen, even though the argument is a
real number.
Change the Complex Mode setting to
something other than Real.
α
α-2
When you see
this message: It means this: So you need to do this:
Can’t Simplify Fraction simplification was attempted
using the 'Simp function (page
2-25), but simplification could not be
performed using the specified divisor.
Example: Specifying a divisor of 3 to
simplify the fraction 4/8.
Specify a different divisor or execute
'Simp without specifying any divisor.
Can’t Solve!
Adjust initial
value or
bounds. Then
try again
A Solve calculation could not obtain a
solution within the specified range.
• Change the specified range.
• Correct the input expression.
Time Out A Solve calculation was unable to
satisfy convergence conditions.
If you are performing a Solve
calculation, try changing to the initial
default estimated value.
Conversion
ERROR
• Attempting to use the unit conversion
command to convert between two
units in different categories.
• Executing a conversion calculation
using the same command twice in a
conversion expression.
In a conversion expression, specify
two different commands that are in
the same category.
Invalid Type An illegal data type is specified. Specify valid data.
Underflow When performing a function calculation
or an equation calculation, you input
an extremely small value for one of
the arguments or you input values for
multiple arguments that are extremely
removed from each other.
Example: ∑(X,X,1,2,1E–50),
1E99x2+1E99x+1E–99=0, etc.
Depending on the calculation
contents, the underflow will occur and
the calculation will not be performed.
Change the value(s) and try again.
α-3
• List and matrix calculation errors
When you see
this message: It means this: So you need to do this:
Invalid list or
matrix
Incorrect use of a list or matrix. Press J to display the error and
make necessary corrections.
Dimension
ERROR
Illegal dimension used during matrix or
list calculations.
Check the matrix or list dimension.
Complex
Number in List
List containing complex number used
in a calculation or operation for which
complex number data is invalid.
Change all data in the list to real
numbers.
Complex
Number in
Matrix
Matrix containing complex number
used in a calculation or operation for
which complex number data is invalid.
Change all data in the matrix to real
numbers.
Improper
Number of
Elements
You attempted to create a list or matrix
whose number of elements exceeds
the maximum limit.
A list cannot have more than 999
elements, and a matrix cannot
exceed 999 rows × 999 columns.
• Equation mode errors
When you see
this message: It means this: So you need to do this:
Infinitely Many
Solutions
An infinite number of solutions for
simultaneous linear equations. —
No Solution No solution for simultaneous linear
equations. —
No Variable No variable within a Solve equation. Input a Solve equation that includes
a variable.
α-4
• Graph, Dyna Graph, Table, Recursion, Conic Graphs mode errors
When you see
this message: It means this: So you need to do this:
Range
ERROR
V-Window range settings exceeded
when a graph is redrawn.
Redraw using the proper settings.
No Variable No variable specified within a graph
function being used for Dynamic Graph.
Specify a variable for the graph
function.
Too Many
Variables
• Attempting to execute the Modify
function using an expression with
more than five variables.
• Attempting to execute the Modify
function when multiple expressions
containing variables are selected.
• Change the expression so it
contains no more than five
variables.
• Select only one expression that
contains a variable.
No item is
selected
Attempting to draw a graph or create a
table while there is no data selected.
Select data and try again.
Expression in
use
Attempting to copy the expression of
a graph while Modify is running to an
area where an expression that is being
used for graphing is located.
Select a diffrerent area and try again.
Requires
one variable
expression.
• You attempted to execute a Modify
function operation while no
expression that contains a variable is
selected.
• You attempted to execute a Modify
operation while multiple expressions
containing variables are selected.
Select at least one and only one
expression that contains a variable.
Invalid graph
type
• You attempted to execute a Modify
operation in the Graph mode while a
list graph expression, overwrite graph
expression, or inequality is selected.
• You attempted to execute a Modify
operation in the Table mode while a
list graph expression, overwrite graph
expression, inequality, or a range of
values is selected.
Select a different type of expression
and try again.
Too Many
Sectors
You executed a calculation using G-
Solve ∫dx - ROOT or ∫dx - INTSECT, but
there are 21 or more roots in the range
specified by you.
Specify a range that is narrower and
try again.
α-5
• Statistics mode errors
When you see
this message: It means this: So you need to do this:
Condition
ERROR
You are attempting to display multiple
statistical graphs of different types.
Press 1(GRAPH)4(SELECT) to
display the graph On/Off screen, and
then select “DrawOn” only for graphs
of the same type.
Data in use • You attempted to execute a
regression calculation while the same
list specified by “Resid List” (residual
list) is specified as calculation data.
• You attempted to execute a Test,
Confidence Interval, or Distribution
calculation while the same list
specified by “Save Res” (save result
list) is specified as calculation data.
• For “Resid List”, specify a list other
than the one being used for the
regression calculation.
• For “Save Res”, specify a list
other than the one being used for
the Test, Confidence Interval, or
Distribution calculation.
• Program errors
When you see
this message: It means this: So you need to do this:
Go ERROR 1 No corresponding Lbl
n for Goto n .
2 No program stored in program area
Prog "file name".
1 Correctly input a Lbl n to corres-
pond to the Goto n , or delete the
Goto n if not required.
2 Store a program in program area
Prog "file name", or delete the
Prog "file name" if not required.
Nesting
ERROR
Nesting of subroutines by Prog "file
name" exceeds 10 levels.
• Ensure that Prog "file name" is not
used to return from subroutines to
main routine. If used, delete any
unnecessary Prog "file name".
• Trace the subroutine jump
destinations and ensure that no
jumps are made back to the original
program area. Ensure that returns
are made correctly.
Too many path
levels
Specification of more than five path
levels in a program.
Specify no more than five path levels.
α-6
• Spreadsheet mode errors
When you see
this message: It means this: So you need to do this:
Range
ERROR
The spreadsheet cell range was
exceeded by paste, recall, or other cell
operation.
Repeat the procedure taking care
that the cell range is not exceeded.
Circular
ERROR
There is a circular reference (such as
“=A1” in cell A1) in the spreadsheet.
Change cell contents to remove the
circular references.
• eActivity mode errors
When you see
this message: It means this: So you need to do this:
No MEMO • On the eActivity mode file menu
screen, pressing 5(MEMO) while a
file that does not include a MEMO is
selected.
• Attempting to display the MEMO
Catalog screen while editing a file that
does not include a MEMO.
Perform these operations while a file
that includes a MEMO is selected.
Only one
memo allowed
per line.
• In the eActivity mode, attempting to
append a MEMO to a line that already
has a MEMO appended.
• In the eActivity mode, attempting
to delete the newline code between
two lines that both have a MEMO
appended.
—
Image wrong
size for
insertion.
In the eActivity mode, you are
attempting to insert an image file
whose file size is not supported.
Use an image file that is the
supported size (page 10-14).
α-7
• Memory mode errors
When you see
this message: It means this: So you need to do this:
Memory
ERROR
Operation or memory storage operation
exceeds remaining memory capacity.
• Keep the number of memories you
use within the currently specified
number of memories.
• Simplify the data you are trying to
store to keep it within the available
memory capacity.
• Delete no longer needed data to
make room for the new data.
Folder has
over 300 files.
Some will be
skipped
The number of files in the storage
memory folder you are trying to open in
the Memory mode exceeds 300.
Use your computer*1 to distribute the
files among multiple folders so no
folder in storage memory contains
more than 300 files.
Sub-folders
in this folder
cannot be
displayed
In the Memory mode, a level 3 nested
storage memory folder is displayed,
and it contains a level 4 nested folder.
(The level 4 folder will be displayed, but
it cannot be opened.)
Use your computer*1 to store all files
you want to access in the top three
folder nesting levels.
Too Many
Data
The number of data items is too large. Delete unneeded data.
Fragmentation
ERROR
Memory must be optimized before any
more data can be stored.
Optimize memory.
Invalid Name The file name you input includes invalid
characters.
Use the correct characters to input a
valid file name.
Invalid Type An illegal data type is specified. Specify valid data.
Storage
Memory Full
The storage memory is full. Delete unneeded data.
Data ERROR A data error occurred. Check to make sure you are writing
correct type of data and try again.
*1 For details about using a computer to perform storage memory file and folder operations, see
“Transferring Data between the Calculator and a Personal Computer” (page 13-5).
α-8
When you see
this message: It means this: So you need to do this:
File System
ERROR
The calculator memory file system
is corrupted or the storage memory
format is one that cannot be read by
the calculator.
After reading the information under
“Important!” below, perform an
Initialize All operation as described in
“Reset” (page 12-4).
Important!
Performing an Initialize All operation
will delete all data in calculator
memory, including language data.
If you need the data in calculator
memory, use the USB cable to
connect the calculator to a computer
and copy all of the data you want to
keep to your computer’s hard disk
before performing the Initialize All
operation. For more information, see
“Performing Data Communication
between the Calculator and a
Personal Computer” (page 13-3).
α-9
• Data communication errors
When you see
this message: It means this: So you need to do this:
Complex
Number in
Data
Data sent from a function of this
calculator (matrix, etc.) includes
complex number data, but the
corresponding function of the receiving
calculator does not support data that
includes complex numbers.
Example: Attempting to send a matrix
containing a complex number in an
element to CFX-9850G.
Send data that does not include
complex numbers.
CSV error
in row [A],
column [B]
The imported CSV file included data
that cannot be converted.
Use your computer to check the
row A, column B data in the file
and change it to data that can be
converted.
USB Connect
ERROR
USB cable connection broken during
data communication.
Use the USB cable to correctly
connect the calculator and computer
(or other device).
Com ERROR Problem with cable connection
or parameter setting during data
communication.
Check to make sure there is nothing
wrong with the cable connection,
and that parameters are configured
correctly.
Transmit
ERROR
Problem with cable connection or
parameter setting during data
communication.
Check to make sure there is nothing
wrong with the cable connection,
and that parameters are configured
correctly.
Receive
ERROR
Problem with cable connection or
parameter setting during data
communication.
Check to make sure there is nothing
wrong with the cable connection,
and that parameters are configured
correctly.
Memory Full Memory of receiving calculator
became full during program data
communication.
Delete some data stored in the
receiving calculator and try again.
Invalid Data
Size
Attempting to send data of a size that is
not supported by the receiving device.
Make sure the data being sent is
of a size that is supported by the
receiving device.
Invalid Data
Number
Attempting to send data with a data
number that is not supported by the
receiving device.
Specify a data number supported by
the receiving device when sending
data.
Please
Reconnect
The connection was dropped for some
reason while updating the operating
system.
Reconnect and try again.
α-10
• Geometry mode errors
When you see
this message: It means this: So you need to do this:
First select a
segment.
You are attempting to construct a
perpendicular bisector without first
selecting a line segment.
Select the required object(s) and
then try again.
First select a
line and point.
You are attempting to construct a
perpendicular or parallel without first
selecting a line segment and point.
First select
2 points or a
segment.
You are trying to construct a midpoint
without first selecting two points or a
line segment.
First select
the applicable
figure.
• You are trying to construct a point of
intersection without first selecting two
lines.
• You are trying to execute an Add
Animation or Replace Animation
command without first selecting the
required object.
• You are trying to execute an Add
Table command without first selecting
the required object.
First select 2
segments.
You are trying to construct an angle
bisector without first selecting two line
segments.
Too Many
Objects!
Work memory
cleared.
Work memory became full. Delete objects you no longer need or
open a new file.
Invalid
Measurement
You are attempting to use the
Expression command to input
an expression that contains a
measurement that does not exist.
Check to make sure that the
expression you are inputting contains
only measurements that are currently
on the screen.
Too Many
Animations
You are trying to add more than 10
animations.
Use the Edit Animations screen to
delete animations you no longer
need, or create a new file and add
new animations.
First select
point(s).
You are trying to execute the Trace
command without first specifying a
trace point.
Specify the trace point and try again.
Too Many
Trace Points
You are trying to specify more than 10
trace points.
Select only up to 10 trace points.
Too Many
Rows
You are trying to add more than 26
columns to an animation table.
Delete columns from the animation
table that you do not need and try
again.
α-11
When you see
this message: It means this: So you need to do this:
First configure
animation
settings.
• You are trying to run an animation
without first configuring its settings.
• You are trying to execute an Add
Table command without first
configuring animation settings.
Configure animation settings and try
again.
Cannot Add
Animation
• The point you selected for an Add
Animation or Replace Animation
command operation cannot be used
in an animation because it is locked,
etc.
• The point you selected for an Add
Animation or Replace Animation
command operation cannot be used
in an animation because it is already
being used in the animation you are
configuring or in another animation.
Select a point to which animation can
be added and try again.
Select the
applicable
measurement
icon.
You are trying to execute the Add Table
command without first selecting the
appropriate measurement icon.
Select the icon of a measurement
that can be added to an animation
table.
First configure
animation
settings and
create a table.
You tried to execute the Display Table
command without generating an
animation table.
Generate an animation table first.
Create at least
one figure with
a fill color.
You are attempting to execute a surface
area calculation (K(Option) – 7:Area
Calc) when there is no figure on the
screen with a fill color.
Draw a figure with a fill color and try
again.
α-12
• Picture Plot mode errors
When you see
this message: It means this: So you need to do this:
Too many
plots
In the Picture Plot mode, the number
of plots exceeds the allowable upper
limit.
—
• Setup errors
When you see
this message: It means this: So you need to do this:
Out of Domain Attempting to input a value that is
outside the allowable input range.
Input a value that is within the
allowable range.
Invalid setting • Input of an improper V-Window value.
• Input of an improper value on the
range screen and use of that value for
execution.
• Attempting to create a table with a
Step value of 0.
• Attempting to input illegal V-Window
setting combinations.
Example: Xmin = 10, Xmax = 10
• Attempting to create a table in the
Recursion mode when the Start
value is greater than or equal to the
End value.
• The Edit Animations screen is
configured with the setting t0=t1 in
the Geometry mode.
• Internal calculation generated a
mathematical error (division by zero,
etc.) when executing a function
calculation, or a calculation in the
Financial mode or Statistics mode.
• Change the V-Window value so it is
within range.
• Input a proper range value.
• Specify a Step value other than 0.
• Enter values that have the proper
relationship with each other.
• Change the value so the Start value
is less than the End value.
• Configure the Edit Animations
screen so t0 and t1 are assigned
different values for the same
animation.
• Since the calculation contains one
or more values that cannot be
calculated, input different values
and try again.
Out of Range Calculation result that exceeds the
calculator display range.
Change the calculation formula.
α-13
• Other errors
When you see
this message: It means this: So you need to do this:
No Data The specified data does not exist.
(Occurs when a list or variable that
does not contain data is referenced.)
Change the data specification.
No File Attempting to recall a file from Picture
Memory (1 through 20) when there is
no file located at the applicable Picture
Memory number.
Specify a Picture Memory number
where a file is stored.
Not Enough
Elements
• The list you specified for a calculation
does not contain the number of
elements required to perform the
calculation.
• You attempted to execute a
statistical calculation using a list
whose elements are all zero for the
frequency data.
• Check the number of elements
required by the calculation you are
trying to perform and adjust the
number of list elements accordingly.
• For frequency data, use a list
whose elements contain values
greater than zero.
α-14
2. Input Ranges
Function Input range for real
number solutions
Internal
digits Precision Notes
sin
x
cos x
tan x
(DEG) | x | < 9 × (10
9
)°
(RAD) |
x | < 5 × 10
7
π rad
(GRA) | x | < 1 × 10
10
grad
15 digits
As a rule,
precision is
± 1 at the
10th digit.*
However, for tan
x :
|
x | ≠ 90(2 n +1): DEG
|
x | ≠ π /2(2 n +1): RAD
|
x | ≠ 100(2 n +1): GRA
sin
–1
x
cos
–1
x
tan
–1
x
| x | < 1
" "
|
x | < 1 × 10
100
sinh x
cosh x
tanh x
| x | < 230.9516564 " "
|
x | < 1 × 10
100
sinh
–1
x
cosh
–1
x
tanh
–1
x
| x | < 1 × 10
100
" "
1 <
x < 1 × 10
100
| x | < 1
log
x
In x 1 × 10
–99
< x < 1 × 10
100 " " • Complex numbers can be
used as arguments.
10
x
e x
–1 × 10
100
< x < 100
" " • Complex numbers can be
used as arguments.
–1 × 10
100
< x < 230.2585092
'
x
x 2
0 < x < 1 × 10
100
" " • Complex numbers can be
used as arguments.
| x | < 1 × 10
50
1/ x
3
'
x
| x | < 1 × 10
100
, x ≠ 0
" " • Complex numbers can be
used as arguments.
| x | < 1 × 10
100
x ! 0 < x < 69
( x is an integer) " "
n P r
n C r
Result < 1 × 10
100
n , r ( n and r are integers)
0 < r < n , n < 1 × 10
10 " "
Pol (
x , y ) x 2
+ y 2
< 1 × 10
100 " "
Rec
(
r ,
θ
)
|
r | < 1 × 10
100
(DEG) |
θ
| < 9 × (10
9
)°
(RAD) |
θ
| < 5 × 10
7
π rad
(GRA) |
θ
| < 1 × 10
10
grad
" "
However, for tan
θ
:
|
θ
| ≠ 90(2 n +1): DEG
|
θ
| ≠ π /2(2 n +1): RAD
|
θ
| ≠ 100(2 n +1): GRA
α-15
Function Input range for real
number solutions
Internal
digits Precision Notes
° ’ ”
← ⎯
° ’ ”
| a |, b , c < 1 × 10
100
0 < b , c
15 digits
As a rule,
precision is
± 1 at the
10th digit.*
|
x | < 1 × 10
100
Sexagesimal display:
|
x | < 1 × 10
7
^( x y
)
x > 0:
–1 × 10
100
< y log x < 100
x = 0 : y > 0
x < 0 : y = n , m
––––
2 n+1
( m , n are integers)
However;
–1 × 10
100
< y log | x | < 100
" "
• Complex numbers can be
used as arguments.
x '
y
y > 0 : x ≠ 0
–1 × 10
100
< 1
x log y < 100
y = 0 : x > 0
y < 0 : x = 2 n +1, 2n+1
––––
m
( m ≠ 0; m , n are integers)
However;
–1 × 10
100
< 1
x log | y | < 100
" "
• Complex numbers can be
used as arguments.
a b / c
Total of integer, numerator
and denominator must be
within 10 digits (includes
division marks).
" "
* For a single calculation, calculation error is ± 1 at the 10th digit. (In the case of exponential display,
calculation error is ± 1 at the last significant digit.) Errors are cumulative in the case of consecutive
calculations, which can also cause them to become large. (This is also true of internal consecutive
calculations that are performed in the case of ^(
x y
),
x '
y
, x ! ,
3
'
x
, n P r , n C r , etc.)
In the vicinity of a function’s singular point and point of inflection, errors are cumulative and may
become large.
Function Input range
Binary, octal,
decimal,
hexadecimal
calculation
Values fall within following ranges after conversion:
DEC: –2147483648 <
x < 2147483647
BIN: 1000000000000000 < x < 1111111111111111 (negative)
0 <
x < 111111111111111 (0, positive)
OCT: 20000000000 <
x < 37777777777 (negative)
0 < x < 17777777777 (0, positive)
HEX: 80000000 < x < FFFFFFFF (negative)
0 < x < 7FFFFFFF (0, positive)
E-Con2
Application
(English)
20100801
ε-1
E-Con2 Overview
All of the explanations provided here assume that you are already familiar
with the operating precautions, terminology, and operational procedures of
the calculator and the EA-200.
1. E-Con2 Overview
• From the Main Menu, enter the E-Con2 mode.
E-Con2 Main Menu
• The E-Con2 mode provides the functions listed below for simple and more efficient data
sampling using the CASIO EA-200.
• 1(SET) ...............Displays a screen for setting up the EA-200.
• 2(MEMORY) ......Displays a screen for saving EA-200 setup data under a file
name.
• 3(PROGRAM) ....Performs program conversion.
• This function can be used to convert EA-200 setup data
configured using E-Con2 to an EA-200 control program (or
EA-100 control program) that can run on the fx-9860G SD/fx-
9860G.
• It also can be used to convert data to a program that can be run
on a CFX-9850 Series/fx-7400 Series calculator.
• 4(START) ..........Starts data collection.
• 5(GRAPH) .........Graphs data sampled by the EA-200, and provides tools for
analyzing graphs. Graph Analysis tools include calculation of
periodic frequency, various types of regression, Fourier series
calculation, and more.
• 6(HELP) .............Displays E-Con2 help.
• Pressing the K key (Setup Preview) or a cursor key while the E-Con2 main menu is on
the screen displays a preview dialog box that shows the contents of the setup in the current
setup memory area.
To close the preview dialog box, press J.
Note
• For details about setup data and the current setup memory area, see “Using Setup
Memory” (page ε-24).
2010080120100801
ε-2
Using the Setup Wizard
2. Using the Setup Wizard
This section explains how to use the Setup Wizard to configure the EA-200 setup quickly
and easily simply by replying to questions as they appear.
k Setup Wizard Parameters
Setup Wizard lets you make changes to the following three EA-200 basic sampling
parameters using an interactive wizard format.
• Sensor (Select Sensor)
• Total Sampling Time
• Sampling Time Unit (Select Unit)
Note the following rules whenever you use the Setup Wizard.
• The EA-200 sampling channel is CH1 or SONIC.
• The trigger for a Setup Wizard setup is always the w key.
• To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard
Note
• To terminate Setup Wizard part way through and cancel the setup, press !J(QUIT).
1. Display the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1).
2. Press 1(SET) and then 1(WIZARD).
• This launches the Setup Wizard and displays the “Select Sensor” screen.
3. Press 1 to specify a CASIO sensor or 2 to specify a Vernier sensor.
• Pressing either key will display the corresponding sensor list.
4. Specify the sensor you want to use.
Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the sensor you want to use,
and then press w.
• If the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen appears, skip to step 6.
• If the sensor you specified has more than one option
(more detailed specifications, such as sampling
unit, mode, etc.), an option list will appear on the
display at this time. If this happens, advance to step
5 (where you will see an example of the screen that
appears when you select 1 - [Temperature] in step
4).
2010080120100801
ε-3
Using the Setup Wizard
5. Select the options for the sensor you specified in step 4.
Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the option you want to
select, and then press w.
• If the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen appears, advance to step 6.
Important!
When special settings are required by the sensor and/or option you select, other screens
other than the “Input Total Sampling Interval” screen will appear on the display. The
following shows where you should go to find information about the operations you need
to perform for each sensor/option selection.
If you select this sensor/option: Go here for more information:
[CASIO] - [Microphone] - [Sound wave & FFT] “Using Setup Wizard to Configure
Settings for FFT (Frequency
Characteristics) Data Sampling” on
page ε-4
[CASIO] - [Microphone] - [FFT only]
[VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Gate] “To configure a setup for PhotoGate
alone” on page ε-5
[VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Pulley] “To configure a setup for PhotoGate
and Smart Pulley” on page ε-5
[CASIO] - [Speaker] - [y=f(x)]
“Outputting the Waveform of a
Function through the Speaker” on
page ε-6
6. Use the number input keys to input the total sampling time. Just input a value.
In step 8 of this procedure, you will be able to specify the unit (seconds, minutes, hours,
days) of the value you input here.
Note
• With some sensors ([CASIO] - [Microphone] - [Sound wave], etc.) sampling time is
limited to a few seconds. The unit for such a sensor is always seconds, and so the
“Select Unit” screen does not appear.
• If you specify a total sampling time value in the range of 10 seconds to 23 hours, 59
minutes, 59 seconds, real-time graphing will be performed during sampling. This is the
same as selecting the Real-time Mode on the “Advanced Setup” screen.
7. After inputting total sampling time value you want, press w.
• This displays the “Select Unit” screen.
8. Use number keys b through e to specify the unit for the value you specified in step 6.
• This displays a confirmation screen like the one
shown nearby.
2010080120100801
ε-4
Using the Setup Wizard
9. If there is no problem with the contents of the confirmation screen, press 1.
If you need to change the setup, press 6 or J. This will return to the screen in step 4
(for setting the total sampling interval), where you can change the setting.
• Pressing 1 will take you to the final Setup Wizard
screen.
10. Press number keys described below to specify what you want to do with the setup you
have configured.
b(Start Setup) ................Starts sampling using the setup (page ε-30)
c(Save Setup-MEM) .....Saves the setup (page ε-24)
d(Convert Program) ......Converts the setup to a program (page ε-27)
k Using Setup Wizard to Configure Settings for FFT (Frequency
Characteristics) Data Sampling
When you perform sound sampling executed by the EA-200’s built-in microphone (by
specifying [CASIO] - [Microphone] as the sensor), Setup Wizard will provide you with three
options: [Sound wave], [Sound wave & FFT], and [FFT only]. “Sound wave” records the
following two dimensions for the sampled sound data: elapsed time (horizontal axis) and
volume (vertical axis). “FFT” records the following two dimensions: frequency (horizontal
axis) and volume (vertical axis).
The following shows the settings for recording FFT data.
1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using
Setup Wizard” on page ε-2.
2. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [CASIO] - [Microphone] - [Sound wave & FFT] or
[CASIO] - [Microphone] - [FFT only].
• This causes a “Select FFT Range” screen to appear.
• You can select one of four settings for FFT Range. The setting you select will
automatically apply the applicable fixed parameters shown below.
Setting
Parameter
Frequency pitch
Upper limit of sampling frequency
Sampling interval
Number of samples
2 Hz
1000 Hz
8192
2 - 1000 Hz:
1
61 sec
μ
4 Hz
2000 Hz
8192
4 - 2000 Hz:
2
31 sec
μ
6 Hz
3000 Hz
8192
6 - 3000 Hz:
3
20 sec
μ
8 Hz
4000 Hz
4096
8 - 4000 Hz:
4
31 sec
μ
3. Use function keys 1 through 4 to select an FFT Range setting.
• Selecting an FFT Range causes the final Setup Wizard screen to appear.
4. Perform step 10 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page ε-2
to finalize the procedure.
2010080120100801
ε-5
Using the Setup Wizard
k Using Setup Wizard to Configure a PhotoGate Setup
Connection of a Vernier PhotoGate requires configuration of setup parameters that are
slightly different from parameters for other types of sensors.
• To configure a setup for PhotoGate alone
1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using
Setup Wizard” on page ε-2.
2. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Gate].
• This displays a screen where you specify whether PhotoGate is connected to the CH1
or SONIC channel.
3. Press 1 to specify CH1 or 2 to specify SONIC.
• This causes a “Gate Status” screen to appear.
• “Open” means the photo path is not blocked, while “Close” means the photo path is
blocked.
• The gate status defines what PhotoGate status should cause timing to start, and what
status should cause timing to stop.
Open-Open ..............Timing starts when the gate opens, and continues until it closes
and then opens again.
Open-Close..............Timing starts when the gate opens, and continues until it closes.
Close-Open..............Timing starts when the gate closes, and continues until it opens.
Close-Close .............Timing starts when the gate closes, and continues until it opens
and then closes again.
4. Use function keys 1 through 4 to select a Gate Status setting.
• Selecting a gate status causes a screen for specifying the number of samples to
appear.
5. Input an integer in the range of 1 to 255 to specify the number of samples.
6. Perform step 10 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page ε-2
to finalize the procedure.
• To configure a setup for PhotoGate and Smart Pulley
1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using
Setup Wizard” on page ε-2.
2. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [VERNIER] - [Photogate] - [Pulley].
• This causes an “Input Distance(m)” screen to appear.
• The distance you specify here is the distance the weight travels after it is released.
• Input a value in the range of 0.1 to 4 to specify the distance in meters.
3. Perform step 10 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” on page ε-2
to finalize the procedure.
2010080120100801
ε-6
Using the Setup Wizard
k Outputting the Waveform of a Function through the Speaker
Normally, the Setup Wizard helps you configure setups for sensors connected to the EA-
200. If you select [CASIO] - [Speaker] - [y=f(x)] on the “Select Sensor” screen, however, it
configures the EA-200 to output the sound that corresponds to a function that you input and
graph on the calculator.
• To configure a setup for speaker output
1. Connect the data communication cable (SB-62) to the communication port of the
calculator and the MASTER port of the EA-200.
2. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using
Setup Wizard” on page ε-2.
3. On the “Select Sensor” screen, select [CASIO] - [Speaker] - [y=f(x)].
This displays a screen like the one shown nearby.
4. Press w to advance to the View Window setting screen.
• The following settings are configured automatically: Ymin = –1.5 and Ymax = 1.5. Do
not change these settings.
5. Press w or J to advance to the graph relation list.
6. In line “Y1”, input the function of the waveform for the sound you want to input.
• Note that the angle unit is always radians.
• Input a function where the value of “Y” is within the
range of –1.5 to +1.5.
7. Press 6(DRAW) to graph the function.
• This graphs the function and displays a vertical
cursor line as shown in the sample display nearby.
Use the graph to specify the range that you want to
output to the speaker.
8. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the cursor to the start point of the output, and
then press w to register it.
2010080120100801
ε-7
Using the Setup Wizard
9. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the cursor to the end point of the output, and
then press w to register it.
• After you specify the start point and end point, an output frequency dialog box shown
below appears on the display.
→
10. Input a percent value for the output frequency value you want.
• To output the original sound as-is, specify 100%. To raise the original sound by one
octave, input a value of 200%. To lower the original sound by one octave, input a value
of 50%.
11. After inputting an output frequency value, press w.
• This outputs the waveform between the start point and end point from the EA-200
speaker.
• If the sound you configured cannot be output for some reason, the message “Range
Error” will appear. If this happens, press J to scroll back through the previous setting
screens and change the setup as required.
12. To terminate sound output, press the EA-200 [START/STOP] key.
13. Press w.
• This displays a screen like the one shown nearby.
14. Perform one of the following operations, depending on what you want to do.
To change the output frequency and try again:
Press 1(Yes) to return to the “Output Frequency” dialog box. Next, repeat the above
steps from step 10.
To change the output range of the waveform graph and try again:
Press 6(No) to return to the graph screen in step 7. Next, repeat the above steps from
step 8.
To change the function:
Press 6(No) and then J to return to the graph relation list in step 6. Next, repeat the
above steps from step 6.
To exit the procedure and return to the E-Con2 main menu:
Press 6(No) and then press J twice.
2010080120100801
ε-8
Using Advanced Setup
3. Using Advanced Setup
Advanced Setup provides you with total control over a number of parameters that you can
adjust to configure the EA-200 setup that suits your particular needs.
k Advanced Setup Operations
• To configure an EA-200 setup using Advanced Setup
The following procedure describes the general steps for using Advanced Setup. Refer to the
pages as noted for more information.
1. Display the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1).
2. Press 1(SET). This displays the “Setup EA-200” submenu.
3. Press 2(ADVANCE). This displays the Advanced Setup menu.
Advanced Setup Menu
4. If you want to configure a custom probe at this point, press f(Custom Probe). Next,
follow the steps under “To configure a custom probe setup” on page ε-19.
• You can also configure a custom probe during the procedure under “To configure
Channel Setup settings” on page ε-9.
• Custom probe configurations you have stored in memory can be selected using
Channel in step 5, below.
5. Use the Advanced Setup keys described below to set other parameters.
• b(Channel) ......Displays a screen that shows the sensors that are currently
assigned to each channel (CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC, Mic). You can
also use this dialog to change sensor assignments. See “Channel
Setup” on page ε-9 for more information.
• c(Sample) .......Displays a screen for selecting the sampling mode, and for
specifying the sampling interval, the number of samples, and the
warm-up mode. When “Fast” is selected for “Mode”, this dialog box
also displays a setting for turning FFT (frequency characteristics)
graphing on and off. See “Sample Setup” on page ε-11 for more
information.
• d(Trigger) ........Displays a screen for configuring sampling start (trigger)
conditions. See “Trigger Setup” on page ε-13 for more information.
• e(Graph) .........Displays a screen for configuring graph settings. See “Graph
Setup” on page ε-17 for more information.
• You can return the settings on the above setup screens (b through e) using the
procedure described under “To return setup parameters to their initial defaults” below.
2010080120100801
ε-9
Using Advanced Setup
6. After you configure a setup, you can use the function key operations described below to
start sampling or perform other operations.
• 1(START) ..........Starts sampling using the setup (page ε-30).
• 2(MULTI) ...........Starts MULTIMETER mode sampling using the setup (page
ε-23).
• 3(MEMORY) ......Saves the setup (page ε-24).
• 4(PROGRAM) ....Converts the setup to a program (page ε-27).
• 5(GRAPH) .........Graphs data sampled by the EA-200, and provides tools for
analyzing graphs (page ε-35).
• 6(ABOUT) ..........Displays version information about the EA-200 unit that is
currently connected to the calculator.
• To return setup parameters to their initial defaults
Perform the following procedure when you want to return the parameters of the setup in the
current setup memory area to their initial defaults.
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) is on the display, press g(Initialize).
2. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to initialize the
setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without initializing the setup, press 6(No).
k Channel Setup
The Channel Setup screen shows the sensors that are currently assigned to each channel
(CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC, Mic).
• To configure Channel Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) is on the display, press b(Channel).
• This displays the Channel Setup screen.
Currently selected channel
Channel Setup Screen
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the channel whose setting
you want to change.
2010080120100801
ε-10
Using Advanced Setup
3. What you need to do next depends on the currently selected channel.
• CH1, CH2, or CH3
Press a function key to display a menu of sensors that can be assigned to the selected
channel.
1(CASIO) ..............Displays a menu of CASIO sensors.
2(VERNIR) ...........Displays a menu of Vernier sensors.
3(CUSTOM) .........Displays a menu of custom probes.
4(None) ................Press this key when you want leave the channel without any
sensor assigned to it.
• SONIC Channel
Press a function key to display a menu of sensors that can be assigned to this channel.
1(CASIO) ..............Displays a menu of CASIO sensors, but only “Motion” can be
selected.
2(VERNIR) ...........Displays a menu of Vernier sensors. You can select “Motion” or
“Photogate”.
Note
• On the menu that appears after you select “Motion” from either the CASIO or
Vernier sensor menu, select either “meters” or “feet” as the sampling unit.
• After selecting “Motion” from either the CASIO or Vernier sensor menu, you can
press the K key to toggle “smoothing (correction of measurement error)” on
(“-Smooth” displayed) and off (“-Smooth” not displayed).
• From the menu that appears after you select “Photogate” as the sensor, select
[Gate] or [Pulley].
[Gate] ...............Select this option when using the PhotoGate sensor alone.
[Pulley] ............. Select this option when using the PhotoGate sensor along with a
smart pulley.
4(None) ................Select this option to disable the SONIC channel.
• Mic Channel
For this channel, the sensor is automatically set to Built-in (External) Microphone.
However, you need to configure the settings described below.
1(Sound) ..............Select this option to record elapsed time and volume 2-
dimensional sampled sound data (elapsed time on the horizontal
axis, volume on the vertical axis).
2(FFT) ..................Select this option to record frequency and volume 2-dimensional
sampled sound data (frequency on the horizontal axis, volume on
the vertical axis).
4(None) ................Select this option to disable the Mic channel.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as many times as necessary to configure all the channels you want.
5. After all the settings are the way you want, press w.
• This returns to the Advanced Setup menu.
2010080120100801
ε-11
Using Advanced Setup
Note
• When you select a channel on the Channel Setup
screen, the sampling range of the selected channel
appears in the bottom line of the screen.
In the above example, the range of the temperature sensor assigned to CH2 appears on
the display.
If the sampling range value is too long to fit on the display, only the part of the value that
fits on the display will be shown.
k Sample Setup
The Sample Setup screen lets you configure a number of settings that control sampling.
• To configure Sample Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) is on the display, press c(Sample).
• This displays the Sample Setup screen, with the
“Mode” line highlighted, which indicates that you can
select the sampling mode.
2. Select the sampling mode that suits the type of sampling you want to perform.
To do this: Press this key: To select this
mode:
Graph data in real-time as it is sampled 1(R-Time) Real-time
Perform sampling of high-speed phenomena
(sound, etc.) 2(Fast) Fast
Perform sampling over a long time (weather,
etc.)
• The EA-200 enters a power off sleep state
while standing by.
4(Extend) Extended
Sample sound using the EA-200’s built-in
microphone 6(g)1(Sound) Sound
Record the time of the occurrence of a particular
trigger event as an absolute value starting from
0, which is the sampling start time
6(g)2(Clock) Clock
Perform periodic sampling, from a start trigger
event to an end trigger event 6(g)3(Period) Period
Perform sampling other than that described
above 3(Norm) Normal
2010080120100801
ε-12
Using Advanced Setup
• Note that the mode you select also determines the channel(s) you can use.
Sampling Mode Selectable Channel(s)
Real-time, Extended, Normal CH1, CH2, CH3, SONIC
Fast CH1, Mic
Sound Mic
Clock, Period CH1
3. To change the sampling interval setting, move the highlighting to “Interval”. Next, press
1 to display a dialog box for specifying the sampling interval.
• The range of values you can select depends on the current sampling mode setting.
If this sampling mode is selected: This is the allowable setting range:
Real-time 0.2 to 299 sec
Fast 20 to 500 μsec
Extended 5 to 240 min
Period “=Trigger” only (no value input required)
Sound 20 to 27 μsec
Clock “=Trigger” only (no value input required)
Normal 0.0005 to 299 sec
4. To change the number of samples setting, move the highlighting to “Number”. Next, press
1 to display a dialog box for specifying the number of samples.
• You can specify a value in the range of 10 to 30,000.
• The total sampling time shown at the bottom of the dialog box is calculated by
multiplying the “Sampling Interval” value you specified in step 3 by the number of
samples you specify here.
Important!
• When all of the following conditions exist, a “Distance” setting appears in place of the
“Number” setting. See “To configure the Distance setting” (page ε-13) for information
about configuring the “Distance” setting.
- Channel setup (page ε-9): 2(VERNIR) - [Photogate] - [Pulley]
- Sampling mode (page ε-11): Clock
5. To change the warm-up time setting, move the highlighting to “Warm-up”. Next, perform
one of the function key operations described below.
Note
• The “Warm-up” setting will not be displayed on the Sample Setup screen if “Fast”,
“Sound” or “Extended” is currently selected as the sampling mode.
To do this: Press this key:
Have the warm-up time for each sensor set automatically 1(Auto)
Input a warm-up time, in seconds, manually 2(Manual)
Disable the warm-up time 3(None)
2010080120100801
ε-13
Using Advanced Setup
Important!
• When the following condition exists, an “FFT Graph” setting appears in place of the
“Warm-up” setting. See “To configure the FFT Graph setting” below, for information
about configuring the “FFT Graph” setting.
- Sampling mode (page ε-11): Fast
6. After all the settings are the way you want, press w.
• This returns to the Advanced Setup menu.
• To configure the Distance setting
In place of step 3 of the procedure under “To configure Sample Setup settings”, press 1 to
display a dialog box for specifying the distance the weight travels in meters.
• Specify a value in the range of 0.1 to 4 meters.
• To configure the FFT Graph setting
In place of step 5 of the procedure under “To configure Sample Setup settings”, press 1 to
display a dialog box for turning frequency characteristic graphing (FFT Graph) on and off.
To do this: Press this key:
Turn on graphing of frequency characteristics after sampling 1(On)
Turn off graphing of frequency characteristics after sampling 2(Off)
k Trigger Setup
You can use the Trigger Setup screen to specify the event that causes sampling to start (w
key operation, etc.). The event that causes sampling to start is called the “trigger source”,
which is indicated as “Source” on the Trigger Setup screen.
The following table describes each of the six available trigger sources.
To start sampling when this happens:
Select this trigger source:
When the w key is pressed [EXE] key
After the specified number of seconds are counted down Count Down
When input at CH1 reaches a specified value CH1
When input at the SONIC channel reaches a specified value SONIC
When the EA-200’s built-in microphone detects sound Mic
When the EA-200’s [START/STOP] key is pressed [START] key
2010080120100801
ε-14
Using Advanced Setup
• To configure Trigger Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) is on the display, press d(Trigger).
• This displays the Trigger Setup screen with the
“Source” line highlighted.
• The function menu items that appears in the menu
bar depend on the sampling mode selected with
Sample Setup (page ε-11). The nearby screen shows
the function menu when “Normal” is selected as the
sample sampling mode.
2. Use the function keys to select the trigger source you want.
• The following shows the trigger sources that can be selected for each sampling mode.
Sampling Mode Trigger Source
Real-time 1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cont) : Count Down
Fast 1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cont) : Count Down, 3(CH1), 5(Mic)
Normal 1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cont) : Count Down, 3(CH1),
4(Sonic), 5([START]) : [START] key
Sound 1(EXE) : [EXE] key, 2(Cont) : Count Down, 5(Mic)
• The trigger source is always “[EXE] key” when the sampling mode is “Extended”, and
“CH1” when the sampling mode is “Clock” or “Period”.
3. Perform one of the following operations, in accordance with the trigger source that was
selected in step 2.
If this is the
trigger source: Do this next:
[EXE] key Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced
Setup menu.
Count Down Specify the countdown start time. See “To specify the countdown
start time” below.
CH1
Specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge direction. See
“To specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge type” on
page ε-15, “To configure trigger threshold, trigger start edge, and
trigger end edge settings” or “To configure PhotoGate trigger start
and end settings” on page ε-16.
SONIC
Specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor level. See
“To specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor level” on
page ε-17.
Mic Specify microphone sensitivity. See “To specify microphone
sensitivity” on page ε-15.
[START] key Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced
Setup menu.
2010080120100801
ε-15
Using Advanced Setup
• To specify the countdown start time
1. Move the highlighting to “Timer”.
2. Press 1(Time) to display a dialog box for specifying the countdown start time.
3. Input a value in seconds from 1 to 10.
4. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu.
• To specify microphone sensitivity
1. Move the highlighting to “Sense” and then press one of the function keys described
below.
To select this level of microphone sensitivity: Press this key:
Low 1(Low)
Medium 2(Middle)
High 3(High)
2. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8).
• To specify the trigger threshold value and trigger edge type
Perform the following steps when “Fast”, “Normal”, or “Clock” is specified as the sampling
mode (page ε-11).
1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”.
2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is
value that data needs to attain before sampling starts.
Sensor assigned to CH1 or SONIC by Channel
Setup (page ε-9)
Measurement unit supported by assigned sensor
3. Input the value you want, and then press w.
4. Move the highlighting to “Edge”.
5. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of edge: Press this key:
Falling 1(Fall)
Rising 2(Rise)
6. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8).
2010080120100801
ε-16
Using Advanced Setup
• To configure trigger threshold, trigger start edge, and trigger end edge
settings
Perform the following steps when “Period” is specified as the sampling mode (page ε-11).
1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”.
2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is
value that data needs to attain before sampling starts.
3. Input the value you want.
4. Move the highlighting to “Start to”.
5. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of edge: Press this key:
Falling 1(Fall)
Rising 2(Rise)
6. Move the highlighting to “End Edge”.
7. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of edge: Press this key:
Falling 1(Fall)
Rising 2(Rise)
8. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8).
• To configure PhotoGate trigger start and end settings
Perform the following steps when CH1 is selected as a Photogate trigger source.
1. Move the highlighting to “Start to”.
2. Press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this PhotoGate status: Press this key:
PhotoGate closed 1(Close)
PhotoGate open 2(Open)
3. Move the highlighting to “End Gate”.
4. Press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this PhotoGate status: Press this key:
PhotoGate closed 1(Close)
PhotoGate open 2(Open)
5. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8).
2010080120100801
ε-17
Using Advanced Setup
• To specify the trigger threshold value and motion sensor level
1. Move the highlighting to “Threshold”.
2. Press 1(EDIT) to display a dialog box for specifying the trigger threshold value, which is
value that data needs to attain before sampling starts.
3. Input the value you want, and then press w.
4. Move the highlighting to “Level”.
5. Press one of the function keys described below.
To select this type of level: Press this key:
Below 1(Below)
Above 2(Above)
6. Press w to finalize Trigger Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8).
k Graph Setup
Use the Graph Setup screen to configure settings for the graph produced after sampling is
complete. You use the Sample Setup settings (page ε-11) to turn graphing on or off.
• To configure Graph Setup settings
1. While the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) is on the display, press e(Graph).
• This displays the Graph Setup screen.
Currently selected item
Graph Setup Screen
2. To change the graph source data name display setting, use the f and c cursor keys
to move the highlighting to “Graph Func”. Next, press one of the function keys described
below.
To specify this graph source data name display setting: Press this key:
Display source data name 1(On)
Hide source data name 2(Off)
• When the graph data is stored in a sample data memory file, the file name appears as
the source data name. When the graph data is stored in current data area, the channel
name appears.
Note
• For details about sample data memory and current data area, see “Using Sample Data
Memory” (page ε-33).
2010080120100801
ε-18
Using Advanced Setup
3. To change the trace operation coordinate display setting, use the f and c cursor keys
to move the highlighting to “Coord”. Next, press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this coordinate display setting for the trace
operation: Press this key:
Display trace coordinates 1(On)
Hide trace coordinates 2(Off)
4. To change the numeric axes display setting, use the f and c cursor keys to move the
highlighting to “Econ Axes”. Next, press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this axes display setting: Press this key:
Display axes 1(On)
Hide axes 2(Off)
5. To change the real-time scroll setting, use the f and c cursor keys to move the
highlighting to “Real Scroll”. Next, press one of the function keys described below.
To specify this real-time scrolling setting: Press this key:
Real-time scrolling on 1(On)
Real-time scrolling off 2(Off)
6. Press w to finalize Graph Setup and return to the Advanced Setup menu.
2010080120100801
ε-19
Using a Custom Probe
4. Using a Custom Probe
You can use the procedures in this section to configure a custom probe for use with the EA-
200. The term “custom probe” means any sensor other than the CASIO or Vernier sensors
specified as standard for the E-Con2 mode.
k Configuring a Custom Probe Setup
To configure a custom probe setup, you must input values for the constants of the fixed
linear interpolation formula (ax + b). The required constants are slope (a) and intercept (b).
x in the above expression (ax + b) is the sampled voltage value (sampling range: 0 to 5
volts).
• To configure a custom probe setup
1. From the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1), press 1(SET) and then 2(ADVANCE) to
display the Advanced Setup menu.
2. On the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8), press f(Custom Probe) to display the
Custom Probe List.
• The message “No Custom Probe” appears if the Custom Probe List is empty.
3. Press 2(NEW).
• This displays a custom probe setup screen like the
one shown nearby.
4. Press 1(EDIT).
5. Input up to 18 characters for the custom probe name, and then press w.
• This will cause the highlighting to move to “Slope”.
6. Use the function keys described below to configure the custom probe setup.
• To change the setting of an item, first use the f and c cursor keys to move the
highlighting to the item. Next, use the function keys to select the setting you want.
(1) Slope
Press 1(EDIT) to input the slope for the linear interpolation formula.
(2) Intercept
Press 1(EDIT) to input the intercept for the linear interpolation formula.
(3) Unit Name
Press 1(EDIT) to input up to eight characters for the unit name.
(4) Warm-up
Press 1(EDIT) to input the warm-up time.
7. Press w and then input a memory number (1 to 99).
• This saves the custom probe setup and returns to the Custom Probe List, which should
now contain the new custom probe setup you configured.
2010080120100801
ε-20
Using a Custom Probe
• To recall the specifications of a Vernier sensor and configure custom
probe settings
1. Perform the first two steps of the procedure under “To configure a custom probe setup”
on page ε-19.
2. Press 5(VERNIR).
• This displays a Vernier sensor list.
3. Use the f and c keys to move the highlighting to the Vernier sensor whose setting
you want to use as the basis of the custom probe settings, and then press w.
• The name and specifications of the Vernier sensor you select will appear on the custom
probe setup screen.
• To complete this procedure, perform steps 4 through 7 under “To configure a custom
probe setup” (page ε-19).
k Auto Calibrating a Custom Probe
Auto calibration automatically corrects the slope and intercept values of a custom probe
setup based on two actual samples.
Important!
• Before performing the procedure below, you should prepare two conditions whose
measurement values are known.
• When inputting reference value in step 5 of the procedure below, input the exact known
measurement value of the condition you will sample in step 4. When inputting reference
value in step 7 of the procedure below, input the exact known measurement value of the
condition you will sample in step 6.
• To auto calibrate a custom probe
1. Connect the calculator and EA-200, and connect the custom probe you want to auto
calibrate to CH1 of the EA-200.
2. What you should do first depends on whether you are configuring a new custom probe for
calibration, or editing the configuration of an existing custom probe.
If you are configuring a new custom probe:
• Perform steps 1 through 6 of the procedure under “To configure a custom probe setup”
on page ε-19.
• Auto calibrate will automatically set the slope and intercept, so you do not need to
specify them in step 6 of the above procedure.
If you are editing the configuration of an existing custom probe:
(1) On the Custom Probe List, use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of
the custom probe you want to edit, and then press 3(EDIT).
(2) Perform the procedure starting from step 6 under “To configure a custom probe setup”
on page ε-19.
2010080120100801
ε-21
Using a Custom Probe
3. Press 2(CALIB).
• This will start the first sampling operation with the sensor connected to EA-200’s CH1,
and then display a screen like the one shown below.
First sampling operation
Real-time display of sampled values
4. After the sampled value stabilizes, hold down w for a few seconds.
• This will register the first sampled value and display it on the screen. At this time the
cursor will appear at the bottom of the display, ready for input of a reference value.
5. Use the key pad to input the reference value for the first sampled value, and then press
w.
• This cause sampling of the second value to be performed automatically, and display the
same type of screen that appeared in step 3.
Second sampling operation
6. After the sampled value stabilizes, hold down w for a few seconds.
• This will register the second sampled value and display it on the screen. The cursor will
appear at the bottom of the display, ready for input of a reference value.
7. Use the key pad to input the reference value for the second sampled value, and then
press w.
• This will return to the custom probe setup screen.
• The E-Con2 will calculate the slope and intercept
value based on the two reference values that you
input, and configure the settings automatically. The
automatically configured values will appear on the
custom probe setup screen, where you can view
them.
8. Press w, and then input a memory number from 1 to 99.
• This saves the custom probe setup and returns to the custom probe list.
2010080120100801
ε-22
Using a Custom Probe
k Zero Adjusting a Custom Probe
This procedure zero adjusts a custom probe and sets its intercept value based on an actual
sample using the applicable custom probe.
• To zero adjust a custom probe
1. Connect the calculator and EA-200, and connect the custom probe you want to zero
adjust to CH1 of the EA-200.
2. What you should do first depends on whether you are configuring a new custom probe for
zero adjusting, or editing the configuration of an existing custom probe.
If you are configuring a new custom probe:
• Perform steps 1 through 6 of the procedure under “To configure a custom probe setup”
on page ε-19.
• Auto calibrate will automatically set the intercept, so you do not need to specify it in step
6 of the above procedure.
If you are editing the configuration of an existing custom probe:
(1) On the Custom Probe List, use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of
the custom probe you want to edit, and then press 3(EDIT).
(2) Perform the procedure starting from step 6 under “To configure a custom probe setup”
on page ε-19.
3. Press 3(ZERO).
• This will start the sampling operation with the sensor
connected to EA-200’s CH1, and then display a
screen like the one shown nearby.
4. At the point your want to perform zero adjustment (the point that the displayed value is
the appropriate zero adjust value), press w.
• This will return to the custom probe setup screen.
• The E-Con2 will set the intercept value automatically
based on the sampled value. The automatically
configured value will appear on the custom probe
setup screen, where you can view it.
5. Press w, and then input a memory number from 1 to 99.
• This saves the custom probe setup and returns to the custom probe list.
2010080120100801
ε-23
Using the MULTIMETER Mode
5. Using the MULTIMETER Mode
You can use the Channel Setup screen (page ε-9) to configure a channel so that EA-200
MULTIMETER mode sampling is triggered by a calculator operation.
• To use the MULTIMETER mode
1. Connect the calculator and EA-200, and connect the sensors you want to the applicable
EA-200 channels.
2. From the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8), use the Channel Setup screen (page ε-9) to
configure sensor setups for each channel you will be using.
3. After configuring the sensor setups, press w to return to the Advanced Setup menu
(page ε-8), and then press 2(MULTI).
• This starts sampling in the EA-200 MULTIMETER
mode and displays a list of sample values for each
channel.
• Displayed sample data is refreshed at 0.5-second
intervals.
• Do not connect sensors to any other channels except
for those you specified in step 2.
• Data sampled in the MULTIMETER mode is not saved in memory.
4. To end MULTIMETER mode sampling, press the w key.
2010080120100801
ε-24
Using Setup Memory
6. Using Setup Memory
Creating EA-200 setup data using the Setup Wizard or Advanced Setup causes the data
to be stored in the “current setup memory area”. The current contents of the current setup
memory area are overwritten whenever you create other setup data.
You can use setup memory to save the current setup memory area contents to calculator
memory to keep it from being overwritten, if you want.
k Saving a Setup
A setup can be saved when any one of the following conditions exist.
• After configuring a new setup with Setup Wizard (page ε-2)
• After configuring a new setup with Advanced Setup (page ε-8)
• While the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1) is on the display
Details on saving a setup are listed below.
• To save a setup
1. If the final Setup Wizard screen (page ε-4) is on the display, advance to step 2. If it isn’t,
start the save operation by performing one of the function key operations described
below.
- If the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) is on the display, press 3(MEMORY).
- If the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1) is on the display, press 2(MEMORY).
• Performing any one of the above operations causes the setup memory list to appear.
• The message “No Setup-MEM” appears if setup memory is empty.
2. If you are starting from the final Setup Wizard screen, press c(Save Setup-MEM).
If you are starting from another screen, press 2(SAVE).
• This displays the screen for inputting the setup name.
3. Input up to 18 characters for the setup name.
4. Press w and then input a memory number (1 to 99).
• If you start from the final Setup Wizard screen (page ε-4), this saves the setup and the
message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the final Setup Wizard screen
(page ε-4).
• If you start from the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) or the E-Con2 main menu (page
ε-1), this saves the setup and returns to the setup memory list which includes the name
you assigned it.
Important!
• Since you assign both a setup name and a file number to each setup, you can assign the
same name to multiple setups, if you want.
2010080120100801
ε-25
Using Setup Memory
k Using and Managing Setups in Setup Memory
All of the setups you save are shown in the setup memory list. After selecting a setup in the
list, you can use it to sample data or you can edit it.
• To preview saved setup data
You can use the following procedure to check the contents of a setup before you use it for
sampling.
1. On the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1), press 2(MEMORY) to display the setup memory
list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press K(Setup Preview).
• This displays the preview dialog box.
4. To close the preview dialog box, press J.
• To recall a setup and use it for sampling
Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with the EA-200.
1. Connect the calculator to the EA-200.
2. Turn on EA-200 power.
3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the
appropriate EA-200 channel.
4. Prepare the item whose data is to be sampled.
5. On the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1), press 2(MEMORY) to display the setup memory
list.
6. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
7. Press 1(START).
8. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1.
• Pressing w sets up the EA-200 and then starts sampling.
• To clear the confirmation message without sampling, press 6.
Note
• See “Operations during a sampling operation” on page ε-31 for information about
operations you can perform while a sampling operation is in progress.
2010080120100801
ε-26
Using Setup Memory
• To change the name of setup data
1. On the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1), press 2(MEMORY) to display the setup memory
list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press 3(RENAME).
• This displays the screen for inputting the setup name.
4. Input up to 18 characters for the setup name, and then press w.
• This changes the setup name and returns to the setup memory list.
• To delete setup data
1. On the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1), press 2(MEMORY) to display the setup memory
list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press 4(DELETE).
4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to delete the
setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without deleting anything, press 6(No).
• To recall setup data
Recalling setup data stores it in the current setup memory area. You can then use Advanced
Setup to edit the setup. This capability comes in handy when you need to perform a setup
that is slightly different from one you have stored in memory.
1. On the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1), press 2(MEMORY) to display the setup memory
list.
2. Use the f and c cursor keys to highlight the name of the setup you want.
3. Press 5(LOAD).
4. In response to the confirmation message that appears, press 1(Yes) to recall the setup.
• To clear the confirmation message without recalling the setup, press 6(No).
Note
• Recalling setup data replaces any other data currently in the current setup memory area.
2010080120100801
ε-27
Using Program Converter
7. Using Program Converter
Program Converter converts an EA-200 setup you configured using Setup Wizard or
Advanced Setup to a program that can run on the calculator. You can also use Program
Converter to convert a setup to a CFX-9850 Series/fx-7400 Series-compatible program.*1 *2
*1 See the documentation that came with your scientific calculator or EA-200 for information
about how to use a converted program.
*2 See online help (PROGRAM CONVERTER HELP) for information about supported CFX-
9850 Series and fx-7400 Series models.
k Converting a Setup to a Program
A setup can be converted to a program when any one of the following conditions exists.
• After configuring a new setup with Setup Wizard (page ε-2)
• After configuring a new setup with Advanced Setup (page ε-8)
• While the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1) is on the display
The program converter procedure is identical in all of the above cases.
• To convert a setup to a program
1. Start the converter operation by performing one of the key operations described below.
- If the final Setup Wizard screen (page ε-4) is on the display, press d(Convert
Program).
- If the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) is on the display, press 4(PROGRAM).
- If the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1) is on the display, press 3(PROGRAM).
• After you perform any one of the above operations,
the program converter screen will appear on the
display.
2. Enter up to eight characters for the program name.
Note
Using the program converter initial default settings will create a program like the one
below.
• Associated Scientific Calculator: fx-9860 Series
• Associated Data Analyzer: EA-200
• Calibration: None
• Password: None
If you want to use these settings the way they are without changing them, skip steps 3
through 7 and go directly to step 8. If you want to change any of the settings, perform the
applicable operations in steps 3 through 7.
2010080120100801
ε-28
Using Program Converter
3. Specify the scientific calculator model to be associated with the program. Perform one of
the following key operations to associate the program with a scientific calculator.
To associate the program with this calculator: Perform this key operation:
fx-9860 Series 1(CALC)1(9860)
CFX-9850 Series 1(CALC)2(9850)
fx-7400 Series 1(CALC)3(7400)
• The number part of the scientific calculator model number you specify will appear in line
“F1:” of the program converter screen.
Note
• For information about 1(CALC)4(→38k), see “Converting a CFX-9850 Series
Program to a fx-9860 Series Compatible Program” (page ε-29).
4. Specify the Data Analyzer model (EA-100 or EA-200) to be associated with the program.
Perform one of the following key operations to associate the program with a Data
Analyzer.
To associate the program with this Data Analyzer: Perform this key operation:
EA-200 2(TYPE)1(200)
EA-100 2(TYPE)2(100)
• The number part of the Data Analyzer model number you specify will appear in line
“F2:” of the program converter screen.
Important!
• Note that the capabilities of the EA-100 and EA-200 are different. Because of this, you
should keep in mind that an EA-200 program converted to an EA-100 program and
used to perform sampling with an EA-100 setup may not produce the desired results.
5. If you plan to use a custom probe connected to CH1 of the Data Analyzer, specify
whether calibration or zero adjust should be performed. Perform one of the following key
operations to configure the desired setting.
To perform this operation: Perform this key operation:
Calibration of the CH1 custom probe 3(CALIB)1(CALIB)
Zero adjust of the CH1 custom probe 3(CALIB)2(ZERO)
No calibration 3(CALIB)3(None)
• The operation you specify will appear in line “F3:” of the program converter screen.
6. To password protect the program, press 4().
• This will cause the “Password?” prompt and
password input field to appear under the program
name input field.
2010080120100801
ε-29
Using Program Converter
7. Enter up to eight characters for the password.
• If you change your mind about assigning a password, press J here. This will cause
the password input field to disappear and cancel password input.
8. After everything is the way you want, press w to convert the program in accordance with
the setup.
• The message “Complete!” appears when conversion is complete. To clear the message
and return to the screen that was on the display in step 1, press w or J.
k Converting a CFX-9850 Series Program to a fx-9860 Series Compatible
Program
To use an EA-200 control program created on the CFX-9850 Series calculator (for use on
the CFX-9850) on the E-Con2, you need to convert the program to an fx-9860 program.
Conversion can be performed using the program converter.
EA-200 Control Program for
CFX-9850 Series Convert EA-200 Control Program for
fx-9860 Series
• To convert a program
1. Transfer the EA-200 control program created for the CFX-9850 Series to the fx-9860
main memory.
• Use the cable that comes bundled with the fx-9860 to connect its 3-pin serial port to the
3-pin serial port of the CFX-9850. For details, see Chapter 13 of this manual.
2. Perform step 1 under “To convert a setup to a program” on page ε-27, which displays the
program converter screen.
3. Press 1(CALC) and then press 4(→38k).
• This displays a list of programs currently in main memory.
4. Use f and c to move the highlighting of the program you want to convert, and then
press 1(EXE) or w.
• A program name input screen will appear after conversion is complete.
5. Enter up to eight characters for the program name.
• If you want to password protect the program, perform steps 6 and 7 under “To convert a
setup to a program” after inputting the program name.
6. Press w to start conversion of the program.
• The message “Complete!” appears when conversion is complete. To clear the message,
press w or J.
2010080120100801
ε-30
Starting a Sampling Operation
8. Starting a Sampling Operation
This section describes how to use a setup configured using the E-Con2 mode to start an
EA-200 sampling operation.
k Before getting started...
Be sure to perform the following steps before starting sampling with the EA-200.
1. Connect the calculator to the EA-200.
2. Turn on EA-200 power.
3. In accordance with the setup you plan to use, connect the proper sensor to the
appropriate EA-200 channel.
4. Prepare the item whose data is to be sampled.
k Starting a Sampling Operation
A sampling operation can be started when any one of the following conditions exist.
• After configuring a new setup with Setup Wizard (page ε-2)
• After configuring a new setup with Advanced Setup (page ε-8)
• While the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1) is on the display
• While the setup memory list is on the display
The following procedures explain the first three conditions described above. See “To recall a
setup and use it for sampling” on page ε-25 for information about starting sampling from the
setup memory list.
• To start sampling
1. Start the sampling operation by performing one of the function key operations described
below.
- If the final Setup Wizard screen (page ε-4) is on the display, press b(Start Setup).
- If the Advanced Setup menu (page ε-8) is on the display, press 1(START).
- If the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1) is on the display, press 4(START).
• After you perform any one of the above operations,
a sampling start confirmation screen like the one
shown nearby will appear on the display.
2010080120100801
ε-31
Starting a Sampling Operation
2. Press w.
• This sets up the EA-200 using the setup data in the current setup memory area.
• The message “Setting EA-200...” remains on the display while EA-200 setup is in
progress. You can cancel the setup operation any time this message is displayed by
pressing A.
• The screen shown nearby appears after EA-200
setup is complete.
3. Press w to start sampling.
• The screens that appear while sampling is in progress and after sampling is complete
depend on setup details (sampling mode, trigger setup, etc.). For details, see
“Operations during a sampling operation” below.
• Operations during a sampling operation
Sending a sample start command from the calculator to the EA-200 causes the following
sequence to be performed.
Setup Data Transfer → Sampling Start → Sampling End →
Transfer of Sample Data from the EA-200 to the Calculator
The table on the next page shows how the trigger conditions and sensor type specified in the
setup data affects the above sequence.
2010080120100801
ε-32
Starting a Sampling Operation
• The screen shown below appears when CH1,
SONIC, or Mic is used as the trigger.
Pressing 1 advances to
“4. Graphing”.
Pressing w there returns to
“3. Sampling”.
Sampled values are saved as
Current Sample Data.
Graph screen does not show all sampled values,
but only a partial preview.
•
When Mode = Sound
The following three graph types
can be produced when Photo-
Gate-Pulley is being used.
1.
Time and distance graph
2.
Time and velocity graph
3.
Time and acceleration graph
Sample values are stored as
List data only.
S
tarts Samplin
g
Starts Sampling
w1
w
• When Number of Samples = 1
•
When Number of Samples > 1
Input values.
w
Mode
Real-time
Fast
Normal
Sound
Extended
Period
Clock
1. EA-200 Setup 2. Start Standby 3. Sampling 4. Graphing
w
• The screen shown below appears when CH1,
SONIC, or Mic is used as the trigger.
Pressing 1 advances to
“4. Graphing”.
Pressing w there returns to
“3. Sampling”.
Sampled values are saved as
Current Sample Data.
Graph screen does not show all sampled values,
but only a partial preview.
•
When Mode = Sound
The following three graph types
can be produced when Photo-
Gate-Pulley is being used.
1.
Time and distance graph
2.
Time and velocity graph
3.
Time and acceleration graph
Sample values are stored as
List data only.
S
tarts Samplin
g
Starts Sampling
w1
w
• When Number of Samples = 1
•
When Number of Samples > 1
Input values.
w
Mode
Real-time
Fast
Normal
Sound
Extended
Period
Clock
1. EA-200 Setup 2. Start Standby 3. Sampling 4. Graphing
w
2010080120100801
ε-33
Using Sample Data Memory
9. Using Sample Data Memory
Performing an EA-200 sampling operation from the E-Con2 mode causes sampled results
to be stored in the “current data area” of E-Con2 memory. Separate data is saved for each
channel, and the data for a particular channel in the current data area is called that channel’s
“current data”.
Any time you perform a sampling operation, the current data of the channel(s) you use is
replaced by the newly sampled data. If you want to save a set of current data and keep it
from being replaced by a new sampling operation, save the data in sample data memory
under a different file name.
k Managing Sample Data Files
• To save current sample data to a file
1. On the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1), press 5(GRAPH).
• This displays the Graph Mode screen.
Graph Mode Screen
• For details about the Graph Mode screen, see “Using the Graph Analysis Tools to
Graph Data” (page ε-35).
2. Press 2(DATA).
• This displays the Sampling Data List screen.
List of current data files
“cd” stands for “current data”. The text on
the right side of the colon indicates the
channel name.
Sampling Data List Screen
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the current data file you want
to save, and then press 2(SAVE).
• This displays the screen for inputting a data name.
2010080120100801
ε-34
Using Sample Data Memory
4. Enter up to 18 characters for the data file name, and then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for inputting a memory number.
5. Enter a memory number in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w.
• This saves the sample data at the location specified by the memory number you input.
The sample data file you save is
indicated on the display using the format:
<memory number>:<file name>.
• If you specify a memory number that is already being used to store a data file, a
confirmation message appears asking if you want to replace the existing file with the
new data file. Press 1 to replace the existing data file, or 6 to return to the memory
number input dialog box in step 4.
6. To return to the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1), press J twice.
Note
• You could select another data file besides a current data file in step 3 of the above
procedure and save it under a different memory number. You do not need to change the
file’s name as long as you use a different file number.
2010080120100801
ε-35
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
10. Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph
Data
Graph Analysis tools make it possible to analyze graphs drawn from sampled data.
k Accessing Graph Analysis Tools
You can access Graph Analysis tools using either of the two methods described below.
• Accessing Graph Analysis tools from the Graph Mode screen, which is displayed by
pressing 5(GRAPH) on the E-Con2 main menu (page
ε
-1)
Graph Mode Screen
• The main menu appears after you perform a sampling operation. Press 5(GRAPH) at
that time.
• When you access Graph Analysis tools using this method, you can select from among a
variety of other Analysis modes. See “Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph”
(page ε-36) for more information about the other Analysis modes.
• Accessing Graph Analysis tools from the screen of a graph drawn after a sampling
operation is executed from the Setup Wizard or from Advanced Setup (Real-time
Mode)
Graph Screen
• In this case, data is graphed after the sampling operation is complete, and the calculator
accesses Graph Analysis tools automatically. See “Graph Screen Key Operations” on
page ε-39.
2010080120100801
ε-36
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
k Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph
This section contains a detailed procedure that covers all steps from selecting an analysis
mode to drawing a graph.
Note
• Step 4 through step 7 are not essential and may be skipped, if you want. Skipping any step
automatically applies the initial default values for its settings.
• If you skip step 2, the default analysis mode is the one whose name is displayed in the top
line of the Graph Mode screen.
• To select an analysis mode and draw a graph
1. On the E-Con2 main menu (page ε-1), press 5(GRAPH).
• This displays the Graph Mode screen.
2. Press 3(MODE), and then select the analysis mode you want from the menu that
appears.
To do this: Perform this menu
operation:
To select this
mode:
Graph three sets of sampled data
simultaneously [Norm] Graph Analysis
Graph sampled data along with its first
and second derivative graph [diff] d/dt & d2/dt2
Display the graphs of different sampled
data in upper and lower windows for
comparison
[COMPARE] → [GRAPH] Compare Graph
Output sampled data from the speaker,
displaying graph of the raw data in
the upper window and the output
waveform in the lower window
[COMPARE] → [Sound] Compare Sound
Display the graph of sampled data
in the upper window and its first
derivative graph in the lower window
[COMPARE] → [d/dt] Compare d/dt
Display the graph of sampled data
in the upper window and its second
derivative graph in the lower window
[COMPARE] → [d2/dt2]Compare d2/dt2
• The name of the currently selected mode appears in the top line of the Graph Mode
screen.
Analysis mode name
2010080120100801
ε-37
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
3. Press 2(DATA).
• This displays the Sampling Data List screen.
4. Specify the sampled data for graphing.
a. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to the name of the sampled
data file you want to select, and then press 1(ASSIGN) or w.
• This returns to the Graph Mode screen, which shows the name of the sample data file
you selected.
Graph on/off indicator Sample data file name
Name of sensor used for sampling
Graph Mode Screen
b. Repeat step a above to specify sample data files for other graphs, if there are any.
• If you select “Graph Analysis” as the analysis mode in step 2, you must specify
sample data files for three graphs. If you select “Compare Graph” as the analysis
mode in step 2, you must specify sample data files for two graphs. With other modes,
you need to specify only one sample data file.
• For details about Sampling Data List screen operations, see “Using Sample Data
Memory” (page ε-33).
5. Turn on graphing for each of the graphs listed on the Graph Mode screen.
a. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to select a graph, and
then press 1(SELECT) to toggle graphing on or off.
Graphing turned off.
Graphing turned on.
b. Repeat step a to turn each of the graphs listed on the Graph Mode screen on or off.
6. Select the graph style you want to use.
a. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting
to the graph (Gph1, Gph2, etc.) whose style you want to specify, and then press
4(STYLE). This will cause the function menu to change as shown below.
2010080120100801
ε-38
Using the Graph Analysis Tools to Graph Data
b. Use the function keys to specify the graph style you want.
To specify this graph style: Press this key:
Line graph with dot ( • ) data markers 1()
Line graph with square ( ) data markers 2()
Line graph with X (×) data markers 3()
Scatter graph with dot ( • ) data markers 4()
Scatter graph with square ( ) data markers 5()
Scatter graph with X (×) data markers 6()
c. Repeat a and b to specify the style for each of the graphs on the Graph Mode screen.
7. Select the graph color you want to use.
a. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting
to the graph (Gph1, Gph2, etc.) whose color you want to specify, and then press
!f(FORMAT).
b. On the dialog box that appears, select a color using keys b through h.
c. Repeat a and b to specify the color for each of the graphs on the Graph Mode screen.
8. On the Graph Mode screen, press 6(DRAW) or w.
• This draws the graph(s) in accordance with the settings you configured in step 2
through step 7.
Graph Screen
• When a Graph screen is on the display, the function keys provide you with zooming and
other capabilities to aid in graph analysis.
For details about Graph screen function key operations, see the following section.
• To deselect sampled data assigned for graphing on the Graph Mode screen
1. On the Graph Mode screen, use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to
the graph (Gph1, Gph2, etc.) whose sampled data you want to deselect.
2. Press 5(DELETE).
• This will deselect sample data assigned to the highlighted graph.
2010080120100801
ε-39
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
11. Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen
Operations
This section explains the various operations you can perform on the graph screen after
drawing a graph.
You can perform these operations on a graph screen produced by a sampling operation,
or by the operation described under “Selecting an Analysis Mode and Drawing a Graph” on
page ε-36.
k Graph Screen Key Operations
On the graph screen, you can use the keys described in the table below to analyze (CALC)
graphs by reading data points along the graph (Trace) and enlarging specific parts of the
graph (Zoom).
Key Operation Description
!1(TRACE)
Displays a trace pointer on the graph along with the coordinates of
the current cursor location. Trace can also be used to obtain the
periodic frequency of a specific range on the graph and assign it
to a variable. See “Using Trace” on page ε-40.
!2(ZOOM)
Starts a zoom operation, which you can use to enlarge or reduce
the size of the graph along the x-axis or the y-axis. See “Using
Zoom” on page ε-41.
!3(V-WIN)
Displays a function menu of special View Window commands for
the E-Con2 mode graph screen.
For details about each command, see “Configuring View Window
Parameters” on page ε-49.
!4(SKETCH)
Displays a menu that contains the following commands: Cls, Plot,
F-Line, Text, PEN, Vertical, and Horizontal. For details about
each command, see “Drawing Dots, Lines, and Text on the Graph
Screen (Sketch)” on page 5-50.
K1(PICTURE)
Saves the currently displayed graph as a graphic image. You can
recall a saved graph image and overlay it on another graph to
compare them. For details about these procedures, see “Saving
and Recalling Graph Screen Contents” on page 5-20.
K2(LISTMEM)
Displays a menu of functions for saving the sample values in a
specific range of a graph to a list. See “Transforming Sampled
Data to List Data” on page ε-42.
K3(EDIT)
Displays a menu of functions for zooming and editing a particular
graph when the graph screen contains multiple graphs. See
“Working with Multiple Graphs” on page ε-46.
K4(CALC)
Displays a menu that lets you transform a sample result graph to a
function using Fourier series expansion, and to perform regression
to determine the tendency of a graph. See “Using Fourier Series
Expansion to Transform a Waveform to a Function” on page ε-43,
and “Performing Regression” on page ε-44.
2010080120100801
ε-40
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
Key Operation Description
K5(Y=fx)
Displays the graph relation list, which lets you select a Y=f(x)
graph to overlay on the sampled result graph. See “Overlaying a
Y=f(x) Graph on a Sampled Result Graph” on page ε-45.
K6(SPEAKER)
Starts an operation for outputting a specific range of a sound data
waveform graph from the speaker. See “Outputting a Specific
Range of a Graph from the Speaker” on page ε-48.
k Scrolling the Graph Screen
Press the cursor keys while the graph screen is on the display scrolls the graph left, right, up,
or down.
Note
• The cursor keys perform different operations besides scrolling while a trace or graph
operation is in progress. To perform a graph screen scroll operation in this case, press J
to cancel the trace or graph operation, and then press the cursor keys.
k Using Trace
Trace displays a crosshair pointer on the displayed graph along with the coordinates of the
current cursor position. You can use the cursor keys to move the pointer along the graph.
You can also use trace to obtain the periodic frequency value for a particular range, and
assign the range (time) and periodic frequency values in separate Alpha memory variables.
• To use trace
1. On the graph screen, press !1(TRACE).
• This causes a trace pointer to appear on the graph.
The coordinates of the current trace pointer location
are also shown on the display.
2. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the trace pointer along the graph to the location
you want.
• The coordinate values change in accordance with the trace pointer movement.
• You can exit the trace pointer at any time by pressing J.
• To obtain the periodic frequency value
1. Use the procedure under “To use trace” above to start a trace operation.
2. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range whose periodic frequency you want
to obtain, and then press w.
2010080120100801
ε-41
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range whose periodic frequency you want
to obtain.
• This causes the period and periodic frequency value
at the start point you selected in step 2 to appear
along the bottom of the screen.
4. Press w to assign the period and periodic frequency values to Alpha memory variables.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying variable
names for [Period] and [Frequency] values.
• The initial default variable name settings are “S” for
the period and “H” for the periodic frequency. To
change to another variable name, use the up and
down cursor keys to move the highlighting to the item
you want to change, and then press the applicable
letter key.
5. After everything is the way you want, press w.
• This stores the values and exits the trace operation.
• For details about using Alpha memory, see Chapter 2 of this manual.
k Using Zoom
Zoom lets you enlarge or reduce the size of the graph along the x-axis or the y-axis.
Note
• When there are multiple graphs on the screen, the procedure below zooms all of them.
For information about zooming a particular graph when there are multiple graphs on the
screen, see “Working with Multiple Graphs” on page ε-46.
• To zoom the graph screen
1. On the graph screen, press !2(ZOOM).
• This causes a magnifying glass cursor ( ) to appear
in the center of the screen.
2. Use the cursor keys to move the magnifying glass cursor to the location on the screen
that you want at the center of the enlarged or reduced screen.
2010080120100801
ε-42
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
3. Press w.
• This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode.
• The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode.
To do this: Press this cursor key:
Enlarge the graph image horizontally e
Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally d
Enlarge the graph image vertically f
Reduce the size of the graph image vertically c
4. To exit the zoom mode, press J.
k Transforming Sampled Data to List Data
Use the following procedure to transform the sampled data in a specific range of a graph into
list data.
• To transform sampled data to list data
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 2(LISTMEM).
• This displays the LISTMEM menu.
2. Press 2(SELECT).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range on the graph.
3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range
you want to convert to list data, and then press w.
4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range you want to convert to list data, and
then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the lists where you want to store the time data
and the sampled data.
→
• The initial default lists are List 1 for the time and List 2 for sample data. To change to
another list (List 1 to List 26), use the up and down cursor keys to move the highlighting
to the list you want to change, and then input the applicable list number.
2010080120100801
ε-43
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
5. After everything is the way you want, press w.
• This saves the lists and the message “Complete!” appears. Press w to return to the
graph screen.
• For details about using list data, see Chapter 3 of this manual.
Note
• Pressing 1(All) in place of 2(SELECT) in step 2 converts the entire graph to list data. In
this case, the “Store Sample Data” dialog box appears as soon as you press 1(All).
k Using Fourier Series Expansion to Transform a Waveform to a
Function
Fourier series expansion is effective for studying sounds by expressing them as functions.
The procedure below assumes that there is a graph of sampled sound data already on the
graph screen.
• To perform Fourier series expansion
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 4(CALC).
• The CALC menu appears at the bottom of the
display.
2. Press 1(FOURIE).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the graph range.
3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range for
which you want to perform Fourier series expansion,
and then press w.
4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range for which you want to perform Fourier
series expansion, and then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for specifying the start degree of the Fourier series.
→
2010080120100801
ε-44
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
5. Input a value in the range of 1 to 99, and then press w.
• This displays a dialog box for inputting the degree of
the Fourier series.
6. Input a value in the range of 1 to 10, and then press w.
• The graph relation list appears with the calculation
result.
7. Pressing 6(DRAW) here graphs the function.
• This lets you compare the expanded function graph
and the original graph to see if they are the same.
Note
• When you press 6(DRAW) in step 7, the graph of the result of the Fourier series
expansion may not align correctly with the original graph on which it is overlaid. If this
happens, shift the position the original graph to align it with the overlaid graph.
For information about how to move the original graph, see “To move a particular graph on
a multi-graph display” (page ε-47).
k Performing Regression
You can use the procedure below to perform regression for a range specified using the trace
pointer. All of the following regression types are supported: Linear, Med-Med, Quadratic,
Cubic, Quartic, Logarithmic, Exponential, Power, Sine, and Logistic.
For details about these regression types, see Chapter 6 of this manual.
The following procedure shows how to perform quadratic regression. The same general
steps can also be used to perform the other types of regression.
2010080120100801
ε-45
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
• To perform quadratic regression
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 4(CALC).
• The CALC menu appears at the bottom of the display.
2. Press 5(X2).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range
on the graph.
3. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range for which you want to perform
quadratic regression, and then press w.
4. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range for which you want to perform
quadratic regression, and then press w.
• This displays the quadratic regression calculation
result screen.
5. Press 6(DRAW).
• This draws a quadratic regression graph and
overlays it over the original graph.
• To delete the overlaid quadratic regression graph,
press !4(SKETCH) and then 1(Cls).
k Overlaying a Y=f(x) Graph on a Sampled Result Graph
You can use the E-Con2 mode to graph equations based on the form Y=f(x). From the graph
screen, press K5(Y=fx) to display the graph relation list screen. From there, operations
are identical to those in the Graph mode.
Note
• The data on the graph relation list screen is shared with the Graph mode. Note, however,
that only Y= type graphs can be used in the E-Con2 mode. Because of this, calling up
the graph relation list screen from the E-Con2 mode will display a “Y” (Y= type) item for
function menu key 3. Also, 5(MODIFY) is not displayed, because it is not used in the
E-Con2 mode.
2010080120100801
ε-46
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
k Working with Multiple Graphs
The procedures in this section explain how you can zoom or move a particular graph when
there are multiple graphs on the display.
• To zoom a particular graph on a multi-graph display
1. When the graph screen contains multiple graphs, press K, and then 3(EDIT).
• The EDIT menu appears at the bottom of the display.
2. Press 1(ZOOM).
• This displays only one of the graphs that were
originally on the graph screen.
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is
displayed, and then press w.
• This enters the zoom mode and causes all of the
graphs to reappear, along with a magnifying glass
cursor ( ) in the center of the screen.
4. Use the cursor keys to move the magnifying glass cursor to the location on the screen
that you want at the center of the enlarged or reduced screen.
2010080120100801
ε-47
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
5. Press w.
• This causes the magnifying glass to disappear and enters the zoom mode.
• The cursor keys perform the following operations in the zoom mode.
To do this: Press this cursor key:
Enlarge the graph image horizontally e
Reduce the size of the graph image horizontally d
Enlarge the graph image vertically f
Reduce the size of the graph image vertically c
→
6. To exit the zoom mode, press J.
• To move a particular graph on a multi-graph display
1. When the graph screen contains multiple graphs, press K, and then 3(EDIT).
• This displays the EDIT menu.
2. Press 2(MOVE).
• This displays only one of the graphs that were originally on the graph screen.
3. Use the f and c cursor keys to cycle through the graphs until the one you want is
displayed, and then press w.
• This enters the move mode and causes all of the graphs to reappear.
4. Use the d and e cursor keys to move the graph left and right, or the f and c
cursor keys to move the graph up and down.
→
5. To exit the move mode, press J.
2010080120100801
ε-48
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
k Outputting a Specific Range of a Graph from the Speaker
Use the following procedure to output a specific range of a sound data waveform graph from
the speaker.
• To output a graph from the speaker
1. On the graph screen, press K, and then 4(SEAPKER).
• This displays the trace pointer for selecting the range
on the graph.
2. Move the trace pointer to the start point of the range you want to output from the speaker,
and then press w.
3. Move the trace pointer to the end point of the range you want to output from the speaker,
and then press w.
• After you specify the start point and end point, an output frequency dialog box shown
below appears on the display.
→
4. Input a percent value for the output frequency value you want.
• The output frequency specification is a percent value. To output the original sound as-is,
specify 100%. To raise the original sound by one octave, input a value of 200%. To
lower the original sound by one octave, input a value of 50%.
5. After inputting an output frequency value, press w.
• This outputs the waveform between the start point and end point from the EA-200
speaker.
• If the sound you configured cannot be output for some reason, the message “Range
Error” will appear. If this happens, press J to scroll back through the previous setting
screens and change the setup as required.
6. To terminate sound output, press the EA-200 [START/STOP] key.
7. Press w.
• This displays a screen like the one shown nearby.
2010080120100801
ε-49
Graph Analysis Tool Graph Screen Operations
8. If you want to retry output from the speaker, press 1(Yes). To exit the procedure and
return to the graph screen, press 6(No).
• Pressing 1(Yes) returns to the “Output Frequency” dialog box. From there, repeat the
above steps from step 4.
k Configuring View Window Parameters
Pressing !3(V-Window) while the graph screen is on the display displays a View
Window function key menu along the bottom of the display.
Press the function key that corresponds to the View Window parameter you want to
configure.
Function Key Description
1(Auto)
Automatically applies the following View Window parameters.
Y-axis Elements: In accordance with screen size
X-axis Elements: In accordance with screen size when 1 data item
equals 1 dot; 1 data equals 1 dot in other cases
2(FULL) Resizes the graph so all of it fits in the screen.
3(Y) Resizes the graph so all of it fits in the screen along the Y-axis,
without changing the X-axis dimensions.
4(UNIT)
Specifies the unit of the numeric axis grid displayed by the Econ Axes
setting of the graph setup screen (page ε-17).
1(μsec): microseconds
2(msec): milliseconds
3(Sec): seconds
4(DHMS): days, hours, minutes, seconds (1 day, 2 hours, 30
minutes, 5 seconds = 1d2h30m5s)
5(Auto): Auto selection
5(CHANGE) Toggles display of the source data on the graph screen on and off.
To exit the View Window function key menu and return to the standard function key menu,
press J.
2010080120100801
ε-50
Calling E-Con2 Functions from an eActivity
12. Calling E-Con2 Functions from an eActivity
You can call E-Con2 functions from an eActivity by including an “Econ strip” in the eActivity
file. The following describes each of the four available Econ strips.
• Econ SetupWizard strip
This strip calls the E-Con2 Setup Wizard. The Econ SetupWizard strip makes it
possible to perform the following series of operations from the eActivity: EA-200
setup using the Setup Wizard R Sampling R Graphing.
• Econ AdvancSetup strip
This strip calls the E-Con2 Advanced Setup screen. The Advanced Setup
provides access to almost all executable functions (except for the program
converter), including detailed EA-200 setup and sampling execution; graphing
and Graph Analysis Tools; simultaneous sampling with multiple sensors using the
MULTIMETER mode, etc.
• Econ Sampling strip
This strip records on set of EA-200 setup information configured using Advanced
Setup, and performs sampling. Once setup information is recorded to this type of
strip, sampling starts immediately based on the recorded setup information the next
time the strip is executed.
• Econ Graph strip
This strip graphs sampled data that is recorded in the strip. The sampled data is
recorded to the strip the first time the strip is executed.
This section explains how to insert each type of Econ strip into an eActivity file, and how
to use inserted Econ strips. For details about eActivity operations, see Chapter 10 of this
manual.
k Inserting an Econ Strip into an eActivity File
The following procedure assumes that the eActivity file into which you want to insert the
Econ strip is already open. For information about creating a new file and other basic eActivity
operations, see Chapter 10 of this manual.
• To insert an Econ Strip into an eActivity file
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, move the cursor the location where you want to insert
the Econ strip.
2. Press 2(STRIP).
• This will display a dialog box with a list of insertable
strips.
2010080120100801
ε-51
Calling E-Con2 Functions from an eActivity
3. Use f and c to move the highlighting to the type of Econ strip you want to insert.
• See the beginning of this section (page ε-50) for
details about each Econ strip type.
4. Press w.
• The strip is inserted above the line or the strip where
the cursor is currently located.
5. Enter up to 16 characters for the strip title.
6. Press w to assign the title to the strip.
• This will highlight the strip.
• You can execute the strip here by pressing w. For
details about operations that are required when you
execute a strip, see “Calling an E-Con2 Function
from an Econ Strip” below.
k Calling an E-Con2 Function from an Econ Strip
This section explains operations for each type of Econ strip that can be inserted into an
eActivity file. The following procedure assumes that the applicable Econ strip has already
been inserted into an eActivity that is currently open.
• To access the Setup Wizard from an Econ SetupWizard strip
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, use the f
and c keys to move the highlighting to the Econ
SetupWizard strip.
2. Press w.
• This launches the Setup Wizard and displays the
“Select Sensor” screen.
2010080120100801
ε-52
Calling E-Con2 Functions from an eActivity
3. Perform the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Setup Wizard” (page
ε-2) from step 3 to set up the EA-200 and execute sampling.
Note
• In the case of the Econ SetupWizard strip, only the “1: Start Setup” is available on the
“Complete!” dialog box. Other options are not available.
4. To return to the eActivity workspace screen, press !a(')J.
• To access Advanced Setup from an Econ AdvancSetup strip
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, use the f and c keys to move the highlighting to
the Econ AdvancSetup strip.
2. Press w.
• This displays the Advanced Setup screen.
• From here, perform the procedure under “To configure an EA-200 setup using
Advanced Setup” (page ε-8) from step 4.
• To return to the eActivity workspace screen after you finished the procedure or at any
point during the procedure, press !a(') .
Note
• Using an Econ AdvancSetup strip to configure a setup causes the setup information to
be registered in the applicable strip. This means that the next time you open the strip,
sampling can be performed in accordance with the previously configured setup information.
2010080120100801
ε-53
Calling E-Con2 Functions from an eActivity
• To execute sampling from an Econ Sampling strip
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, use the f and
c keys to move the highlighting to the Econ Sampling
strip.
2. Press w.
• This displays a sampling start confirmation screen.
• If this is the first time you are using this Econ
Sampling strip for sampling, continue on to step 3.
• If this is an Econ Sampling strip that you have used
for sampling in the paste and want to re-execute with
the same setup, jump to step 8.
3. Press !,(,) to display the application list.
4. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to “Econ AdvancSetup”, and
then press w.
• This displays the Advanced Setup screen.
5. Perform steps 4 and 5 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Advanced Setup (page
ε-8) to configure the setup for sampling.
6. Press !,(,) to display the application list.
7. Use the f and c cursor keys to move the highlighting to “Econ Sampling”, and then
press w.
• This will return to the sampling start confirmation screen in step 2 of this procedure.
8. Press w.
• This will set up the EA-200 in accordance with the setup data registered in the Econ
Sampling strip. The message “Start sampling?” appears on the screen after EA-200 set
up is complete.
9. Press w to start sampling.
• The screens that appear while sampling is in progress and after sampling is complete
depend on setup details. For more information, see “Starting a Sampling Operation”
(page ε-30).
• After sampling is complete, the data will be graphed in accordance with the setup
settings.
10. To return to the eActivity workspace screen from the graph screen, press !a(').
2010080120100801
ε-54
Calling E-Con2 Functions from an eActivity
• To graph sampled data from an Econ Graph strip
1. On the eActivity workspace screen, use the f and c keys to move the highlighting to
the Econ Graph strip.
2. Press w.
• If this Econ Graph strip already has sampled data registered to it because of a previous
execution, a graph of the existing data will appear on the display. In this case, jump to
step 5 of this procedure.
• If this is the first time you are executing this Econ Graph strip, the Advanced Setup
screen will appear on the display. If this happens, proceed with step 3 of this procedure.
3. Perform steps 4 and 5 under “To configure an EA-200 setup using Advanced Setup”
(page ε-8) to configure the setup for sampling.
4. Press 1(START).
• As instructed by the message that appears on the display, press the w key to perform
sampling.
• After sampling is complete, the data will be graphed in accordance with the setup
settings.
5. To return to the eActivity workspace screen from the graph screen, press !a(').
• Econ Strip Memory Capacity Precautions
• The memory capacity of each Econ strip is 25 KB. An error will occur if you perform
an operation that causes this capacity to be exceeded. Particular care is required
when handling a large number of samples, which can cause memory capacity to be
exceeded.
• Always make sure that FFT Graph is turned off whenever performing sampling with the
microphone. Leaving FFT Graph turned on cause memory capacity to be exceeded.
• If an error occurs, press !a(') to return to the eActivity workspace screen and
perform the procedure again.
• For information about checking the memory usage of each strip, see “To display the
strip memory usage screen” on page 10-21.
Manufacturer:
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome
Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan
Responsible within the European Union:
CASIO EUROPE GmbH
Casio-Platz 1
22848 Norderstedt, Germany
This mark applies in EU countries only.
CASIO COMPUTER CO., LTD.
6-2, Hon-machi 1-chome
Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-8543, Japan
One or more of the following patents may be used in the product.
U.S.Pats. 5,166,897 5,210,708 5,535,317 5,539,867 5,739,823
SA1011-B

Navigation menu